Chapter Test Questions Flashcards

You may prefer our related Brainscape-certified flashcards:
1
Q

The record date for ABC Growth Fund’s quarterly dividends is Thursday, December 20. When is the ex-dividend day?

A. December 17
B. December 18
C. December 20
D. December 21

A

D. December 21

For mutual funds, the ex-dividend date is the first business day AFTER the record date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
2
Q

Which of the following best describes the formula for current yield?

A. Annualized dividend / last reported trade price
B. Annualized dividend / annualized market value
C. Most recent dividend / book value per share
D. Quarterly dividend / par value

A

A. Annualized dividend / last reported trade price

The formula is annual dividend / current market value. Current market value is the price at which the most recent trade was executed, or the price at the close of the trading day.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
3
Q

Jack owns 300 shares of cumulative, convertible preferred stock. All of the statements below are true EXCEPT:

A. Jack can convert his shares to common stock at any time.
B. Jack will receive any deferred or omitted dividends before common shareholders can receive a dividend.
C. Jack receives dividend payments before common shareholders.
D. The issuing company could call the stock at par value.

A

D. The issuing company could call the stock at par value.

Jack owns cumulative, convertible shares. There is no call provision mentioned; therefore, the company could not call the stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
4
Q

ADRs are used to facilitate which of the following?

A. Domestic trading of foreign securities
B. Domestic trading of U.S. government securities
C. Foreign trading of U.S. government securities
D. Foreign trading of domestic securities

A

A. Domestic trading of foreign securities

American depositary receipts (ADRs) are certificates issued by a bank in the United States to represent a certain amount of shares of a foreign company. Since ADR transactions are regulated under the U.S. securities regulations, they also enjoy the same protection as domestic transactions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
5
Q

Which of the following laws requires the full disclosure of all material information about a new issue security?

A. Securities Act of 1933
B. Securities Exchange Act of 1934
C. Glass Steagall Act
D. Regulation T

A

A. Securities Act of 1933

The Securities Act of 1933 is dedicated to the regulation of the new issue market. The SEC will not declare the issue to be in compliance if all material facts are not disclosed. If it is discovered that all material facts have not been disclosed, investors would have the right to file a claim against all parties based on disclosure requirements of the Act of 1933. The Glass Steagall Act pertains to the distinction between commercial banking and investment banking. As for Regulation T, it is a regulation, not a law. And the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 regulates the trading of securities in secondary markets, not new issue markets.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
6
Q

Which of the following is FALSE regarding warrants?

A. Warrants typically have a long life, perhaps even perpetual; the subscription price is above the stock’s current market value.
B. Warrants can trade separately from the common stock.
C. Warrants have a longer life than rights.
D. Warrants are issued at a discount to the underlying equity in order to make security offerings more attractive to the investor.

A

D. Warrants are issued at a discount to the underlying equity in order to make security offerings more attractive to the investor.

Warrants are long-term and at issue, their subscription price is at a premium to the underlying stock price. Rights are short-term, with a subscription price that is at a discount to the underlying stock price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
7
Q

The main function(s) of FINRA include I. Self-regulation for the securities market. II. Governing member firms and associated persons. III. Monitoring compliance with securities regulations. IV. Approve and monitor SEC rules and regulations.

A. II and IV only
B. I, II, III, and IV
C. I only
D. I, II, and III only

A

D. I, II, and III only

FINRA oversees the securities markets, member firms, and associated persons, as well as monitoring compliance with securities regulations. The SEC has authority over FINRA, not the other way around.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
8
Q

Investors who own shares of XYZ Corp. have limited liability. Which of the following statements best describes this feature?

A. They would be liable for the amount they’ve invested, and any debt incurred by the corporation.
B. If the corporation went under, they would receive their original investment back in full.
C. They would be liable for judgments against the company in direct proportion to their ownership in the stock.
D. They would only be liable for the amount they’ve invested to purchase the shares.

A

D. They would only be liable for the amount they’ve invested to purchase the shares.

Limited liability means that investors are only liable for the amount they invested, and not for any other debts incurred by the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
9
Q

A corporation has issued 10 million shares of common stock that are currently trading for $5 per share. There are 2 million shares of treasury stock. What is the total value of outstanding common stock shares?

A. $8 million
B. $10 million
C. $40 million
D. $60 million

A

C. $40 million

Ten million issued shares minus 2 million treasury shares equals 8 million shares outstanding. Eight million outstanding shares x $5 / share = $40 million. Remember: Outstanding Stock = Issued Shares - Treasury Stock

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
10
Q

XYZ Corporation has been experiencing some financial difficulty in the last few years. However, they are confident that the company will be profitable again in the next few years. XYZ would like to borrow some money from investors by issuing bonds, but they are concerned that the interest rate they will have to pay will be too high based on their most recent financial report. If XYZ would like to reduce the interest rate on the bonds and increase the marketability of their bonds, which of the following could XYZ do?

A. Issue bonds and stock together in a unit
B. Attach preemptive rights to the bond
C. Attach warrants to the bond
D. Issue treasury stock

A

C. Attach warrants to the bond

By issuing warrants with their new bond offering, XYZ would reduce its interest rate and also increase the marketability of the new bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
11
Q

The quick ratio is:

A. An inferior measure because it fails to consider inventory.
B. A more stringent measure than the current ratio.
C. A more lenient measure than the current ratio.
D. Less accurate than the current ratio because it does not consider the time value of money.

A

B. A more stringent measure than the current ratio.

The quick ratio (acid test ratio) is a more stringent measure because it uses only cash equivalents (inventory is deducted), which are divided by current liabilities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
12
Q

An American investor that would like to purchase the shares of a foreign company’s stock with the same regulatory protection given a domestic security could:

A. Purchase American depositary receipts on the foreign company.
B. Use foreign currency exchange markets.
C. Purchase domestic shares and convert them to foreign shares in the open markets.
D. Set up a domestic trading account with a foreign brokerage firm

A

A. Purchase American depositary receipts on the foreign company.

American depositary receipts, or ADRs, are certificates that trade on a stock market in the United States but actually represent a foreign stock. This allows American investors to purchase shares of non-American companies on an American exchange, as opposed to a foreign exchange, which would involve additional costs and complications. Because they trade on domestic exchanges, ADRs have the same regulatory protection as U.S. domestic securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
13
Q

A corporation pays a stock dividend to:

A. Promote its stock.
B. Reduce the price of its stock.
C. Reduce accounts payable.
D. Conserve cash.

A

D. Conserve cash.

A corporation pays a stock dividend to reward the shareholders while saving cash.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
14
Q

ABC Corporation has earnings of $5 per share and has paid a quarterly dividend of $.75. If ABC is currently trading at $30 a share, what is the current yield for ABC’s stock?

A. 2.5%
B. 7%
C. 10%
D. 17%

A

C. 10%

Current yield is determined by dividing the annual dividend by the current market price. Since ABC has paid a $.75 quarterly dividend, multiply $.75 times four to get annual dividend income of $3 per share. Then, divide $3 per share by the current market price of $30 per share to get the yield of 10%.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
15
Q

Joe received a certificate from a commercial bank that represents his interest in shares of a foreign company on a foreign exchange. What is this certificate called?

A. Application
B. Certificate of authenticity
C. American depositary receipt
D. Warrant

A

C. American depositary receipt

American depositary receipts are issued by banks in the U.S. to represent a certain amount of shares of a foreign company on a foreign exchange.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
16
Q

Which of the following preferred shares has the highest yield?

A. Participating
B. Cumulative
C. Convertible
D. Callable

A

D. Callable

Callable stocks have the highest yield. The highest yielding stock has the lowest price, and participating, cumulative and convertible are attractive features that add to the price and thus lower the yield. The call feature is undesirable to an investor. It adds risk and uncertainty to the stock. Therefore, investors demand a lower price and consequently higher yield when they buy callable preferred stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
17
Q

A convertible preferred is convertible at $20 per share. The stock is currently selling on the market at $120. Which of the following are correct statements is correct?

A. The common stock must be selling at $24 to be at parity with the preferred stock.
B. The common stock must be selling at $20 to be at parity with the bond.
C. The preferred stock’s conversion ratio is 1:6.
D. It makes sense to convert at $22.

A

A. The common stock must be selling at $24 to be at parity with the preferred stock.

The conversion ratio is the par value of the preferred stock divided by the conversion price, or in this case, 1:5. It identifies the number of common shares received upon conversion. The parity price of the common stock is determined by dividing the conversion ratio into the market value of the preferred stock, or 120/5 = $24. It only makes sense to convert at a price above the parity price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
18
Q

Which will receive dividends?

A. Preemptive rights
B. ADR
C. Warrant
D. Treasury stock

A

B. ADR

ADRs receive dividends. Both warrant and rights are used to purchase the underlying stock but they are not stock themselves and do not receive dividends. Treasury stock is stock that has been bought back by the corporation; it does not receive dividends nor does it vote.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
19
Q

Preferred stock has priority over common in which of the following ways? I. Payment of dividends II. Voting status III. Bankruptcy priority IV. Receipt of stock rights

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

Preferred stock does not vote, nor does it receive stock rights in a rights offering.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
20
Q

Which of the following is true about treasury stock?

A. It has been issued and repurchased by the company.
B. It is authorized, but unissued.
C. It is entitled to a dividend.
D. It has voting rights.

A

A. It has been issued and repurchased by the company.

Treasury stock has been issued (sold to the public) and subsequently bought back by the corporation; shares of treasury stock have no voting rights and receive no dividends.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
21
Q

ABC Corp paid the following dividends to its 6% noncumulative preferred stock: year one, $4; year two, $3. In year three, if ABC wishes to distribute a dividend to the common stockholders, ABC must first pay what to the preferred stockholders?

A. $0
B. $5
C. $6
D. $11

A

C. $6

ABC must pay the preferred stockholders its full dividend of $6 in year three before it may pay a dividend to the common. If this were cumulative preferred, the correct answer would be $11 – the delinquent dividends totaling $5 plus the current dividend of $6.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
22
Q

Which of the following is true of the organizational structure of a balance sheet? I. It is arranged from current items at the top to long term items at the bottom. II. Liquid items appear on the left and illiquid and fixed items appear on the right. III. It follows an equation. IV. Leverage items follow equity items.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

The balance sheet follows the balance sheet equation, and it starts with current items at the top and flows to long term items below. Leverage (bonds) comes before equity (stock.)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
23
Q

A corporation is issuing additional shares of stock through an APO (additional public offering). Which of the following would not be affected?

A. Interest owed
B. Outstanding shares
C. Working capital
D. Earnings per share

A

A. Interest owed

Working capital would increase because of cash receipts from the stock sale. EPs would decline because earnings are now dividend among a greater number of outstanding shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
24
Q

Which of the following securities is considered to be a long-term instrument?

A. Options
B. T-bills
C. Rights
D. Warrants

A

D. Warrants

Like rights, warrants provide an investor with an opportunity to purchase securities at a specified price for a set period of time. However, warrants are long-term, while rights are short-term.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
25
Q

Settlement for government securities is:

A. Same day.
B. Next day.
C. 4 business days.
D. 7 business days.

A

B. Next day.

Government trades settle the next business day, or T.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
26
Q

Warrants are issued along with a bond offering. The principal reason is:

A. To raise the price of the securities being sold.
B. To raise the coupon interest cost.
C. To improve marketability.
D. To increase the yield.

A

C. To improve marketability.

An attached warrant increases the attractiveness of a bond, enhancing its marketability. Consequently, the issuer can structure the bond with a lower nominal yield (stated interest rate). Investors will accept a lower stated interest rate in exchange for the warrant.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
27
Q

The term for active stock that represents the number of shares owned by the public is:

A. Treasury stock.
B. Issued stock.
C. Authorized stock.
D. Outstanding stock.

A

D. Outstanding stock.

“Outstanding stock” is the term for issued stock less any treasury stock reacquired by the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
28
Q

The date the board of directors authorizes a dividend is the:

A. Ex-dividend date.
B. Record date.
C. Declaration date.
D. Payable date.

A

C. Declaration date.

The dividend is authorized on the declaration date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
29
Q

A shareholder owns 200 shares of stock with cumulative voting rights. If there are five vacancies being voted upon, what is the maximum number of votes the shareholder may cast for any one vacancy?

A. 1
B. 25
C. 200
D. 1,000

A

D. 1,000

The number of votes controlled by the shareholder is always calculated using the same formula: number of shares × number of vacancies. Under the cumulative method, the shareholder may allocate those votes among the vacancies in any way he desires. In this example, the investor might choose to concentrate all 1,000 of his votes on one vacancy. Consequently, he would forfeit any vote on the remaining four vacancies.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
30
Q

In order for a corporation to qualify for the 50% corporate dividend exclusion when they own stock of another corporation, they must own less than what percentage of that corporation’s outstanding stock?

A. 5%
B. 10%
C. 15%
D. 20%

A

D. 20%

To qualify for the corporate dividend exclusion, the shareholding corporation must own less than 20% of the dividend-paying corporation’s outstanding stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
31
Q

A heavily leveraged corporation has which of the following?

A. High bond ratio
B. Low rate risk
C. Low debt/equity ratio
D. High debt/equity ratio

A

D. High debt/equity ratio

A corporation with more debt has a higher debt/equity ratio and is more vulnerable to interest rate increases.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
32
Q

A client calls his registered representative (RR) to ask her to buy 500 shares of XYZ Corp because he heard a dividend has been declared, but not paid yet, and he wants to receive the dividend. How should the RR respond to the client?

A. Inform the client of the consequences and refuse the order
B. Place the order as an unsolicited order
C. Place the order at a date to settle after the record date and accept the consequences for going against the client’s instructions.
D. Place the order according to the client’s instructions

A

A. Inform the client of the consequences and refuse the order

This question is about a prohibited practice known as “selling dividends”. Registered representatives are prohibited from advising an investor to purchase a stock for the sole purpose of receiving the dividend. The registered representative must inform the client of the consequences of buying a stock just before a dividend is paid. If the client were to purchase the stock just before the ex-dividend date, he would have an unrealized loss on the stock when the price drops on that date and he would have a tax liability because dividends are taxable.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
33
Q

A company has been in arrears on dividend payments for three quarters. Who must get paid before common shareholders can receive a dividend? I. Callable preferred; II. Convertible preferred; III. Cumulative preferred:

A. I and II only
B. II only
C. III only
D. I, II and III

A

D. I, II and III

All dividend payments must be made to owners of all classes of preferred stock before common shareholders may receive a dividend. The cumulative feature also entitles the owner to any dividends in arrears.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
34
Q

What is the key difference between straight preferred stock and participating preferred stock shares?

A. Participating preferred offers the investor the potential to receive dividends in addition to the stated dividend.
B. There is no difference as both terms describe the same type of security.
C. Straight preferred shares enjoy an additional catch up provision for unpaid past dividends
D. Participating preferred shares may be converted to either common stock or corporate bonds

A

A. Participating preferred offers the investor the potential to receive dividends in addition to the stated dividend.

Participating preferred offers the stock the potential to receive a larger dividend in a year with exceptional corporate earnings.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
35
Q

Which of the following is FALSE regarding all preferred stock?

A. Preferred stock is often convertible to common shares.
B. Preferred stock is cumulative for past dividends and allows for a dividend catch up at some point in the future.
C. Preferred shares are senior to common shares.
D. Preferred shares receive dividends prior to common stock when dividends are declared.

A

B. Preferred stock is cumulative for past dividends and allows for a dividend catch up at some point in the future.

Although most preferred stock is cumulative, the cumulative feature is optional. Straight preferred (or noncumulative) also pays a stated dividend but does not “catch up” dividends which may have gone unpaid during any prior period.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
36
Q

Corporations generally issue warrants in connection with which of the following?

A. Convertible bond issues, in order to secure a higher interest rate
B. Common stock, in order to obtain an increase in par value
C. Preferred stock, in order to obtain a lower par value
D. Bonds, in order to secure a lower interest rate

A

D. Bonds, in order to secure a lower interest rate

Warrants are generally sweeteners attached to bonds to lower the interest rate the issuing corporation has to pay. But primarily, the warrants increase the marketability of the bond.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
37
Q

Which type of preferred stock may be exchanged for shares of common stock?

A. Callable preferred
B. Convertible preferred
C. Cumulative preferred
D. Participating preferred

A

B. Convertible preferred

The convertible preferred provision allows a shareholder to exchange preferred stock for common stock. The conversion price is determined at the time of issue.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
38
Q

Which of the following components reconcile cash flow to net income?

A. Convertible bond interest
B. Amortization
C. Depreciation and amortization
D. Depreciation

A

C. Depreciation and amortization

Amortization and depreciation are noncash deductions which are added back to net income to determine cash flow.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
39
Q

What type of preferred stock would a corporation issue if it wants the right to repurchase the shares at a specified price in the future?

A. Participating preferred
B. Convertible preferred
C. Callable preferred
D. Cumulative preferred

A

C. Callable preferred

The call feature of a stock allows the issuing corporation to repurchase the stock in the future at a specified price. The call price is established at issuance and is usually above par to make the stock more attractive to investors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
40
Q

Which of the following would ensure that the numbers of shares printed on the stock certificates are equal to the number of shares that are outstanding for the corporation?

A. Registrar
B. Investment banker
C. Underwriter
D. Transfer agent

A

A. Registrar

It is the registrar’s job to make sure that the number of shares printed on the certificates is equal to the number of shares outstanding for the corporation. The transfer agent’s job is to physically transfer the ownership of the shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
41
Q

Which of the following is NOT a component of the balance sheet?

A. Assets
B. Liabilities
C. Net worth
D. Net revenue

A

D. Net revenue

This balance sheet formula (also known as the balance sheet equation) is expressed as “Assets = Liabilities + Net Worth.” Revenue and expense items are found on the income statement.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
42
Q

An investor owns 1,000 shares of XYZ Corporation, which just declared a stock dividend of 6%. The stock was selling for $10 just before the dividend was declared. The dividend announcement will have what effect?

A. Increase the number of shares the investor owns to 1,060 shares, but will not impact the total value of the stock holding.
B. Increase the cash in the account and decrease the number of shares owned.
C. Increase the number of shares outstanding and lower the investor’s proportional ownership of the company.
D. Increase the number of shares the investor owns to 1,060 shares and increase the share price to $10.60 in the market.

A

A. Increase the number of shares the investor owns to 1,060 shares, but will not impact the total value of the stock holding.

A stock dividend is used by the company to gradually lower the price of the stock in the marketplace and save cash for future growth. It does this by paying dividends in shares rather than in cash. In this scenario, the investor will have more shares, but at a lower price. Therefore, the market value of the stock holding remains the same.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
43
Q

Which of the following best describes cash settlement?

A. The trade involves a very liquid money market security with a maturity of less than 30 days.
B. The customer pays for the securities on trade date.
C. The customer must pay for the securities with cash or a cashier’s check.
D. Cash settlement may not be done in a margin account.

A

B. The customer pays for the securities on trade date.

For cash settlement trades, trade date and settlement date are the same. The entire transaction takes place on the same day.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
44
Q

Stock rights are:

A. Issued with a subscription price above current market value.
B. Required to be exercised.
C. Short term.
D. Long term.

A

C. Short term.

Stock rights are short-term instruments issued with a subscription price below the stock’s current market value. Because they enable the holder to purchase stock at a discount, rights have value. They trade briefly in the secondary market, because they expire in 30 to 60 days. Rights can be left to lapse or expire.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
45
Q

A corporation has a $4 million profit. The corporation is in the 34% tax bracket. What is pre-dilutive EPS? Common stock: 1,000,000 shares ($10 par) = $10,000,000; 5% preferred: 50,000 shares ($100 par) = $5,000,000; 7% debentures: 5,000 bonds ($1,000 par convertible at $10) = $5,000,000

A. $2.59
B. $2.16
C. $2.41
D. $2.66

A

B. $2.16

$4,000,000 (profit) minus $350,000 (interest 7% X $5 million) = $3,650,000 (pre-tax profit) X .66 (converse of 34% tax bracket) = $2,409,000 (post-tax profit) minus $250,000 (preferred dividends) = $2,159,000 earnings divided by 1,000,000 shares = $2.16 EPS

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
46
Q

Which of the following does NOT affect a corporation’s reported net income per share?

A. A declaration of the dividend
B. A change in accounting method for valuing inventory
C. The discontinuance of operations of a company plant or division
D. The decrease in the number of shares outstanding

A

A. A declaration of the dividend

A declaration of a dividend has nothing to do with income per share. A dividend is the portion of earnings that the board of directors decides to distribute to the shareholders. The remainder is retained by the corporation in retained earnings.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
47
Q

A corporation’s capitalization consists of: Debenture - 7% - $1,000 par, maturity 2022: $4,000,000; Common Stock - $1 par, 200,000 shares outstanding: $200,000; Capital in excess of par: $800,000; Retained earnings: $5,000,000. The corporation, for the year 2010, earns $1,500,000 before interest and taxes and is in the 50% tax bracket. What is the return on common equity?

A. 6.1%
B. 10.2%
C. 30.5%
D. 61%

A

B. 10.2%

Net income = $1,500,000 gross earnings – $280,000 bond interest (7% x $4m) = $1,220,000 x 50% tax = $610,000 net income. Common shareholder equity = $5,000,000 retained earnings + $800,000 capital excess par + $200,000 par value outstanding shares = $6,000,000 total common equity. $610,000 / $6,000,000 = 10.16%

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
48
Q

A corporation has a $4 million profit. The corporation is in the 34% tax bracket. What is post-dilutive EPS? Common stock: 1,000,000 shares ($10 par) = $10,000,000; 5% preferred: 50,000 shares (100 par) = 5,000,000; 7% debentures: 5,000 bonds ($1,000 par convertible at $10) = $5,000,000

A. $2.16
B. $2.41
C. $1.44
D. $1.59

A

D. $1.59

The convertible bonds all converted ($5,000,000/$10 = 500,000 shares of common). More shares are created, but interest cannot be deducted. Therefore, taxable earnings increase and net income also increases; however, because the number of shares outstanding goes up, the earnings-per-share goes down or dilutes. $4,000,000 (profit) X .66 (converse of 34% tax) = $2,640,000 (post-tax profit) minus $250,000 (preferred dividends) = $2,390,000 earnings divided by 1,500,000 shares = $1.59 EPS.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
49
Q

Once the dividend is declared by a corporation, which of the following will occur?

A. Retained earnings will decrease.
B. Working capital will increase.
C. Current liabilities will decrease.
D. Retained earnings will increase.

A

A. Retained earnings will decrease.

When a corporation declares a dividend, it becomes a current liability and must be paid. Retained earnings will decrease and current liabilities will increase by the total dollar amount of the dividend to all stockholders. An increase in current liabilities result in a decrease in working capital (which is equal to current assets minus current liabilities).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
50
Q

The capital structure is the total of all securities issued by a corporation. Which of the following statements is INCORRECT concerning corporate securities?

A. Treasury stock has voting rights.
B. Outstanding stock may receive dividends.
C. Most corporations will issue fewer shares than authorized in order to keep stock available for future use.
D. The amount of stock actually sold is referred to as issued shares.

A

A. Treasury stock has voting rights.

Owners of treasury stock have no voting rights and do not receive dividends.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
51
Q

Which type of stock would an investor own for the best assurance of receiving dividend income?

A. Participating preferred
B. Callable preferred
C. Convertible preferred
D. Cumulative preferred

A

D. Cumulative preferred

Cumulative preferred stocks give the best assurance of dividend income because no dividends can be paid to common stockholders if any preferred stock dividends are in arrears (not paid).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
52
Q

Which of the following indicates the generosity of the board of directors?

A. Preferred dividend ratio
B. P/E ratio
C. Dividend payout ratio
D. EPS

A

C. Dividend payout ratio

The dividend payout ratio expresses the portion of earnings which the board chooses to distribute to the shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
53
Q

Which of the following is NOT part of a corporation’s capital structure?

A. Paid in capital surplus
B. Accounts payable
C. Debentures
D. Preferred stock

A

B. Accounts payable

Accounts payable includes short-term (30- to 60-day) liabilities. It is not part of a corporation’s long-term capital structure.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
54
Q

When current stockholders have preemptive rights, they are entitled to:

A. The opportunity to purchase new shares before the shares are offered to the public.
B. Voting rights.
C. A special purchase price when they buy bonds from the same company.
D. A special discount on new issues.

A

A. The opportunity to purchase new shares before the shares are offered to the public.

Preemptive rights allow current shareholders the first opportunity to purchase a sufficient number of the new shares to maintain their current percentage of ownership in the company. The stock is offered to the general public only after current shareholders exercise their preemptive rights.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
55
Q

A corporation declares a dividend. This causes I. Stockholders’ equity to increase. II. Stockholders’ equity to decrease. III. Liabilities to increase. IV. Liabilities to decrease.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

C. II and III

When a corporation declares a dividend, it is deducted from retained earnings in the equity section of the balance sheet and added to current liabilities in the liabilities section.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
56
Q

Which of the following statements is INCORRECT concerning convertible preferred stock?

A. It can be converted into common stock.
B. It has a higher claim than common in a corporate bankruptcy.
C. It can be called by the corporation.
D. Dividends must be paid before common stock dividends.

A

C. It can be called by the corporation.

Only callable preferred stock can be called by the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
57
Q

Companies have a net worth, which can be calculated using a method called the

A. Asset to Liability Cost Basis Method.
B. Corporate cash flow method.
C. Business modeling method.
D. Balance sheet equation.

A

D. Balance sheet equation.

The balance sheet equation works much the same for businesses as a net worth statement does for individuals. In both instances, net worth is calculated by subtracting liabilities from assets. One key difference is that companies often have inventory as an asset and bond obligations as a liability while individuals do not.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
58
Q

Which of the following best defines treasury stock?

A. Issued shares minus outstanding shares
B. Authorized shares minus outstanding shares
C. Nonvoting shares, authorized and issued
D. Nondividend paying shares, issued and outstanding

A

A. Issued shares minus outstanding shares

Treasury stock was previously outstanding. It has been bought back by the corporation and placed in the corporate treasury. Total shares issued minus shares currently outstanding equals the number of shares bought back by the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
59
Q

What are the two types of voting processes used by corporations?

A. Preemptive and proxy
B. Proxy and statutory
C. Statutory and cumulative
D. Proxy and cumulative

A

C. Statutory and cumulative

There are two types of voting processes used by corporations: statutory voting and cumulative voting. With statutory voting, shareholders are permitted one vote for each share owned to be voted for each director. With cumulative voting, shareholders can multiply the number of shares owned by the number of directorships and cast the votes in any manner desired.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
60
Q

To determine a corporation’s profitability year-over-year, which of the following is most suitable?

A. Price/earnings ratio
B. Profit ratio
C. Earnings per share
D. Fully diluted earnings per share

A

B. Profit ratio

The profit ratio measures how much of each revenue dollar is net income (Net income ÷ revenue).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
61
Q

The board of directors declares a dividend on Wednesday, Oct. 5, to shareholders of record as of Thursday, Oct. 20. If an investor purchased the stock on Thursday, Oct. 20, in a cash transaction, which of the following statements would be true?

A. The investor is entitled to the dividend as long as the shares are purchased on or before the record date regardless of the type of settlement used.
B. The investor would not be entitled to the dividend because the shares were purchased after the ex-dividend day which would have been Tuesday, October 18.
C. The investor would not be entitled to the dividend because the stock was purchased on the record date.
D. The investor would be entitled to receive the dividend because the stock was purchased using cash settlement.

A

D. The investor would be entitled to receive the dividend because the stock was purchased using cash settlement.

An investor that purchases the shares on the record date for cash settlement is the owner of record as of that date. The investor is therefore entitled to the dividend. For cash transactions, the ex-dividend date is the day after, not the day before, the record date. The way to remember this is to remember the acronym DREP (Declaration, Record, Ex-date, Payable).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
62
Q

The current ratio formula is

A. Current assets ÷ current owners’ equity.
B. Current assets ÷ current liabilities.
C. Quick assets ÷ current liabilities.
D. Current assets ÷ total liabilities.

A

B. Current assets ÷ current liabilities.

Current ratio measures the entity’s ability to pay its short-term debts. A number less than one means that the entity has insufficient funds to meet current liabilities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
63
Q

Which of the following reflects a company’s profits and losses for a fiscal year?

A. Revenue report
B. Income statement
C. Cash flow analysis
D. Balance sheet

A

B. Income statement

An income statement shows a company’s performance over a specific period of time in terms of the company’s profits and losses.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
64
Q

An American corporation receiving which of the following is entitled to a 50% exclusion?

A. Dividends of preferred stock, but not common stock, of a domestic corporation
B. Dividends from common and preferred stock of another domestic corporation
C. Dividends from common stock only of a domestic corporation
D. Dividends and interest from a domestic corporation

A

B. Dividends from common and preferred stock of another domestic corporation

Under current tax law, corporations may exclude from taxation 50% of common and/or preferred dividends they receive from stock owned in a U.S. corporation. In order to qualify, they must own less than 20% of the dividend-paying corporation’s outstanding stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
65
Q

Authorized stock that has not been sold or distributed is referred to as:

A. Unissued shares.
B. Treasury stock.
C. Issued shares.
D. Outstanding stock.

A

A. Unissued shares.

Unissued shares are authorized but have not been sold or distributed. Treasury stock has been issued and repurchased by the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
66
Q

From a fundamental analyst’s point of view, which of the following is least significant?

A. Inventories
B. Assets
C. Trading volume
D. Sales

A

C. Trading volume

A fundamentalist looks at the company, not the market. Trading volume is a market characteristic and is examined by a technical analyst.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
67
Q

A corporation may distribute dividends in the form of:

A. Cash, company stock and stock of another corporation.
B. Cash only.
C. Cash and stock only.
D. Company stock and stock of another corporation only.

A

A. Cash, company stock and stock of another corporation.

Dividends may be distributed as cash, company stock, or stock in a related or subsidiary corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
68
Q

An investor has a net worth of $500,000. If the investor takes $2,500 out of savings to invest in an IRA and $3,000 to pay off a credit card, and buys a $5,000 stereo on store credit, the investor’s net worth will then be:

A. $492,000
B. $495,000
C. $497,000
D. $500,000

A

D. $500,000

Here is how to work through these transactions to see how they affect the investor’s net worth. First, by moving $2,500 out of savings to invest in an IRA, the investor has simply moved a current asset to a long-term asset, so total assets remain unchanged. Second, when the investor uses $3,000 from savings to pay off a credit card, he has reduced both current assets and current liabilities by the same amount so net worth remains unchanged. Third, when the investor buys a $5,000 stereo on credit, both assets and liabilities have increased by the same amount; therefore, after all of this, the total net worth remains unchanged at $500,000. Remember, the formula for calculating net worth is total assets minus total liabilities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
69
Q

Tim is an investor in Ajax Corporation, a publicly traded corporation. As an owner of common stock, Tim has the right to

A. Choose where Ajax locates its corporate headquarters.
B. Make day-to-day management decisions at Ajax Corporation.
C. Inspect the financials of Ajax Corporation.
D. Hire mid-level managers for Ajax Corporation.

A

C. Inspect the financials of Ajax Corporation.

As a common shareholder of Ajax Corporation, Tim would have the right to inspect the books, meaning Ajax financial statements. Tim would have access to these financial statements through Ajax filings of their 10K annual reports and 10Q quarterly reports.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
70
Q

Which of the following is the quick ratio?

A. P/E ratio
B. The acid test
C. EPS
D. EPS vs. P/E ratio

A

B. The acid test

The acid test is the same as quick ratio: current assets minus only inventory divided by current liabilities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
71
Q

ABC Corporation originally authorized 1 million shares and has issued 600,000 shares. ABC Corporation has decided to buy 50,000 of their shares back and place them in treasury. How many shares are currently outstanding?

A. 400,000 shares
B. 550,000 shares
C. 600,000 shares
D. 1 million shares

A

B. 550,000 shares

The formula to calculate the number of outstanding shares is as follows: Total issued shares - Treasury stock = Number of outstanding shares (or in this scenario, 600,000 - 50,000 = 550,000 outstanding shares).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
72
Q

Individuals holding shares of common stock have the right to participate in the underlying corporation’s earnings. Which of the following statements is true?

A. Lower earnings yield lower dividends.
B. Higher dividends result in higher earnings.
C. Shareholders pay dividends in order to receive the payouts.
D. Earnings do not affect the payouts.

A

A. Lower earnings yield lower dividends.

Those holding shares of common stock have the right to participate in the earnings of the issuing company in the form of stock dividends. Dividends are usually paid quarterly by the issuing company, and as earnings fluctuate, so does the amount of payout per share issued by the company.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
73
Q

Preemptive rights allow a stockholder to

A. Purchase warrants and call options.
B. Serve as a board member.
C. Maintain proportionate interest in the company.
D. All of the above are correct.

A

C. Maintain proportionate interest in the company.

Preemptive rights allow the stockholder to maintain proportionate ownership in the company by having the first opportunity to buy new shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
74
Q

A cash purchase of heavy equipment will affect which of the following? I. Current Assets; II. Working capital; III. Shareholder’s equity; IV. Liabilities

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and II

Working capital is reduced because the heavy equipment is purchased with cash, a current asset. Fixed assets are affected because the value of long-term assets increases. (Heavy equipment is increased.) Total assets, however, do not change.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
75
Q

What ratio would an analyst consider when evaluating a corporation’s ability to service its debt?

A. Working capital ratio
B. Debt/equity ratio
C. Interest coverage ratio
D. Leverage ratio

A

C. Interest coverage ratio

The interest coverage ratio measures how easily the entity can pay interest on its outstanding bonds. A higher number is better.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
76
Q

ABC Corp., a newly formed corporation, is developing a machine to harness wind power to create energy. Because ABC currently has no earnings and is still in the growth phase, it is unable to pay cash dividends to its investors. However, ABC is very optimistic about its new product and wants to provide some sort of dividend to its current shareholders. ABC’s board of directors declares a 20% stock dividend to its current shareholders. An investor who currently owns 1,000 shares valued at $50 per share would own what after the stock dividend?

A. 1,200 shares at $50
B. 1,200 shares at $41.67
C. 1,000 shares at $50
D. 1,000 shares at $41.67

A

B. 1,200 shares at $41.67

When a corporation declares a stock dividend, the number of shares goes up while the price per share goes down. The aggregate or total value of the investment stays the same. In the case of ABC Corp. declaring a 20% stock dividend, an investor who owned 1,000 shares will now own 1,200 shares. However, the value of $50 per share will be reduced to $41.67 per share (50/1.20). The total value of the investment remains $50,000.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
77
Q

The amount of stock that a corporation is allowed to issue is called:

A. Treasury stock.
B. Authorized stock.
C. Outstanding stock.
D. Issued stock.

A

B. Authorized stock.

Authorized stock is specified in the corporate charter and is the total number of shares that the corporation may ultimately issue to the public.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
78
Q

The ex-dividend date is:

A. The first date on which the stock trades without the dividend.
B. Two business days after the record date.
C. The date the corporation distributes the dividends to shareholders.
D. The last date to purchase the stock for cash settlement and receive the dividend.

A

A. The first date on which the stock trades without the dividend.

The ex-date is the first day that the stock trades without the legal right to receive the dividend. On the ex-date, the stock price drops by the amount of the dividend.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
79
Q

A customer instructs his broker/dealer to purchase 200 shares of Dunham Corporation. Two days after trade date, the customer decides that he no longer wants the shares. Which statement is correct?

A. The customer has entered into a legally binding contract and is obligated to pay for the stock.
B. A trade may be canceled any time up to settlement date.
C. Because it is before settlement date, the customer is not obligated to pay for the trade.
D. Because the 24-hour grace period has expired, the customer must pay for the purchase.

A

A. The customer has entered into a legally binding contract and is obligated to pay for the stock.

On trade date, the terms of the trade are set, and the customer has entered into a legally binding contract.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
80
Q

A corporation with a low common stock ratio is:

A. Conservatively managed.
B. Financed more by preferred stock than common stock.
C. Less vulnerable to interest rate changes.
D. More vulnerable to interest rate changes.

A

D. More vulnerable to interest rate changes.

A low ratio indicates a large portion of the corporation’s capitalization is debt; it is highly leveraged. This makes the corporation vulnerable to rate changes. A low ratio indicates aggressive, not conservative financial management.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
81
Q

If a U.S. corporation was looking for maximum tax relief, which of the following investments should the registered representative recommend?

A. Common stock issued by another U.S. corporation
B. Common stock issued by a foreign corporation
C. Treasury stock
D. Bond

A

A. Common stock issued by another U.S. corporation

Of these choices, a U.S. corporation would achieve the best tax relief by purchasing shares in another U.S. corporation. Dividends received from another domestic corporation qualify for the 50% exclusion from taxes. The investing corporation would only pay taxes on 50% of the dividend distribution.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
82
Q

The ex-dividend date for XYZ is Monday, March 23. Under which of the following conditions would an investor purchasing XYZ receive the dividend?

A. Buys XYZ Monday, March 23 in a regular way trade
B. Buys XYZ Wednesday, March 25, for cash settlement
C. Buys XYZ Friday, March 27, for cash settlement
D. Buys XYZ Friday, March 20 in a regular way trade

A

D. Buys XYZ Friday, March 20 in a regular way trade

If Monday, March 23 is the ex-date, then Tuesday, March 24 is the record date. Therefore, a regular-way purchase on Friday, March 20 would buy (or receive) the dividend because settlement occurs on Tuesday, March 24 (or T+2) meeting the requirement that settlement must occur on or before the record date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
83
Q

The amount of money that an investor pays for newly issued common stock in excess of its par value is called

A. Excess par value.
B. Book value.
C. Retained earnings.
D. Paid in capital surplus.

A

D. Paid in capital surplus.

When a corporation first issues stock to the public, any amount the investor pays for the new shares above par value is called “paid in capital surplus.”

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
84
Q

A corporation’s capital structure consists of the following: Debenture - 7% - $1,000 par, maturity 2022: $4,000,000; Common stock - $1 par, 200,000 shares outstanding: $200,000; Capital in excess of par: $800,000; Retained earnings: $5,000,000. The corporation, for the current year, earns $1,500,000 before interest and taxes and is in the 50% tax bracket. What are the company’s earnings per share?

A. $0.25
B. $3.05
C. $3.75
D. $7.50

A

B. $3.05

Corporate profit of $1,500,000 minus $280,000 interest (7% X 4 million) = $1,220,000 X 50% = $610,000 divided by 200,000 shares = $3.05.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
85
Q

The bond ratio measures:

A. The portion of debt which matures in the next 12 months.
B. Short-term debt compared to long-term debt.
C. Total debt to common stock.
D. The amount of corporate capitalization that comes from long-term debt.

A

D. The amount of corporate capitalization that comes from long-term debt.

The bond ratio equals total bond par value ÷ total long-term capitalization.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
86
Q

Which measures a corporation’s solvency?

A. Working capital
B. Profit margin
C. Cash flow
D. Debt/equity ratio

A

A. Working capital

Working capital = current assets - current liabilities. It measures a corporation’s ability to meet current debt obligations.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
87
Q

One way an analyst evaluates management efficiency is by reviewing the

A. Return on common equity.
B. Debt/equity ratio.
C. P/E ratio.
D. Fully diluted EPS.

A

A. Return on common equity.

Return on common equity measures the return which management achieves on common stockholders’ equity. A higher ratio is better.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
88
Q

A corporation has the following: Revenue: $200,000. Operating expenses: $180,000 (includes $4,000 depreciation). Interest on notes: $11,000. Taxes (34%): $3,060. What is cash flow?

A. $5,940
B. $9,000
C. $9,940
D. $16,940

A

C. $9,940

Revenue minus the total of all expenses, including interest and taxes = $5,940. Then add depreciation, a non-cash expense for $9,940.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
89
Q

Which of the following best describes the purpose of a balance sheet?

A. It helps investors understand the company’s solvency.
B. It summarizes what the company owns and owes.
C. It demonstrates the company’s profits and losses.
D. It only shows the company’s assets.

A

B. It summarizes what the company owns and owes.

A balance sheet is a financial statement that summarizes a company’s assets, liabilities and shareholders’ equity at a specific point in time; in other words, it demonstrates what the company owns and owes.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
90
Q

The equation for outstanding stock is

A. Issued shares minus unissued shares.
B. Authorized shares minus unissued shares.
C. Issued shares minus treasury stock.
D. Authorized shares minus treasury stock.

A

C. Issued shares minus treasury stock.

Outstanding Stock = Issued Shares – Treasury Stock. Remember that treasury stock, which is stock that has been issued (sold to the public) and subsequently bought back by the corporation, must be subtracted from the shares that have been issued.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
91
Q

In order of liquidation, which of the following has a residual claim to the assets of the corporation?

A. General creditors
B. Secured bondholders
C. Preferred shareholders
D. Common shareholders

A

D. Common shareholders

Common shareholders are said to have a residual claim to assets. This means that common shareholders are the last to be paid per the order of bankruptcy liquidation. As owners, common shareholders take the most risk and also receive the greatest benefit if the company prospers.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
92
Q

All of the following types of stocks would be eligible for dividends EXCEPT:

A. Outstanding stock.
B. Treasury stock.
C. Preferred stock.
D. Common stock.

A

B. Treasury stock.

Treasury stock has no voting rights and does not receive dividends since the corporation holds these shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
93
Q

A corporation uses the statutory voting method. The shareholder owns 200 shares and there are five vacancies up for re-election. What is the maximum number of votes the shareholder may cast for any one vacancy?

A. 1
B. 5
C. 200
D. 1,000

A

C. 200

Statutory voting rights allow for one vote per share per vacancy. No matter what the number of vacancies is, the maximum limit of votes per vacancy is one per share. In this case, 200 shares owned = 200 votes per vacancy.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
94
Q

Which of the following will not affect a corporation’s reported net income?

A. Payment of a cash dividend to common shareholders
B. The carry forward of a loss from a prior tax year
C. A reduction of the company’s effective tax rate
D. A change of inventory procedure from FIFP to LIFO

A

A. Payment of a cash dividend to common shareholders

Payment of a dividend affects shareholder income but is after-tax to the corporation, having no effect on its net income.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
95
Q

Which of the following is not affected by the sale of debentures?

A. Working capital
B. Shareholders’ equity
C. Total assets
D. Liabilities

A

B. Shareholders’ equity

Receipt of cash from sale of bonds increases assets, working capital (current assets vs. current liabilities), and liabilities. There is no effect on a shareholder’s equity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
96
Q

EPS measures:

A. Earnings after interest but before taxes.
B. Earnings available to common stockholders.
C. Earnings paid to stockholders.
D. Earnings available to stockholders.

A

B. Earnings available to common stockholders.

EPS is net income available to common stock after the preferred dividend is paid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
97
Q

An analyst comparing the stock prices of two similar market competitors would most be interested in their:

A. P/E ratio.
B. Fully diluted EPS.
C. Debt ratio.
D. EPS.

A

A. P/E ratio.

The P/E ratio measures the value of a stock at its current price, and is one of the most commonly used tools when comparing similar stocks.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
98
Q

A stock dividend affects which of the following? I. Assets; II. Liabilities; III. Shareholder’s equity; IV. Net worth

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. III and IV
D. I and III

A

C. III and IV

A stock dividend reduces retained earnings and increases shares outstanding proportionately.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
99
Q

ABC Corporation shares are currently trading at $50 per share. ABC is about to perform a two-for-one stock split. After the split, an investor who currently owns 100 shares of ABC stock would own:

A. 200 shares at $25.
B. 100 shares at $50.
C. 100 shares at $25.
D. 200 shares at $50.

A

A. 200 shares at $25.

200 shares at $25 a share is what the investor would own after the two-for-one split. It is important to remember that the aggregate value remains the same; however, the number of shares goes up and the price per share goes down proportionately. In this case, 2/1 × 100 shares before = 200 share after ½ × $50 per share before = $25 price per share after.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
100
Q

Fully diluted earnings per share:

A. Assumes interest and preferred dividends have been paid.
B. Is reported to the IRS.
C. Is a larger number than EPS.
D. Is a smaller number than EPS.

A

D. Is a smaller number than EPS.

Fully diluted EPS is a theoretical number. It is the earnings which would be available to commons shares if all convertible securities were converted to common stock. Fully diluted EPS assumes interest and dividends on convertible bonds and convertible preferred stock has NOT been paid. Because the total number of common shares significantly increases, fully diluted EPS is a smaller number than EPS.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
101
Q

Which of the following is NOT affected by the declaration of a dividend?

A. Working capital
B. Net worth
C. Assets
D. Liabilities

A

C. Assets

The declaration of a dividend increases current liabilities and reduces retained earnings. There is no impact on cash (assets) until the dividend is paid. When current assets are unchanged and current liabilities increase, working capital decreases.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
102
Q

Shares of stock that have actually been sold to the public are known as:

A. Issued stock.
B. Treasury stock.
C. Outstanding stock.
D. Authorized stock.

A

A. Issued stock.

Issued shares are the amount of stock that has been sold to the public.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
103
Q

Most stockholders vote by proxy. What does this mean?

A. They waive their right to vote.
B. They send their ballot by certified mail.
C. They grant limited power of attorney to someone to vote on their behalf.
D. They vote for the most popular candidate.

A

C. They grant limited power of attorney to someone to vote on their behalf.

Because attendance is usually inconvenient, most stockholders vote by proxy. A proxy is a limited power of attorney that the stockholder grants to someone to vote the stock either at his or her own discretion or at the instruction of the stockholder.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
104
Q

What is regular-way settlement for Treasury bonds?

A. T
B. T+1
C. T+2
D. Same day

A

B. T+1

Government notes and bonds, including treasury bonds, settle regular way, which is the next business day (also known as T+1).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
105
Q

For stock dividends, which of the following dates is NOT chosen by the board of directors?

A. Ex-dividend date
B. Declaration date
C. Record date
D. Payable date

A

A. Ex-dividend date

The ex-dividend date is dictated by the SRO. The other three dates are chosen by the corporation’s board of directors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
106
Q

Which of the following discloses the assets available to common stock?

A. Book value per share
B. Fully diluted EPS
C. EPS
D. Debt/equity ratio

A

A. Book value per share

The book value per share is the residual value of assets left after all other parties are paid, including preferred stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
107
Q

Your client owns stock in a company that has announced a stock rights offering. If the client does not subscribe to the offer, his percentage of ownership interest in the company will:

A. Be worth more.
B. Increase.
C. Decrease.
D. Remain the same.

A

C. Decrease.

If a client does not subscribe to the shares entitled by his preemptive rights during a stock rights issue, his proportionate ownership will decrease because there will be an increase in outstanding shares owned by others after the offer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
108
Q

Which of the following is not included in the current assets section of a balance sheet?

A. Inventory
B. Cash
C. Goodwill
D. Accounts receivable

A

C. Goodwill

Goodwill appears in the intangible assets section, below fixed assets.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
109
Q

A corporation offers its shareholders the privilege of obtaining its shares at a fixed price. What type of product is the corporation issuing?

A. Rights
B. Puts
C. Calls
D. Cumulative preferred stock

A

A. Rights

Corporations issue rights to allow shareholders to maintain their same ownership percentage in a corporation when new shares are issued. These shares are purchased at a fixed price (subscription price), which is lower than the public offering price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
110
Q

Which of the following types of preferred stock might have regular changes in the dollar amount of its dividend?

A. Cumulative
B. Adjustable rate
C. Convertible
D. Participating

A

B. Adjustable rate

Adjustable rate preferred stock has a dividend that changes based on the performance of a benchmark security, and typically adjusts quarterly. Participating preferred stock might occasionally receive a dividend in excess of the normal stated divided, but this is an infrequent occurrence. Both participating and convertible preferred stock have fixed dividends.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
111
Q

A small corporation is raising $7,500,00 through a private placement of common stock. According to Regulation D, they can sell stock to all of the following groups of investors EXCEPT:

A. Unlimited number of accredited investors.
B. An insurance company and 20 non-accredited investors who are all represented by a purchaser representative.
C. An amateur investment club consisting of 25 investors with incomes of less than $75,000 per year, all represented by a purchaser representative.
D. A group of 40 individuals with annual incomes of $100,000 to $150,000 a year for 5 consecutive years. Two of the 40 investors have a net worth in excess of $1,000,000.

A

D. A group of 40 individuals with annual incomes of $100,000 to $150,000 a year for 5 consecutive years. Two of the 40 investors have a net worth in excess of $1,000,000.

Choice D is incorrect because under Regulation D, the company may sell securities to up to 35 non-accredited investors, and 38 investors in this example are non-accredited. All 40 have incomes less than $200,000 a year. Two of the 40 are accredited regardless of their incomes because they have a net worth of $1,000,000 or more.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
112
Q

An officer of ABC Corporation wants to sell some of the ABC stock in the secondary market to purchase a vacation home. He calls his registered representative and asks how many shares he can sell and stay within the requirements of Rule 144. The registered representative tells the officer that he will need to:

A. Call the SEC and ask them how many shares he will be allowed to trade.
B. Look at the number of outstanding shares of ABC And the average trading volumes for the previous 4 weeks.
C. Call the Exchange and ask them how many shares he will be allowed to trade.
D. Determine the number of shares he sold in the last trade and he is able to sell an equal amount of shares this time.

A

B. Look at the number of outstanding shares of ABC And the average trading volumes for the previous 4 weeks.

The officer would be able to sell the greater of 1% of the outstanding shares or the average trading volume for the previous four weeks. Form 144 is filed concurrently with the sale and the volume limitation applies during a 90-day period applicable to the Form 144.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
113
Q

The investment banker bears all the risk of unsold shares of a new issue security in which situation?

A. Firm commitment underwriting
B. The investment banker is never exposed to that type of risk.
C. All-or-nothing commitment
D. Best efforts underwriting

A

A. Firm commitment underwriting

In a firm commitment underwriting, the investment banker pays the issuer the value of all the shares, less the agreed upon compensation to the underwriting syndicate. If the issue is slow to sell or doesn’t sell, the investment banker selling the issue assumes the risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
114
Q

The purpose of a Rule 144 filing is to:

A. Announce a secondary offering.
B. Provide historical performance data.
C. Identify corporate insiders.
D. Alert the SEC that a control person is offering securities for sale.

A

D. Alert the SEC that a control person is offering securities for sale.

Rule 144 is a filing with the SEC concerning the sale of controlled securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
115
Q

A customer receives a red herring from his registered representative and has indicated interest in the offering. Which two of the following are true? I. The customer is obligated to buy the stock. II. The customer is not obligated to buy the stock. III. The broker/dealer is allowed to accept a deposit to secure the customer’s indication of interest. IV. The broker/dealer is not allowed to accept a deposit to secure the customer’s indication of interest.

A. II and III
B. II and IV
C. I and III
D. I and IV

A

B. II and IV

During the 20-day cooling-off period, deposits may not be accepted, and customers are not obligated to buy.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
116
Q

All of the following are required to register under Rule 145 for mergers and acquisitions EXCEPT:

A. A leveraged buy-out.
B. Stock splits or stock dividends.
C. An acquisition in which the acquirer is using both cash and securities.
D. A merger involving a stock offering.

A

B. Stock splits or stock dividends.

Rule 145 does not require the filing of a registration statement when a company declares a stock dividend or engages in a stock split.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
117
Q

The legislation that regulates the sale of securities at the state level is known as the:

A. Securities Act of 1933.
B. Investment Company Act of 1940.
C. Securities Act of 1934.
D. Blue Sky laws.

A

D. Blue Sky laws.

State securities laws are known as Blue Sky laws. These laws are tested under the Series 63 examination.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
118
Q

XYZ Corporation Primary Distribution Total issue: 1,000,000 shares; Retained for sale by underwriters: 800,000 shares; Reserved for distribution to selling group: 200,000 shares. PER SHARE: Public Offering Price: $10.00; Manager’s fees and expenses: .10; Underwriter’s allowance: .70; Selling Concession: .50; Proceeds to Issuer: 9.20. The underwriting spread is:

A. $0.10
B. $0.70
C. $0.80
D. $1.30

A

C. $0.80

By definition, the “underwriting spread” is the difference between the public offering price per share ($10) and the proceeds to the issuer (9.20).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
119
Q

Which of the following is NOT an exempt transaction?

A. An issue sold to 800 accredited investors
B. An issue of 5-year Treasury notes
C. An issue of $3.5 million over 1 year
D. An issue sold in one state

A

B. An issue of 5-year Treasury notes

Treasuries are an exempt security. The other three are exempt transactions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
120
Q

The agreement among underwriters, also known as the syndicate letter, is a document that:

A. Is an agreement between participating broker/dealers who assume liability for any unsold shares and specifies the underwriters’ responsibilities and participation percentages.
B. Is an agreement that is provided to the investor for full and fair disclosure purposes.
C. Is between the issuer and the underwriters and specifies the offering price of the securities.
D. Is delivered to the issuer and defines the underwriting spread.

A

A. Is an agreement between participating broker/dealers who assume liability for any unsold shares and specifies the underwriters’ responsibilities and participation percentages.

The agreement among underwriters, also known as the syndicate letter, is between the broker/dealers who have formed the underwriting syndicate. It spells out the responsibilities of each syndicate member and each member’s percentage liability. It is important to differentiate the agreement among underwriters from the underwriting agreement. The agreement among underwriters is between syndicate members. The underwriting agreement is between the managing underwriter and the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
121
Q

XYZ Corporation is planning an add-on offering. XYZ currently has outstanding shares and is now raising additional capital to build a new manufacturing plant. The quiet period in which no research may be published on XYZ will last for how many days?

A. 3 days from the effective date
B. 5 days from the effective date
C. 12 days from the effective date
D. 40 days from the initial filing of the registration statement

A

A. 3 days from the effective date

The quiet period for a subsequent primary or add-on offering is 3 days from the effective date. This is the time period during which no research may be published on XYZ to prevent influencing the market value of XYZ outstanding stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
122
Q

Which of the following is exempt from FINRA Rule 5130, which prohibits the purchase of IPOs by member firms and associated persons?

A. An associated person who works for a member firm in the selling group
B. An associated person whose limited registration permits selling only investment company products
C. An associated person who works for a member of the syndicate, but does not plan on selling the IPO to customers
D. An associated person who works for a member firm not involved in the syndicate

A

B. An associated person whose limited registration permits selling only investment company products

An associated person with a limited registration is not a restricted person. The other associated persons are restricted. Whether an associated person plans to sell the IPO and whether the member firm is involved with the offering is irrelevant.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
123
Q

After a registered representative sends a red herring (preliminary prospectus) to a customer, each of the following activities is permissible EXCEPT:

A. Discussing the information in the preliminary prospectus with the customer.
B. Sending the final prospectus to the customer once the registration is effective.
C. Obtaining an indication of interest in the issue from the customer.
D. Guaranteeing the offering price of the issue to the customer.

A

D. Guaranteeing the offering price of the issue to the customer.

Since the offering price has not yet been determined, it cannot be guaranteed. The word “guarantee” should always be treated cautiously on the Series 7 exam.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
124
Q

Which act is most concerned with disclosure?

A. Securities Act of 1933
B. Securities Act of 1934
C. Maloney Act of 1938
D. Trust Indenture Act of 1939

A

A. Securities Act of 1933

The ’33 act requires SEC registration and prospectus disclosure.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
125
Q

XYZ Corporation Primary Distribution: Total issue: 1 million shares; Retained for sale by underwriters: 800,000 shares; Reserved for distribution to selling group: 200,000 shares. PER SHARE: Public Offering Price: $10.00; Manager’s fee and expenses: .10; Underwriter’s allowance: .70; Selling concession: .50; Proceeds to issuer: 9.20. Subsequent to the public offering, XYZ Corporation will receive a check from the underwriting syndicate for:

A. $8.7 million.
B. $9.2 million.
C. $9.5 million.
D. $10 million.

A

B. $9.2 million.

The proceeds to the issuer will be $9.20 per share for 1 million shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
126
Q

All of the following are true regarding indications of interest received by an underwriter of a new public offering during the 20-day cooling off period EXCEPT I. Indications cannot be canceled by the customer. II. Indications can be canceled by the customer. III. Indications can be canceled by the underwriting firm. IV. Indications cannot be canceled by the underwriting firm.

A. II and IV
B. I and III
C. I and IV
D. II only

A

C. I and IV

I and IV are the answers to this question (note the word “EXCEPT”) since indications are binding on neither the customer nor the underwriter.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
127
Q

Which of the following must be sold by prospectus?

A. Illinois 5% bond
B. ABC Bank 6% debenture
C. ABC Bank Corp 6% debenture
D. LMN County 4% bond

A

C. ABC Bank Corp 6% debenture

Securities issued by bank holding companies are not exempt.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
128
Q

If certain requirements are met, a corporation can offer securities sold within the borders of one state using the intrastate offering exemption, also known as:

A. Rule 147.
B. Regulation A+.
C. Regulation D.
D. Rule 144.

A

A. Rule 147.

SEC Rule 147 is the intrastate offering exemption. Certain requirements must be met with regard to the company’s assets, revenues, and proceeds. Also, 100% of the purchasers must be principal residents of the state.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
129
Q

Under Rule 144A, a qualified institutional buyer has:

A. At least $150 million in public float.
B. $50 million in public float and has not missed an interest or dividend payment in 3 years.
C. At least $100 million in assets under discretionary management.
D. At least 80% of its assets in one state.

A

C. At least $100 million in assets under discretionary management.

A QIB has at least $100 million in assets under discretionary management.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
130
Q

An analyst publishes a quarterly newsletter on technology stocks. The analyst regularly follows 15 young tech companies in this report. One of these companies is issuing stock through an APO. Which of the following is true?

A. The analyst must suspend the newsletter during the offering period.
B. During the offering period, the analyst must omit this company from the report.
C. During the offering period, the analyst must feature this company individually in the report.
D. During the offering period, the analyst may include this company but give it no special recognition.

A

D. During the offering period, the analyst may include this company but give it no special recognition.

The analyst may include the company if it is not highlighted or if past recommendations about the company are not changed.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
131
Q

Which of the following is designed to prevent fraud in the issue of securities?

A. Securities Act of 1934
B. Rule 144
C. Regulation A
D. The Securities Act of 1933

A

D. The Securities Act of 1933

The primary purpose of the Securities Act of 1933 is to provide purchasers of new issues fraud prevention in the sale of securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
132
Q

A tender offer is:

A. An offer to buy stock at a price above current market value.
B. An offer to sell stock at a price below current market value.
C. An offer extended to convertible securities at a parity exchange rate.
D. An offer to exchange stock at current market value on a specified date.

A

A. An offer to buy stock at a price above current market value.

A tender offer is a formal offer made by the corporation to existing shareholders to purchase their shares at a price above current market value.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
133
Q

ABC is a broker/dealer underwriting its own IPO. ABC is required to hire an independent underwriter to facilitate the IPO. What are the qualifications for the independent underwriter?

A. The underwriter must have done at least three offerings in the last 3 years. These three offerings must have been at least 50% of the size and type of ABC’s offering.
B. The independent underwriter must be owned by or affiliated in some manner with ABC brokerage firm.
C. The underwriter must have brought at least three other broker/dealers public in the last 5 years.
D. The underwriter must be a publicly traded company.

A

A. The underwriter must have done at least three offerings in the last 3 years. These three offerings must have been at least 50% of the size and type of ABC’s offering.

When ABC goes public, it must employ at least one qualified independent underwriter. The qualification of this underwriter is that it has done at least three offerings of this type that are at least 50% of this offering’s size in the last 3 years. The independent underwriter’s function is to help price the security.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
134
Q

According to the Securities Act of 1933, when new securities are sold in an IPO of a company that qualifies for listing on the NYSE, the final prospectus is to be delivered:

A. Only at the investor’s request.
B. Right after purchase of new securities.
C. Within 25 days of the effective date.
D. Whenever the representative thinks is best.

A

C. Within 25 days of the effective date.

In a sale of IPO securities, the final prospectus must be delivered to any customer within 25 days of the effective date if it qualifies to be listed on the exchange. If the IPO does NOT qualify for listing, the prospectus delivery requirement is 90 days.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
135
Q

ABC Corporation owns a division that manufactures a niche product used in the automotive industry. ABC feels that this division would be better served as its own entity, separate from the parent company. If ABC chooses to separate this portion of its manufacturing business, the process is a:

A. Secondary offering.
B. Merger.
C. Spinoff.
D. Stock distribution.

A

C. Spinoff.

When a company decides to separate a division into its own entity, the process is called a spinoff. Sometimes it is advantageous for a division to operate independently.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
136
Q

An issuer can avoid registration by engaging in a private placement of securities under Regulation D if certain requirements are met. Which of the following statements is CORRECT?

A. No more than 35 non-accredited investors may be involved in the sale.
B. The buyer must be given access to the financial information that would be found in a prospectus of a public offering.
C. The issuer needs assurance that the buyer has no intentions of making a quick sale of the investment.
D. All of the above are correct statements.

A

D. All of the above are correct statements.

All of the statements are correct regarding Regulation D conditions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
137
Q

Who of the following are restricted persons associated with an IPO? I. An uncle of a registered representative; II. The father-in-law of a registered representative; III. A broker/dealer not involved in the syndicate; IV. A new registered representative’s grandparents

A. I and III
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

FINRA Rule 5130 states that broker/dealers and associated persons are not allowed to purchase IPOs from a syndicate. The broker/dealer’s involvement in the syndicate is irrelevant. This restriction extends to a registered representative’s in-laws, siblings, children, parents and spouses. Aunts, uncles, cousins and grandparents are excluded. Additionally, anyone financially supported by the registered representative or associated person is also a restricted person.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
138
Q

SEC stands for:

A. Secret Exchange Commission.
B. Securities Exchanging Committee.
C. Securities and Exchange Commission.
D. Secret and Exclusive Committee.

A

C. Securities and Exchange Commission.

SEC stands for Securities and Exchange Commission.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
139
Q

An issuer that currently has $150 million in outstanding capitalization and has an average daily trading volume of $1 million would have a restriction period for their add-on offering of:

A. 0 days.
B. 1 day prior to the effective date.
C. 5 days from the effective date.
D. 40 days from the effective date.

A

A. 0 days.

Issuers with a public float of at least $150 million and an average daily trading volume of $1 million would have no restrictions prior to the effective date. Issuers with an average daily trading volume of at least $100,000 and $25 million in public float are subject to a restricted period of 1 day before the effective date. Tier 3 companies – companies that do not qualify for Tier 1 or Tier 2 (smaller companies) – have a 5-day restricted period.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
140
Q

Which of the following falls under the category of an exempt security?

A. U.S. government bond
B. Common stock
C. Corporate bond
D. Mutual fund

A

A. U.S. government bond

Only the U.S. government bond is an exempt security; the rest are considered nonexempt securities and must be registered under the Securities Act of 1933.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
141
Q

When material deficiencies are discovered in the registration statement, the SEC will

A. Hire an underwriter to correct the registration statement.
B. Notify the appropriate state securities administrator.
C. Refer to the SRO.
D. Issue a deficiency letter or a stop order.

A

D. Issue a deficiency letter or a stop order.

The SEC will issue a deficiency letter, which suspends the cooling-off period until the deficiency is corrected, or a stop order, to prohibit sale until the deficiency is corrected.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
142
Q

Which of the following is true of restricted stock?

A. Shares are registered with the SEC.
B. A broker/dealer cannot act as an agent.
C. It must be held for 2 years before resale.
D. The purchase must be paid for in its entirety.

A

D. The purchase must be paid for in its entirety.

If a selling company is subject to the SEC reporting requirements, the securities must be held at least 6 months. Otherwise, they must be held at least 1 year. The holding period begins when the securities are bought and fully paid for. A broker/dealer can act as an agent, but restricted stock is not registered with the SEC.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
143
Q

Under Rule 144, when does an affiliate need to file a Notice of Proposed Sale with the SEC?

A. Every 3 months
B. If the sale involves more than 5,000 shares
C. If the sale adds up to $5,000
D. Every time there is a sale of restricted securities

A

B. If the sale involves more than 5,000 shares

If the sale involves more than 5,000 shares, or if the aggregate dollar amount is greater than $50,000 in any 90-day period, affiliates must file a notice with the SEC.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
144
Q

A research analyst has a meeting with an employee from investment banking. This is:

A. Prohibited until after the cooling-off period.
B. Prohibited under all circumstances.
C. Permissible if the meeting is attended by a compliance officer.
D. Permissible only when they are working on the same underwriting.

A

C. Permissible if the meeting is attended by a compliance officer.

An employee from the legal or compliance department must be present if the analyst is speaking with the investment banking department.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
145
Q

An analyst includes ABC’s 6% debenture in his newsletter. The analyst’s employer is currently underwriting an ABC stock offering. This is permissible:

A. Only with advance SRO approval.
B. If the analyst’s employer is not the managing underwriter.
C. If the bonds are not convertible.
D. Under no circumstances.

A

C. If the bonds are not convertible.

Because the bond is a different security than the stock, including it in the newsletter is permissible if it is not convertible into stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
146
Q

A director of a public corporation wishes to sell some of his stock in the company. Under SEC Rule 144, how long is the holding period?

A. 3 months
B. 6 months
C. 12 months
D. 24 months

A

B. 6 months

Before restricted securities may be sold in the marketplace, they must be held for a specified period of time. If a selling company is subject to the SEC reporting requirements, the securities must be held at least 6 months; otherwise, at least 1 year.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
147
Q

In order to be considered an accredited investor, in each of the past 2 years the investor’s income must exceed:

A. $200,000.
B. $300,000.
C. $400,000.
D. $500,000.

A

A. $200,000.

An individual natural person is an accredited investor if his or her income in each of the past 2 years exceeded $200,000 and it is reasonable to expect the same income level in the current year. If it is a joint account, the income test increases to $300,000.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
148
Q

ABC Corporation has issued a tender offer to the shareholders of XYZ Corp. Which of the following is a permissible way for a shareholder to sell into the offer?

A. Deliver 2 warrants, each representing one round lot of the stock
B. Deliver 1 warrant, representing one round lot of the stock
C. Deliver one round lot of the stock
D. Deliver an option on 100 shares of the stock

A

C. Deliver one round lot of the stock

A shareholder who sells into a tender offer must deliver shares net long. This means that the actual shares must be delivered. Options and warrants must be exercised first, then the resulting shares may be delivered into the tender. An investor may not sell short into the tender.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
149
Q

An issuer who has at least $100,000 in average daily trading volume and $25 million in public float is planning to bring additional shares to market. What would the restriction period be?

A. 1 day prior to the effective date
B. 3 days prior to the effective date
C. 10 days prior to the effective date
D. 20 days prior to the effective date

A

A. 1 day prior to the effective date

For issuers offering additional shares who currently have an average daily trading volume of at least $100,000 and $25 million in public float, the restriction for offering participants is 1 day prior to the effective date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
150
Q

All are true about a red herring EXCEPT

A. It includes the price of the security.
B. It helps to determine demand for a new issue.
C. It’s also known as a preliminary prospectus.
D. It’s given to investors before the prospectus is finalized.

A

A. It includes the price of the security.

The red herring does not include the price of the security. The red herring, or preliminary prospectus, is often used to gauge subsequent market interest on the effective date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
151
Q

Once a shelf registration is filed by the issuer, for how long may the issuer delay selling all or part of the new issue?

A. 270 days
B. 1 year
C. 18 months
D. 2 years

A

D. 2 years

In general, shelf registration gives the issuer 2 years to complete the issue. It may be as long as 3 years for seasoned (SIs) and well-known seasoned investors (WKSIs).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
152
Q

Which of the following is not a method to register a security at the state level?

A. Qualification
B. Application
C. Coordination
D. Notification

A

B. Application

The three methods used to “blue sky” a security are notification, coordination, and qualification.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
153
Q

Under Reg D rule 506, how much money can be raised within 12 months?

A. $1 million
B. $5 million
C. $10 million
D. An unlimited amount

A

D. An unlimited amount

Under Reg D rule 506, there is an unlimited amount of money that can be raised.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
154
Q

XYZ Corporation Primary Distribution: Total Issue: 1 million shares; Retained for sale by underwriters: 800,000 shares; Reserved for distribution to selling group: 200,000 shares. PER SHARE: Public Offering Price: $10.00; Manager’s fee and expenses: .10; Underwriter’s allowance: .70; Selling concession: .50; Proceeds to issuer: 9.20. Each underwriter will receive what fee per share for the stock he gives up to the selling group?

A. $0.20
B. $0.30
C. $0.50
D. $0.70

A

A. $0.20

The syndicate underwriter’s allowance (take-down) is $0.70, but on sales made by the selling group, the syndicate members are conceding $0.50 of the $0.70 to the selling group. The syndicate is, in effect, receiving a $0.20 override on sales made by the selling group.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
155
Q

After a company has streamlined its operations, one of its peripheral operations no longer fits in this newer business mode, so the company plans to sell it. This is called a:

A. Spinoff.
B. Registered secondary offering.
C. Tender offer.
D. Rule 147 offering.

A

A. Spinoff.

Selling or separating a portion of a corporation is called a spinoff.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
156
Q

A $200 million new issue is being underwritten by a syndicate. A “tombstone” ad has been placed in the Wall Street Journal listing the manager of the syndicate and the syndicate’s members. The placing of the ad was required by the:

A. SEC.
B. NYSE.
C. State Securities Commission.
D. None of the above.

A

D. None of the above.

No one requires an underwriter to publish a tombstone ad.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
157
Q

Under Reg D rule 504, how much money may be raised within 12 months?

A. $3 million
B. $5 million
C. $10 million
D. An unlimited amount

A

B. $5 million

Under Reg D rule 504, the maximum amount that can be raised in any 12 months would equal $5 million. Additionally, all investors must be accredited investors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
158
Q

Jack owns a small manufacturing company in the Northeast. The company is publicly traded; however, its capitalization is very small. Jack would like to expand his operations over the next 2 years. Which of the following types of offerings will best suit the manufacturing company’s needs?

A. A registered secondary offering
B. An immediate offering at the market
C. An initial public offering, or IPO
D. A shelf offering

A

D. A shelf offering

The best answer is a shelf offering, since the issuer will need the money in stages over the next 2 years. Because the issuer is small, it only qualifies for a 2-year offering period. IPO is not the answer because an issuer only has one initial public offering. In a registered secondary offering, the offering proceeds go to a party other than the issuer. An immediate offering at the market is a possible choice. However, since the issuer will need the capital in stages, shelf offering is the better answer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
159
Q

A corporation can avoid registration requirements in the issuance of securities by engaging in a private placement under:

A. Regulation A.
B. Rule 144.
C. Rule 147.
D. Regulation D.

A

D. Regulation D.

Private placement conditions are covered under Regulation D.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
160
Q

A guaranteed bond is one that is guaranteed by another company or entity. We would typically see a guaranteed bond used in which of the following situations?

A. Competitive bid underwriting
B. Merger
C. Spinoff
D. Registered secondary offering

A

C. Spinoff

A spinoff occurs when a division of the company is separated into a new entity. Often this new entity will issue bonds that are guaranteed by the company it was formerly associated with to reduce interest costs. The spinoff entity is sometimes held as a subsidiary. In other instances, it is sold to another company.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
161
Q

A “Chinese Wall” is:

A. A separation between the managing underwriter and the syndicate members.
B. A separation between the issuer and the syndicate.
C. A separation between investment banking and the other functions inside a broker/dealer.
D. A separation between the trading department and the back office inside a broker/dealer.

A

C. A separation between investment banking and the other functions inside a broker/dealer.

The Chinese Wall separates the investment banking department (also called the underwriting department), which handles inside information, from other departments of the broker/dealer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
162
Q

Which of the following transactions requires distribution of an offering circular to prospective investors?

A. Rule 147
B. Reg A+
C. Rule 144A
D. Reg D

A

B. Reg A+

Regulation A+ or small issue exemptions, use an offering circular for disclosure instead of a prospectus. It must be sent to the prospective buyer either 48 hours prior to the purchase, or at the time of purchase, with a 5-day right of rescission.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
163
Q

Most restricted stock is acquired through which of the following types of offerings?

A. Private placement
B. Direct participation program
C. Registered secondary
D. Regulation A

A

A. Private placement

Unregistered securities purchased through a private placement are governed by Reg D. These securities are restricted from resale for 6 months for SEC-reporting companies, or for 1 year for nonreporting companies. Securities accumulated through Reg A are not restricted securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
164
Q

Which of the following is true about a stabilizing bid?

A. It is available to syndicate members, but not selling group members.
B. It is only visible on NASDAQ Level III.
C. The market maker must honor this bid by purchasing at least 100 shares at this price.
D. It must be disclosed in the prospectus.

A

D. It must be disclosed in the prospectus.

The right of the managing underwriter to enter a stabilizing bid in association with a primary offering must be disclosed in the prospectus.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
165
Q

Which of the following may an analyst do in connection with a public offering?

A. Receive compensation on investment banking activity
B. Include the stock in a quarterly research report only if it has been included previously
C. Participate in road shows
D. Publish research on the security

A

B. Include the stock in a quarterly research report only if it has been included previously

The stock may be included if it has previously been included in a list with several similar companies and the recommendation is not more favorable than it had been previously. Additionally, the company cannot be given any special recognition.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
166
Q

A coffee producer, an OTC traded company, did an add-on offering to update its roasting facility and expand into the tea market. The prospectus must be delivered within:

A. 25 days of the effective date.
B. 40 days of the effective date.
C. 30 days of the registration date.
D. 90 days after the effective date.

A

B. 40 days of the effective date.

Non-NASDAQ OTC issuers must deliver a prospectus for 90 days after the effective date in an IPO, and 40 days from the effective date for APOs.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
167
Q

Regarding underwriting compensation, rank the following in order of size from greatest to least. I. Reallowance II. Spread III. Concessions

A. I, III, II
B. II, I, III
C. II, III, I
D. III, II, I

A

C. II, III, I

The correct answer must show II (spread) as first in order, so the first and last answer choices can be eliminated. The reallowance is the smallest part of underwriting compensation; it is paid to another member whose only interest in the underwriting is filling a few customer orders.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
168
Q

Under Reg A+ Tier 2, what is the maximum amount of money that may be raised?

A. $5 million with no more than $1.5 million by affiliates
B. $20 million
C. $50 million with no more than $15 million by affiliates
D. Unlimited amount of money

A

C. $50 million with no more than $15 million by affiliates

Under Reg A+ Tier 2, the maximum amount of money that can be raised is $50 million with no more than $15 million by affiliated persons. This is to allow emerging growth companies to raise money.

Under Reg A+ Tier 1, the maximum amount of money that can be raised is $20 million with no more than $6 million by affiliated persons.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
169
Q

XYZ Corporation is a well-known seasoned issuer (WKSI) and is planning to expand operations. XYZ will need additional capital in stages to for this expansion. If XYZ does a shelf offering, how much time will it have to issue additional shares before it has to refile?

A. Ninety days to bring the shares to market and place the money in escrow for use at a later date
B. One year from the effective date of the shelf offering
C. Three years from the effective date of the shelf offering
D. Two years from the effective date of the shelf offering

A

C. Three years from the effective date of the shelf offering

Because XYZ is a WKSI, it may spread the offering over a 3-year period through a shelf offering. If XYZ was an unseasoned issuer (a smaller company), the shelf offering period would last only 2 years.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
170
Q

What is the most common method of acquiring restricted stock?

A. Rights offering
B. Private placement
C. Employee profit sharing plan
D. Merger

A

B. Private placement

Private placements are more commonly used to acquire restricted stock. Rights offerings (registered offerings), Employee Stock Ownership Plans (ESOP), and mergers are less common.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
171
Q

The announcement that must be filed in connection with a Regulation D offering is:

A. An offering memorandum.
B. An offering circular.
C. An official statement.
D. An official notice.

A

A. An offering memorandum.

The announcement that must be filed in connection with a Regulation D offering is an offering memorandum.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
172
Q

A well-known seasoned issuer is issuing securities in an APO. To meet Act of ‘33 disclosure requirements, the issuer may use a/an:

A. Free-writing prospectus.
B. S-1.
C. Offering circular.
D. Offering memorandum.

A

A. Free-writing prospectus.

WKSIs may use a free-writing prospectus for additional primary offerings (APOs) or add-on offerings.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
173
Q

A Rule 144 filing for the sale of restricted securities by control persons is subject to which of the following time limitations?

A. 30 days
B. 60 days
C. 90 days
D. 120 days

A

C. 90 days

A filing for sale under Rule 144 has a 90-day time restriction. If the security is not sold within 90 days of filing the Form, the affiliate must file an amended notice.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
174
Q

Upon filing a registration statement with the SEC, at what point would the issuer be required to provide additional information?

A. In the event of material changes in the underwriter’s circumstances
B. In response to an SEC deficiency letter
C. When accounting for offering amendments following commencement of sales
D. When accepting indications of interest

A

B. In response to an SEC deficiency letter

Additional information is required when responding to SEC deficiency letters. The SEC verifies that full and proper disclosure is made to the investors or potential investors. If something is inherently fraudulent or missing in the registration documents, the SEC will send out a deficiency letter and issue a stop order. The registration process will continue once the issuer provides the additional information to the security and exchange commission.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
175
Q

Which of the following is FALSE regarding a Rule 147 offering?

A. 80% of the issuer’s revenues must be generated in the state.
B. 100% of the purchasers must reside in the state.
C. 100% of the proceeds must be invested in the state.
D. 80% of the issuer’s assets must be in the state.

A

C. 100% of the proceeds must be invested in the state.

Under Rule 147, 80% of the proceeds must be invested in the state.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
176
Q

The underwriting agreement is between whom?

A. The syndicate members and the selling group
B. The underwriters and the public customers purchasing the new offering
C. The issuer and the managing underwriter
D. The syndicate members

A

C. The issuer and the managing underwriter

The underwriting agreement is between the issuer and the managing underwriter. It is the document that spells out the duties and responsibilities of each party, including who has liability for any unsold shares.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
177
Q

Some securities are exempt from the registration and prospectus requirements of the Securities Act of 1933. All of the following securities are among this exempt class EXCEPT:

A. Commercial paper that has a maturity not exceeding 270 days.
B. A security issued by a nonprofit organization.
C. A security offered for sale in only one state.
D. U.S. government securities.

A

C. A security offered for sale in only one state.

Offering all the securities in one state is an exempt transaction (Rule 147). The security offered through the exempt transaction is NOT an exempt security. The other securities listed are exempt securities. Municipal securities are also exempt.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
178
Q

Rule 144A allows:

A. Orderly distribution of insider shares.
B. Sale of insider shares along with an APO.
C. Domestic purchase of foreign securities.
D. Foreign purchase of domestic securities.

A

C. Domestic purchase of foreign securities.

Rule 144A allows domestic QIBs to purchase securities outside the US if done through a broker/dealer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
179
Q

Which of the following terms would be used to describe a pre-offering solicitation under Reg A+?

A. A preliminary prospectus
B. Testing the waters
C. Statement of additional information
D. An omitting prospectus

A

B. Testing the waters

Testing the waters is a term that is used when the issuer is gauging marketability of their offering. A preliminary offering circular is sent to prospective investors to determine the viability of the offering. This is done prior to the offering statement being filed. The other three statements are incorrect because a prospectus is used for a public offering and an omitting prospectus and statement of additional information are both used for an open-end investment company.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
180
Q

XYZ is a publicly traded company and its stock has been doing well for the last several years. XYZ is planning to expand into new markets and would like to raise additional capital to finance this expansion. How may this be done?

A. After the IPO, XYZ can no longer raise capital in the primary markets
B. Registered secondary offering
C. Initial public offering or IPO
D. Add-on offering

A

D. Add-on offering

In an add-on, or subsequent primary offering, a publicly traded company increases its capitalization by issuing additional shares in the primary market. In a registered secondary offering, a party other than the issuer (usually a large shareholder) sells unregistered shares through a process of registration. In a registered secondary offering, the issuer does not receive the sale proceeds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
181
Q

Regulation S addresses:

A. Off-shore sales of restricted stock.
B. Extension of credit.
C. Boundaries between underwriting and sales departments.
D. Private issuance of unregistered securities.

A

A. Off-shore sales of restricted stock.

Regulation S addresses off-shore sales of restricted stock and requires a 1-year holding period. Debt instruments sold under Reg S have a holding period of 40 days. Regulation M requires that broker/dealers establish a Chinese wall between underwriting and sales/trading departments. Regulation D relates to the issuance of unregistered, nonexempt securities. Regulation T governs the extension of credit from a broker/dealer to its customers.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
182
Q

Utilizing stabilization efforts on a new stock issue:

A. Can only be done using sell orders.
B. Must be done before the issue is sold in the marketplace as new issue.
C. Is prohibited under the Securities Act of 1933.
D. Is permitted if reported in the prospectus of the new stock issue.

A

D. Is permitted if reported in the prospectus of the new stock issue.

Stabilization is a one-sided bid by the underwriter to stop the decline in the price of a new issue of stock. If the syndicate has the ability to utilize stabilization, it must be disclosed in the prospectus.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
183
Q

When selling a new issue of securities within a given state, which of the following would potentially be governed under the state Blue Sky Laws? I. Registered representative; II. Broker/dealer; III. Security

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. I, II and III

A

D. I, II and III

All three are governed by that state. Generally, all three must be registered in that state. The Blue Sky laws under the Uniform Securities Act are tested in the Series 63 exam.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
184
Q

Under a Regulation S offering, when can the securities be resold to the investors in the United States? I. 40 days for equity securities II. 1 year for equity securities III. 40 days for debt securities IV. 1 year for debt securities

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

The resale in the secondary market of Reg S offerings is restricted for U.S. investors for a period of 1 year or 12 months for equities and 40 days for debt securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
185
Q

The investor places a sell stop at $45-limit $43 when the market is currently trading at $46. The following trades have occurred: $45.67, $45.23, $44.32, $42.98. At which price will the customer trade?

A. $45.23
B. $44.32
C. $42.98
D. There was no resulting trade for the customer.

A

D. There was no resulting trade for the customer.

The sell stop was placed at $45, so once the stock price hit $44.32, the stop was erased, then the limit order was in effect at $43. So the customer was only willing to sell at a price of $43 or better, which would be higher. However, the next trade was at $42.98, which was below the limit price of $43. Therefore, the customer’s trade did not occur.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
186
Q

How do OTC market makers make a profit?

A. By charging commission
B. By acting as agents
C. On the spread between the bid and the ask
D. By buying at the ask and selling at the bid

A

C. On the spread between the bid and the ask

OTC market makers make a profit on the spread between the bid and the ask in the securities that they trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
187
Q

Which system is used to report corporate bond trades?

A. TRACE
B. RTRS
C. TRF
D. OATS

A

A. TRACE

Trade Reporting and Compliance Engine is used by broker/dealers to report corporate bond trades. OATS is used to monitor for front running and best execution. RTRS tracks municipal bonds. All three systems are TRFs, or Trade Reporting Facilities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
188
Q

Which of the following most closely expresses FINRA’s Five Percent Policy?

A. Markups/markdowns carry more risk and can be larger than commissions, but should never exceed 5%.
B. Markups/markdowns and commissions should be fair under the circumstances and should probably not exceed 5%.
C. Commissions should be fair and reasonable, and generally not exceed 5%.
D. Markups/markdowns and commissions should never exceed 5%.

A

B. Markups/markdowns and commissions should be fair under the circumstances and should probably not exceed 5%.

The policy applies to markups, markdowns, and commissions. Five Percent is a guideline, not a firm maximum.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
189
Q

Trade tickets must be time stamped:

A. When the order is received.
B. When the ticket arrives at the trading desk.
C. When the trade is executed.
D. All of the above.

A

D. All of the above.

All three are required so that there is an audit trail for the trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
190
Q

An investor with a short position is:

A. Bearish.
B. Accredited.
C. Closed.
D. Bullish.

A

A. Bearish.

A short position is an open, not a closed, position. Accredited and non-accredited investors may establish short positions. Long positions are bullish; short positions are bearish.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
191
Q

All of the following are forms of arbitrage EXCEPT:

A. Arbitration arbitrage.
B. Convertible securities arbitrage.
C. Market arbitrage.
D. Risk arbitrage.

A

A. Arbitration arbitrage.

Arbitration arbitrage is not a form of arbitrage. Arbitration is used for dispute resolution.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
192
Q

Which of the following is shown at NASDAQ Level 2? I. Highest bid; II. Lowest bid; III. Highest offered; IV. Lowest offered

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

D. I, II, III, and IV

Level 2 is the trading desk and sees all quotes entered. Level 3 is where the market maker enters quotes, while Level 1 is where the R/R and/or customer can see inside asked and bid, or lowest asked and highest bid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
193
Q

Which of these sequences accurately describes the flow of an order to purchase a stock on the NYSE in a margin account? I. Margin department; II. Wire room (order department); III. Cashiering; IV. P&S

A. III, II, IV, I
B. IV, II, I, III
C. II, I, IV, III
D. II, IV, I, III

A

D. II, IV, I, III

After the RR receives the order from the customer, it is submitted it to the wire room. The order is “wired” to the floor of the NYSE, where the firm’s commission broker executes the trade. The execution is reported to the P&S (purchase and sales) department; from there it goes to the margin department, where the required margin is calculated; the last step in the sequence is the cashiering department, which is responsible for sending out the “bill.”

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
194
Q

A market order to sell at the close is placed with a registered representative. The resulting trade is executed and later confirmed to the customer at 14. The trade actually occurred at 13. What price does the customer receive?

A. 14
B. 13, but the customer can pursue arbitration as recourse.
C. 14, if a mediator is appointed.
D. 13

A

D. 13

The market order was filled at 13, and the customer will receive this price in spite of the confirmation error.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
195
Q

Your customer enters a buy order for 100 shares at 16 when the market is 15 - 15.50. An order is filled at 15.75. This means:

A. 15.50 plus markup.
B. 15 plus spread.
C. 15 plus commission.
D. 15.50 plus commission.

A

A. 15.50 plus markup.

Since the price is above the ask, it must be a customer purchase including a markup, because customer purchases are executed at the ask plus a markup. Conversely, customer sales are executed at the bid (in this case 15) less a markdown.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
196
Q

You have been watching two OTC stocks for a period of time and have noted that the spreads between the bid and ask prices are quite different. What could you likely assume from this finding?

A. The stock with the wider spread is more active.
B. The stock with the more narrow spread will be a better long-term performer.
C. No conclusion should be drawn from this finding.
D. The stock with the more narrow spread is more active.

A

D. The stock with the more narrow spread is more active.

Generally, the more actively traded stock will have a narrower spread between the bid and ask price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
197
Q

One of your clients bought 100 shares of TBS at 20. The stock has now risen to 55, and the client would like to protect her profit. Which of the following orders should be entered?

A. Sell limit at 55.50
B. Sell limit at 55
C. Sell stop at 54.88
D. Sell stop at 55.13

A

C. Sell stop at 54.88

When an investor is long stock and wishes to protect against a loss or to lock in a profit on the position, the investor enters a sell stop order below the current market. The current market value of the stock is at 55 and the client wishes to protect the profit, so a sell stop order at 54.88 could be entered. If an investor has a short position in the stock and wishes to protect or lock-in a profit, a buy stop order would be entered above the market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
198
Q

Regarding a broker/dealer retail sale to a customer, how can an order be filled? I. From inventory; II. Sell short to customer; III. Simultaneous or riskless transaction; IV. As an agent:

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

The first three of these are principal transactions (as a dealer). The last is an agent or broker transaction.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
199
Q

What is the lowest price that a seller is willing to accept for a security from a customer?

A. Ask price
B. Bid price
C. Bottom price
D. Strike price

A

A. Ask price

The asked, or offering price, is the lowest price that a seller is willing to accept for a security from a customer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
200
Q

The major objective for requiring the reporting of transactions in NASDAQ National Market System issues within 10 seconds is to provide current information to:

A. Institutional investors only.
B. Investors.
C. The SEC.
D. FINRA.

A

B. Investors.

The purpose of any trade or quote reporting system is to provide current information to investors, not regulators, and not just institutional investors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
201
Q

FINRA Rule 4320 provides guidelines on the regulation of short sale delivery requirements. If a broker and the short selling client fail to deliver on a demand for the shorted security, what are the consequences imposed by the law?

A. The client and broker/dealer are restricted in trading and must deliver or face license suspension and account closure.
B. The client’s account is frozen and will not be released until the securities are delivered to the original owner.
C. The broker/dealer, client, and clearing firm are restricted from transacting in that security until the securities that are sold short are delivered in good delivery form.
D. The client has T+2 to deliver the securities after a second demand for the securities.

A

C. The broker/dealer, client, and clearing firm are restricted from transacting in that security until the securities that are sold short are delivered in good delivery form.

A short sale is the sale of an asset that the seller does not own. Short sale securities are securities that are borrowed. The original owner of the securities has every right to transact anytime they deem appropriate for their account. If securities are not returned, the original owner may also be in breach of failure to deliver. For this reason and others, FINRA has established delivery requirements and since amended the rules to include this amendment which places strong performance requirements and responsibilities on the broker/dealer and the clearing firm. Also included in the rule is the declaration that the broker/dealer effecting the short sell transaction and the client are restricted from transacting in the securities until the shorted securities are delivered in good delivery form.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
202
Q

What is the description of the industry’s Five Percent Policy?

A. Charges must be fair and reasonable.
B. There is a maximum markup of 5%.
C. No transaction charge can exceed 5%.
D. 5% is a sales charge rule

A

A. Charges must be fair and reasonable.

The Five Percent Policy is a guideline for determining fair and reasonable markups, markdowns and commissions. It states that such charges must always be reasonable given the circumstances. It is not a rule establishing 5% as a maximum.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
203
Q

The responsibility of a broker/dealer’s cashiering department is all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Handling the execution of a customer’s orders.
B. Transferring customers’ securities.
C. Delivering and receiving securities from other broker/dealers.
D. Handling loans from banks on hypothecated securities.

A

A. Handling the execution of a customer’s orders.

A cashier handles money and securities for the firm and does not handle the execution of a customer’s orders.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
204
Q

Sell ABC short 20 stop 20.50. The ticker tape shows: 19, 20, 21, 20.50, 20.25. At what price was the trade executed?

A. 19
B. 20
C. 20.50
D. 21

A

D. 21

Sell short 20 stop 20.50 (limit) is triggered or elected at 20 or below, and executed at or above 20.50. The order is triggered at 19 (20 or below), and execution occurs at 21 (the next price that is 20.50 or above).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
205
Q

A specialist receives an order to buy XYZ 200 shares 20 stop 19. This means that:

A. The specialist is prevented from buying, unless the market is at or below 19.
B. The order is stopped at or below 20 and filled at or above 19.
C. The order is triggered at or above 20 and filled at 19 or lower.
D. The order will be filled if the market moves successively lower from 20 to 19.

A

C. The order is triggered at or above 20 and filled at 19 or lower.

Buy stop limit order: stop at 20 or above, execute at 19 or below.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
206
Q

When a firm effects trades for its own account, it is acting in a principal capacity and is considered to be a/an:

A. Dealer.
B. Agency.
C. Financial institution.
D. Broker.

A

A. Dealer.

A firm transacting trades for its own account is acting in the capacity of a dealer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
207
Q

A firm is acting in the capacity of a broker and receiving a commission. The firm is performing as:

A. An agent.
B. An investment adviser.
C. A dealer.
D. A principal.

A

A. An agent.

A firm that brokers and charges a commission is acting as an agent.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
208
Q

An investor who is bullish on a stock establishes a:

A. Straddle.
B. Long position.
C. Short position.
D. Spread.

A

B. Long position.

A bullish investor establishes a long position in (buys) a stock. A bearish investor establishes a short position in (sells) a stock. Spreads and straddles may be bullish or bearish, depending on whether they are net debit or credit positions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
209
Q

A customer placed a market order. This means:

A. The order may not be executed because the customer has not specified a price.
B. The customer has specified a price, and the order will not be filled unless the market reaches that price.
C. The customer has stated the price he is willing to pay.
D. No price is set, and the order is to be filled at the best available market price.

A

D. No price is set, and the order is to be filled at the best available market price.

A market order has no specified price and is filled at the best available market price when executed.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
210
Q

Which of the following are concerns about dark pools of liquidity?

A. A large volume of shares trade
B. These are liquid trades.
C. These are trades by institutional investors.
D. These trades are neither reported nor visible to the public.

A

D. These trades are neither reported nor visible to the public.

Because of the lack of transparency with dark pool trades, they are considered unfair by some because the true volume and price of the security being traded is not displayed to the public.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
211
Q

When must a trade confirmation be sent to a customer?

A. T + 1
B. No later than the Reg T deadline
C. No later than settlement date
D. By the second day of the following week

A

C. No later than settlement date

The confirmation must be sent no later than completion of the trade or settlement date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
212
Q

The 5% markup applies to which of the following?

A. Nonexempt securities
B. New issues
C. Government securities
D. Mutual funds

A

A. Nonexempt securities

Nonexempt (corporate) securities in secondary trades are under the policy.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
213
Q

The highest price a buyer is willing to pay for a security is known as the:

A. Asked price.
B. Bid price.
C. Net asset value.
D. Offering price.

A

B. Bid price.

A customer selling a secondary market security will receive the bid price, which is the highest price a dealer is willing to pay.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
214
Q

Which of the following represents the order in which market orders are filled?

A. Precedence, priority and parity
B. First in first out (FIFO)
C. Last in first out (LIFO)
D. Priority, precedence and parity

A

D. Priority, precedence and parity

Priority (time), precedence (size) and parity (coin toss). Priority means orders that get there first get filled first. Precedence means the larger order will get filled first. If the orders are entered at the same time and the orders are the same size, the exchange will toss a coin; this is called parity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
215
Q

Which of the following statements is INCORRECT in regard to broker/dealers?

A. A principal is a dealer and sells securities from its own inventory.
B. A dealer makes a profit by charging a commission on the security transaction.
C. An agent is a broker and trades securities for a customer. As an agent, a firm does not own the security.
D. Securities firms may act in the capacity of both a principal and an agent and are referred to as broker/dealers.

A

B. A dealer makes a profit by charging a commission on the security transaction.

Dealers do not profit by charging a commission; they make their profit by charging markups on sales and markdowns on purchases.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
216
Q

Your client is interested in XYZ Company, a stock on Nasdaq; however, the client is not certain if it is better to buy the stock or sell it short. In a communication with a market maker in the security, you receive the following quotes: 500/54 bid – 200/54.17 ask. What does this series of quotes represent for your client?

A. Your client is given the opportunity to take both positions in the stock, selling at $54 and buying at $54.17.
B. Your client can take either position and buy or sell the full amount of shares provided in the quote.
C. Your client can buy up to 200 shares at $54.17 or sell up to 500 shares of the stock at $54 to the market maker.
D. Your client can sell short 200 shares through the broker @ $54.17 or buy 500 shares at $54.

A

C. Your client can buy up to 200 shares at $54.17 or sell up to 500 shares of the stock at $54 to the market maker.

First, an explanation of the quote provided: The market maker is willing to sell up to 200 shares at $54.17 or buy up to 500 shares at the price of $54. Those are the market maker’s positions; your client is on the other side of the trade. Your client is not obligated to buy or sell the full amount of shares. The quote is simply stating the market maker’s trade limits at that price. The market maker’s BID is what the client will receive if the client sells and the ASK is what the client will pay if the client buys.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
217
Q

An order is entered “buy XYZ 35 stop limit.” The tape shows 35.50; 36; 34.50; 35. The order was most likely executed at which price?

A. 34.50
B. 35
C. 35.50
D. 36

A

A. 34.50

A buy stop limit is placed above current market value. This order was triggered on 35.50, and executed at 34.50.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
218
Q

A customer places an order to buy 100 ABC @ 35 stop, but not for more than 36. This is a:

A. Buy stop limit order.
B. Buy market order.
C. Buy stop order.
D. Buy limit order.

A

A. Buy stop limit order.

This is a buy stop limit. The first price is the stop or trigger price, and the second is the price limit. Therefore, the order will be triggered at 35, and then become a live limit order to buy at 36 or better (less).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
219
Q

What type of order can a specialist keep on his books?

A. Limit
B. Market order
C. Market not public
D. Not held

A

A. Limit

A specialist can hold limits, stops, and stop limits away from the market, but not market orders (whether public or private). A “not held” is a market order.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
220
Q

A broker/dealer receives a confirmation from a trade that it does not recognize. Which of the following steps should be taken by the member firm?

A. Look for a customer who would be interested in purchasing the stock for a higher price
B. Send a DK notice to the contra broker
C. Complete the transaction and update the firm’s records
D. Block the sending member firm from trading with your firm in the future

A

B. Send a DK notice to the contra broker

DK stands for Don’t Know and is used when the member firm does not recognize the trade or when the terms of the transaction were not what the member firm agreed to.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
221
Q

Which of the following large block transactions appears on the exchange tape prior to execution on the exchange floor?

A. Special offer
B. Specialist’s block
C. Secondary distribution
D. Exchange distribution

A

A. Special offer

A “special offer” is an attempt to stabilize a declining stock. It appears prior to execution.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
222
Q

All the following receive copies of an order ticket, buy or sell, EXCEPT:

A. Operations department.
B. Margin department.
C. Purchase and sales.
D. Order or wire department.

A

A. Operations department.

The operations department is back office and issues, confirms, but does not receive order tickets, which are front office.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
223
Q

A customer that sells a security in the secondary market will receive the:

A. Net asset value.
B. Offering price.
C. Bid price.
D. Asked price.

A

C. Bid price.

The highest price a buyer will pay for a security is the bid price, which is the price the seller (customer) will receive.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
224
Q

Which of the following does NOT describe the OTC market?

A. A decentralized market
B. An auction market
C. A market where shares of the largest corporations are traded
D. A negotiated market

A

B. An auction market

The OTC is negotiated and competitive, involving dealers and traders processing orders and automatic quotes. Shares of the largest corporations trade OTC. The stock exchange, like the NYSE, is an auction market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
225
Q

XYZ 25.25 + .25; Bid 25; Ask 25.12. If an investor wishes to purchase 1,000 shares of XYZ, excluding commission or markup, what price would be paid per share?

A. 25.12
B. 25.25
C. +25
D. 25

A

A. 25.12

Customers buy at the offer and sell at the bid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
226
Q

Quotations provided by the National Quotation Service on the pink sheets are:

A. Published monthly.
B. Interdealer quotes.
C. For completed trades.
D. For corporate bonds.

A

B. Interdealer quotes.

“Pink Sheets” are compilations of all OTC common stocks with inter-dealer quotes (if available).

An interdealer quotation system (IQS) is a system for organizing the dissemination of price quotes and other securities information by broker and dealer firms. IQSs are intended to provide investors with timely and relevant information on which to base their investment decisions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
227
Q

Which of the following is NOT required on confirmations?

A. Broker/dealer capacity
B. Delivery and payment instructions
C. Complete security description
D. CUSIP

A

D. CUSIP

CUSIP is not required on the trade ticket or confirmation.

CUSIP refers to the Committee on Uniform Securities Identification Procedures which oversees the entire CUSIP system. The CUSIP number is a unique identification number assigned to all stocks and registered bonds in the United States and Canada, and it is used to create a concrete distinction between securities that are traded on public markets.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
228
Q

When a customer effects a proceeds transaction, the Five Percent Policy states:

A. The markup is computed as two separate trades.
B. The combined proceeds to the broker/dealer on the sale and purchase should not exceed the 5% guideline based on the inside ask on the buy side.
C. The markup that is charged must be 5% on both the sale and the purchase.
D. The markup or commission charged must bear a reasonable relationship to the prevailing interdealer quotations.

A

B. The combined proceeds to the broker/dealer on the sale and purchase should not exceed the 5% guideline based on the inside ask on the buy side.

A proceeds transaction is one in which the proceeds of a sale are used to make an immediate purchase. FINRA states that the fairness of the markup is based on the combined proceeds to the broker/dealer divided by the inside ask on the buy side, and the broker/dealer should NOT consider these as separate trades but as one combined trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
229
Q

A Third Market trade involves:

A. Listed stocks traded over the counter.
B. Listed or unlisted stocks traded between institutional investors without the services of a brokerage firm.
C. The trading of unlisted stocks between institutional investors.
D. The trading of NYSE stocks on regional exchanges.

A

A. Listed stocks traded over the counter.

When stocks that are listed on any exchange are traded away from that exchange in the OTC market, such trading is described as third market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
230
Q

Your client is long 100 shares of XYZ at $20. You enter a sell stop limit at 20. The tape indicates the following trades: 19, 19.75, 20.13, 20. At what price is the order executed?

A. 19.75
B. 20
C. 20.13
D. No execution

A

C. 20.13

Sell stop limits are placed below current market value. Therefore, XYZ must be currently trading above 20. The sell stop limit will be triggered when XYZ declines to or below 20. Therefore, at 19 the order is triggered and becomes a live limit order to sell at 20 or better; the first tic or trade at or above 20 is 20.13.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
231
Q

An investor purchases shares on one exchange and simultaneously sells those shares on another exchange. This is an example of:

A. Backing away.
B. Arbitrage.
C. Trading ahead.
D. Front running.

A

B. Arbitrage.

Arbitragers make their money by buying on one exchange and simultaneously selling on another exchange taking advantage of small price deviations. It’s important to remember that arbitragers need to move large blocks of securities in order for arbitrage to be profitable.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
232
Q

The return by the receiving party of securities previously accepted for delivery or a demand by the delivering party for return of securities that have been delivered is called:

A. Close-out.
B. Rejection.
C. Reclamation.
D. Re-delivery.

A

C. Reclamation.

Reclamation means literally “to reclaim or take back,” as the question describes. When a security is refused at settlement, it is known as a “rejection.”

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
233
Q

NASDAQ Market Makers are required to report each trade within how many seconds of execution?

A. 3
B. 10
C. 30
D. There is no reporting requirement for the market makers.

A

B. 10

While many regulations also state immediately, the required deadline is stated as 10 seconds. It is a reasonable time after the trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
234
Q

An investor is interested in selling her shares of ABS Corp., which trades over-the-counter. The best bid price is $3.15 from the market maker Donaldson. The best ask price is $3.30 from market maker Williamson Investments. The investor trades listed stocks on the NYSE through her broker/dealer, STAT Investments. She can sell her ABC Corp shares:

A. At the ask price of $3.30 by directly contacting Williamson Investments.
B. By contacting her broker/dealer STAT Investments; she will get the bid price of $3.15.
C. By contacting her broker/dealer STAT Investments; she will get the ask price of $3.30.
D. At the bid price of $3.15 by directly contacting Donaldson.

A

B. By contacting her broker/dealer STAT Investments; she will get the bid price of $3.15.

While it would be advantageous for the investor to contact Donaldson directly, this can only be done with LEVEL III Nasdaq access, which her broker/dealer has. So, she needs to contact her broker. She will get the $3.15 price less a commission charge. The investor has access to Level I Nasdaq, which shows the best pricing, but not the name and contact information.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
235
Q

When a stock is crossed on the NYSE floor and then appears on the tape after execution, the transaction is a:

A. Special offer.
B. Exchange distribution.
C. Specialist block.
D. Secondary offering.

A

B. Exchange distribution.

A “stock cross” is an exchange distribution, crossing a huge buy order with a sell order, the specialist acting as a broker’s broker. A “secondary” is a spin-off distribution with a prospectus filed with the SEC, the largest of the blocks. A “special order” is a stabilizing bid reported on the tape prior to execution to support a falling stock. The “specialist block” is done quietly in the Third Market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
236
Q

An order for a security trade that directs the broker to buy or sell “at the market” but only when a certain price level has been reached is known as:

A. A market order.
B. A limit order.
C. Selling short or “shorting.”
D. A stop order.

A

D. A stop order.

With a stop order, when the specified price level (trigger) is reached, it is triggered. Then it becomes a live market order, executed immediately at the next price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
237
Q

Which of the following orders are reduced by the specialist of the NYSE on the ex-dividend date of a listed stock? I. Open buy limits; II. Open sell stops; III. Open sell limits; IV. Open buy stop limits:

A. II and IV
B. III and IV
C. I and II
D. I and III

A

C. I and II

Only orders that are placed at or below current market price are adjusted: these include buy limits, sell stops, and sell stop limits. On the other hand, sell limits, buy stops and buy stop limits are placed ABOVE the current market value, and therefore are not adjusted.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
238
Q

A listed stock trading in the OTC market is referred to as the:

A. Fourth Market.
B. Third Market.
C. Instinet.
D. Composite.

A

B. Third Market.

A listed stock trading in the OTC market is referred to as the Third Market. These trades are reported to FINRA, and quotes can be found on the Consolidated Quote System (CQS).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
239
Q

A large corporation places an order to purchase a block of its own stock. The order is placed with a floor broker who enters the order with a specialist. The order is taken off the floor and filled. The block order is:

A. A special offer.
B. A secondary offering.
C. A specialist block.
D. An exchange acquisition.

A

C. A specialist block.

Only one specialist is involved; the order is booked and taken off the floor, hence the term “specialist block.”

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
240
Q

In the secondary market, which of the following can take a position?

A. Issuer
B. Trader or dealer
C. Underwriter
D. Agent

A

B. Trader or dealer

A trader can be a market-maker, a dealer, a firm acting as principal, or a taker of long or short positions, but not an agent or broker.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
241
Q

Which of the following statements are true regarding the over-the-counter market? I. The Federal Reserve Board regulates which OTC securities are marginable. II. FINRA regulates trading practices in the OTC market. III. The SEC does not have regulatory authority over OTC margin transactions. IV. The FRB governs trading practice on margin trades.

A. II and III
B. II and IV
C. I and II
D. I and III

A

C. I and II

The Fed regulates OTC margin, FINRA regulates OTC trading, and the SEC has an overview of FINRA, whether a trade was done for cash or on margin. The FRB does not regulate trade practices.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
242
Q

A client places an order to sell short 100 shares of XYZ at 35.50 stop limit. At which trade was the order elected? 36, 35.75, 35.13, 34.88, 35, 35.62

A. 34.88
B. 35.00
C. 35.13
D. 35.62

A

C. 35.13

Sell stop and sell stop limit orders are triggered (elected) when the stock price trades at or through (below) the trigger price, which is 35.50 in this example. This stop limit order then becomes a live limit order to sell at 35.50 or better. This order is triggered at 35.13. Then it becomes a live limit order to sell at 35.50 or better. Therefore, it would be executed at 35.62.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
243
Q

A customer places a buy limit order at $36.50. This means that the order:

A. Is held in the specialist’s book.
B. Can only be executed at $36.50.
C. Cannot be executed and is terminated.
D. Is executed at or above $36.50.

A

A. Is held in the specialist’s book.

The order is guaranteed to be executed at $36.50. Awaiting execution, the order is held in the specialist’s book.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
244
Q

Relative to a DMM “stopping stock” on the NYSE, it can be done if I. It is for a public order. II. Permission of a floor governor is granted. III. The designated market maker is guaranteeing a price. IV. It is bought for another member’s account.

A. II and IV
B. III and IV
C. I and II
D. I and III

A

D. I and III

The designated market maker (DMM) may guarantee a floor broker a price for one of the broker’s public orders, as long as, in the DMM’s judgment, it would not adversely affect the market in the stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
245
Q

In order to make sure that the trader received the best execution, the trader should seek the:

A. NBBO.
B. Last trade in the security.
C. Lowest bid.
D. Highest ask.

A

A. NBBO.

The NBBO, which stands for the National Best Bid and Offer, will be determined by looking at all the different markets where the security trades to determine the highest bid and the lowest ask price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
246
Q

Where do municipals trade?

A. On short
B. On the NYSE
C. On Munifacts
D. OTC

A

D. OTC

Municipal bonds trade in the OTC market, which is a negotiated market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
247
Q

Which of these statements is INCORRECT concerning broker/dealers?

A. A dealer sells securities from its own inventory.
B. A broker is an agent who purchases or sells securities for a customer and charges them a commission.
C. A dealer earns a profit by marking up the security above the ASK price.
D. A firm can act in both the capacity of a broker and a dealer when selling securities from its own inventory.

A

D. A firm can act in both the capacity of a broker and a dealer when selling securities from its own inventory.

Acting as broker and acting as dealer are mutually exclusive. In each trade, the firm acts as one or the other, but never both. When a firm acts as a broker, it is acting in an agent capacity and does not use its inventory account.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
248
Q

CQS transactions involve all the following, EXCEPT:

A. BSE listed.
B. NYSE listed.
C. CSE listed.
D. OTCBB.

A

D. OTCBB.

OTCBB consists of unlisted over-the-counter stocks. The OTCBB is not an exchange.

The Consolidated Quotation System (CQS) is the electronic service that provides quotation information for stock traded on the American Stock Exchange, New York Stock Exchange, and other regional stock exchanges in the United States and also includes issues traded by FINRA member firms in the third market.

BSE = Bombay Stock Exchange (India)
NYSE = New York Stock Exchange
CSE = Canada's New Stock Exchange
How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
249
Q

One of your customers enters a limit order good for one month. Your firm has entered the order as a GTC order. The responsibility for canceling the order, if not executed by the end of that month, is that of the:

A. Firm’s commission broker.
B. Firm.
C. Customer.
D. Specialist.

A

B. Firm.

When a member firm accepts an order of this type, it accepts ultimate responsibility for follow-through. The firm’s commission broker is commonly known as the “floor broker” and is on the floor of the exchange. The specialist has no responsibility in this case because the specialist doesn’t know that the order was only good until the end of the month.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
250
Q

A broker/dealer tells a customer that an order was not executed because of a stock order that was placed ahead. The order was probably a:

A. Short sale.
B. Margin order.
C. Limit order.
D. Market order.

A

C. Limit order.

When there are many limit orders entered at the same price, they are filled in the order in which they are entered, a time priority. It is possible that those orders entered last are not executed because the other orders (stock ahead) may not be executed before the stock price moves beyond the stipulated limit price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
251
Q

Concerning the reporting of last-sale price information for OTC stocks, which of the following is true?

A. Last-sale price information is available on NASDAQ National List OTC stocks.
B. No last-sale price information is available on any NASDAQ OTC stocks.
C. Last-sale price information is available on all NASDAQ and OTC stocks.
D. Last-sale price information is available on OTC transactions in the National Market System.

A

D. Last-sale price information is available on OTC transactions in the National Market System.

Last-sale information is available for OTC transactions in NASDAQ National Market System, not on NASDAQ small caps or emerging companies.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
252
Q

Which of the following orders are placed BELOW the current market value? I. Sell limits; II. Buy limits; III. Buy stops; IV. Sell stops:

A. II and III
B. II and IV
C. I and III
D. I and IV

A

B. II and IV

Buy limits, sell stops, and sell stop limits are placed below current market value. Sell limits, buy stops, and buy stop limits are placed above current market value.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
253
Q

A designated market maker (DMM) can act as all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Underwriter.
B. Agent.
C. Broker.
D. Principal.

A

A. Underwriter.

A broker is an agent. The DMM is also a principal but does not underwrite new issues.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
254
Q

An order reaches the floor, and the designated market maker says you are stopped at 38.50. This means:

A. You are guaranteed a price of 38.50 or less.
B. Your execution will be 38.50 or better.
C. You can’t trade until the stock hits 38.50.
D. You must enter a new order at 38.50.

A

B. Your execution will be 38.50 or better.

A DMM stopping the stock guarantees a price that is equal to or better (usually subject to only one attempt by a broker to get a better price).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
255
Q

Which of the following orders is NOT kept in the specialist’s book?

A. Stop
B. GTC
C. Limit
D. Not held

A

D. Not held

A “not held” order is held by the floor broker until the floor broker judges the best time to submit the order to the specialist. Market public orders are executed without delay unless specifically designated as “not held” (“hold for a better time or price”) or “not public” (“execute away from the trading pit”).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
256
Q

A broker receives a buy and a sell order on the same security from two customers. Which must he do to execute the orders?

A. Utilize another dealer to complete the trade
B. Fill both from inventory
C. Riskless and simultaneous principal
D. Agency cross

A

D. Agency cross

The broker would act as an agent (not principal) and cross both customers at one price (usually between bid and asked) with the commission due from each customer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
257
Q

A large corporation places an order to purchase a block of its own stock. The order is placed with a floor broker who enters the order with a specialist. The order is taken off the floor and filled. The announcement of the order is to:

A. Only the specialist.
B. All FINRA members.
C. All NYSE members.
D. All NYSE and FINRA members.

A

A. Only the specialist.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
258
Q

An order from the public is represented on the trading floor of the New York Stock Exchange by a:

A. Floor broker.
B. DMM.
C. Floor clerk.
D. Floor trader.

A

A. Floor broker.

A public order that is transmitted to the New York Stock Exchange Floor is represented on the floor by a floor broker who competes for execution of the order.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
259
Q

An investor purchases a 6% convertible corporate bond at 105. The conversion price on the bond is $25 and the bond is currently trading at $26.50. The bond has been called at 103. Which of the following situations would benefit the investor the most?

A. Sell the bond at 105.
B. Keep the bond and continue to receive interest.
C. Allow the bond to be called.
D. Convert the bond and sell the stock in the market.

A

D. Convert the bond and sell the stock in the market.

The investor should convert the bond and sell the stock in the open market. This is a form of convertible securities arbitrage. Both the conversion price and conversion ratio are based on the par value. Because we know the conversion price is $25, we simply take the par value of $1,000 divided by $25 and we get the ratio of 40:1. The bond is currently trading at $1,050. To come up with the parity of the common stock, take the $1,050 divided by 40 which would equal a parity price of $26.25. The stock is currently trading at $26.50 so therefore, if the investor purchased the bond and converted it at $26.25 and simultaneously sold in the market, it would make $0.25 per share or $1,060 per bond (which would be $26.50 times 40 equals $1,060).

If the investor allowed the bond to be called, they would only make $1,030 and if they sold it in the market, they’d only make $1,050. The investor would not be allowed to keep the bond and continue to receive interest after it’s been called.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
260
Q

A dealer has an average cost of 6.50 on the inventory position of an OTC stock the firm is trading. The NASDAQ Level 1 quote for the stock is 5 - 5.50. According to the FINRA conduct rules, what price would be used when figuring the mark-up to a prospective customer?

A. 5
B. 5.50
C. 6
D. 6.50

A

B. 5.50

Dealers must sell to customers at a price based upon current market value. Because the question identifies this transaction as a sale (the dealer is figuring MARK-UP), the mark-up will be based upon the best available ASK price, which is 5.50.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
261
Q

All of the following are true regarding Electronic Communications Networks (ECNs) EXCEPT:

A. ECNs cannot execute mutual fund trades.
B. They are used for Fourth Market trades.
C. They facilitate trades between institutions.
D. Transactions are executed without the broker.

A

A. ECNs cannot execute mutual fund trades.

Institutional investors, including mutual funds, use ECNs to execute trades on an agency cross basis.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
262
Q

A broker goes to a designated market maker (DMM) to sell 100 XYZ. The DMM stops the broker at 31. Which of the following is true?

A. The DMM has halted trading at 31.
B. The broker cannot obtain a price higher than 31.
C. The broker is assured of 31 or a better price.
D. The DMM has guaranteed the broker a price of 31.

A

D. The DMM has guaranteed the broker a price of 31.

The DMM stopping the stock is guaranteeing a price. The broker now has one chance of doing better. The DMM will only stop the order for public orders, not for institutional orders.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
263
Q

Which of the following is NOT considered by a NASDAQ dealer when determining the mark up or mark down to charge in a principal trade?

A. Availability of the security
B. Cost involved in trade execution
C. Cost of the security held in inventory
D. Dollar price of the security

A

C. Cost of the security held in inventory

The dealer’s cost cannot be considered since every trade must be based on current market price at the time of that trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
264
Q

Which of the following statements regarding limit orders is true?

A. A limit may never be executed.
B. A buy limit is placed above current market value.
C. A limit order may not be left with the specialist.
D. A limit is executed immediately.

A

A. A limit may never be executed.

Because a limit order is dependent on market movement in a certain direction, it may never be executed. Buy limits are placed below, and sell limits above, current market value. Market orders are executed immediately; limit orders are left with the specialist for possible future execution.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
265
Q

All of the following are correct about corporate bond trade reporting EXCEPT:

A. Sell side reports through TRACE within 10 seconds.
B. Buy side reports through TRACE within 15 minutes.
C. FINRA reports the trade immediately.
D. Sell side reports through TRACE within 15 minutes.

A

A. Sell side reports through TRACE within 10 seconds.

Corporate Bond transactions are reported through TRACE. Both the buy side and the sell side are required to report within 15 minutes of the transaction. Once the trade report is in from both the buy side and the sell side, FINRA is required to release the information to the public immediately.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
266
Q

An investor purchased a bond with a 3% coupon at $1,050. All of the following statements are correct EXCEPT:

A. The current yield is 2.86%.
B. The bond was purchased at a discount.
C. The bond was purchased at a premium.
D. The current yield is lower than the coupon rate.

A

B. The bond was purchased at a discount.

This is not a correct statement; the bond’s purchase price is higher than par, so it was purchased at a premium, not a discount.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
267
Q

Which of the following would be required to quote on a yield to call basis?

A. Nominal rate of 5% with a basis of 5.5%
B. Nominal rate of 5.5% quoted at 100
C. Nominal rate of 6% with a basis of 5.5%
D. Nominal yield of 5.25% with a basis of 5.5%

A

C. Nominal rate of 6% with a basis of 5.5%

The basis of 5.5 is lower than the stated or nominal rate of 6%, so therefore the bond is trading at a premium. If we follow the YMCA technique, this would indicate that the lowest rate is yield to call on a premium bond.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
268
Q

All of the following statements are true concerning revenue bonds EXCEPT:

A. They often have an indenture, which includes protective covenants.
B. A feasibility study will be used to determine the viability of the project.
C. They’re considered self-supporting.
D. They require voter approval.

A

D. They require voter approval.

Voter approval is only required for general obligation bonds because they are backed by the full faith and credit of the state or local taxing authorities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
269
Q

Ted and Carol opened a 529 plan for their granddaughter. For their initial contribution, they want to contribute the largest amount permitted without paying gift tax. The maximum contribution allowed without paying gift tax is:

A. $15,000.
B. $30,000.
C. $75,000.
D. $150,000.

A

D. $150,000.

Ted and Carol could make an accelerated gift of $150,000 ($75,000 each) without paying gift tax. They would not be able to make another contribution for 5 years.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
270
Q

What does it mean when a market maker has a quote that is out firm with the recall?

A. That they can recall the quote and change the price randomly during the outfirm period.
B. That it is a nominal quote and does not need to be honored.
C. That it locks in a price for a specified period of time and the period of time can be accelerated by the recall.
D. That is a workable indication that provides a range in which the bonds will sell.

A

C. That it locks in a price for a specified period of time and the period of time can be accelerated by the recall.

An outfirm quote with a 5-minute recall locks in a price at which the bonds can be purchased for a specific period of time. This way, the other firm is able to market those bonds without having to purchase them first and placing them in their inventory. The recall will accelerate the period of time in which the quote is out firm.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
271
Q

When comparing a convertible bond to a similar callable debenture, which of the following statements is true?

A. The similar bonds will have similar interest rates.
B. The callable debenture will be sold on a yield-to-call basis.
C. The convertible bond will have a lower stated interest rate.
D. The callable debenture will have a lower stated interest rate.

A

C. The convertible bond will have a lower stated interest rate.

Because the convertible feature is attractive to investors, they will accept a lower yield than on comparable bonds without this feature. Because callable bonds carry more risk, investors demand a higher yield than similar noncallable bonds. Because bonds are always sold on a “yield-to-worst” basis, a premium-priced callable bond would be sold on a yield-to-call basis. However, a discount-priced callable bond is sold on a yield-to-maturity, never a yield-to-call basis.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
272
Q

Which of the following municipal bonds would not be tax exempt?

A. New Orleans Convention Center bonds
B. Cedar Rapids Sewer and Water bonds
C. Tampa Bay Control bonds
D. Charlotte Transportation bonds

A

A. New Orleans Convention Center bonds

Convention center bonds are not designated for a public purpose; therefore, they are not tax exempt.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
273
Q

Which of the following have an active secondary market?

A. Eurodollar CDs
B. Federal funds
C. Commercial paper
D. Repurchase agreements

A

A. Eurodollar CDs

There is no secondary market for fed funds. There is not much of a secondary market for commercial paper or repurchase agreements, but there’s an active secondary market in Eurodollar CDs, especially in New York and London.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
274
Q

Your broker/dealer is a member of the underwriting syndicate and re-offers 100,000 M of bank-qualified municipal debt at 99.75 net. There’s a .75 point selling concession, .25 point re-allowance, and 1 point additional takedown. What’s the member’s profit?

A. $750,000
B. $2 million
C. $1 million
D. $1.75 million

A

D. $1.75 million

The takedown or member’s profit is selling concession (including re-allowance) plus additional takedown. The total takedown is 1.75 points or percent of $100 million or $1.75 million (times the member’s bracket). “99.75 net” simply indicates a dealer/syndicate re-offering or no commission charged.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
275
Q

Which of the following is not a characteristic of money market instruments?

A. They are investment grade.
B. They freely trade.
C. They are equity positions.
D. They have maximum maturities of 1 year.

A

C. They are equity positions.

All money market instruments are debt, not equity securities. All money market securities share three characteristics: They are short-term, safe, and liquid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
276
Q

Long-term unsecured corporate debt offerings are defined as:

A. Commercial paper.
B. Preferred stock.
C. Debentures.
D. Bills.

A

C. Debentures.

Debentures are unsecured corporate debt offerings, or nonsecured bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
277
Q

Which of the following trade with accrued interest?

A. Certificates of deposit
B. Banker’s acceptances
C. Zero coupon Treasury obligations
D. Treasury bills

A

A. Certificates of deposit

Only negotiable CDs pay interest. The rest of these instruments just pay par at maturity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
278
Q

Which of the following corporate bonds is considered safest for an investor?

A. A-rated unsecured bond
B. A-rated secured bond
C. AAA-rated unsecured bond
D. BB-rated unsecured bond

A

C. AAA-rated unsecured bond

The rating takes into account all information about the bond. Even though this bond is unsecured, it is considered safer than bonds that are fully secured from other issuers.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
279
Q

A municipal “workable indication” is the same as a:

A. Likely bid.
B. Firm bid and offer.
C. Firm bid.
D. Likely ask.

A

A. Likely bid.

A workable quote is a likely bid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
280
Q

What is the backing for a secured bond?

A. Guarantee from the issuer’s bank
B. Full faith and credit of the issuer
C. Assets held in an escrow account
D. Guarantee from the issuer’s parent company

A

C. Assets held in an escrow account

Every bond is backed by the full faith and credit of the issuer, which is simply the issuer’s promise to repay. In addition, a secured bond is also backed by assets held for the bondholders.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
281
Q

Which of the following is related to the additional bonds test in the bond indenture?

A. Dilution of tax revenue
B. Limitation on future bond issues
C. Junior lien
D. Subordinated debenture

A

B. Limitation on future bond issues

The additional bonds test is a requirement of a secured bond issue having an open end indenture. If the corporation issues additional bonds, both the original and the new bondholders have equal claim to the collateral. To protect the original bondholders, the number of bonds issued using the same collateral is limited. This total number of permissible bonds is calculated using the additional bonds test. This test is used for net lien municipal revenue bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
282
Q

A Treasury bond with a 10 1/4% coupon due on July 1, has interest payment dates of Jan. 1 and July 1. It is traded for settlement on Feb. 24. What is the number of days of accrued interest?

A. 54
B. 55
C. 56
D. 57

A

A. 54

Governments notes and bonds use “actual over actual” (days in month over days in the year) and settle next day. 31 days in January plus 23 in February = 54 days. The settlement date does not count.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
283
Q

A municipality has issued a double-barreled revenue bond where the net revenues generated by the facility have proven to be insufficient to service the debt. Which of the following income sources may be used by the municipality to satisfy the obligation? I. Ad valorem tax collections; II. Fines; III. Assessments of additional taxes; IV. Collected back-due ad valorem taxes

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and IV
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

D. I, II, III, and IV

“Double-barreled” means general obligation, and GO Bonds can be backed by all of the taxes mentioned in addition to fines.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
284
Q

A bond whose fixed nominal rate increases to a higher fixed rate in its latter years is called a(n):

A. VRN
B. CMO
C. ETN
D. Step coupon bond

A

D. Step coupon bond

An ETN’s accreted interest is based on an underlying index, and is only paid at maturity. VRNs have a fluctuating rate; not a one-time increasing rate. CMOs are not structured as step-ups.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
285
Q

A municipal dealer has bonds out firm to another dealer. Which is true? I. The bonds are tied up for a specified period of time. II. The dealer is locked into a quote. III. This is a type of AON. IV. The price can be re-negotiated.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and II

An “out firm” is a bid price guaranteed to a dealer by another dealer for a period of time.

All or none (AON) is a directive used on a buy or sell order that instructs the broker to fill the order completely or not at all.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
286
Q

An asset-backed security is backed by:

A. Short-term loans on credit cards or automobiles.
B. Equipment owned and operated by the issuer.
C. Securities of a different issuer.
D. Real estate mortgage pools.

A

A. Short-term loans on credit cards or automobiles.

Asset-backed securities are backed by short-term loans on assets other than real estate, such as autos or credit cards.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
287
Q

On a discount bond, which of the following correctly states highest to lowest yield?

A. Nominal yield, current yield, yield to maturity
B. Yield-to-maturity, current yield, nominal yield
C. Nominal yield, yield to maturity, current yield
D. Current yield, nominal yield, yield to maturity

A

B. Yield-to-maturity, current yield, nominal yield

On a discount bond, the highest yield is the yield-to-maturity, followed by the current yield. The nominal yield, or coupon rate, is the lowest yield.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
288
Q

Which of the following bonds is affected by the price of the common stock?

A. Guaranteed bond
B. Convertible bond
C. Surety bond
D. Income bond

A

B. Convertible bond

Because it converts into the common stock, the convertible bond’s price is affected by the price of the common stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
289
Q

Which of the following statements regarding Eurodollar bonds is false?

A. The issuer of Eurobonds may be domestic or foreign.
B. Payment of interest and principal may be made in U.S. dollars or designated foreign currencies, at the option of the issuer.
C. Payment of interest and principal may be made only in U.S. dollar-denominated deposits.
D. The bonds are issued outside the United States.

A

B. Payment of interest and principal may be made in U.S. dollars or designated foreign currencies, at the option of the issuer.

Payment is made only in U.S. dollars, not foreign currencies.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
290
Q

A bond with a C rating is considered:

A. To have financial risk.
B. To have high credit risk.
C. To be lowest of investment grade.
D. Medium grade.

A

B. To have high credit risk.

A C rating is the lowest speculative rating before a bond has defaulted.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
291
Q

What is the most common type of corporate bond issued?

A. Secured.
B. Unsecured.
C. Open-end.
D. Closed-end.

A

B. Unsecured.

Debentures (the most common type of bond issued) are issues that are not secured by a pledged asset, but secured only by the good faith of the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
292
Q

Which of the following issues equipment trust certificates?

A. A regional airline
B. A company that builds boats
C. A company that leases planes
D. An airline manufacturer that manufactures jet engines

A

A. A regional airline

An equipment trust certificate is issued by the owner/operator of the equipment, not the manufacturer. The correct answer is the regional airline, which actually flies the planes and will use the airplanes as collateral for the equipment trust certificate.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
293
Q

An investment with a stated interest rate that matures in 2 to 10 years is a:

A. Treasury stock.
B. Treasury strip.
C. Treasury note.
D. Treasury bond.

A

C. Treasury note.

T-Notes mature in 2 to 10 years and pay a stated rate of interest.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
294
Q

The least-active secondary market exists in:

A. Banker’s acceptances.
B. Commercial paper.
C. T-bills.
D. CDs.

A

B. Commercial paper.

This is just a fact you need to know.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
295
Q

All of the following are agency issues backed by government-guaranteed or insured mortgages, EXCEPT:

A. Federal Home Loan.
B. SLMA.
C. FNMA.
D. GNMA.

A

B. SLMA.

Sallie Mae is Student Loan Marketing Association (SLMA) and does not deal in mortgages. The rest do.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
296
Q

Which of the following is not AAA-rated?

A. STRIPs
B. LYONS
C. TIGRS
D. CATS

A

A. STRIPs

STRIPs are issued by the U.S. Treasury and are full faith and credit of the U.S. government. The others are different treasury receipts, which are broker/dealer products and are AAA-rated.

Liquid yield option notes (LYONs), introduced by Merrill Lynch in 1985, are a form of zero-coupon convertible bonds with a predetermined conversion feature that allows either the holder or issuer to convert them to a fixed number of shares of common stock.

Treasury Investment Growth Receipts (TIGRs), issued from 1982 until 1986, were zero-coupon bonds based on U.S. Treasury bonds held by Merrill Lynch.

Certificates of Accrual on Treasury Securities (CATS) were a type of bond invented by the bank Salomon Brothers. Issued by private banks from 1982 – 1986, these bonds were backed by the U.S. Treasury through the creation of special purpose entities (SPV/SPEs).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
297
Q

Commercial paper I. Can be issued to the public. II. Is generally issued at a discount. III. Can be traded. IV. Has maturity of more than 270 days.

A. I and II
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

Commercial paper is issued to dealers only and matures in less than 270 days. It also trades and, if issued by nonfinancial corporations, is sold at discount.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
298
Q

Funded debt of a corporation can include:

A. Common stock with warrants.
B. Preferred stock.
C. Short-term bank loans.
D. Long-term loans.

A

D. Long-term loans.

“Funded debt” refers to long-term debt or bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
299
Q

What is the security for senior subordinated debentures?

A. General assets
B. Real estate
C. Mortgages
D. Equipment

A

A. General assets

A debenture is full faith + credit or general, NOT particular assets.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
300
Q

Which of the following securities has the lowest credit risk?

A. COAGRS
B. TIPS
C. LYONs
D. PANTHERS

A

B. TIPS

TIPS, or Treasury Inflation Protected Securities, are issued and backed by the U.S. Treasury. The other debt instruments are proprietary names of various treasury receipts, which are issued and backed by broker/dealers.

A Certificate of Government Receipts (COUGR) is a U.S. Treasury bond that was marketed by A.G. Becker Paribas stripped of its coupon payments. COUGRs only pay an investor their face value at maturity.

Liquid yield option notes (LYONs), introduced by Merrill Lynch in 1985, are a form of zero-coupon convertible bonds with a predetermined conversion feature that allows either the holder or issuer to convert them to a fixed number of shares of common stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
301
Q

If a 10-year bond has a coupon or interest rate of 8%, how much interest does the bond pay?

A. $80 twice a year
B. $40 twice a year
C. $80 once a year
D. $40 once a year

A

B. $40 twice a year

An 8% bond pays $80 each year (1,000 x 8%). Bonds pay interest semi-annually, so the bond pays $40 twice a year.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
302
Q

In a government yield auction of U.S. Treasury bills, which of the following orders will always be filled?

A. Commercial lenders
B. The FOMC account
C. Primary market makers
D. Noncompetitive bid

A

D. Noncompetitive bid

Non-competitive bids, which are submitted to the Federal Reserve prior to a government yield auction of U.S. Treasury bills, are certain to be filled because T-bills in the amount of the order have been set aside for the non-competitive bidder prior to the auction market. The noncompetitive bidder is guaranteed to receive the designated amount of T-bills at the average yield (the average price) of the actual auction market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
303
Q

New issue municipal “group” orders are submitted:

A. For a particular syndicate member to be retailed to its clients.
B. For the benefit of the syndicate account as a whole in proportion to each member’s bracket.
C. By municipal specialists or broker’s brokers for their institutional clients.
D. By a joint account which is in the process of underwriting those securities.

A

B. For the benefit of the syndicate account as a whole in proportion to each member’s bracket.

Group net orders are for the benefit of the syndicate as a whole and normally have highest priority, unless the manager allows presale.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
304
Q

Systematically increasing cost basis on an OID is called:

A. Accretion.
B. Depletion.
C. Appreciation.
D. Amortization.

A

A. Accretion.

Bond premiums are amortized down to par. Bond discounts are accreted up to par.

The original issue discount (OID) is the difference between the original face value amount and the discounted price paid for a bond. OID bonds have the potential for gains since investors can buy the bonds for a lower price than their face value.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
305
Q

A step coupon bond: I. Has a nominal rate which increases at a specified point during its life. II. Has a nominal rate which fluctuates based on an underlying index. III. Pays periodic interest. IV. Accretes interest and pays at maturity.

A. III and IV
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

A step coupon, or step-up bond, has a fixed coupon rate which increases to another fixed rate at a specified year during its life. Step-ups pay periodic interest; they are not OIDs.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
306
Q

Municipalities typically issue short-term notes for:

A. Permanent financing.
B. Long-term financing.
C. Project financing.
D. Interim financing.

A

D. Interim financing.

Municipalities use short-term municipal notes to provide interim financing in anticipation of receiving money from taxes, revenues collected from a municipal facility, or new bonds being issued.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
307
Q

Interest income from U.S. government bonds is:

A. Subject to federal income tax but exempt from state income tax.
B. Subject to federal and state income tax.
C. Exempt from federal and state income tax.
D. Subject to state income tax but exempt from federal income tax.

A

A. Subject to federal income tax but exempt from state income tax.

U.S. government bonds are taxable by their issuing entity, the federal government, but exempt from state taxation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
308
Q

A bond that sells above par is known as a premium bond. Which of the following statements are true?

A. Current yield is the lowest.
B. All yields are the same.
C. Yield-to-maturity is higher than current yield.
D. Nominal yield is the highest yield.

A

D. Nominal yield is the highest yield.

The nominal yield will always be the highest yield on a premium bond. The nominal yield is the same as the coupon rate.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
309
Q

On a discount bond, which of the following lists is correct from lowest to highest yield?

A. Nominal yield, current yield, yield-to-maturity
B. Yield-to-maturity, current yield, nominal yield
C. Nominal yield, yield-to-maturity, current yield
D. Current yield, nominal yield, yield-to-maturity

A

A. Nominal yield, current yield, yield-to-maturity

On a discount bond, the lowest yield is nominal yield, followed by current yield, then yield-to-maturity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
310
Q

All of the following are agency issues backed by government-guaranteed or insured mortgages EXCEPT:

A. Federal Home Loan.
B. SLMA.
C. FNMA.
D. GNMA.

A

B. SLMA.

SLMA, or Sallie Mae, is the Student Loan Marketing Association (SLMA) and does not deal in mortgages. The rest do.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
311
Q

Which of the following are true of negotiable certificates of deposit? I. The issuing bank guarantees the instrument. II. Certificates of deposit are callable. III. Minimum denominations are $1,000. IV. They can be traded in the secondary market.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

B. I and IV

Denominations of a negotiated CD are $100,000 minimum, and they are too short-term to be callable.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
312
Q

Which of the following can issue Eurodollar bonds? I. Sovereign governments; II. State and local governments; III. U.S. corporations; IV. Foreign corporations

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. III and IV
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

All of these entities can issue Eurodollar bonds. The U.S. government, however, cannot.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
313
Q

An example of a non-marketable type of Treasury issue is a:

A. T-Bond.
B. Series EE bond.
C. T-Bill.
D. T-Note.

A

B. Series EE bond.

A Series EE savings bond is a non-marketable savings bond issued by the Treasury. It is not traded in the secondary market and must be redeemed by the issuer. T-bills, T-notes, and T-bonds are all marketable securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
314
Q

Which of the following statements regarding overnight repurchase agreements is incorrect?

A. The seller loses control of securities.
B. There is no liquidity risk.
C. There is no interest rate risk.
D. Interest rates most closely follow the fed funds rate.

A

C. There is no interest rate risk.

An overnight repo is still debt, and all debt has interest rate risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
315
Q

The investment risk that impacts buying power and results in devaluation of fixed income securities is called:

A. Market risk.
B. Financial risk.
C. Commerce risk.
D. Inflation risk.

A

D. Inflation risk.

Inflation risk is also known as “purchasing power risk.” As inflation erodes money’s purchasing power, the value of a bond’s fixed interest payments will decline, reducing the market value of the bond. All fixed income securities are subject to inflation risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
316
Q

Funds are escrowed to retire a bond on its next call date. This bond is I. Prerefunded. II. Extinguished. III. Defeased. IV. Defunded.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

A new bond has been issued and the resulting funds have been escrowed for calling a prerefunded bond on its next call date. This bond is said to be defeased and will trade on a YTC basis.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
317
Q

Which of the following have the highest monthly payment guaranteed by the government?

A. T-note
B. GO
C. T-bond
D. GNMA

A

D. GNMA

T-bonds and notes pay semiannually, as does a General Obligation municipal bond. GNMA is a monthly pass-through of interest and principal with payment that is government-guaranteed.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
318
Q

One method that the Securities and Exchange Commission has incorporated into the yield reporting standards that provides for greater clarity of income results is called:

A. Current yield analysis.
B. Annual yield standardization.
C. Current month yield adjustment.
D. Standardized yield reporting.

A

D. Standardized yield reporting.

Standardized yield (SEC yield) is the measure of the current net market yields on a mutual fund’s investment portfolio. It is based on the net investment income for the 30-day period ending on the last day of the previous month divided by the highest offering price on that last day. It helps make it easier for investors to compare fund performance.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
319
Q

A U.S. government bond quoted at 94.20 - 95.08 has a bid price of:

A. $942.00.
B. $946.25.
C. $952.50.
D. $958.00.

A

B. $946.25.

Bonds are quoted at $1,000 par in 32nds, with each point worth $10. The bid price (the first price listed) would be $940 + (20/32 X $10), which converts to $940 + $6.25 for a price of $946.25.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
320
Q

The key difference between a T-Note and a T-Bond is:

A. T-Notes are always sold at a discount and redeemed for the face amount.
B. T-Notes are issued with maturities of less than 10 years.
C. T-Notes are only sold for amounts less than $1,000.
D. T-Notes are issued with maturities of 10 years or more.

A

B. T-Notes are issued with maturities of less than 10 years.

The only difference between a T-note and a T-bond is the length of the maturity of the original issue. T-Notes have maturities ranging from 2 to 10 years while T-Bonds have maturities of 30 years. Both have a starting denomination of $1,000 and can be purchased at a discount or a premium depending on the interest rate environment in the market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
321
Q

How are Eurodollars denominated?

A. In euro
B. By the European government
C. In American dollars
D. By both American and European companies

A

C. In American dollars

Eurodollar securities, whether notes, bonds, or CDs, are based on U.S. dollars in foreign repositories, mostly European.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
322
Q

Alicia purchased a 10-year Treasury bond from the Federal Reserve Bank last year to secure her daughter’s college funds. Which of the following is NOT true regarding this type of security?

A. Alicia has physical possession of the bond itself, so she can sell it to anybody for any price.
B. The bond has a set maturity date.
C. This type of bond is considered a marketable security.
D. The bond is considered a form of “lending” money to the government.

A

A. Alicia has physical possession of the bond itself, so she can sell it to anybody for any price.

Since 1986, all securities issued by the Treasury Department have been book-entry, meaning they exist only as electronic records in computers.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
323
Q

Which of the following is NOT a secured bond?

A. Mortgage bond
B. Equipment trust certificate
C. Guaranteed bond
D. Collateral trust certificate

A

C. Guaranteed bond

A guaranteed bond is a debenture (unsecured). It is backed not only by the issuer’s promise, but by an additional promise, usually from a parent or affiliate.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
324
Q

Which of the following statements about series bonds is TRUE?

A. They are considered to be very risky.
B. They are volatile.
C. They may only be redeemed by the Treasury.
D. They trade in the secondary market.

A

C. They may only be redeemed by the Treasury.

Series bonds are savings bonds that offer stability and low risk. Series bonds are issued by the Treasury and may only be redeemed by the Treasury. They do not trade in the secondary market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
325
Q

A corporation issues bonds which will mature over several years. These bonds are known as:

A. Serial bonds.
B. Term bonds.
C. Successive bonds.
D. Ladder bonds.

A

A. Serial bonds.

Serial bonds are issued together but mature in increments over a series of years. Term bonds are issued together and all mature at the same time. A laddered portfolio of bonds is a portfolio of various bonds from different issuers that mature at intervals to match an investor’s cash flow needs.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
326
Q

An 8.5% CMO yielding 9.55% does NOT have which of the following risks?

A. Extended maturity
B. Resale
C. Loss of principal
D. Refinance

A

D. Refinance

Refinance risk is a threat only when bonds are trading at a premium. CMO refinancing risk occurs when rates are falling. Extended maturity, resale, and loss of principal occur when rates are rising.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
327
Q

Which of the following Treasuries trades in the secondary market?

A. II bonds
B. HH savings bonds
C. T bills
D. EE bonds

A

C. T bills

EE, HH, and II savings bonds do NOT trade in the secondary market. They must be redeemed by the U.S. Treasury.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
328
Q

The primary responsibility for the payment of principal and interest on an industrial revenue bond issue rests with the:

A. Bond counsel.
B. Issuer.
C. Trustee.
D. Corporate lessee.

A

D. Corporate lessee.

The corporate lessee pays debt service on a facility lease from the municipality.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
329
Q

The main difference between the 30-day visible supply and the placement ratio is:

A. The 30-day visible supply looks forward and the placement ratio records historical information.
B. The placement ratio considers only revenue bonds.
C. The 30-day visible considers only GO bonds.
D. The placement ratio considers the time value of money.

A

A. The 30-day visible supply looks forward and the placement ratio records historical information.

The 30-day visible supply reports the total number of municipal bonds coming to market in the next month. The placement ratio reports the number of bonds sold compared to total bonds offered for the previous week.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
330
Q

When comparing long-term bonds to short-term bonds, which of the following statements is incorrect?

A. Long-term bonds are usually more liquid than short-term bonds.
B. Long-term bonds usually have higher yields than short-term bonds.
C. Long-term bonds tend to be more callable than short-term bonds.
D. Long-term bond market prices react to a change in interest rates with a greater price change than short-term bonds.

A

A. Long-term bonds are usually more liquid than short-term bonds.

In a positive yield curve, which is normal, long-term bonds have higher yields than short-term bonds. Generally speaking, issuers attach call provisions to long-term bonds more frequently than short-term bonds. When interest rates fluctuate, long-term bonds experience a greater price change than short-term bonds. But short-term bonds are generally considered to be more liquid than long-term maturities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
331
Q

To determine the current yield of a bond,

A. Multiply the current market value by the nominal yield.
B. Multiply the par value by the nominal yield.
C. Divide the annualized dollar yield by the face value.
D. Divide the annualized dollar yield by the current market value.

A

D. Divide the annualized dollar yield by the current market value.

The current yield is the annualized dollar yield (also called interest rate or coupon rate) expressed as a percentage of the current market value of the bond.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
332
Q

If the last transaction in a bond is XYZ 4.50s 2025 at 98, it is selling at:

A. Asset value.
B. A premium.
C. A discount.
D. Par.

A

C. A discount.

This bond is selling at a discount or less than par ($1,000). Multiply the quoted price of 98 by 10 to calculate the price ($980).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
333
Q

Which of the following is the most secure?

A. Moral Obligation
B. IDR
C. TAN
D. GO

A

C. TAN

A TAN (Tax Anticipation Note) is GO, anticipates property tax proceeds, and is short-term. It is the safest of the Muni notes.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
334
Q

Mortgage-backed issues are considered to be safe instruments. Which statement is INCORRECT concerning these securities?

A. GNMA, FNMA, and FHLMC are all fully backed by the federal government.
B. Interest received is subject to federal, state and local taxation.
C. GNMA (Ginnie Mae) is a government-owned corporation.
D. GNMA, FNMA (Fannie Mae), and FHLMC (Freddie Mac) will all hold FHA and VA loans in their portfolios.

A

A. GNMA, FNMA, and FHLMC are all fully backed by the federal government.

Only GNMA is fully backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S government guaranteed agency. FNMA and FHLMC are government-sponsored enterprises that may borrow from the Treasury.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
335
Q

An investor has some bonds that are callable. She is wondering what the yield on her bonds will be if they are in fact called by the issuer. Which of the following is true regarding this investor’s bonds?

A. She would not be affected by the call unless she opts to redeem the bonds at the current market value.
B. The investor would receive the face value of the bond once it is called.
C. She would receive all future interest in one lump sum when the bond is called.
D. The investor would have a yield on the bond based on the call premium at the time that the bond is called.

A

D. The investor would have a yield on the bond based on the call premium at the time that the bond is called.

The yield that this investor would realize in the event that the bond was redeemed by the issuer on the next available call date would be the yield-to-call. This yield would be based on the call premium paid by the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
336
Q

Which of the following statements is true when a bond is trading at a premium?

A. All yields are the same.
B. Yield-to-maturity is higher than current yield.
C. Nominal yield is the highest yield.
D. Current yield is the lowest.

A

C. Nominal yield is the highest yield.

The nominal yield will always be the highest yield on a premium bond. The nominal yield is the same as the coupon rate.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
337
Q

Treasury notes have stated (fixed) interest payments that are paid:

A. Monthly.
B. Quarterly.
C. Semiannually.
D. Annually.

A

C. Semiannually.

Treasury notes pay interest semiannually.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
338
Q

Which bond would be the safest credit risk?

A. Guaranteed bond
B. Step coupon bond
C. Convertible bond
D. Income bond

A

A. Guaranteed bond

Unlike the other debentures, a guaranteed bond is backed by not just one, but two promises.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
339
Q

The risk of not being able to sell a security in a timely manner is:

A. Marketability risk.
B. Business/credit risk.
C. Purchasing power risk.
D. Reinvestment risk.

A

A. Marketability risk.

Marketability risk is the risk of not being able to sell the investment in a timely manner.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
340
Q

Which of the following is a U.S. government agency backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S government?

A. SLMC
B. FHLMC
C. FNMA
D. GNMA

A

D. GNMA

Government National Mortgage Association (also known as Ginnie Mae, or GNMA) is the only U.S. government agency fully backed by the U.S. Government. The others are quasi-governmental agencies that have an implied backing in the form of a line of credit from the U.S. Treasury, but not full backing.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
341
Q

A portfolio manager purchases a bond on a yield-to-call basis. This bond is trading at:

A. A premium
B. A series
C. A discount
D. Par

A

A. A premium

Bonds are always quoted on a “yield-to-worst” basis. This means that discount bonds are sold on a yield-to-maturity basis and premium bonds are sold on a yield-to-call basis. When a bond is issued at par, all yields are the same.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
342
Q

General obligation bonds issued by states are not secured by what form of taxes?

A. Gasoline taxes
B. Property taxes
C. Sales taxes
D. Income taxes

A

B. Property taxes

Only local subdivisions, such as cities and counties, levy property taxes. Thus, GO bonds issued by the state will not be secured by property taxes.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
343
Q

Which of the following have currency risk? I. American Depository Receipts; II. Eurobonds; III. Income bonds; IV. Treasury Receipts

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

ADRs facilitate domestic investment in foreign securities. Because the dividends and principal are denominated in a currency of the foreign issuer, ADRs have currency risk, even though the custodial bank performs all currency exchange services.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
344
Q

Which of the following is an example of an unsecured corporate bond?

A. Mortgage bond
B. Debenture
C. Equipment trust certificate
D. Collateral trust bond

A

B. Debenture

A debenture is a bond secured only by the full faith and credit of the corporation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
345
Q

When comparing two similar bonds,

A. The secured bond’s yield will be comparable to the unsecured bond yield.
B. The income bond’s yield will be lower than the secured bond’s yield.
C. The secured bond’s yield will be higher than the unsecured bond yield.
D. The unsecured bond’s yield will be higher than the secured bond.

A

D. The unsecured bond’s yield will be higher than the secured bond.

Because the debenture is riskier than the secured bond, investors will demand a higher yield. Income (adjustment) bonds are very risky and therefore trade at a significant discount, resulting in a higher potential yield than a secured bond.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
346
Q

Rising prices over time will erode the value of a dollar. This is known as:

A. Purchasing power risk.
B. Market risk.
C. Business risk.
D. Timing risk.

A

A. Purchasing power risk.

Sustained inflation will erode the value of a dollar causing a decline in the purchasing power of future dollars.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
347
Q

An investor who wants to purchase mortgage-backed securities fully guaranteed by the U.S. government should purchase:

A. Federal National Mortgage Association (Fannie Mae).
B. Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (Freddie Mac).
C. Government National Mortgage Associations (Ginnie Maes).
D. Collateralized Mortgage Obligations (CMOs).

A

C. Government National Mortgage Associations (Ginnie Maes).

Of these issues, Ginnie Maes are the only ones with both principal and interest payments fully guaranteed by the U.S. government.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
348
Q

Which of the following best illustrates “marketability risk?”

A. A security has “gone out of style” and is no longer attractive in the market.
B. A security has been promoted through false advertising.
C. An advertiser creates a TV commercial that ultimately deters viewers from buying the product.
D. A person selling a security at an inappropriate time sustains a loss.

A

D. A person selling a security at an inappropriate time sustains a loss.

Marketability or redeemability risk is the risk of selling or redeeming a security at an inappropriate time, thus sustaining a loss or mitigating a profit.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
349
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of TIPS? I. Fluctuating interest rate; II. Fixed interest rate; III. Fluctuating principal; IV. Fixed principal

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

TIPS have a CPI-adjusted, fluctuating principal and a fixed interest rate. Because this fixed rate is applied to a fluctuating principal each semiannual interest period, the interest payment fluctuates.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
350
Q

Assuming a face value of $1,000, a 10% bond quoted at 820 has a current yield of:

A. 8.6%.
B. 10%.
C. 12.2%.
D. 14.5%.

A

C. 12.2%.

The nominal yield is 10%; the face value of the bond is $1,000. The annual interest is $100 (10% of $1,000). Therefore, the current yield is $100 / $820 = 12.2%.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
351
Q

In the analysis of a general obligation bond, an increase in which of the following is NOT considered a negative event?

A. Assessed valuation of property
B. Expenses of the municipality
C. Delinquent taxes
D. Tax rates

A

A. Assessed valuation of property

An increase in assessed valuation indicates that the value of local property is rising which will result in higher tax collections.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
352
Q

An investor buys a 4% 10-year municipal bond at 96. Six years later, the investor sells at 99. What is the investor’s gain or loss?

A. $100 loss
B. No gain or loss
C. $30 gain
D. $6 gain

A

C. $30 gain

Only municipal OIDs are accreted. The discount on a conventional interest paying municipal bond purchased in the secondary market is not accreted.

99 points x $10/point = $990
96 points x $10/point = $960
$990 (sold) - $960 (bought) = $30

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
353
Q

Which of the following is NOT required to meet the educational requirements for selling a CMO to a retail client?

A. Discussion stating the fact that two CMOs with the same collateral backing may be retired on different dates
B. Suitability requirements for buying CMOs
C. Glossary
D. Discussion of characteristics and risks involved

A

B. Suitability requirements for buying CMOs

Brokers who sell CMOs to retail clients are required to offer educational materials to retail buyers, which must a glossary, a discussion of the characteristics and risks involved, and a discussion stating that two CMOs with the same collateral backing may be retired on different dates. Although a broker must always consider suitability when recommending an investment to a client, this is not an educational materials requirement for selling a CMO. However, the required discussion about the characteristics and risks associated with CMOs will serve to educate the investor about this type of security.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
354
Q
Which has the best rating?
A. A-3 10 years to maturity
B. A-2 15 years to maturity
C. A-1 20 years to maturity
D. Aaa 5 years to maturity
A

D. Aaa 5 years to maturity

Moody’s Aaa or S&P’s AAA is top investment grade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
355
Q

Which of these issues one type of security only that pays monthly interest?

A. T-Bond
B. T-Note
C. Fannie Mae
D. Ginnie Mae

A

D. Ginnie Mae

The best answer is the GNMA certificate which pays monthly interest. Fannie Mae also issues stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
356
Q

A guaranteed bond:

A. Is backed by the full faith and credit of another entity.
B. Has a higher nominal rate than other debentures.
C. Is the best type of secured bond.
D. Has priority over other secured bonds in bankruptcy priority.

A

A. Is backed by the full faith and credit of another entity.

All bonds are backed by the faith and credit of the issuer. In addition, the guaranteed bond is also backed by the promise of a second entity, usually a parent corporation or subsidiary. Consequently, it has a lower coupon than comparable debentures which are not guaranteed. A guaranteed bond is not a secured bond. Like all other debentures, a guaranteed bond is subordinate to secured bonds in bankruptcy priority.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
357
Q

The last quotation of a U.S. government bond is 98.08. An investor purchasing the bond would pay:

A. $98.80.
B. $980.80.
C. $982.50.
D. $988.00.

A

C. $982.50.

Bond prices are quoted at par in 32nds. The quote of 98.08 means $980.00 + 8/32, which equals $2.50, making the bond price $982.50.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
358
Q

Which of the following statements are true regarding income bonds? I. They do not pay semiannual interest. II. Their steady income makes them attractive to retired investors. III. They may not return 100% of principal at maturity. IV. They are typically issued by utility companies.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

Income (adjustment) bonds result from a debt renegotiation. The issuer will not pay interest again unless it returns to profitable financial condition. Because they may not return 100% of principal they are very risky and not suitable for most investors. The other answer choices are distractors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
359
Q

Overlapping debt includes which of the following?

A. School district
B. Port authority
C. Housing authority
D. Hospital board

A

A. School district

Overlapping debt is general obligation debt. Of these municipal issuers only the school district debt is general obligation. It is backed by taxes.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
360
Q

When the government places an embargo on a foreign source of goods and services, this is considered a form of:

A. Regulatory risk.
B. Business risk.
C. Inflation risk.
D. Import risk.

A

A. Regulatory risk.

Regulatory risk is associated with changes in law that can potentially affect a security, an industry or a country. This issue may also be referred to as legislative or political risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
361
Q

If a bond investor wants to know the rate of return measuring the total performance on a bond held from purchase through maturity, the investor should calculate the:

A. Internal rate of return.
B. Tax-adjusted yield of the bond.
C. Yield-to-maturity.
D. Annualized yield for the bond.

A

C. Yield-to-maturity.

The yield to maturity is a rate of return measuring the total performance of a bond (coupon payments as well as capital gain or loss) from the time of purchase until maturity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
362
Q

Which of the following best describes regulatory risk?

A. Currency exchange rates affecting foreign investments
B. Changes in law that can potentially affect a security
C. Purchase of a security at an inappropriate time
D. Security falling out of political favor

A

B. Changes in law that can potentially affect a security

Regulatory risk, also known as legislative or political risk, is associated with changes in law that can potentially affect a security, an industry or a country.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
363
Q

Which of the following is true of GNMA?

A. It issues $25,000 bonds.
B. It lends funds to savings institutions.
C. It is a direct obligation of the government.
D. Interest payments are semi-annual.

A

A. It issues $25,000 bonds.

GNMA is a serial, pass-through certificate making monthly payments of principal and interest. It is also a government agency which buys only government-guaranteed mortgages.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
364
Q

Which of the following statements regarding commercial paper is false?

A. Any discount is taxable as ordinary income.
B. It is issued by corporations.
C. It can be issued either at a discount or with a coupon rate.
D. Registration is required by the SEC.

A

D. Registration is required by the SEC.

Commercial paper that matures in 270 days or less is exempt from SEC registration.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
365
Q

Which of the following corporate bonds is secured by real estate?

A. Mortgage bond
B. Equipment trust certificate
C. Debenture
D. Collateral trust bond

A

A. Mortgage bond

Mortgage bonds are backed or secured by real estate so if the corporation defaults on the bonds the real estate will be sold to satisfy the bond holder’s claims.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
366
Q

Which of the following investments would be least suitable for a retired individual with limited savings?

A. Income bond
B. CD
C. Money market mutual fund
D. T-bill

A

A. Income bond

An income bond is the product of a bankruptcy proceeding or debt renegotiation. It is very speculative and not suitable for an investor with a low risk tolerance.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
367
Q

Which of the following would NOT issue overlapping debt?

A. Water district
B. Library district
C. School district
D. State

A

D. State

The state has no direct role in the property tax.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
368
Q

Which of the following best describes a double-barreled bond?

A. General obligation
B. Contingent liability
C. Moral obligation
D. Section 8-assisted

A

A. General obligation

A double-barreled bond is a general obligation bond, but it possesses a revenue source which may or may not be adequate for debt service payments.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
369
Q

Geographical diversification of municipal investments can protect against all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Default by one particular issuer.
B. Adverse legislation in one area.
C. Economic decline in one region.
D. Increasing interest rates.

A

D. Increasing interest rates.

Increasing interest rates affect all long-term debt negatively and can’t be diversified away by investing in municipal bond issues in different regions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
370
Q

A retired investor is reinvesting the proceeds from a mature municipal bond. Which of the following would best suit her objectives?

A. A toll road bond
B. A G.O. issued by a city with a rising tax rate
C. A pre-refunded bond
D. An airport bond

A

C. A pre-refunded bond

A pre-refunded bond is AAA and trades to an established call date. It is the best of the four choices. Airport and toll road bonds are revenue bonds which are generally not as safe as G.O.s. A rising tax rate is viewed negatively since it can result from falling assessed values, rising delinquency rates, or municipal budget deficits. Therefore, a G.O. issued by a city with a rising tax rate is not the best choice for this retired conservative investor.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
371
Q

Benefits of Local Government Investment Pools (LGIPs) include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. High investment returns.
B. Protection of capital.
C. Cash management.
D. Liquidity.

A

A. High investment returns.

LGIPs are established by state or local governmental entities to invest public funds for their own benefit. Among the benefits they offer are cash management, liquidity and protection of principal. Designed to satisfy short-term cash needs, they offer low volatility and modest returns.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
372
Q

If a municipal securities dealer, as a member of a syndicate, enters an order for its own account, which priority would it have, if normal priority were followed?

A. Member
B. Group
C. Designated
D. Pre-sale

A

A. Member

An order for its own (retail) account would be a member order.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
373
Q

A bond rated A by Moody’s is considered to be:

A. High or medium investment grade.
B. Speculative.
C. Not suitable for investment.
D. Highest-quality investment grade.

A

A. High or medium investment grade.

Medium investment grade is A. Aaa and AAA are highest investment grade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
374
Q

The cyclical and constantly fluctuating nature of interest rates has the most direct impact on:

A. No one type of security more than another since all markets are equally affected.
B. The value of growth mutual funds.
C. Market values of fixed income securities.
D. Corporate stock pricing.

A

C. Market values of fixed income securities.

Interest rates fluctuate constantly and directly affect the market value of fixed income securities. The threat of suffering a loss due to a change in the interest rate is called interest rate risk. All fixed income securities are subject to interest rate risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
375
Q

A U.S. government bond quoted at 108.06 - 109.09 has an ask price of:

A. $108.60.
B. $1,081.88.
C. $1,092.81.
D. $1,099.00.

A

C. $1,092.81.

Bond prices are quoted at $1,000 par in 32nds, with each point worth $10. The ask price (the last price quoted) would be $1,090 + (9/32 X $10) for a price of $1,092.81.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
376
Q

An investor had a series of bonds in his portfolio “called” by the issuer. What “value” can he expect to receive for the bonds when he redeems them with the issuer?

A. Inflation-adjusted value
B. Face value
C. Market discounted value
D. Call premium value

A

D. Call premium value

When a bond is called, the issuer often pays a call premium for the privilege of calling the bonds early.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
377
Q

Which of the following entities does NOT issue Eurodollar bonds?

A. A local government
B. Foreign corporations
C. U.S. government
D. U.S. corporations

A

C. U.S. government

The U.S. government cannot issue Eurodollar bonds; however, local and state governments may.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
378
Q

Which of the following is an appropriate investment for a LGIP?

A. Commercial paper
B. Private equity fund
C. International mutual fund
D. Sector fund focused on technology

A

A. Commercial paper

Of the choices listed, only commercial paper would meet the low volatility and short-term liquidity requirements of a Local Government Investment Fund. Technology sector funds and international mutual funds would be too volatile and risky to meet the everyday cash needs of the participating government entities. Private equity funds are also not appropriate; they are illiquid, long-term investments with a high degree of risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
379
Q

Moody’s MIG rating would apply to which of the following?

A. Noncallable industrial revenue bonds
B. Bond anticipation notes
C. Project notes
D. Advanced refunded utility bonds

A

B. Bond anticipation notes

MIG or Moody’s Investment Grade applies only to municipal notes. It does not apply to project notes which have not been issued since 1984 and were not rated.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
380
Q

Which of the following is the risk that an issuer may not be able to meet interest or principal payments on fixed income securities?

A. Interest rate risk
B. Purchasing power risk
C. Fixed income risk
D. Business/credit risk

A

D. Business/credit risk

Business/credit risk is the risk that an issuer may not be able to meet interest or principal payments on fixed income securities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
381
Q

The terms for systematically recognizing the premium or discount associated with a municipal bond’s price are I. Amortization II. Absorption III. Accretion IV. Alliteration

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

A bond purchase premium is amortized and a bond purchase discount is accreted. These are mathematical calculations used to systematically recognize the premium or discount over the life of the bond. The other choices are distractors.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
382
Q

Which risk is the risk that an investor may sustain a loss if a security must be sold quickly?

A. Purchasing power risk
B. Business/credit risk
C. Market risk
D. Liquidity risk

A

D. Liquidity risk

An investment of low liquidity could expose an investor to a risk of loss should the security need to be liquidated quickly.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
383
Q

A bridge authority issues a revenue bond through a competitive bid underwriting. Twenty years after construction is finished, the bridge is condemned due to weather damage and faulty construction. What provision is in place to protect the bond holders?

A. Errors and Omissions refund under the insurance covenant
B. Sinking fund required by the bond indenture
C. Catastrophic call under the insurance covenant
D. Additional bonds test

A

C. Catastrophic call under the insurance covenant

The insurance covenant in the bond indenture requires that the project is insured against future catastrophe. In this event, the insurance proceeds are used to call the bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
384
Q

Which of the following is false regarding bond anticipation notes?

A. Interest is paid semi-annually.
B. Interest on the notes is exempt from federal income tax.
C. Maturity of the notes is under 5 years.
D. Notes are repaid from general tax collections and direct government obligations.

A

D. Notes are repaid from general tax collections and direct government obligations.

Bond anticipation notes, or BANSs, are interim financing that is repaid from the proceeds of an upcoming bond issue.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
385
Q

A city and county are coterminous. When evaluating the debt issue of the city, the debt of the county would be considered:

A. Direct debt.
B. Overlapping debt.
C. Commingled debt.
D. Double-barreled debt.

A

B. Overlapping debt.

If a city and county are coterminous, this would mean that they have overlapping boundaries. In such cases, a portion of the county’s debt would be overlapping on the city.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
386
Q

In a municipal offering, “group net” orders are treated by the manager:

A. For the benefit of the syndicate as a whole.
B. For the benefit of the institution placing the order.
C. And by municipal brokers’ brokers for anonymous clients.
D. To benefit a joint account established in order to reoffer the bonds.

A

A. For the benefit of the syndicate as a whole.

Group net benefits each member of the syndicate according to bracket.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
387
Q

The type of risk that includes influences such as competitive pressures, market share and competence of management and is usually managed with a long-term focus is called:

A. Market risk.
B. Inflation risk.
C. Management risk.
D. Business risk.

A

D. Business risk.

Business risk is the risk associated with the specific circumstances of any particular company. It includes many influences associated with business success or failure such as competitive pressures, market share and competence of management. Business risk is usually managed with a long-term focus.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
388
Q

Assuming that a bond is purchased at a discount, then:

A. CY is greater than YTC.
B. CY is greater than YTM.
C. Nominal yield, or stated rate, is less than YTC.
D. Nominal yield is greater than YTC.

A

C. Nominal yield, or stated rate, is less than YTC.

If a bond is selling at a discount, the current yield (CY) will be higher than the nominal (coupon) yield. The yield-to-maturity (YTM) will be even higher than the current yield, since the discount represents a profit earned at maturity. The yield-to-call (YTC) is the highest yield on a callable bond traded at a discount.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
389
Q

TIPS are NOT issued in which of the following maturities?

A. 5 year
B. 10 year
C. 20 year
D. 30 year

A

C. 20 year

TIPs are issued in 5-, 10-, and 30-year maturities only.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
390
Q

When comparing business risk and market risk, which of the following is true?

A. The market value of substandard business operation is subject to market risk but the value of a well-run business is not.
B. Business risk is illustrated by the concept that “a rising tide raises (or lowers) all boats.
C. Business risks are those relating to the operational success of the particular business in question as opposed to the influence of trends in the broad securities markets.
D. Market risk has to do with how the successes or failures in the day-to-day operations of a business influence the market value of its securities.

A

C. Business risks are those relating to the operational success of the particular business in question as opposed to the influence of trends in the broad securities markets.

Business risk is tied to the fortunes of the particular business. Market risk is the influence that general market sentiments and pressures can have on the value of even the more prosperous business operation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
391
Q

Accrued interest on a new issue municipal bond is calculated from:

A. Dated date to first coupon date.
B. Settlement date to trade date.
C. Dated date to settlement date.
D. Settlement date to first coupon date.

A

C. Dated date to settlement date.

New issue municipals calculate interest from the dated date up to but not including the settlement date. This interest accrues to the issuer and is factored into the re-offered price of the bond.

The dated date is the date on which interest begins to accrue on a fixed-income security.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
392
Q

Which of the following is a contract between the issuer and the trustee who acts on behalf of the bondholders?

A. Offering circular
B. Trust indenture
C. Prospectus
D. Official statement

A

B. Trust indenture

A trust indenture is a contract between the issuer and the trustee who acts on behalf of the bond holder. It is designed to protect the bond holder and the indenture will often have covenants that will protect the bondholders’ interest. Further, the indenture will either be open-end or closed-end.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
393
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of auction rate securities? I. They are money market debt instruments. II. They have regularly resetting interest rates. III. They are extremely liquid. IV. They are issued by corporations and municipalities.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

D. II and IV

ARSs may have limited marketability, and cannot be presented as money market securities. They have regularly resetting interest rates and are issued by certain government agencies, corporations and municipalities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
394
Q

If interest rates are trending downward, which of the following are true? I. The market value of preferred stocks will increase. II. The market value of all types of fixed income securities will likely decrease. III. Values of U.S. Treasury securities will increase. IV. Values of municipal bonds will decrease.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

The relationship between bond prices and interest rates is inverse. As interest rates trend down, bond prices will generally go up.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
395
Q

Linda inherited a 20-year Treasury bond from her grandfather. The bond has 5 more years to maturity, so which of the following is true regarding the volatility of the bond based on interest rate fluctuations?

A. As interest rates go down, the bond will go down in market value.
B. The bond will fluctuate more than a 20-year bond with a longer maturity.
C. The bond will not fluctuate with interest rates since it has a set “coupon” interest rate.
D. The bond will fluctuate with interest rates, but less than a similar bond with a longer maturity.

A

D. The bond will fluctuate with interest rates, but less than a similar bond with a longer maturity.

It is important to remember that the value of a marketable debt security is affected by changes in interest rates. As interest rates go down, for example, the market value of an existing debt security increases. Also, the shorter the maturity, the less volatile a bond is to current interest rate fluctuations.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
396
Q

The lowest bank-qualified rating is:

A. AA.
B. Baa.
C. BB.
D. A-1.

A

B. Baa.

“Bank-qualified” bonds are investment grade. The lowest investment grade rating is Baa (Moody’s) or BBB (Standard and Poor’s).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
397
Q

Atlanta has $100 million of existing debt and makes up 60% of Fulton County’s assessed valuation. Fulton County has $20 million of debt. What is Atlanta’s direct debt per capita (assuming a population of 2 million)?

A. $30
B. $50
C. $56
D. $60

A

B. $50

The key here is that the question is asking for DIRECT DEBT PER CAPITA, which includes ONLY the debt of Atlanta, not including any of the Fulton County debt. $100 million divided by 2 million = $50 of direct debt per capita. The overlapping debt is $6 ($12 million divided by 2 million people). The net overall debt for the city is $112 million (the direct debt of $100 million plus the overlapping debt of $12 million), or $56 per capita.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
398
Q

The priority for acceptance of orders for an over-subscribed municipal bond offering will be established by the manager in the:

A. Agreement among underwriters.
B. Official notice of sale.
C. Bid form.
D. Official statement.

A

A. Agreement among underwriters.

The agreement among underwriters conveyed through the syndicate letter or account summary specifies over-allocation priority.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
399
Q

Which of the following are issued with a specified, fixed rate of interest?

A. U.S. government bonds and notes
B. U.S. government bills and notes
C. U.S. government bills and bonds
D. All of the above

A

A. U.S. government bonds and notes

Treasury notes and Treasury bonds are issued with specified or fixed interest rates. Treasury bills are dependent on the amount purchased, as they are always purchased at discount. T-Notes and T-Bonds can be purchased at a discount and/or a premium.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
400
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of BABs? I. Their interest is taxable. II. Their proceeds fund debt refinancing. III. Their proceeds fund public projects. IV. Capital gains on BABs are tax-free.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and III

BABs are issued by municipalities to finance public projects, such as bridges and highways. BAB interest is taxable. Capital gains on ALL municipal bonds, including BABs, are taxable.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
401
Q

In pricing a new issue, a municipal bond underwriter would most likely check:

A. The 30-day visible supply.
B. SHORT.
C. Munifacts.
D. EMMA.

A

A. The 30-day visible supply.

The 30-day visible supply indicates how much competition a bond issue will have in the next 30 days. This influences an underwriter’s pricing decision on a new bond offering. The other three are information sources for the secondary market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
402
Q

Which of the following bonds has the most call risk?

A. 4% corporate bond trading at a premium, callable at a premium
B. 3% corporate bond trading at a discount, callable at par
C. 2% general obligation municipal bond, callable at a premium
D. 4% corporate bond trading at a premium, callable at par

A

D. 4% corporate bond trading at a premium, callable at par

Generally, bonds with higher stated interest rates are more likely to be called than those with lower stated rates because the issuer has more incentive to eliminate high semiannual interest payments. Also, bonds callable at par are more likely to be called than bonds with a premium call price, because there is less call cost to the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
403
Q

Qualified disability-related expenses for an ABLE account include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Wheelchair.
B. Doctor’s visits.
C. Rent.
D. College textbooks for a sibling.

A

D. College textbooks for a sibling.

Qualified disability-related expenses for an ABLE account must be related to satisfying the needs of the disabled person and include expenses for education, housing, transportation, assistive technology, employment training and support, financial management and health care.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
404
Q

The lowest yielding CMO tranche is the:

A. Inverse floater.
B. Z-tranche.
C. TAC.
D. PAC.

A

D. PAC.

The PAC has the lowest prepayment and extension risk, and therefore the lowest yield. The Z-tranche is the riskiest tranche. Consequently, the Z-tranche has the highest potential yield.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
405
Q

A pre-refunded bond is sold on a:

A. Current yield basis.
B. YTM basis.
C. YTC basis.
D. Nominal yield basis.

A

C. YTC basis.

Because the bond will definitely be called on the next available call date, it is quoted and traded on a YTC basis.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
406
Q

Which of the following does NOT affect the secondary market price of a bond?

A. Yield
B. Dated date
C. Settlement date
D. Coupon

A

B. Dated date

The dated date, first day of interest accrual, would affect price only on new issues, not on secondary market transactions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
407
Q

When a member is liable for its percentage of any unsold securities, the syndicate is a(n) I. Eastern syndicate. II. Divided syndicate. III. Western syndicate. IV. Undivided syndicate.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

B. I and IV

In an undivided syndicate, each member is liable for unsold securities regardless of its sales performance in the issue.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
408
Q

The form of risk that affects purchasing power is called:

A. Inflation risk.
B. Consumption risk.
C. Supply and demand risk.
D. Regulatory risk.

A

A. Inflation risk.

Inflation reduces purchasing power over time.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
409
Q

A South American country nationalizes all foreign business assets within its borders. This is an example of:

A. Inflation risk.
B. Diplomacy risk.
C. Legislative risk.
D. Currency risk.

A

C. Legislative risk.

Legislative risk, also known as regulatory or political risk, comes from the actions of foreign governments as well as the U.S. government.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
410
Q

A debenture is an example of a:

A. Nonsecured bond.
B. Convertible bond.
C. Zero-coupon bond.
D. Secured bond.

A

A. Nonsecured bond.

Debentures are corporate issues of unsecured debt; they are backed only by the good faith of the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
411
Q

Which bond has the greatest market risk?

A. 6 1/2%, 15-year noncallable, rated A
B. 6%, 30-year callable, rated Baa
C. 7%, 15-year noncallable, rated BBB
D. 7%, 30-year callable, rated A-1

A

B. 6%, 30-year callable, rated Baa

The 30-year has lowest coupon and is lowest of the investment grade rating. Although the rating is equal to the rating of the 7%, 15-year noncallable BBB bond, the bond with the lower coupon/higher price has greater market risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
412
Q

Credit analysis of an airport authority revenue bond would include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Debt coverage ratios.
B. Flow of funds.
C. Competing facilities.
D. Overlapping debt.

A

D. Overlapping debt.

Overlapping debt is for GO (general obligation), not revenue bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
413
Q

What type of risk involves owning bonds in a declining interest rate environment?

A. Reinvestment risk
B. Interest risk
C. Market risk
D. Inflation risk

A

A. Reinvestment risk

Reinvestment risk occurs when interest rates have fallen and bond interest income must be reinvested at lower rates. The income produced by the currently available bond yields may be much less.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
414
Q

Which of the following correctly describes a bond’s interest accrual period?

A. The last payment date up to but not including settlement date.
B. The last settlement date up to but not including interest payment date.
C. The dated date up to but not including trade date.
D. The last settlement date up to but not including trade date.

A

A. The last payment date up to but not including settlement date.

The bond purchaser owes part of the next semiannual interest payment (accrued interest) to the bond seller. The seller is entitled to the first portion of the interest payment (from the last payment date up to but not including settlement date) and the buyer will earn the second portion (from settlement date until the next semiannual payment date).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
415
Q

XYZ Corp’s debentures are convertible into its common stock at $50 per share. The stock has risen to $70. What is the parity price of the bond?

A. $150
B. $900
C. $1,200
D. $1,400

A

D. $1,400

An increase from $50 to $70 is 40% per share. To be at parity, the bond must also rise 40%. Therefore, the parity price of the bond is $1,400.

$1,000 (par) / $50 (convertible price) = 20 conversion ratio
$70 stock price x 20 conversion ratio = $1,400

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
416
Q

If the prime interest rate increases, bond prices will generally:

A. Decrease.
B. Remain the same.
C. Move in parity with the prime rate.
D. Increase.

A

A. Decrease.

Bond prices are inversely proportionate to interest rates; therefore, a rise in the prime rate will generally cause high-grade bond prices to fall.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
417
Q

Sam was having difficulty selling his investments due to a lack of demand in the secondary market. What does that say about his investments?

A. They may be subject to legislative risk.
B. They were fixed income securities.
C. Their market value was lower than their book value.
D. They have a high liquidity risk.

A

D. They have a high liquidity risk.

Liquidity Risk is the risk that an asset may not quickly convert to cash at a fair price. Illiquid investments might not sell quickly or at a fair price due to low trading activity in the secondary market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
418
Q

The best definition of “current yield” is:

A. The most recent annualized dollar amount of income divided by the security’s purchase price and expressed as a percentage.
B. A debt security’s annualized dollar amount of income divided by the face (or “par”) value.
C. The most recent annualized dollar amount of income divided by the security’s current market value and expressed as a percentage.
D. The most recent annualized dollar amount of income, as opposed to any past payout or an anticipated future payout.

A

C. The most recent annualized dollar amount of income divided by the security’s current market value and expressed as a percentage.

The term “current” always implies a yield figure based on current market value rather than the price paid for a security or its anticipated value at maturity. For a bond, annualized dollar yield is always the same because it is the nominal yield expressed in dollars. For a stock or mutual fund, the most recent annualized dollar yield is the sum of the most recent four dividends.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
419
Q

Which of the following is NOT a risk of Eurodollar bonds?

A. Credit risk
B. Interest rate risk
C. Exchange rate risk
D. Systematic risk

A

C. Exchange rate risk

Because Eurodollar bonds are traded in, and pay interest in U.S. dollars, they do not have currency or exchange rate risk. Like other bonds, Eurodollar bonds are subject to the other listed risks.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
420
Q

An investor buys bonds which are priced in basis points. These bonds are:

A. Convertible bonds
B. Adjustment bonds
C. Serial bonds
D. Term bonds

A

C. Serial bonds

Serial bonds are priced at a yield percentage or in basis points. Term bonds are priced in points as a percentage of par value (a dollar price). Convertible bonds are typically term bonds. Adjustment bonds are a result of a debt renegotiation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
421
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of BABs? I. They provide tax-free interest. II. They may provide a federal subsidy to the issuer III. They may provide a tax credit to the investor. IV. They provide tax-free capital gains.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

C. II and III

Interest on BABs is taxable, and capital gains from trading ALL bonds is taxable.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
422
Q

All of the following are used to properly evaluate the yield-to-maturity of a bond investment EXCEPT:

A. Number of years to maturity.
B. Par value realized at maturity.
C. Current price of the bond.
D. Annual interest paid in dollars.

A

C. Current price of the bond.

The factors taken into account when calculating yield-to-maturity of a bond are annual coupon payment in dollars; number of years to maturity; par (or face) value realized at maturity; initial price paid. The current price of the bond is not taken into account.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
423
Q

Which of the following is the highest yield when a bond is trading at a discount?

A. Current yield
B. Yield-to-maturity
C. Coupon rate
D. Nominal yield

A

B. Yield-to-maturity

Since the yield-to-maturity represents the overall yield received on a bond, it is the highest yield on a discount bond. The calculation incorporates the coupon rate plus the par value received at maturity, which is greater than the discounted price paid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
424
Q

If a bond is bought at a discount, the yield-to-maturity is:

A. Higher than the nominal yield.
B. Lower than the nominal yield.
C. The same as the nominal yield.
D. None of the above.

A

A. Higher than the nominal yield.

On a discount bond, YTM is higher than nominal yield. In addition to earning interest, the investor pays less than par value for the bond and receives full par value at maturity.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
425
Q

Liquidity of an investment is best described as:

A. Whether the investment can be traded on an exchange (auction market) or must be negotiated over the counter.
B. Whether trading activity is heavy or light on a given trading day.
C. The extent to which the investment is composed of cash or cash equivalents.
D. Whether the investment can be sold quickly at a fair price.

A

D. Whether the investment can be sold quickly at a fair price.

To liquidate is to sell an investment and turn it into cash. A security is liquid if it can be quickly converted to cash at a fair price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
426
Q

Which of the following municipal entities would NOT issue overlapping debt?

A. School district
B. Turnpike authority
C. Park district
D. Library district

A

B. Turnpike authority

The turnpike authority issues self-supporting revenue debt, not general obligation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
427
Q

Which of the following factors will most likely create reinvestment risk?

A. Opportunity cost
B. Falling interest rates
C. Short-term investments
D. Decreasing asset values

A

B. Falling interest rates

Reinvestment risk is the risk that, upon maturity, if interest rates have fallen, the investor must reinvest the bond principal at a lower yield. Also, in a falling rate environment, bond holders must reinvest the bond interest income they receive at lower rates.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
428
Q

The last transaction in ABC 6.00s 2025 was 103. This bond is selling at:

A. Net asset value.
B. Par.
C. A premium.
D. A discount.

A

C. A premium.

This bond is quoted at 103, which is equal to a price of $1,030. (Remember to multiply 103 x 10 to arrive at the price of the bond). The bond is selling at a premium because the price of $1,030 is greater than its par value (or $1,000).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
429
Q

Which of the following is NOT correct regarding 529 plans?

A. They allow for an accelerated gift per donor.
B. Qualified withdrawals are taxed as ordinary income.
C. Rules and provisions may vary by state.
D. Contributions grow tax deferred.

A

B. Qualified withdrawals are taxed as ordinary income.

Qualified withdrawals are not taxed as ordinary income. Rather, withdrawals are tax-free when used for qualified education expenses. 529 plans are state-specific, and some rules may vary. Most plans allow for a 5-year “accelerated gift” equal to five times the allowable annual amount per donor with no gift tax liability if no other contributions are made for 5 years. This amount increases periodically for inflation. Contributions grow tax-deferred.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
430
Q

XYZ Industries: 6% noncumulative preferred; 9% debentures convertible at $25. The trust indenture for the debentures contains an “anti-dilution” clause. If the company distributes a 10% stock dividend on the common stock, an investor who owns 10 XYZ Industries debentures would receive:

A. A certificate for one additional bond.
B. A certificate for 10 shares of common stock.
C. A check for $50, representing the adjustment for the conversion ratio.
D. A notice that the conversion price of his bonds has been reduced to $22.73.

A

D. A notice that the conversion price of his bonds has been reduced to $22.73.

A debenture convertible at 25 would convert into 40 shares ($1,000/25 = 40). A 10% stock dividend would adjust the number of shares to 44. $1,000/44 = 22.73, the new conversion price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
431
Q

An investor’s eldest child is about to graduate from high school and is not planning on attending any higher education program. What options does the investor have regarding the 529 plan which was established for this child?

A. The parent may use the funds to purchase a primary residence.
B. The funds will be forfeited.
C. The funds may be transferred to a sibling without penalty.
D. The balance may be withdrawn without penalty.

A

C. The funds may be transferred to a sibling without penalty.

With 529 plans, the donor may roll over the money and transfer it at any time, without penalty, to any beneficiary in the same family as long as it will be used for qualified educational expenses.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
432
Q

Smith Co is a member of an eastern municipal underwriting syndicate. Smith is committed to sell 25% of the issue, or 50,000 bonds. Smith sells 62,000 bonds, and at the end of the offering there are 8,000 unsold bonds. Smith:

A. Must continue selling until the full issue is placed.
B. Fulfilled its commitment in the offering and has no further obligation.
C. Exceeded its obligation and qualifies for the additional takedown.
D. Owns 2,000 of the unsold bonds.

A

D. Owns 2,000 of the unsold bonds.

In an eastern syndicate, each member is liable for any unsold bonds according to its original commitment percentage. The member’s performance is irrelevant. In this case, though Smith exceeded its commitment by 12,000 shares, it is still liable for 25% of any unsold shares. If this were a western syndicate, it would have fulfilled its commitment in the offering and would have no further obligation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
433
Q

Which of the following is NOT used to calculate the price of a bond?

A. Coupon
B. Yield to maturity
C. Dated date
D. Accrued interest

A

C. Dated date

The dated date is relevant only on a new issue bond. It is not relevant to the accrued interest calculation on a bond traded in the secondary market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
434
Q

Which of the following needs voter approval?

A. GO
B. Sewer revenue bond
C. Special assessment bond
D. IDB

A

A. GO

Only GO bonds (general obligation) require voter referendums.

IDB = Industrial Revenue Bond

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
435
Q

A common fund found in the indenture of a revenue bond that provides money for additions, expansions, and improvements is the:

A. Replacement and renewal fund.
B. Sinking fund.
C. Operations and maintenance fund.
D. Construction fund.

A

A. Replacement and renewal fund.

Of the common funds that are found in the indenture of revenue bond, an operations and maintenance fund provides for monies to operate and maintain the facility. A debt service fund provides for service of the principal and interest payments. A replacement and renewal fund provides monies for additions, improvements, or expansions to the current facility if these would be considered beneficial.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
436
Q

Which of the following is measured by the yield-to-maturity?

A. The return on a bond up to the call date
B. The return of an investment in relation to the degree of risk
C. The total return of a bond from the time of purchase until maturity
D. The return on a bond based on its current market value

A

C. The total return of a bond from the time of purchase until maturity

The yield-to-maturity measures the total return of a bond from the time of purchase until maturity. The return of an investment in relation to the degree of risk taken is called the risk-adjusted return. The current yield measures the interest rate that a security with a fixed income is generating to the holder based on its current market value. The yield-to-call measures the return on a bond similar to the yield-to-maturity, except that the ending period is not the maturity date but the call date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
437
Q

The credit rating of a pre-refunded bond is:

A. Determined by Fitch.
B. AAA.
C. Never above BBB.
D. Based on the financial condition of the issuer.

A

B. AAA.

An advance-refunded bond has been called and therefore trades on a YTC basis. The issuer pre-refunded this bond by issuing a new bond (with a lower interest rate). The issuer places this refund money into an escrow account to retire the advance-refunded bonds at their next call date. Since money is safely escrowed to retire the old bonds on their next call date, they are automatically reclassified as AAA and they trade to this known call date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
438
Q

A registered representative of a managing underwriter enters an order for the broker/dealer’s customer’s account. What priority will it have?

A. Pre-sale
B. Member-related
C. Member
D. Designated group

A

C. Member

Customers of member dealers are given member priority.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
439
Q

What should an investor consider before establishing a 529 plan in a neighboring state?

A. Whether or not the child will attend college as the plan cannot be transferred after it is established
B. Tax consequences for establishing the plan while the child is so young
C. The possible tax consequences of investing in an out-of-state plan
D. Which university the child would have to attend based on this particular 529 plan

A

C. The possible tax consequences of investing in an out-of-state plan

When an investor establishes a 529 plan outside of his or her state, there could be tax consequences that would make the plan less attractive, including the loss of state income tax deductions. 529 plans do not limit a student’s choice of universities. If the child for whom a 529 plan is established decides not to attend college, the beneficiary can be changed to another person in the same family. Tax consequences are of no concern since earnings grow tax-deferred and withdrawals are tax-free when used for qualified education expenses. In fact, establishing a plan when a child is very young allows funds to grow for a longer period of time.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
440
Q

An investor buys a 10-year municipal bond at 107. The investor sells the bond after 3 years at 102. What is the investor’s gain or loss?

A. $35 loss
B. $29 loss
C. $19 gain
D. No gain or loss

A

B. $29 loss

The investor reduces bond cost basis by $7 per year ($70 premium / 10 years) After 3 years, the investor’s cost basis is $1,049 (1,070 – 21) Cost basis minus sale price = 1,049 – 1,020 = $29 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
441
Q

Qualified higher education expenses in a 529 plan include which of the following expenses for elementary and secondary public school?

A. Unlimited expenses
B. $10,000 in tuition
C. Books and supplies
D. None; only postsecondary education expenses are allowed.

A

B. $10,000 in tuition

In addition to specified expenses for postsecondary schools (colleges and universities), qualified higher education expenses also include $10,000 in annual expenses for tuition for elementary and secondary public, private, and religious schools.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
442
Q

The term “double-barreled” is used to refer to which of the following?

A. Certain municipal bonds where the source of revenues is a special tax levied on the sale of such items as alcoholic beverages, tobacco, and firearms
B. Certain municipal bonds where a taxing authority guarantees debt service payments in the event that pledged revenues are insufficient
C. The arrangement whereby municipalities issue bonds to finance the construction of industrial plants which are leased to private companies
D. A municipal authority or commission created to finance a project for which the debt service is funded by legislative appropriations

A

B. Certain municipal bonds where a taxing authority guarantees debt service payments in the event that pledged revenues are insufficient

“Double-barreled” refers to general obligation municipal debt that has a possible unstable revenue source. The final backing if revenues fall short is the general tax revenues of the issuer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
443
Q

The provision in the indenture of a municipal revenue bond that would be invoked in the case of condemnation of the building constituting the primary revenue source is the:

A. Defeasement provision.
B. Catastrophe call provision.
C. Extraordinary call provision.
D. Sinking fund provision.

A

B. Catastrophe call provision.

Protective covenants in revenue bonds include the Insurance Covenant. In the event the facility becomes condemned or damaged to the extent that it cannot generate revenues, an insurance policy enables the issuer to call in the bonds. This is known as a “catastrophe call.”

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
444
Q

A bond is considered to be speculative (a “junk bond”) when its Standard and Poor’s rating is no higher than:

A. C.
B. B.
C. BB.
D. BBB.

A

C. BB.

Bonds with a rating of BBB and higher are considered to be “investment grade,” while bonds rated BB or lower are speculative or high yield, also known as junk bonds.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
445
Q

The G.O. index contains:

A. 20 GO bonds with 20 year maturities.
B. 20 GO bonds with 25 year maturities.
C. 25 GO bonds with 25 year maturities.
D. 25 GO bonds with 30 year maturities.

A

A. 20 GO bonds with 20 year maturities.

The GO index contains 20 GOs with 20 year maturities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
446
Q

Which of the following would be least suitable for a very wealthy investor seeking tax relief?

A. Limited partnership
B. G.O.
C. Revenue
D. IDR

A

D. IDR

IDRs are subject to the alternative minimum tax (AMT). Since very wealthy investors are generally subject to the AMT, the other three choices are probably better for this investor.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
447
Q

A parent has been using distributions from a 529 plan to pay for her son’s college education. In his spare time and unrelated to his college curriculum, the son decides to start a business and needs $15,000 in seed money. If $15,000 is withdrawn from the 529 plan to cover this business venture, what are the implications?

A. No penalty, but ordinary income taxes on earnings
B. 10% penalty and ordinary income taxes on earnings
C. 10% penalty, but no tax implications
D. No penalty, no tax implications

A

B. 10% penalty and ordinary income taxes on earnings

This is not a qualified higher education expense. Therefore, there would be a 10% penalty on the earnings portion of the withdrawal, which would also be subject to ordinary income taxes at the state and federal levels.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
448
Q

The priority accorded to municipal orders taken for a new issue would be found in the:

A. Offering circular.
B. Agreement among underwriters.
C. Official statement.
D. Settlement letter.

A

B. Agreement among underwriters.

The order priority of a municipal underwriting may be found in the agreement among underwriters. It would not be in the official statement.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
449
Q

Which of the following statements is true about a municipal dealer who has an outfirm quote from another municipal dealer? I. The dealer has the right to buy the bonds at a fixed price for a certain period of time. II. The dealer must buy the bonds before the stated time period expires. III. The dealer can sell the bonds before buying them. IV. The dealer may renegotiate the price prior to the sale.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

The dealer has received an out firm bid, which is a stated price for a fixed time subject to fill or kill recall. The dealer can sell the bonds prior to buying them. No renegotiate is available, and the dealer is not obligated to buy.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
450
Q

Which of the following are true regarding municipal offerings? I. Revenue bonds are usually offered through competitive bidding. II. Revenue bonds are usually offered through a negotiated process. III. General obligation bonds are usually offered through competitive bidding. IV. General obligation bonds are usually offered through a negotiated process.

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. I and III

A

B. II and III

II and III are correct. A “competitive bid” process is often required for GO bonds; revenue bond issues are typically negotiated.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
451
Q

The responsibility for the payment of principal and interest on an industrial development revenue bond issue rests with the:

A. Municipal issuer.
B. Trustee.
C. Corporate guarantor.
D. Bond counsel.

A

C. Corporate guarantor.

The corporation is the guarantor of industrial development revenue bonds. The corporation guaranteeing the IDR must be disclosed on the municipal bond confirmation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
452
Q

Bond premium amortization I. Reduces the investor’s cost basis. II. Increases the investor’s cost basis. III. Reduces YTM and YTC. IV. Increases YTM and YTC.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and III

Amortizing the bond’s premium systematically reduces the investor’s cost basis to par at maturity. It also reduces the yield realized by the investor.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
453
Q

Which of the following would be quoted on a bond confirmation when an investor purchases a bond that has been advance refunded?

A. Yield call or yield to maturity whichever is lower
B. Yield to call
C. Yield to maturity
D. Yield to call or yield to maturity whichever is higher

A

B. Yield to call

Because these bonds have been advance refunded to the call date, the investor will receive yield to call and that is what must be quoted on the investor confirmation. Under normal circumstances the investor confirmation must show yield to maturity or yield to call whichever is lower. But because the bond has been advance refunded, we know that the bond will be called at the first call date. Therefore, in this situation, yield to call is required to be on the confirmation because it will be the effective yield for the investor.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
454
Q

With regard to 529 plans, all of the following are considered qualified higher education expenses EXCEPT:

A. Computers.
B. Extracurricular activity fees.
C. Tuition.
D. Room and board.

A

B. Extracurricular activity fees.

This is an EXCEPT question. Qualified higher education expenses do not include extracurricular activity fees. They are limited to tuition, mandatory fees, room and board, computers (and related equipment), and required books and supplies.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
455
Q

Advance refunding is:

A. Issuing new debt to extinguish old debt at the first opportunity.
B. Rolling principal over before its maturity to take advantage of higher rates.
C. Making regular deposits to an escrow account to be used only for debt retirement.
D. Escrowing sufficient collateral to extinguish debt at maturity.

A

A. Issuing new debt to extinguish old debt at the first opportunity.

Advance refunding is issuing a new, lower coupon bond to lock in a low interest rate, escrowing the funds, and using them to pay off an outstanding, higher coupon bond at the next call date.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
456
Q

Where can retail investors find information on municipal bond issuers?

A. Local newspaper
B. The daily bond buyer
C. Munifacts
D. EMMA

A

D. EMMA

EMMA (Electronic Municipal Market Access) is an electronic system which provides muni bond issuer information to the public and to professionals.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
457
Q

An engineering report would be used for which of the following?

A. Hospital revenue bond
B. School bond
C. Project note
D. General obligation bond

A

A. Hospital revenue bond

An engineering report or feasibility study would only be used in the analysis of a municipal revenue bond issue. School bonds, general obligation bonds, and project notes do not require feasibility studies.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
458
Q

Prepaid tuition plans allow the purchase of units or credits at participating colleges or universities. Which of the following statements is TRUE?

A. Residency is never required.
B. Future tuition can be secured at current prices.
C. Room and board are covered.
D. Tuition for elementary and secondary schools can be prepaid.

A

B. Future tuition can be secured at current prices.

Prepaid tuition plans allow the purchase of units or credits at participating colleges/universities for future tuition at current prices. They offer a significant benefit considering the escalating costs associated with college tuition. Room and board are not covered , nor is tuition for elementary and secondary schools. Most prepaid tuition plans are sponsored by state governments and have residency requirements.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
459
Q

The Revdex is found in which publication?

A. EMMA
B. Daily Bond Buyer
C. SHORT
D. Munifacts

A

B. Daily Bond Buyer

The Revdex is found in the Daily Bond Buyer. It is relevant to the primary municipal market. The other three sources service the secondary municipal market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
460
Q

What is the cost of a March 120 T-Bond call with a premium of .20?

A. $625
B. $1,000
C. $2,000
D. $6,250

A

A. $625

Treasury notes and bonds are quoted in 32nds. Therefore, .20 = 20/32 (.625) of 1% of $100,000 (1 point) or $625.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
461
Q

Equity options expire:

A. At 11:59 p.m. ET on the Saturday following the third Friday of the month.
B. At 4:05 p.m. on the third Friday of the month.
C. At noon on the Saturday following the third Friday of the month.
D. At 11:59 p.m. ET on the third Friday of the month.

A

D. At 11:59 p.m. ET on the third Friday of the month.

Equity options expire on the third Friday of the month at 11:59 p.m. ET.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
462
Q

If an investor is very bullish on a stock, which of the following actions would provide the greatest potential short-term gain?

A. Buy one call on the stock
B. Short 100 shares of the stock
C. Sell one put on this stock
D. Buy 100 shares of the stock

A

A. Buy one call on the stock

Buying 100 shares of the stock and buying one call on the stock offer theoretically unlimited upside potential. However, a call is cheaper than 100 stock shares and therefore offers the same unlimited upside for a smaller investment. This is the concept of leverage. Selling a put offers a finite, not a theoretically unlimited, potential gain. Shorting stock is a bearish move and is contrary to this investor’s bullish opinion.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
463
Q

An option contract that gives the holder of the contract the right to sell the underlying security at the strike price is a:

A. Short stock position.
B. Call option.
C. Put option.
D. Strike option.

A

C. Put option.

A put option contract gives the holder of the contract the right to sell the underlying security at the strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
464
Q

The manager of a bond fund has used the strategy of writing covered T-bond calls as a means of increasing the fund’s yield. Distributions to shareholders from this source of income will be treated, for tax purposes, as:

A. Capital gains.
B. Interest.
C. Interest and capital gains.
D. Ordinary income.

A

A. Capital gains.

Any income derived from writing options is considered to be capital gain. Therefore, any distributions (Remember: a regulated investment company distributes at least 98% of its net capital gains.) would be considered to be capital gains to the shareholder of the fund. However, interest received on the bonds in the portfolio would be distributed (after expenses) to the shareholder in the form of dividends, taxed as ordinary income.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
465
Q

If you anticipate interest rates to decline, you would recommend a I. T-Bond yield call. II. T-Bond yield put. III. T-Bond call. IV. T-Bond put.

A. II and IV
B. I and III
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

D. II and III

Rates declining would favor a T-Bond yield put, which follows declining yields and a T-Bond call, which appreciates along with bond prices.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
466
Q

ABC shares are trading at $29. An investor buys 10 ABC Oct 30 calls at $2 and 10 ABC Oct 30 puts at $3.50. At expiration, ABC is trading at $34 and the investor closes the position at intrinsic value. What is the gain or loss, not including commission?

A. $150 loss
B. $1,500 loss
C. $400 gain
D. $4,000 gain

A

B. $1,500 loss

Credit: ($34 - $30) (call buy)
Debit: $2.00 (premium), $3.50 (premium)

$34 - $30 - $2.00 - $3.50 = -$1.50 x 1,000 shares = -$1,500

The investor purchased 10 calls at $2 for a total cost of $2,000 and 10 puts at $3.50 for a total cost of $3,500. At expiration, ABC is $34, so the Oct 30 calls are in-the-money by four points and the investor’s calls have intrinsic value of $4,000 ($4 x 100 x 10 = $4,000). The Oct 30 puts are out-of-the-money and have zero intrinsic value. The investor made $2,000 profit on the calls but lost $3,500 (the entire premium paid) on the puts; $2,000 - $3,500 = $1,500 loss.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
467
Q

Bob wrote one XYZ July 45 put for $4.50 and one XYZ July 40 call for $2 with the market price of XYZ at 41. XYZ appreciates to 43, and Bob makes closing purchases of the put for $2.50 and the call for $3.75. What is the gain or loss?

A. $250 loss
B. $250 gain
C. $25 loss
D. $25 gain

A

D. $25 gain

Credit: $4.50 (premium), $2.00 (premium)
Debit: $2.50, $3.75 (closing purchases)

$4.50 + $2.00 - $2.50 - $3.75 = $0.25

The position is a short combination. Bob wrote the put and call for a combined premium of $6.50 ($4.50 + $2). He purchased them back for a combined premium of $6.25 ($2.50 + $3.75 = $6.25. $6.50 - $6.25 = $0.25 X 100 = $25.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
468
Q

If a call holder chooses to exercise the call, the writer must:

A. Buy 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.
B. Assign a call.
C. Give notice to the OCC.
D. Sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.

A

D. Sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.

Call holders have the right to buy. Therefore, the writer of the call option would be obligated to sell 100 shares at the strike price if the contract was exercised.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
469
Q

Long-term equity appreciation participation securities or LEAPS have expirations as long as:

A. 9 months.
B. 12 months.
C. 24 months.
D. 39 months.

A

D. 39 months.

LEAPS can run as long as 39 months. However, when leaps are in the last 9 months prior to expiration, they are considered regular options.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
470
Q

You buy a put. Four months later, you sell for a gain. Which is true? I. Short-term capital gain; II. Long-term capital gain; III. Closing sale; IV. Closing purchase

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

Short-term and closing sale.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
471
Q

Which of the following applies to a call option contract?

A. The call writer has the obligation to buy at the strike price.
B. The call holder has the obligation to buy at the strike price.
C. The call writer has the right to sell at the strike price.
D. The call holder has the right to buy at the strike price.

A

D. The call holder has the right to buy at the strike price.

A call option is a contract that gives the call holder the right to purchase 100 shares of the underlying security, at the strike price (also called the exercise price), until expiration. The call writer has the obligation to sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price. Long call – right to buy. Short call – obligation to sell.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
472
Q

On behalf of a client, you enter an order to write 5 ABC Jan 30 puts. This order is a(n)

A. Closing buy order.
B. Opening buy order.
C. Opening sell order.
D. Closing sell order.

A

C. Opening sell order.

Opening sell, the investor is establishing a short position.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
473
Q

A financial institution has a large portfolio of U.S. Treasury notes and is concerned that interest rates are about to increase. Rather than selling off the notes, thereby creating portfolio volatility, the institution could attempt to offset the portfolio’s unrealized losses by:

A. T-note options could not be used in this situation.
B. Buying T-note calls.
C. Buying T-note puts.
D. Writing either T-note calls or T-note puts.

A

C. Buying T-note puts.

If interest rates go up as expected, the T-note portfolio will decline in price. The purchase of T-note puts would offset this unrealized loss, since their value would increase as prices decrease.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
474
Q

An investor is long XYZ stock at 50 and writes a 55 call for 3. What is the result when the investor closes this position at the current market price of 57?

A. $400 gain
B. $600 gain
C. $800 gain
D. $1,000 gain

A

C. $800 gain

Credit: $3 (premium), $55 (short call)
Debit: $50 (long stock)

$3 + $55 - $50 = $8 x 100 shares = $800

The investor bought stock at $50 (debit), sold a call @$3 (credit) and sold stock at $55 (credit). Total credits $58 - $50 debit = $8 X 100 = $800.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
475
Q

An investor is short 20 DEF April 70 puts. He enters an order to buy 10 DEF April 70 puts. This order is:

A. An opening sell order.
B. A closing buy order.
C. A closing sell order.
D. An opening buy order.

A

B. A closing buy order.

This is a closing buy order. The investor is reducing an existing options position.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
476
Q

If a call holder chooses to exercise the call, the writer must:

A. Give notice to the OCC.
B. Sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.
C. Buy 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.
D. Assign a call.

A

B. Sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.

Call holders have the right to buy. Therefore, the writer of the call option would be obligated to sell 100 shares at the strike price if the contract was exercised.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
477
Q

The strike price and premium of Treasury bond options are stated as a percentage of the:

A. Face amount of the underlying bonds.
B. Aggregate call premium.
C. Accrued interest.
D. Current market value of the underlying bonds.

A

A. Face amount of the underlying bonds.

The par value, or face amount of T-bonds, is basis for bond and option quotes.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
478
Q

Your customer writes an S & P 100 (OEX) May 320 put for .50. With the OEX at 340, what is her maximum gain?

A. $34
B. $50
C. $510
D. $515

A

B. $50

$0.50 (premium) x 100 shares = $50

When you write a put, your maximum gain is the premium you received - $50 or .50 point X 100.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
479
Q

The holder of a call option on a T-bond will profit under all of the following circumstances, EXCEPT I. Yields on T-bonds decrease. II. Yields on T-bonds increase. III. Prices of T-bonds decrease. IV. Prices of T-bonds increase.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

The buyer or holder of a call will profit, EXCEPT when yields increase and prices decrease. Under this circumstance the holder will lose.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
480
Q

A U.S. corporation imports goods from Switzerland. Which of the following option positions should it choose to best protect itself?

A. Buy Swiss francs puts
B. Sell Swiss franc calls
C. Sell Swiss franc
D. Buy Swiss franc calls

A

D. Buy Swiss franc calls

Remember that “importers buy calls.” An easy way to remember this is EPIC: Exporters buy Puts, Importers buy Calls.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
481
Q

A client has both a cash and margin account, and actively trades stocks in both. He does not own stock ZZZ at the moment, but has been following it for some time and is convinced it is going to steeply decline in price. He plans to short sell the stock, but wants to know any advantages to buying puts on the stock instead. All of the following are correct EXCEPT put buying:

A. Does not require that securities be located for borrowing.
B. Returns are enhanced by the gradual erosion of the option’s time value.
C. Is less risky.
D. Involves a smaller capital commitment.

A

B. Returns are enhanced by the gradual erosion of the option’s time value.

Both strategies allow investors to capitalize on a stock’s decline, but with very different risk/reward profiles. Short sales have an unlimited loss potential in a rising market, while the maximum loss on a long put is limited to the premium paid. Short sales must be done in a margin account, and 50% of the short market value is required to be deposited by the investor. Long puts require a much smaller capital outlay - the option premium. Short sales can also be more cumbersome since the securities to be borrowed must be located. The eroding time value of options does not constitute an advantage, however, because it works to reduce premiums over time, thereby inhibiting options returns.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
482
Q

A customer buys an 8 1/2% T-bond maturing in 2015. He also buys a T-bond put. Interest rates appreciate to 10%. Which of the following will occur upon sale of the bond and exercise of the put?

A. Put will be exercised for a gain.
B. Position will be closed for a loss.
C. Position will be closed without gain or loss.
D. Bond yields will rise for a gain.

A

B. Position will be closed for a loss.

If you buy a T-bond and a T-bond put, then interest rates rise; you cut your losses in bond price by exercise. Your loss becomes mostly premium.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
483
Q

The contract size for equity mini-options is:

A. 10 shares of the underlying stock.
B. 25 shares of the underlying stock.
C. 50 shares of the underlying stock.
D. 100 shares of the underlying stock.

A

A. 10 shares of the underlying stock.

The contract size for equity mini-options is 10 shares of the underlying stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
484
Q

A domestic company is exporting goods to Europe. Which of the following option strategies would it use?

A. Sell euro puts
B. Buy euro calls
C. sell euro calls
D. Buy euro puts

A

D. Buy euro puts

The U.S. exporter would buy puts. An easy way to remember this is EPIC, meaning Exporters buy Puts, Importers buy Calls.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
485
Q

Which one of the following parties to an options contract receives the premium and has the obligation to sell the underlying security at the strike price if the option is exercised?

A. Put writer
B. Call holder
C. Call writer
D. Put holder

A

C. Call writer

The call writer is short the call and has the obligation to sell the underlying security at the strike price if the options contract is exercised by the call holder. The call writer collects the premium.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
486
Q

Which of the following is true concerning option sales literature?

A. It must show past performance.
B. It must be preceded or accompanied by an OCC disclosure document.
C. It must disclose the firm’s past experience based on the firm’s recommendations.
D. It may not project future performance.

A

B. It must be preceded or accompanied by an OCC disclosure document.

Sales literature in options may portray past performance of representative and B/D and may project future performance if hedged and currency dates are given, but it must be preceded or accompanied by a disclosure document.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
487
Q

Triple witching involves the expiration of which of the following four times a year? I. Equities; II. Equity options; III. Equity option indexes; IV. LEAPs

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

Equities don’t expire; therefore, any choices containing “I” are incorrect. “Triple witching” is the expiration of options on equities, equity indexes, and equity index futures, but futures are for another test; not covered here on the Series 7.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
488
Q

A customer buys 1 Euro April 98 call and sells 1 Euro July 98 call. The position is profitable under all circumstances, EXCEPT:

A. Premiums widen.
B. Premiums narrow.
C. Both contracts expire.
D. Both contracts are exercised.

A

A. Premiums widen.

The position is credit; the July being sold is more valuable. Credit will gain, except if premiums widen.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
489
Q

A customer with a short equity put option is assigned an exercise notice by his firm. How should he handle this?

A. He can avoid buying the underlying stock by closing out his short put within 24 hours of receiving the exercise notice.
B. He must accept the exercise notice and buy the underlying stock.
C. He can ask the firm to reassign the notice.
D. He can refuse the exercise notice.

A

B. He must accept the exercise notice and buy the underlying stock.

The exercise of options contracts is backed by the Options Clearing Corp., which is the clearing agent for listed options contracts and is responsible for standardizing, issuing and guaranteeing the performance of these contracts. If the holder of an option wishes to exercise, his broker/dealer notifies the OCC, which, in turn, randomly assigns the exercise notice to a broker/dealer that can fulfill the notice. That broker/dealer then assigns the exercise notice to a short customer on a random, first in/first out or any other basis that is fair and reasonable. Once a customer receives an exercise notice, he must fulfill his obligations under the contract. If a customer defaults on this obligation (which is rare), the OCC, as the guarantor of last resort, stands ready to fulfill it.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
490
Q

A customer purchases one XYZ July 50 put for $2.50 with the price of XYZ stock at 55. The following week, XYZ reports disappointing earnings and the stock drops to 43.50. If the customer simultaneously exercises the long put and purchases 100 shares of XYZ stock at 43.50, the resulting profit or loss would be

A. $0.
B. $400 profit.
C. $400 loss.
D. $650 profit.

A

B. $400 profit.

[ $50 - $43.50 - $2.50 ] x 100 shares = $400 profit

The customer purchases the put for $2.50 (a debit). He exercises the put and sells stock at $50 (a credit) and purchases the stock at $43.50 (a debit). $6.50 profit on stock - $2.50 premium paid= $4 X 100 = $400 profit

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
491
Q

The options position with the most risk is:

A. Uncovered put.
B. Long call.
C. Uncovered call.
D. Long put.

A

C. Uncovered call.

Short calls have unlimited risk. Naked or uncovered calls are short calls.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
492
Q

A customer has a portfolio of Treasury securities. In order to increase investment income,

A. Buy calls.
B. Write puts.
C. Buy puts.
D. Write calls.

A

D. Write calls.

If an investor is long Treasury securities, writing T-Bond calls would increase income through receiving premiums.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
493
Q

A newspaper advertisement lists only the name, address, and phone number for information on options. Which of the following is required?

A. Approval of the CBOE
B. Permission of the broker/dealer
C. Approval of the ROP
D. Nothing, not an ad

A

C. Approval of the ROP

Approval of the ROP is always required, whether the material is sales literature, advertising, or personal correspondence. Approval of the CBOE is required for any but blind ads. This is a blind ad.

A Registered Options Principal (ROP) designation qualifies the holder to supervise options trading activities.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
494
Q

Buy one ABC Jan 40 call and write one ABC Jan 30 call. This position I.is a Debit spread. II is a Credit spread. III. Loses money if premiums widen. IV. Loses money if premiums narrow.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

Write a 30 call, buy a 40 call is a vertical (price) spread. The short call with lower strike price will have the higher premium, so the spread is established for a credit. You make money on this position if the spread narrows (becomes less expensive) if it widens (becomes more expensive) you lose money. This is a bear call spread.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
495
Q

A company is building a plant in Japan using Japanese labor. The company will pay the labor force in Japanese yen in approximately 3 months. The company believes the dollar will decline against the yen. In order to best protect itself, what option position should the company choose?

A. Sell a Japanese yen put
B. Sell a Japanese yen call
C. Buy a Japanese yen put
D. Buy a Japanese yen call

A

D. Buy a Japanese yen call

If the U.S. company wishes to protect its payroll, it would buy Japanese yen calls to hedge against the currency.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
496
Q

Which of the following is the most widely used index for option contracts?

A. S & P 100
B. National OTC
C. Major market
D. S & P 500

A

A. S & P 100

The S & P 100, or OEX, has the greatest volume by far.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
497
Q

How often can an investor purchase the maximum number of option contracts?

A. 5 business days
B. 7 business days
C. 30 calendar days
D. 9 months

A

A. 5 business days

The option position limits apply every 5 business days.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
498
Q

XYZ stock has a market price of $55 per share. John thinks the price of XYZ stock is going to remain stable over the next 3 months, so he decides to write 10 XYZ July 55 calls @ 3. What is the maximum gain?

A. $300
B. $1,000
C. $3,000
D. Unlimited

A

C. $3,000

The maximum gain in writing/selling options is the premium received.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
499
Q

You are long 200 shares of ABC at 54 and simultaneously buy 2 ABC Aug 55 puts for 3. The puts are exercised with the market at 52. What is your gain or loss?

A. $100 gain
B. $300 gain
C. $200 loss
D. $400 loss

A

D. $400 loss

Premium is -3 (200). Market is a long position hedge. -54 + 55 = +1 - 3 = -2 X 200 = $400 loss. Note that the market value (market at 52) is irrelevant for this calculation.

Credit: $55 (put)
Debit: $54 (own), $3 (put premium)
$55 - $54 - $3 = -2 x 200 = -$400

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
500
Q

A client purchases 100 XYZ at 47 and later writes a Nov 50 call at 4. The client will break even when the underlying stock is at:

A. $40.
B. $43.
C. $51.
D. $54.

A

B. $43.

Price paid for stock $47 - $4 premium received = $43.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
501
Q

Your customer writes an OEX 250 put for 2.50 when the S & P 100 is at 252. What is the maximum loss?

A. $250
B. $24,750
C. $25,000
D. $25,200

A

B. $24,750

Credit: $2.50 (premium)
Debit: $250 (strike)
$2.50 - $250 = -$247.50 * 1000 = -$24,750

The maximum loss is the strike price of 250 minus 2.50 X 100 = 24,750.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
502
Q

A customer purchases one XYZ July 50 put for $2.50 with the price of XYZ stock at 55. What is the maximum profit the customer could realize?

A. $250
B. $4,750
C. $5,000
D. Unlimited

A

B. $4,750

$50 - $2.50 = $47.50 x 100 = $4,750

50 strike price - $2.50 premium= 47.50 X 100 = $4,750 gain

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
503
Q

If a customer is short a stock, which of the following would lower risk and increase income?

A. Buy puts
B. Buy calls
C. Sell puts
D. Sell calls

A

C. Sell puts

A short stock position is bearish. You would sell puts, which is bullish and would give a partial hedge and income.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
504
Q

The options position limit on XYZ stock is 200,000 contracts. Bob (a high roller) is short 150,000 XYZ Dec 50 puts. Which of the following trades would put Bob in violation of position limits?

A. Buy 100,000 XYZ Mar 60 puts.
B. Buy 60,000 XYZ Dec 50 puts.
C. Buy 60,000 XYZ Mar 60 calls.
D. Write 100,000 XYZ Dec 60 calls.

A

C. Buy 60,000 XYZ Mar 60 calls.

Bob is short puts, a bullish position. If he buys 60,000 calls, he will have 210,000 contracts on the same side of the market. Buying 60,000 XYZ Dec 50 puts will reduce his position. Writing calls and buying puts are bearish positions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
505
Q

George bought 500 shares of ABC at 41 and wrote 5 ABC June 40 straddles. At expiration, ABC closes at 37.50 and George is exercised on his short puts. After being exercised, what is George’s stock position?

A. Long 500 shares ABC
B. Short 500 shares ABC
C. Long 1,000 shares ABC
D. Short 1,000 shares ABC

A

C. Long 1,000 shares ABC

A put writer has the duty to buy stock at the strike price. George already owned 500 shares and had to buy another 500 shares of ABC at the 40 strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
506
Q

Your client has a portfolio of Treasury bonds. You are concerned about a rise in interest rates. Which of the following would you recommend?

A. Sell T-Bond puts
B. Buy T-Bond calls
C. Buy T-Bond puts
D. Sell T-Bond calls

A

C. Buy T-Bond puts

A rise in interest rates would cause bond values to fall. Therefore, a hedge would involve buying puts on long bond positions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
507
Q

If XYZ stock is trading at 27.50, which of the following options are in-the-money?

A. XYZ August 25 put
B. XYZ July 30 call
C. XYZ July 25 call
D. XYZ August 27 put

A

C. XYZ July 25 call

The July 25 call is in the money by 2.50. A call is in the money when the price of the underlying security is higher than the strike price. A put is in the money when the price of the underlying security is lower than the strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
508
Q

An investor has a portfolio of stocks that has appreciated from an original value of $38,000 to a current value of $44,000. The portfolio has a beta factor of 1.00. If the investor wishes to hedge the portfolio through the use of OEX SEP 220 options, the investor should:

A. Buy 1 put.
B. Buy 2 puts.
C. Write 1 call.
D. Write 2 calls.

A

B. Buy 2 puts.

$44,000 (portfolio) / [ 220 (strike) x 100 (contract multiplier) ] = 2 puts
2 puts x 1.00 (beta) = 2 puts

The best way to hedge a portfolio of stocks is to purchase a put option. Since the investor wishes the use OEX 220’s and since each option has a multiplier of 100, the market value of the OEX 220 is 100 X 220, or $22,000. Hedging a portfolio of $44,000 would require two puts.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
509
Q

With the underlying stock at $120, an investor writes a naked 120 put for a premium of $200. The maximum the writer can lose is:

A. $200.
B. $11,800.
C. $200 to $12,000.
D. $200 to infinity.

A

B. $11,800.

$120 (strike) x 100 = $12,000, if stock goes to zero.
$12,000 - $200 (premium) = $11,800 loss

The maximum loss for a short put occurs if the stock goes to zero. The writer is exercised, and is forced to buy worthless stock for $120 per share. Keeping the $200 premium, the maximum loss is $11,800.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
510
Q

Option orders are transmitted to the CBOE trading floor via:

A. ECN.
B. OSS.
C. SLP.
D. EMMA.

A

B. OSS.

The CBOE’s Order Support System is an automated execution system that allows member firms to transmit option orders directly to the trading post.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
511
Q

Short 200 shares of ABC at 56. Which would lower or offset your market risk? I. Buy ABC July 55 put; II. Sell ABC July 55 put; III. Buy ABC July 55 call; IV. Sell ABC July 55 call

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

For short stock, selling puts provides a partial hedge (and income) and buying calls is a hedge.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
512
Q

Your client purchased one XYZ Sept. 120 straddle @ $9 ($3.75 for the call and $5.25 for the put). Assuming intrinsic value only, what are the breakeven points for the straddle?

A. 111 and 129
B. 120 and 129
C. 102 and 138
D. 111 and 138

A

A. 111 and 129

$120 + $9 = $129
$120 - $9 = $111

Breakeven is 111 and 129. Call strike price + total premium on the upside. Put strike price – total premium on the downside. Your client makes a profit if XYZ falls below 111 or rises above 129. He loses money at expiration if XYZ closes between 111 and 129.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
513
Q

You buy/hold an ABC Sept 50 put. Which of the following would create a straddle?

A. Sell ABC Sept 60 call
B. Buy ABC Sept 50 call
C. Sell ABC Sept 50 call
D. Buy ABC Sept 40 call

A

B. Buy ABC Sept 50 call

A straddle is either buying or selling a call and put on the same underlying security, with the same strike price and expiration date. You buy/hold an ABC Sept 50 put, so to create a straddle, you buy/hold an ABC Sept 50 call.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
514
Q

In closing a discretionary account trading in options, you would need the permission of which of the following?

A. General securities principal
B. Client
C. Supervisory manager
D. Registered options principal

A

D. Registered options principal

The registered options principal must approve both the opening and closing of discretionary accounts in options and closely review their transactions.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
515
Q

All of the following are advantages of buying calls EXCEPT:

A. Potential for unlimited gains.
B. Collecting dividends on the underlying stock.
C. Liquid secondary market.
D. Leverage.

A

B. Collecting dividends on the underlying stock.

Call holders don’t collect dividends; they don’t own the stock.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
516
Q

Your customer buys one XYZ 160 put at 10 and shorts one XYZ 150 put at 3. Which two words describe this spread? I. Debit; II. Credit; III. Bullish; IV. Bearish

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and IV

This is a debit spread, since the customer purchased one put for 10 and sold the other for 3, which resulted in a debit of $700. Further, this is a bear spread, since the customer bought a put with the high strike of 160 and sold a put with a strike price of 150. If the investor had sold the option with the lower strike price, it would have been a bull spread and credit.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
517
Q

In early May, a customer buys 100 SOP at 27 and writes one SOP Oct 30 call for 3. This is his first option transaction and takes place in his cash account. Which of the following statements is TRUE if the call is exercised?

A. Breakeven at 24, maximum profit of $300
B. Breakeven at 24, maximum profit of $600
C. Breakeven at 30, minimum profit of $300
D. Breakeven at 30, minimum profit of $600

A

B. Breakeven at 24, maximum profit of $600

$27 - $3 = $24 breakeven
$30 - $27 = $3 x 100 = $300 from sale
$3 x 100 = $300 from premium

Since the investor purchased 100 shares for $27 a share and sold the call for $300, the investor is out a net of $2,400; therefore, the breakeven point is $2,400 or $24 per share. If the market increases and the option is exercised, the owner of the stock makes the maximum profit of $600. Premium = +3; Market = -27 + 30 = +3 = -24 breakeven = +6 X 100 = $600

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
518
Q

The portfolio manager of a U.S. large-cap equity mutual fund is worried that an escalating trade war may negatively impact his fund by causing a general market decline. Which of the following hedging strategies would best protect the fund portfolio in a down market?

A. Buy Russell 2000 Index puts
B. Buy puts on the portfolio’s major holdings
C. Buy S&P 500 Index puts
D. Sell S&P 500 Index calls

A

C. Buy S&P 500 Index puts

Given the nature of the fund, the most effective hedge is to buy puts on a broad U.S. market index whose composition closely resembles that of the portfolio. The S&P 500 Index is a better match for the fund portfolio than the Russell 2000 Index, which tracks small- and medium-cap U.S. stocks. Long puts would provide a good hedge because they will increase in value if the market, and therefore the fund, declines in value. Selling calls on the S&P 500 Index is a less effective hedge than buying puts because it would limit the portfolio’s downside protection to the premiums collected. Buying puts on the fund’s major holdings would be costly and, in any event, would not succeed in protecting the portfolio as a whole.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
519
Q

A customer buys 100 shares of XYZ stock for $40 a share and sells one July 45 call for a premium of $2. What is the maximum loss that the customer would sustain?

A. $3,800
B. $4,000
C. $4,200
D. $4,500

A

A. $3,800

If stock goes to zero, customer would lose [ $40 (purchase price) + $2 (premium) ] x 100 shares = $3,800

Premium = +2 Market = -40 (stock price) = 38 breakeven X 100 = $3,800

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
520
Q

A mutual fund portfolio manager expects interest rates to increase. He wishes to protect his Treasury bond portfolio but also wishes to generate some additional income. What would be the most appropriate action for the portfolio manager to take?

A. Sell T-bond puts
B. Sell T-bond calls
C. Buy T-bond puts
D. Buy T-bond calls

A

B. Sell T-bond calls

Because the manager wishes to generate income and have the income protect against temporary declines in bond prices, he should sell calls, not buy puts.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
521
Q

An investor is bullish on a stock and wants to leverage the maximum potential gain on that stock. However, she is uncomfortable with the short-term nature of options. Which of the following might her registered representative suggest?

A. Maxi-options
B. LEAPS
C. STAGS
D. Mini-options

A

B. LEAPS

Unlike conventional options and which expire nine months after issue, LEAPS are issued with expirations out to 39 months and might appeal to this investor. Mini-options represent an underlying 10 shares (instead of 100) but still have nine month expirations. “STAGS” is a distractor.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
522
Q

An investor buys one DEF May 60 call for a premium of 6 and sells one DEF May 70 call for a premium of 3. The investor will break even at expiration of LDEF if trading at which of the following prices?

A. $60
B. $63
C. $66
D. $67

A

B. $63

Premium = -6 + 3 = -3 Market = -60 (call = right to buy) = 63

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
523
Q

With XYZ trading at 72.75, a customer buys one XYZ May 75 put for $4.50. What’s the maximum gain?

A. $450
B. $7,050
C. $7,275
D. $7,500

A

B. $7,050

[ $75 (strike) - $4.50 (premium) ] x 100 shares = $7,050

Maximum gain is $7,050, 75 strike price - $4.50 premium paid = $70.50 X 100 shares. The put holder will realize the maximum gain if XYZ is 0 at May expiration.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
524
Q

Buy 200 shares of XYZ at 35. Sell 2 XYZ June 40 calls for 2. Sell 2 XYZ June 30 puts for 1.50. What is the maximum loss?

A. $6,700
B. $7,000
C. $12,300
D. $13,000

A

C. $12,300

Credit: $2 (premium), $1.50 (premium)
Debit: $35 (purchase), $30 (short put)

The position should be treated as a covered call, long the stock, short the call, and a short put X 200. Long the stock at 35 = -35. Duty to buy on short put = -30 Market = -65. Premium received = +3 1/2 Breakeven is -61.50 X 200 = $12,300 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
525
Q

On April 25, a customer buys 100 XYZ at 62.25 and, on the next day, buys one XYZ July 60 put at 1.50. At expiration, XYZ is selling at 68.38. The customer allows the put to expire and sells the XYZ shares at 68.38. What would be his profit on the overall transactions?

A. $350.50
B. $463
C. $612.50
D. $762.50

A

B. $463

Credit: $68.38
Debit: $62.25, $1.50
$68.38 - $62.25 - $1.50 = $463

Paid $6,225 for the long position in XYZ (100 X 62.25), also paid $150 for the put option, for a total of $6,375 paid. Put option expires unexercised, and receives $6,838 for the sale of XYZ (100 X 68.38). $6,838 – $6,375 = $463 profit.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
526
Q

Prior to writing an option in a newly-opened account, which of the following must be completed and delivered? I. Options agreement; II. Margin agreement; III. Options disclosure; IV. Margin disclosure

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

The hypothecation (margin) agreement must be completed prior to the first margin trade, and writing an option is a short sale on margin. The options disclosure document must also be sent. The options agreement needs to be signed only after 15 days of account opening, and margin disclosure is with the opening of the margin account, not the first trade.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
527
Q

Sandy holds 2 XYZ Dec 60 calls. XYZ split 3:2. After the split Sandy holds 2 XYZ Dec 40 calls. A week later, she sold her calls for $3. What is the total premium she received?

A. $45
B. $450
C. $600
D. $900

A

D. $900

After a 3:2 split, the new contract size is 150 shares. $3 X 150 = $450 X 2 contracts = $900.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
528
Q

When an option writer covers a position by purchasing an option, it is a(n):

A. Closing sale.
B. Opening purchase.
C. Closing purchase.
D. Opening sale.

A

C. Closing purchase.

If the investor is the writer of an option, which is the same as being short, he can close his position by buying an options contract.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
529
Q

All of the following statements refer to European style options EXCEPT:

A. Can be exercised at any time.
B. Can only be exercised during a specific time period.
C. Are less risky than American style options.
D. Often apply to stock index options.

A

A. Can be exercised at any time.

Unlike American style options, European style options can only be exercised during a specific time period, usually the last trading day before expiration, making them less risky. Options on stock indexes are generally European style.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
530
Q

A customer writes 10 ABC April 40 puts at $4.75 when the market price of ABC is $42. What is the maximum possible gain for the investor?

A. $2,750
B. $4,750
C. $35,250
D. $40,000

A

B. $4,750

Maximum gain for an option writer is the premium received. Therefore, 4.75 X 100 = 475 X 10 = $4,750.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
531
Q

Bob sold one XYZ March 60 call for 3.50. What is the maximum gain?

A. $350
B. $600
C. $6,000
D. Unlimited

A

A. $350

The maximum gain when selling options is the premium received.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
532
Q

A customer buys 100 shares of XYZ common stock at $52 and, on the same day, buys one XYZ April 50 put at 1.50. What is the maximum possible gain to the customer upon expiration of the option?

A. $4,850
B. $5,050
C. $5,350
D. Unlimited

A

D. Unlimited

The gain is up and unlimited.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
533
Q

For the purposes of establishing option position limits, which of the following pairs of positions shall be considered on the same side of the market? I. Long calls and long puts; II. Long calls and short puts; III. Short calls and short puts; IV. Short calls and long puts

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

D. II and IV

Long calls and short puts (II) are both on the upside of the market (bullish) while short calls and long puts (IV) are both on the downside of the market (bearish).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
534
Q

The market price of ABC stock is $17.25. The ABC June 20 call:

A. Has intrinsic value.
B. Is at the money.
C. Is in the money.
D. Is out of the money.

A

D. Is out of the money.

The ABC June 20 call is out of the money. The market price of the stock is lower than the strike price. Calls are in the money when the market price is above the strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
535
Q

Long the stock. Sell a call. The call is exercised. The seller will receive the dividend if the call is exercised after the:

A. Record date.
B. X-dividend date.
C. Settlement date.
D. Payment date.

A

B. X-dividend date.

The covered call writer is long the stock and entitled to the dividend if ownership continues up through the x-dividend date. Exercise would call the stock away.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
536
Q

The purchase of a put has all the following advantages over selling short, EXCEPT:

A. Decreasing time value.
B. No requirement to make dividend payments.
C. Liquidity.
D. Lower capital commitment.

A

A. Decreasing time value.

Decreasing time value is not an advantage for premium buyers. Loss for the purchase of a put is limited to the premium paid.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
537
Q

Sell an ABC May 55 call and buy an ABC May 60 call. At what market price will every dollar of loss on the 55 call be offset by a dollar of gain on the 60 call?

A. Below 55
B. 60
C. 55
D. Above 60

A

B. 60

At 60, this credit spread reaches maximum loss. The gain is narrowing around 55 with a maximum loss at 60.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
538
Q

Purchase an ABC May 60 call for 5. Sell an ABC May 70 call for 1. When ABC is at 72, the 60 call is at 13, and the 70 call is at 3, you close your position. What is your gain or loss?

A. $600 gain
B. $800 gain
C. $1,000 gain
D. $800 loss

A

A. $600 gain

Credit: $1, $13
Debit: $5, $3

Premium Open: -5 and +1 = -4 Close: +13 and -3 = +10 +6 gain X 100 = $600 gain

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
539
Q

XYZ stock has a market price of $62. Your client writes an XYZ Sept 60 call for $5. A month later, XYZ stock has a market price of $68 and your client makes a closing purchase of the XYZ Sept 60 call at $10. What is his gain or loss?

A. $500 loss
B. $100 gain
C. $700 gain
D. $200 loss

A

A. $500 loss

$5 - $10 = -$5 x 100 = -$500

He wrote/sold the call for $500 (credit) and made a closing purchase for $1,000 (debit), for a loss of $500.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
540
Q

ABC stock is trading at $18.30 a share. The ABC June 20 put has a premium of $2.60. It has a time value of:

A. $0.90.
B. $1.30.
C. $2.60.
D. 0; it only has intrinsic value.

A

A. $0.90.

$20 - $18.30 = $1.70 intrinsic value
$2.60 (premium) - $1.70 (intrinsic) = $0.90 (time value)

The June 20 put is in the money. To determine the time value, you have to determine how much of the premium is intrinsic value (in the money), 20 (strike price) – 18.30(market price of ABC) = $1.70 (intrinsic value). Premium – intrinsic value = time value, so $2.60 - $1.70 = .90.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
541
Q

An investor holds 2 July 60 calls. If a 25% stock dividend is declared, the investor will hold:

A. 2 July 48 calls with 100 shares each.
B. 2.5 July 45 calls with 100 shares each.
C. 2 July 48 calls with 125 shares each.
D. 2.5 July 45 calls with 120 shares each.

A

C. 2 July 48 calls with 125 shares each.

The number of contracts stays the same with a stock dividend, but the shares increase and the strike price declines. The calculation for the stock would be taking the initial 100 shares X 1.25 = 125 shares. The calculation for the adjusted strike-price would be taking the initial 60 / 1.25 = 48.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
542
Q

A customer buys 100 shares of XYZ common stock at $52 and, on the same day, buys one XYZ April 50 put at 1.50. A customer will break even with this position when the market price of the stock is:

A. 48.50.
B. 50.50.
C. 52.
D. 53.50.

A

D. 53.50.

Premium is -1.50 and market is -52. Therefore, breakeven is 53.50.

Customer bought at $52 and paid $1.50 for the put. $52 + $1.50 = $53.50, which is upside breakeven. The put is not exercised.

Downside, I think would be $50 (strike price) - $2 (net between purchase price and strike price) - $1.50 (premium) = $46.50, which is not an answer.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
543
Q

You bought an XYZ March 50 call for $3. The day before March expiration, XYZ is trading at $65 and you sell the call for intrinsic value. You have:

A. Loss of $300.
B. Gain of $1,200.
C. Loss of $1,200.
D. Gain of $300.

A

B. Gain of $1,200.

Intrinsic value for a call is stock price – strike price = 15. You paid $3 (a debit) for the call and sold it for $15 (a credit) for a gain of $1,200.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
544
Q

Short 1 ABC May 45 call at 1.50 and buy 1 ABC May 40 call at 3.50. This position is I. Debit. II. Bear. III. Bull. IV. Credit.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

Buying the lower strike price on a call spread means that your position is debit. You pay more premium than you receive. Debit call is bullish.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
545
Q

A customer has been approved for a margin account. The customer wishes to sell options. The first trade can occur:

A. Fifth business day.
B. Today.
C. Within 15 days.
D. Next day.

A

B. Today.

The customer may immediately trade once his margin account is approved.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
546
Q

Your client is bearish on ABC stock. Which of the following option spreads might you recommend? I. Buy 1 ABC July 50 call, sell 1 ABC July 55 call. II. Buy 1 ABC July 55 call, sell 1 ABC July 50 call. III. Buy 1 ABC July 55 put, sell 1 ABC July 50 put. IV. Buy 1 ABC July 50 put, sell 1 ABC July 55 put.

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

II and III are both bearish. II is a credit call and III a debit put spread.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
547
Q

XYZ Corporation declares a 20% stock dividend. What effect will this have on XYZ options contracts?

A. Contract size will increase and strike prices will be adjusted lower.
B. Contract size will increase and strike prices will remain the same.
C. The number of contracts will increase and strike prices will be adjusted lower.
D. The number of contracts will increase and strike prices will remain the same.

A

A. Contract size will increase and strike prices will be adjusted lower.

Fractional stock splits and stock dividends increase contract size. Strike prices are adjusted proportionately lower.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
548
Q

A customer writes an XYZ Dec 15 put for $2. At expiration the market price of XYZ is $12 and the put is exercised and the customer immediately sells 100 shares at $12. What is gain or loss?

A. Profit of $100
B. Loss of $100
C. Profit of $200
D. Loss of $200

A

B. Loss of $100

Credit: $2, $12
Debit: $15

The market price of XYZ is $12. The put was exercised and the customer has to buy 100 shares of stock at $15 (debit) that was sold for $12 (credit), so $300 was lost on the stock. However, the premium of $200 (credit) was received when the put was written, so the loss is $100.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
549
Q

Sarah wrote/sold the following straddle: 1 XYZ Oct 20 put for 5 and 1 XYZ Oct 20 call for 3. At October expiration, XYZ stock is at 29. The Oct 20 put expires and the Oct 20 call is exercised with XYZ at 29. Sarah buys stock at $29 and closes her position. What is the profit or loss?

A. Profit $400
B. Loss $400
C. Profit $100
D. Loss $100

A

D. Loss $100

Credit: $5 (premium), $3 (premium), $20 (call strike)
Debit: $29 (purchase)

$5 + $3 + $20 - $29 = -$1 x 100 = -$100

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
550
Q

A customer shorts one ABC Jan 65 call for a premium of 4 and holds one ABC Apr 70 call for a premium of 1. If the market price of the underlying security is 62, what is the probable result?

A. $300 loss
B. $300 gain
C. $800 gain
D. $800 loss

A

B. $300 gain

Credit: $4 (premium)
Debit: $1 (premium)
$4 - $1 = $3 x 100 = $300

If the market price remains at 62, the options should expire since they’re both out-of-money. This would give the customer a $300 profit.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
551
Q

In early October, a customer buys 100 shares of XYZ stock at $50 per share and, at the same time, writes an XYZ April 50 call option for a premium of $8 per share. What is the term used to describe this position?

A. A covered write
B. Either an uncovered writer position or a naked position
C. An uncovered writer’s position
D. A naked position

A

A. A covered write

An investor who buys stock and then writes a call option on those shares is writing a covered call option. This position is known as a covered write.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
552
Q

Which of the following are combined with a long call position in XYZ in order to determine compliance with the exchange position limit rules? I. Long XYZ puts; II. Short XYZ calls; III. Short XYZ puts

A. I only
B. II only
C. III only
D. II and III only

A

C. III only

The position limit rules were developed to prevent investors from putting an excessive “bet” on a specific directional move in the market price of a security. Investors bet that market prices will either rise or fall. Here the investor with a long call position is betting that the market price will go up. An investor who takes a short position in XYZ puts also stands to benefit if the market price goes up since the put will expire and he will keep his premium.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
553
Q

The husband of an options clients also trades options, but does so in a separate account at another brokerage firm. Both of them are currently hedging short sale positions in stock VVV with options. However, the options client is long 32,000 VVV calls, while her husband is short 30,000 VVV puts. The current contract position limit for VVV stock is 60,000 contracts. Which of the following applies to this situation?

A. This couple’s current options positions are in violation of the position limit rules.
B. The position limit rules apply to institutional but not individual investors.
C. The position limit rules do not apply to this couple because they trade options in separate accounts at different firms.
D. This couple’s current options positions are not in violation of the position limit rules.

A

A. This couple’s current options positions are in violation of the position limit rules.

The options exchanges impose limits on the maximum number of puts and calls on a given security that may be held or written on the same side of the market by a single investor or group of investors acting in concert or under common control. These limits apply to all investors, including institutions. Married couples are viewed as acting in concert or under common control, and as such are subject to the limits even if they maintain options accounts at different brokerage firms. In this case, a violation would occur if the couple exceeded the 60,000 contract position limit for VVV stock with combined positions on the same side of the market - that is, on the bull or bear side of the market. The long calls and short puts they own are both bullish. And since they have a combined 62,000 contracts on the bull side of the market, they are in violation of the position limit rules.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
554
Q

A customer has requested that an account be opened for trading options. Which of the following would the registered representative do in addition to mailing out the options agreement form?

A. Send an options disclosure document
B. Obtain the approval of a manager or principal
C. Complete a customer suitability form
D. Consult the ROP

A

A. Send an options disclosure document

Suitability is already determined at account opening, and the ROP (registered options principal), upon approving the account, would instruct you to send out the options disclosure document.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
555
Q

A client owns 100 shares of ABC stock purchased 2 years ago at $28 per share. The stock is now trading at $42 and is widely predicted to be headed for a decline. What options strategy could the client use that would protect her gain yet still allow her to benefit from an upward move in the stock if current predictions are incorrect?

A. Sell a put on ABC
B. Buy a call on ABC
C. Buy a put on ABC
D. Sell a call on ABC

A

C. Buy a put on ABC

This is a classic hedging question. It is important to remember that hedges always have the opposite market attitude of the underlying primary investment position. In this case, the client’s primary investment position is that she owns the stock, which means she is bullish on the stock. To hedge that long position, she must use options positions that are bearish. Of the four potential answers, buying a call and selling a put can immediately be eliminated because they are bullish in nature. By contrast, long puts and short calls are both bearish in nature, and both could be used to hedge a long stock position. However, only the long put position would allow the client to achieve both objectives noted in the question. If the stock declines, she can exercise her right to sell it and preserve her gain, or the gain in the option’s value will offset the losses on her stock position; if the stock goes up, she is out her put premium but will fully participate in the price gain. If, on the other hand, she sells a call on the stock, her downside protection is limited to the premium she collects, and on the upside, the stock could be called away from her, preventing her from benefiting from further appreciation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
556
Q

The options position limit on ABC stock is 75,000 contracts on the same side of the market. Which of the following positions would violate the position limit?

A. Short 50,000 ABC June 60 calls, Long 50,000 ABC June 70 calls
B. Long 20,000 ABC June 50 calls, Long 70,000 June 50 puts, Long, 40,000 ABC Sept 55 calls
C. Long 50,000 ABC June 60 calls, Long 25,000 ABC June 50 puts, Long 10,000 ABC Sept 40 puts
D. Long 50,000 ABC June 60 calls, Long 25,000 ABC Sept 55 calls, and Short 10,000 ABC June 50 puts

A

D. Long 50,000 ABC June 60 calls, Long 25,000 ABC Sept 55 calls, and Short 10,000 ABC June 50 puts

Long calls and short puts are on the same side of the market (bullish). Different expiration dates and strike prices are irrelevant.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
557
Q

An investor wants to purchase ABC stock, which is currently trading at $38 per share, because he believes it has excellent long-term appreciation potential. Near-term, however, he expects the stock to decline in price due to general market weakness. If he wants to purchase the stock below its current market value and generate additional income, he could:

A. Write a put at $35.
B. Buy a $40 call and exercise the option.
C. Write a call at $35.
D. Buy a $40 put and exercise the option.

A

A. Write a put at $35.

The two responses that have the investor exercising the option can immediately be eliminated because the investor is looking to generate (collect) premium income, not pay it out by buying options. Writing a call and writing a put would both generate premium income, but only the short put position would achieve the additional objective of potentially enabling him to acquire the stock below its current market price of $38. The reason: If the stock does indeed decline in price near-term, the put would likely be exercised, allowing the put writer (the investor) to buy the stock at $35 per share. Writing a call, by contrast, would obligate the investor to sell, not to buy, the stock, and since he does not own the stock, would expose him to potentially unlimited losses if the stock rose in value. Another clue to correctly choosing between the writing a call and writing a put answers is to look at the market attitude of the two strategies. Put writing is a bullish strategy that is in keeping with the investor’s long-term view of the stock, while call writing is a bearish strategy that conflicts with that view.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
558
Q

In an options contract, which party receives the premium and is obligated to buy the underlying security at the strike price?

A. Put holder
B. Put writer
C. Call holder
D. Call writer

A

B. Put writer

In an options contract, the put writer collects the premium and is obligated to buy the underlying security at the strike price. Remember that the option writer – for calls or puts – always has the obligation to sell or buy the underlying security and receives the premium.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
559
Q

In an effort to maintain orderliness when taking option orders and transactions, the specialist/order book official uses a/an:

A. First come/first serve rule (FIFO).
B. Intrinsic value method.
C. Random selection process.
D. Trading rotation.

A

D. Trading rotation.

The specialist/order book official always starts the taking of orders, in the series of options assigned to him, with an opening rotation. When the market closes, the system implemented to take orders is the closing rotation.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
560
Q

A simultaneous investment in different types options on the opposite side of the market is a:

A. Credit spread.
B. Straddle.
C. Horizontal spread.
D. Hedged position.

A

B. Straddle.

A straddle involves the purchase or sale of a call and a put (different types of options) that are on the opposite sides of the market.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
561
Q

An investor writes one ABC Oct 50 straddle, receiving 3.25 for the call and 2.25 for the put. What is the maximum gain?

A. 2.50
B. 3.50
C. 4.50
D. 5.50

A

D. 5.50

The maximum gain is total premium received is 3.25 + 2.25 = 5.50.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
562
Q

Which of the following identifies uncovered put writing? I. Unlimited loss; II. Bearish on the stock; III. Bullish on the stock; IV. Unlimited gain

A. III and IV
B. I and II
C. II only
D. III only

A

D. III only

Selling a put uncovered gain is premium; loss is breakeven down to zero. The position is bullish because there is downside risk.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
563
Q

Which TWO of the following are used to determine position limits? I. Debit puts and credit puts; II. Credit calls and debit puts; III. Debit calls and credit puts; IV. Debit calls and credit calls

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

C. II and III

Credit calls and debit puts are on the same side of the market (bearish). Debit calls and credit puts are on the same side of the market (bullish).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
564
Q

An option trader sells 1 ABC Apr 50 put for 1 and buys 1 ABC Apr 60 put for 8 with the market in ABC at 54. What are the trader’s maximum profit, maximum loss, and breakeven point?

A. $600, $400, 54
B. $700, $300, 57
C. $300, $700, 53
D. $700, $700, 67

A

C. $300, $700, 53

Credit: $1, $60-$50=$10
Debit: $8

The position is a debit put spread. Premium (max loss -7(00), max gain +3(00) and 60 minus 50 strike price equals 10. Breakeven is net premium of 7 subtracted from the higher strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
565
Q

An options client owns 1 ABC July 30 call contract. ABC announces a 50% stock dividend. How will this development impact the client’s contract?

A. The ABC call will be adjusted to contain 150 shares with an exercise price of 20.
B. The current contract will remain unchanged and an additional contract will be issued containing 50 shares with an exercise price of 30.
C. Don’t worry about it; stock dividends do not impact options contracts.
D. The ABC call will be adjusted to contain 150 shares with an exercise price of 45.

A

A. The ABC call will be adjusted to contain 150 shares with an exercise price of 20.

Options contracts are adjusted in response to corporate actions or events such as even and uneven stock splits, reverse stock splits, stock dividends, rights offerings, mergers and acquisitions and spin-offs. Specifically, the underlying terms of the contract are adjusted to ensure that the valuation and total equity/obligation of the contract remain unchanged. When a company pays a stock dividend, the number of contracts remains the same, but the number of shares represented by the contract rises. In addition, the strike price is adjusted down so that the total exercise value remains unchanged. In this example, the exercise value of the original contract was $3,000 (100 shares x $30 strike price). After the 50% stock dividend payout, the contract is adjusted to contain 50% more shares, or 150 shares in total, and the strike price is reduced to $20 so that the total exercise price remains $3,000. It is important to note that options contracts are typically not adjusted for ordinary cash dividends.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
566
Q

What is the maximum loss for selling an XYZ 60 call for 3.50 when XYZ is at 70 and the call is at 11?

A. 350
B. 1,100
C. 2,250
D. Unlimited

A

D. Unlimited

A naked call has unlimited loss.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
567
Q

An option trader sells 1 ABC Apr 50 put for 1 and buys 1 ABC Apr 60 put for 8 with the market in ABC at 54. The trader will profit if I. Both options expire unexercised. II. Both options are exercised. III. The difference in premiums widens to more than 7 points. IV. The difference in premiums narrows to less than 7 points.

A. II or IV
B. I or III
C. I or IV
D. II or III

A

D. II or III

The position of debit will profit if options are exercised and premiums widen.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
568
Q

A customer gives a registered representative an order for the sale of an option position. The order is:

A. Discretionary.
B. Authorized only if approved by the registered options principal.
C. Unauthorized unless done in a margin account.
D. Unsolicited.

A

D. Unsolicited.

A customer giving the representative an order is unsolicited.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
569
Q

Sell a 15 put for 2. What is the maximum loss?

A. $200
B. $500
C. $1,300
D. $1,500

A

C. $1,300

Premium is -2, and market is -15 = -13 X 100 = $1,300. Strike price 15 minus – 2 premium received = 13 X 100 = $1,300

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
570
Q

ABC stock is trading at $29. Jan thinks that ABC stock is going lower so she buys 10 ABC Feb 30 puts @ $2.25. The following week ABC rallied to $35 and Jan sold her puts for $0.75. What is gain or loss?

A. A loss of $600
B. A loss of $1,500
C. A loss of $150
D. A gain of $1,500

A

B. A loss of $1,500

$0.75 - $2.25 = -$1.50 x 10 x 100 = -$1,500

Jan paid $2.25 (a debit) and sold for $0.75 (a credit) = ($1.50) X 100 X 10 contracts = $1,500 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
571
Q

The disclosure document of the options clearing corporation must be sent:

A. 30 days after the account opening.
B. At or prior to the first trade approval.
C. Within 15 days before first trade.
D. Within 15 days after first trade.

A

B. At or prior to the first trade approval.

The disclosure document of the options clearing corporation must be sent to the customer prior to the account approval by a registered option principal, or ROP.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
572
Q

When must a client receive an option’s disclosure document?

A. Before the customer’s first statement
B. At confirmation of the trade
C. At or before the account is approved for trading
D. At or before account approval

A

D. At or before account approval

A client receives an option’s disclosure document at or before account approval.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
573
Q

What is the meaning of the term “strike” price as used in an options contract?

A. The strike price is the value at which the option can be exercised throughout the option period.
B. It is the price the seller of the option pays if the option contract expires.
C. This is the price any investor will be willing to pay for the security during the option period.
D. It is the cost of the option in dollars at the time it is sold by the option “writer.”

A

A. The strike price is the value at which the option can be exercised throughout the option period.

An option denotes the right (but not the obligation) to buy or sell an underlying security at a designated price, known as the strike or exercise price, at any time throughout the option period. Option contracts are written with a definite start and expiration time.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
574
Q

The writer of a call option opens with a premium of 8 and closes his option position at ¼. What is the loss or gain?

A. $775 gain
B. $750 gain
C. $750 loss
D. $775 loss

A

A. $775 gain

$8 - $0.25 = $7.75

The answer is $775 gain, calculated as $800 (credit received by the writer) minus $25 (debit paid by the writer when the position is closed out).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
575
Q

You buy 100 shares of XYZ at 48 and buy an XYZ May 50 put for 5. The stock is sold at 59 and the put for 1. What is your gain or loss?

A. $400 loss
B. $700 profit
C. $700 loss
D. $1,500 profit

A

B. $700 profit

Credit: $59, $1
Debit: $48, $5
$59 + $1 - $48 - $5 = $7 x 100 = $700

If premium is -5 and stock/strike price is -48 = -53. If premium is +1 and stock/strike price is +59 = +60. Profit is -53 + 60 = +7(00)

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
576
Q

Sell short 100 shares of XYZ at 46 in a margin account. Buy an XYZ July 45 call for 4. XYZ is at 50 when the call is exercised. What is your gain or loss?

A. $300 loss
B. $500 loss
C. $400 gain
D. $500 gain

A

A. $300 loss

Credit: $46
Debit: $4, $45
$46 - $4 - $45 = -$3 x 100 = -$300

Paid premium of $400, then paid $4,500 when call exercised, $4,900 total paid. Received $4,600 when sold stock. So $4,600 received minus $4,900 paid = $300 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
577
Q

Buy 100 shares of LMN at 44 Sell LMN May 45 call. At what market price could there be a loss?

A. Above 44
B. Above 45
C. Below 44
D. Below 45

A

C. Below 44

Loss is in the stock market price going down below the purchase price of the long stock, so below 44 is the price point there could be a loss, depending on the premium received for the 45 call.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
578
Q

A customer purchases one XYZ July 50 put for $2.50 with the price of XYZ stock at 55. The maximum loss the customer could sustain is:

A. $250.
B. $5,000.
C. $5,500.
D. Unlimited.

A

A. $250.

The buyers of options lose only their premium (2.50 X 100 = $250).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
579
Q

A customer buys an XYZ Aug 50 put for 2.50. With XYZ trading at 52.50, what is the customer’s maximum loss?

A. $250
B. $1,050
C. $5,250
D. Unlimited

A

A. $250

The customer bought a put. Maximum loss when buying options = premium, $250.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
580
Q

A client wants to discuss the assignment of his short call option on XYZ. The market price is $1.00 out of the money but the market price has been increasing steadily. He asks when he is required to deliver the stock. Which of the following is the correct means of option assignment for his call?

A. The Options Clearing Corporation decides which broker/dealer will deliver the securities. Then the broker/dealer will assign one of their clients by random selection. The client might not be assigned.
B. FINRA makes the random selection and assigns the investor through notice to the broker/dealer.
C. The Options Clearing Corporation will notify the client that he must arrange delivery with his broker/dealer.
D. The client must deliver the stock to the Options Clearing Corporation when the security is in-the-money. They will decide whose securities will be delivered when exercised.

A

A. The Options Clearing Corporation decides which broker/dealer will deliver the securities. Then the broker/dealer will assign one of their clients by random selection. The client might not be assigned.

The process of assignment for options is random on the part of both the Options Clearing Corporation (OCC and the broker/dealer. When an investor wishes to exercise his option, he notifies the broker/dealer. The broker/dealer notifies the OCC and then the OCC randomly selects a broker/dealer that has an open position to be exercised. That broker/dealer then randomly selects one of their clients to deliver securities to or to buy the securities when assigned a put option. FINRA is not involved.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
581
Q

Which of the following options is trading at parity?

A. 40 call with a $3 premium when the current market value of the underlying stock is trading at $40
B. 40 call with a $3 premium and the current market value of the underlying stock is trading at $43
C. 50 put with a $3 premium when the current market value of the underlining stock is at $53
D. 50 put with a $3 premium when the current market value of the underlining stock is at $50

A

B. 40 call with a $3 premium and the current market value of the underlying stock is trading at $43

Parity exists when the underlying stock is trading at the same value as the breakeven of the option. If the stock’s current market value is $43, a $40 call with a premium of $3 is at parity. This usually happens just prior to expiration because there’s no longer any time value associated with the option.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
582
Q

A customer writes 10 ABC April 40 puts at 4.75 when the market price of ABC is $42. ABC stock rises to 63.38, and the customer closes the position at .12. What is the gain or loss?

A. $19,625 loss
B. $4,750 loss
C. $4,630 gain
D. $125 gain

A

C. $4,630 gain

Credit: $4.75
Debit: $0.12
$4.75 - $0.12 = $4,630

The customer wrote 10 puts @ 4.75 (credit), for a total of 4.75 X 100 (shares per option contract) X 10 (put contracts) = $4,750. The customer then purchased them back @ .12 (debit), for a total of .12 X 100 X 10 = $120. $4,750 – $120 = $4,630 gain.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
583
Q

The exchange halts trading in a stock on which listed options are traded. Who halts trading in the options on that stock?

A. The specialist
B. The SEC
C. The options exchange
D. The issuer

A

C. The options exchange

The options exchange, by agreement with the stock exchange, honors trading halts.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
584
Q

Your client wrote 5 XYZ June 60 straddles @ $8.25. What is the potential maximum gain and loss?

A. Maximum gain is $4,125 and maximum loss is $30,000.
B. Maximum gain is $4,125 and maximum loss is unlimited.
C. Maximum gain is unlimited and maximum loss is $4,125.
D. Maximum gain is $4,125 and maximum loss is $25,875.

A

B. Maximum gain is $4,125 and maximum loss is unlimited.

On a short straddle, the maximum gain is the premium received, $8.25 X 100 = $825 X 5 = $4,125, and the maximum loss is unlimited.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
585
Q

Which of the following applies to put option contracts?

A. The put writer has the obligation to sell at the strike price.
B. The put writer has the right to sell to sell at the strike price.
C. The put holder has the obligation to buy at the strike price.
D. The put holder has the right to sell at the strike price.

A

D. The put holder has the right to sell at the strike price.

A put option is a contract that gives the put holder the right to sell 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price (also called the exercise price), until expiration. Long put – right to sell. Short put – obligation to buy.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
586
Q

Your customer buys an XYZ September 60 put at 6 and sells one XYZ September 50 put for 1. When the market is at 56 and the options are trading at intrinsic value, what is your gain or loss?

A. $100 loss
B. $400 gain
C. $500 loss
D. $500 gain

A

A. $100 loss

Credit: $1, ($60 - $56 = $4)
Debit: $6
$4 + $1 - $6 = -$1 x 100 = -$100

Premium is -5 Market is +60 minus premium = +55 and -56 = +4 -5 (premium) +4 (market) = -1 X 100 = $100 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
587
Q

An investor is long 1 July 50 put. After writing 1 July 45 put, this position is a I. Credit spread. II. Debit spread. III. Horizontal spread. IV. Vertical spread.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

D. II and IV

The spread is debit (buy the higher put) and vertical (difference in strike price).

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
588
Q

A registered representative wants to increase his sales and decides to increase his option business. He sends a letter to all of his customers discussing covered call writing, but he makes no specific recommendations. When must the OCC Disclosure Statement be delivered?

A. Within 15 days after the account has been approved for option writing
B. At or prior to the time the client receives the letter
C. At or prior to the opening of the account
D. At or prior to account approval

A

B. At or prior to the time the client receives the letter

The options disclosure document must be sent prior to or upon sales literature being sent.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
589
Q

A customer buys a June 30 put for 1 after having purchased 100 shares of the same stock for $34 per share. What is the maximum possible gain?

A. $2,900
B. $3,300
C. $3,500
D. Unlimited

A

D. Unlimited

Since the customer owns stock and the stock may rise infinitely, there is an unlimited gain potential.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
590
Q

In opening an options account, all the following must be completed, EXCEPT:

A. Delivering the options disclosure document to the customer.
B. Completing the new account form.
C. Reviewing and approving the first transaction.
D. Receiving a signed options agreement from the customer.

A

D. Receiving a signed options agreement from the customer.

The customer has a 15-day free look on the account agreement beginning on the date the agreement is given.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
591
Q

Which of the following would be reviewed in accordance with SEC position limits?

A. Long puts and short calls
B. Short puts and long puts
C. Long puts and long calls
D. Short puts and short calls

A

A. Long puts and short calls

Position limits place restrictions on the number of positions on the same side of the market, either both bullish or both bearish. Both long puts and short calls are bearish.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
592
Q

Unless instructed to the contrary, the Options Clearing Corporation (OCC) will automatically exercise all options that are:

A. At-the-money.
B. Out-of-the-money.
C. In-the-money by $50 or more.
D. At least $0.01 in-the-money.

A

D. At least $0.01 in-the-money.

If a long option expires, the client will lose the full premium paid. To help minimize these losses, if an option is in-the-money by 0.01 or more the option will be automatically exercised by the OCC, unless the holder instructs the OCC to let it expire unexercised.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
593
Q

Randy bought 500 shares of ABC stock @ 34. He wrote 5 ABC Aug 35 straddles @ $6.15. At August expiration, ABC closes at 37.50 and Randy is exercised on his short calls. What is his profit or loss?

A. $3,575 profit
B. $3,075 loss
C. $1,250 loss
D. $500 profit

A

A. $3,575 profit

Credit: $6.15, $35
Debit: $34

Randy’s profit is $3,575. At expiration, he was assigned and had to sell his long stock @ 35 for a one point profit plus the premium received for the short straddle. $1 + $6.15 = $7.15 X 100 = $715 X 5 (straddles & stock) = $3,575.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
594
Q

What is the maximum potential loss when a client holds a long straddle on a common stock?

A. Premium paid
B. Unlimited
C. Strike price of long put – Net Premium
D. Strike price of long call + Net premium

A

A. Premium paid

When you are long you are the buyer. In a straddle, you buy both a put and a call. The maximum loss is the premium paid. In this case, both options expire worthless, which occurs if the straddle expires with the market price at the strike price.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
595
Q

If you buy a XYZ July 50 put for 7 and sell a XYZ July 40 put for 1, your position is I. Bullish. II. Bearish. III. Debit. IV. Credit.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

You buy the higher, more valuable strike price of the put spread, so you establish the spread for a debit. A debit put spread is bearish.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
596
Q

Rich holds one XYZ May 30 call. XYZ splits 3:1. What is Rich’s new option position?

A. 3 XYZ May 10 calls
B. 1 XYZ May 10 call
C. 3 XYZ May 15 calls
D. 2 XYZ May 15 calls

A

A. 3 XYZ May 10 calls

Remember: Whenever you have a stock split that is even, such as a 3-for-1, the number of contracts goes up and the strike price goes down, accordingly. In this case, Rich owns one contract with the strike price at 30. After a three-for-one stock split, Rich will own three contracts with the strike price of $10. It’s important to remember that the aggregate value and exercise will remain at $3,000.

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
597
Q

A customer shorts one ABC Jan 65 call for a premium of 4 and holds one ABC 70 call for a premium of 1. What is the customer’s maximum potential loss?

A. $0
B. $200
C. $300
D. Unlimited

A

B. $200

$65 - $70 = -$5 (net spread @ $70 CMV) + $4 (put premium) - $1 (call premium) = -$2 x 100 shares = -$200

On this credit spread, if the option is exercised, the customer will lose $200. This is equal to the difference in the strike prices minus the net premiums. BUY 70 call for 1 minus SELL 65 call for 4 = 5 market minus 3 premium = 2 OR Premium = +4 minus 1 = +3 Market = +65 minus 70 = -5 = -2 loss

How well did you know this?
1
Not at all
2
3
4
5
Perfectly
598
Q

A customer who is long a call may have the following benefits, EXCEPT:

A. Profit from an increase in the price of the underlying stock.
B. Postpone a purchase decision on the underlying stock.
C. Hedge a short sale of the stock.
D. Diminishing time.

A

D. Diminishing time.

Long a call can benefit from all except diminishing time because that is a disadvantage to long options positions. Long positions need time for the stock to be able to move in their favor in order for them to benefit.

599
Q

American style options may be exercised:

A. At any time up to the expiration cut-off time.
B. After the expiration cut-off time.
C. In the first 10 days only.
D. During a specific time period only.

A

A. At any time up to the expiration cut-off time.

American style options can be exercised any time up to the cut-off time on expiration day. European style options can only be exercised during a specific time period, usually the last trading day before expiration.

600
Q

Sell a 15 put for 2. If the option is exercised against you when the market is $12, what is your gain or loss?

A. Loss of $100
B. Profit of $200
C. Loss of $200
D. Profit of $100

A

A. Loss of $100

Premium is +2 and market is -15 = -13 plus 12 = -1 X 100 = $100 loss. When the option is exercised, the investor is forced to purchase stock at $15 when it is trading at $12. This $3 loss is offset by the $2 premium received = $1 loss X 100 = $100.

601
Q

Writing a straddle is:

A. Writing an equal number of puts and calls with the same strike price and expiration date, on the same underlying security.
B. Buying calls and writing puts with the same strike price and expiration date.
C. Writing calls on an existing long stock position.
D. The purchase of an equal number of puts and calls with the same strike price and expiration date, on the same underlying security.

A

A. Writing an equal number of puts and calls with the same strike price and expiration date, on the same underlying security.

Writing a straddle involves writing an equal number of puts and calls with the same strike price and expiration date, on the same underlying security. Investors who write straddles are anticipating low volatility in the underlying security.

602
Q

An investor with no other position writes one ABC July 80 call for a premium of 10 and buys 100 shares of ABC stock for $85 per share. If the customer then had a closing purchase for 10 and sold the 100 shares of ABC for $88 per share, the result is a:

A. $300 profit.
B. $300 loss.
C. $800 profit.
D. $800 loss.

A

A. $300 profit.

Credit: $10, $88
Debit: $85, $10
$10 + $88 - $85 - $10 = $3 x 100 = $300

Situation 1: Premium is +10 and strike price is -85 = -75 breakeven. Situation 2: Premium is -10 and strike price is +88 = +78 close out. This equals a +3 gain X 100 shares = $300 profit.

603
Q

A customer buys an XYZ May 60 call for $3.25. What is the customer’s maximum potential loss?

A. The entire value of the stock
B. 20% of the stock, less out of the market amount, including the current premium
C. Unlimited
D. 100% of the premium

A

D. 100% of the premium

The customer buying an option can only lose the premium.

604
Q

An investor with no other position writes one ABC July 80 call for a premium of 10 and buys 100 shares of ABC stock for $85 per share. What is the client’s breakeven point?

A. 70
B. 75
C. 90
D. 95

A

B. 75

Since the investor purchased 100 shares of stock for $85 a share and has sold a call option for a premium of 10, the client is actually out only $75 per share.

605
Q

An investor purchases 100 shares at $100 per share and, on the same day, sells a 100 call for 4.25. What is the maximum loss that could be realized by the investor?

A. $425
B. $9,575
C. $10,425
D. The investor would lose nothing.

A

B. $9,575

If the stock should fall to zero, the investor has lost his entire investment, less the premium received on the call. Maximum loss is therefore $9,575. $10,000- $425 = $9,575.

606
Q

An investor writes an XYZ May 25 put and buys an XYZ May 35 put. This position I. Is a Credit spread II. Is a debit spread. III. Loses money if premiums narrow. IV. Loses money if premiums widen.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

Buy a 35 put and write a 25 put is a debit put spread. A higher strike price put is more expensive than the lower strike price put so the investor established the spread for a debit; the investor loses money if the spread narrows (goes down in value).

607
Q

What are the benefits of writing covered calls?

A. Income and full hedge
B. Income and a partial hedge
C. Unlimited capital appreciation
D. No downside risk

A

B. Income and a partial hedge

A covered write provides a stock investor with a partial hedge and income. The tradeoff is limited capital appreciation. The investor still has most downside risk associated with stock ownership because only a small part of the risk is offset by the premium received from selling calls.

608
Q

Which TWO of the following positions are bullish? I. Long calls II. Short calls III. Long puts IV. Short puts

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and IV

Long calls and short puts are both bullish positions. If the underlying security goes higher, calls will increase in value and puts will go down in value. If call holders exercise their calls, they will be long stock. If put writers are assigned, they will be long stock.

609
Q

A customer writes an XYZ May 70 call for 1 and purchases an XYZ May 60 call for 4. At what market price is every dollar of gain on the 60 call offset by a dollar of loss on the 70 call?

A. 63
B. 64
C. 60
D. 70

A

D. 70

At 70, gains are maximized. At 70, the customer has a duty to sell as an offset to the right to buy at 60.

610
Q

Your customer buys 100 shares of XYZ at 40 and writes an XYZ April 40 call for 5. What is the maximum loss?

A. $500
B. $3,500
C. $4,000
D. Unlimited

A

B. $3,500

Price paid for stock $40 – premium received $5 = $35 x 100 = $3,500

611
Q

ABC stock is selling at $153 per share on April 30th. A July call option is selling for $7.30 and has a strike price of $155. This option is:

A. Out of the money.
B. Indeterminable with the information provided.
C. In the money.
D. At the money.

A

A. Out of the money.

A call option is out of the money when the market price is below the strike price. The option premium price does not matter. The call option gives the investor the right to buy the stock at the strike price before expiration. In this scenario, the option is out of the money because the investor can buy the stock in the marketplace now at a lower price. It does not make sense for the investor to exercise this option now.

612
Q

A customer buys a June 30 put for 1 after having purchased 100 shares of the same stock for $34 per share. If the market price moves to $41 per share and the stock is sold in the market, the result is a:

A. $500 loss.
B. $600 loss.
C. $600 gain.
D. $700 gain.

A

C. $600 gain.

$41 - $34 - $1 = $6 x 100 shares = $600

If the market price moved to 41, the put would expire (worthless as it is) out-of-the-money by 11 points. The customer could then sell the stock in the market for the current price of $41 a share, resulting in a net profit of $600. Premium is -1; Market is -34; This equals -35 + 41 (current stock price) = +6 = $600

613
Q

A customer writes/sells 1 ABC July 25 call @ $4. What is the maximum loss?

A. $400
B. $24,600
C. $25,000
D. Unlimited

A

D. Unlimited

Call writers maximum loss is unlimited.

614
Q

An investor buys 10 XYZ May 40 calls for 8 and sells 10 XYZ May 50 calls for 3. He closes his positions by selling the 40 calls for 5 and buying the 50 calls for 1. What is his gain or loss?

A. $1,000 loss
B. $900 loss
C. $500 gain
D. $100 gain

A

A. $1,000 loss

Opens at -8 + 3 = -5 Closes at +5 minus 1 = +4 -5 + 4 = -1 X 100 X 10 = $1,000 loss

615
Q

During an account-review meeting, an options customer asks for a comparison of short call with a short call spread on a stock. All of the following are correct EXCEPT both positions:

A. Have a limited maximum loss.
B. Are bearish.
C. Generate premium income.
D. Have a limited maximum gain.

A

A. Have a limited maximum loss.

Both short calls and short call spreads generate premium income, and both are bearish strategies in which the seller wins when the price of the underlying stock remains flat or declines. Moreover, all call writing strategies have a limited upside that, at most, is equal to the premium collected. The key difference between the two strategies lies in their risk. If an investor writes a “naked” short call in which he does not own the underlying stock, he faces a potentially unlimited loss if the stock price heads north and the option is exercised against him. This will force him to buy the stock in the open market and sell it for a loss at the agreed upon strike price. In a short call spread, by contrast, the investor simultaneously buys and sells a call on the stock, collecting more premium on the short side than he pays on the long side. This limits his potential loss in an up market, but also reduces his maximum gain to the difference between the premium collected and the premium paid.

616
Q

You are long 100 shares of XYZ at 45 and sell an XYZ May 45 call.

A. Your loss is premium.
B. Your loss is unlimited.
C. Your gain is unlimited.
D. Your gain is premium.

A

D. Your gain is premium.

617
Q

A customer sells an ABC July 50 put for 1.50 and buys an ABC July 55 put for 3. The market value of ABC is 45, and the options are trading at their intrinsic value. What is the gain or loss?

A. Loss of $350
B. Gain of $350
C. Loss of $750
D. Gain of $750

A

B. Gain of $350

Premium is -3 + 1.50 = -1.50; Market is +55 minus 50 = +5; -1.50 + 5 = +3.50 X 100 = $350 gain.

-$1.50 (net premium)
-$5.00 (short put)
+$10.00 (long put)

618
Q

Which of the following hedging positions best reduces risk?

A. Sell short 200 shares of ABC stock and buy 1 ABC call
B. Sell short 100 shares of ABC stock and sell 1 ABC put
C. Buy 100 shares of ABC stock and buy 1 ABC put
D. Buy 100 shares of ABC stock and sell 1 ABC call

A

C. Buy 100 shares of ABC stock and buy 1 ABC put

In hedging, the most effective protection always comes from buying calls and puts. In other words, it is always best to buy. Long option positions are highly protective because, if properly constructed, they can completely offset the losses on a long stock position if the stock price falls, or on a short stock position if the stock price rises. Depending on the strike price they select, investors can use long option positions to fine tune the degree of protection they wish to achieve. Short calls and puts are less effective hedges because they afford protection only to the extent of the premium collected. Remember: Long options provide full protection, while short options provide partial protection.

619
Q

An investor buys 100 shares of XYZ at 24 and writes an XYZ Dec 25 call for $2. At December expiration, XYZ is trading at 30. What’s the gain or loss?

A. Gain of $300
B. Loss of $300
C. Gain of $400
D. Loss of $400

A

A. Gain of $300

Credit: $2, $25
Debit: $24
$2 + $25 - $24 = $3 x 100 shares = $300

If the stock is trading at 30, the call would be exercised, and the investor would sell stock at 25 for $100 dollar profit plus the $200 ($2 X 100 = $200) premium received for the short call.

620
Q

A customer buys 100 shares of XYZ common stock at $52 and, on the same day, buys one XYZ April 50 put at 1.50. What is the maximum potential loss for this position?

A. $150
B. $350
C. $5,050
D. $5,350

A

B. $350

$2 + $1.50 = $3.50 x 100 = $350

This is a hedged position. If the stock falls below 50, the customer can exercise the put and sell the stock at $50 for a $200 loss. The $150 premium paid for the put is also loss.

621
Q

An investor is long 100 shares XYZ and sells a call. The investor is:

A. Neutral.
B. Bearish.
C. Conservative.
D. Mildly aggressive.

A

C. Conservative.

When writing a long stock, this is a covered call, and is considered a conservative strategy.

622
Q

An investor made an opening purchase of 5 ABC Nov 70 straddles @ $7.25 ($3.25 for the calls and $4 for the put). ABC dropped to $52 and the investor sold the 5 straddles. Assuming only intrinsic value, what is the investor’s profit?

A. $0
B. $5,375
C. $7,250
D. $9,000

A

B. $5,375

Credit: ($70 - $52 = $18)
Debit: $7.25
$18 - $7.25 = $10.75 x 5 x 100 = $5,375

The profit is $5,375. If ABC is 52, the Nov 70 put has an intrinsic value of 18, the call is out of the money, so it has zero intrinsic value. $18 - $7.25 (premium paid) = $10.75 X 100 = $1,075 X 5 straddles = $5,375

623
Q

John owns a contract that entitles him to buy 100 shares of ABC at a specified price prior to a fixed expiration date. John owns a:

A. Call option.
B. Preemptive right.
C. Put option.
D. Warrant.

A

A. Call option.

A call option contract gives the buyer of the contract the right to purchase 100 shares of the underlying security at the strike price.

624
Q

What is the premium multiplier for mini-option contracts?

A. 1
B. 10
C. 50
D. 100

A

B. 10

The premium multiplier is 10. A mini-option contract with a premium of $2 would cost $20 ($2 x 10).

625
Q

Which describes what happens to outstanding option contracts when exchange trading of the underlying stock is interrupted?

A. Only closing orders can be placed.
B. Options are halted if the stock is halted.
C. Only closing orders can be executed.
D. Options are canceled.

A

B. Options are halted if the stock is halted.

Stock halts are honored by options exchanges on equity options (but not on index options).

626
Q

Which of the following positions carries the greatest risk?

A. Long 10 ABC March 40 calls
B. Writing 1 ABC March 40 call
C. Long 1000 shares of ABC stock and writing 10 ABC March 40 calls
D. Long 500 shares of ABC stock

A

B. Writing 1 ABC March 40 call

Writing uncovered calls has unlimited risk: it is equivalent to a short stock position.

627
Q

An investor bought 100 shares of XYZ at $60. When XYZ was at $68, an XYZ 60 call was sold for a premium of 10. If the call were exercised, the investor would have a:

A. $200 loss.
B. $1,000 loss.
C. $800 profit.
D. $1,000 profit.

A

D. $1,000 profit.

Premium = +10 Market is -60 +60 Therefore, $10 = $1,000 profit. His profit is the call premium received.

628
Q

An investor shorts 100 XYZ at 50 in his margin account; he simultaneously writes an XYZ April 50 put for 2. What is the maximum loss?

A. $200
B. $5,000
C. $5,200
D. Unlimited

A

D. Unlimited

The maximum loss of a covered put is unlimited, due to the short sale of the stock.

629
Q

Short a 15 put for $2. What is the breakeven?

A. 13
B. 14
C. 15
D. 16

A

A. 13

Strike price – premium received = 13

630
Q

A customer buys one ABC Mar 110 put at 8 and sells one ABC Mar 100 put at 1. Which two of the following describe the spread? I. Credit; II. Debit; III. Bearish; IV. Bullish

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

631
Q

An investor buys one DEF May 60 call for a premium of 6 and sells one DEF May 70 call for a premium of 3. Above what market price will every dollar gained on the long call be offset by a dollar lost on the short call?

A. $60
B. $63
C. $66
D. $70

A

D. $70

At 70, gain is capped by the duty to sell.

632
Q
CALL / PUT:
ABC June 15 call / put
ABC June 17.50 call / put
ABC June 20 call / put
ABC June 22.50 call / put
ABC June 25 call / put

Which TWO of the following are true?

I. The ABC June 25 call is worth more than the ABC June 20 call.
II. The ABC June 17.50 put is worth more than the June 15 put.
III. The ABC June 25 put is the most valuable put in this options series.
IV. The June 25 call is the most valuable option in this series.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

C. II and III

II. The ABC June 17.50 put is worth more than the June 15 put.

III. The ABC June 25 put is the most valuable put in this options series.

The ABC June 17.50 put has the higher strike price (sell high) so it’s worth more than the ABC June 15 put. The ABC June 25 put has the highest strike price in this series, so it is the most valuable put.

633
Q

ABC stock is trading $26.75 per share. Which of the following options will have the LOWEST premium?

A. ABC June 25 call and the ABC June 15 put
B. ABC June 20 put and the June 15 call
C. ABC June 17.50 call and the ABC June 20 put
D. ABC June 15 call and the ABC June 17.50 put

A

A. ABC June 25 call and the ABC June 15 put

The price of the stock is irrelevant. The call with the highest strike price will always be the cheapest call in the series. The put with the lowest strike price will always be the cheapest put in the series.

634
Q

An investor owns 100 shares of XYZ, an oil and gas exploration company. The investor believes that although the oil prices are currently low, they will go up again. Which of the following strategies will enable the investor to increase their overall return on their portfolio during this time?

A. Buy 10 XYZ put
B. Write 10 XYZ call
C. Buy 10 XYZ call
D. Write 10 XYZ put

A

B. Write 10 XYZ call

This is an example of cover called writing. By writing 10 XYZ call, the investor will receive the premium. This position is called “covered call writing” and is the first option position that any new investor is able to take. The reason is the investor owns the underlying stock, so when the option is exercised, the investor will be able to deliver the shares.

635
Q

If the market price of the underlying securities remains the same, which two of the following investors would realize a loss? I. Buyer of an at-the-money put; II. Seller of an at-the-money put; III. Buyer of a straddle; IV. Seller of a straddle

A. II and IV
B. I and III
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

B. I and III

For buyers of options, low volatility and the passing of time erode option premiums. An at-the-money put has no intrinsic value, so if the stock remains at or near the strike price, the premium will erode. At expiration, if it is at the money, it will expire worthless. Straddle holders need large moves in the underlying stock to make a profit, because they paid two premiums for the straddle.

636
Q

A customer buys a June 30 put for 1 after having purchased 100 shares of the same stock for $34 per share. If the market price moves to $22 and the long stock is used to exercise the long put, the result is a:

A. $500 gain.
B. $1,300 gain.
C. $500 loss.
D. $1,300 loss.

A

C. $500 loss.

Credit: $30
Debit: $1, $34

Since the investor was out $3,400 on the stock plus the $100 on the put, the investor is originally out $3,500. If the stock moves to 22 and the long put is exercised and the stock is delivered against the exercise, the customer will receive the strike price of $3,000 for a net loss of $500.

637
Q

Buy 100 shares of XYZ at 66 and buy an XYZ Nov 65 put for 2.50. With XYZ at 60, assume exercise of the put. What’s the profit or loss?

A. $350 loss
B. $600 loss
C. $350 profit
D. $600 profit

A

A. $350 loss

Credit: $65
Debit: $66, $2.50
$65 - $66 - $2.50 = -$3.50 x 100 = -$350

The breakeven is 68.50 or 66, plus put premium. When the stock is at 60, the 60 put has intrinsic value of $5, the $6 dollar of loss in the stock will be offset by a $2.50 gain in the put.

638
Q

A customer shorts one ABC Jan 65 call for a premium of 4 and holds one ABC Apr 70 call for a premium of 1. What is the customer’s maximum potential gain?

A. $300
B. $800
C. $1,000
D. Unlimited

A

A. $300

If the options expire, the customer will make $300 on this credit spread. The maximum gain on a credit spread is always the net premium.

639
Q

An investor buys one DEF May 60 call for a premium of 6 and sells one DEF May 70 call for a premium of 3. Using this strategy, what would be the investor’s maximum gain?

A. $300
B. $600
C. $700
D. $1,000

A

C. $700

Premium = -3 Market = -60 (call = right to buy) + 70 (call = duty to sell) = +10 minus 3 = 7 X 100 = $700 gain.

640
Q

A client buys a BAT July 40 put and sells a BAT April 40 put. The client would profit if this spread position:

A. Narrows.
B. Expires.
C. Widens.
D. Narrows, then widens.

A

C. Widens.

The option position is a calendar or horizontal spread. As in all spreads, one option leg is important and is netted against the other, less important leg. July has more time value than April. The April leg was sold. The spread is debit. Debit spreads benefit from premium widening.

641
Q

Josie made an opening purchase of 10 XYZ May 40 straddles @ $3 ($2 for the calls and $1 for the put). At May expiration, XYZ is 40. What is Josie’s profit or loss?

A. $3,000 loss
B. $40,000 profit
C. $300 loss
D. $3,000 profit

A

A. $3,000 loss

$3 (premium) x 10 x 100 = $3,000

If XYZ is 40 at May expiration, both the May 40 puts and calls will expire worthless and Josie will lose the entire premium she paid for the straddles. $3 X 100 = $300 X 10 straddles = $3,000

642
Q

In early May, a customer buys 100 SOP at 27 and writes one SOP Oct 30 call for 3. This is his first option transaction and takes place in his cash account. The initial option order ticket must be written as an opening:

A. Uncovered purchase.
B. Uncovered sale.
C. Covered purchase.
D. Covered sale.

A

D. Covered sale.

If a customer buys 100 shares of stock and sells a call against that stock, this creates an opening covered sale.

643
Q

A customer buys 100 shares of XYZ stock for $40 a share and sells one XYZ July 45 call for a premium of $2. If the customer is assigned an exercise notice when the stock price is $50, the resulting gross profit would be:

A. $200.
B. $500.
C. $700.
D. $1,200.

A

C. $700.

Credit: $2, $45
Debit: $40
$2 + $45 - $40 = $7 x 100 = $700

644
Q

Jan sold short 100 shares of XYZ at 33. Which of the following will BEST protect against upside risk?

A. Sell an XYZ 35 put
B. Sell an XYZ 35 call
C. Buy an XYZ 35 put
D. Buy an XYZ 35 call

A

D. Buy an XYZ 35 call

The XYZ 35 call is the best protection; the most Jan can lose is $550. If the stock goes above 35, then Jan can exercise the call at 35 for a $200 loss on the stock and she will lose the $350 premium she paid for the call for a total loss of $550. If she writes an XYZ 35 put, she still has the potential for unlimited upside loss. Both selling the XYZ 35 call and buying the XYZ put are bearish positions. To hedge a short stock position (bearish), you have to establish a bullish position in options.

645
Q

An investor buys 500 shares of XYZ at 38 and writes 5 XYZ January 40 calls. This position is referred to as:

A. Straddle.
B. Covered call writing.
C. Uncovered call writing.
D. Full hedge.

A

B. Covered call writing.

To establish a covered call write, an investor writes call options share for share against a long stock position and collects the premium.

646
Q

A customer shorts 1 XYZ October 50 put for 2 and buys 1 XYZ October 60 put for 7. He will experience a profit from this position if: I. Both puts are exercised; II. The premium difference narrows to less than $5 per share; III. The premium difference widens to more than $5 per share.

A. I only
B. II only
C. I and II
D. I and III

A

D. I and III

The position is a debit put spread. Debit profits from exercise and premiums widening.

647
Q

An investor buys 200 shares of ABC at 36 and 2 May 35 puts for $2.50. ABC falls to 30 and the investor exercises the puts. What is the gain or loss?

A. Loss of $150
B. Loss of $350
C. Loss of $700
D. Gain of $350

A

C. Loss of $700

Credit: $35
Debit: $36, $2.50
$35 - $36 - $2.50 = -$3.50 x 200 = -$700

The investor lost $700. The investor bought stock at $36, and when the puts were exercised, the stock was sold at 35 for a $200 loss plus and the cost of the premium paid for the puts ($2.50 X 100 = $250 X 2 contracts= $500).

648
Q

A customer buys a June 30 put for 1 after having purchased 100 shares of the same stock for $34 per share. What is the breakeven point?

A. $29
B. $31
C. $33
D. $35

A

D. $35

When an investor purchases 100 shares of stock for $34 a share and purchases a put for another $100, the customer is out a total of $3,500. Therefore, the customer must receive at least $35 a share to break even on the transaction.

649
Q

Buy 100 shares of ABC at 40 and sell an ABC April 45 call for 2. What is your maximum loss?

A. $3,800
B. $4,000
C. $4,200
D. $4,500

A

A. $3,800

Purchase price of stock $40 - $2 premium received = $38 X 100 = $3,800.

650
Q

You write an XYZ July 50 call for 6 and buy a July 60 call for 1. With XYZ at 44 and the 50 call at .12, you close your positions. What is your gain or loss?

A. $500 gain
B. $500 loss
C. $488 gain
D. $488 loss

A

C. $488 gain

Credit: $6, $0.12
Debit: $1, $0.12
$6 - $0.12 - $1 = $4.88 x 100 = $488 gain

The spread is credit; both options are out of the money. Your gain is the premium you received $5 (6 - 1) or $500 less .12 (what you paid to buy back the short call) or $12 = $488 gain.

651
Q

An investor owns 500 XYZ shares. He wrote covered calls, which will expire in May. In what month will he be able to write contracts after the May expiration?

A. December
B. February
C. September
D. November

A

D. November

The May quarterly cycle contains August and November.

652
Q

In February, a customer sells 1 XYZ October 50 put for 3 and buys 1 XYZ October 60 put for 11. What will be the customer’s pre-tax profit or loss if in June he closes the 50 for 1 and closes the 60 for 4?

A. $300 profit
B. $300 loss
C. $500 profit
D. $500 loss

A

D. $500 loss

Credit: $3, $4
Debit: $11, $1
$3 + $4 - $11 - $1 = -$5 x 100 = -$500

A net debit of 800 is closed out by a net sale of 300, resulting in a loss of $500.

653
Q

Bob sold short 100 shares of PQP at 56 and wrote a PQP Oct 55 put for 3.50. What’s the maximum loss?

A. Unlimited
B. $450
C. $59.50
D. $52.50

A

A. Unlimited

The maximum loss is unlimited. Bob is short stock. His short put will only give him a partial hedge.

654
Q

In early October, a customer buys 100 shares of XYZ stock at $50 per share and, at the same time, writes an XYZ April 50 call option for a premium of $8 per share. Excluding commissions and dividends, what is the market price per share of XYZ stock at which the customer breaks even?

A. $42
B. $45
C. $50
D. $58

A

A. $42

Breakeven is the price paid for the stock less the premium received. $50- $8 = $42.

655
Q

An investor with no other position writes one ABC July 80 call for a premium of 10 and buys 100 shares of ABC stock for $85 per share. If the market price of ABC moves to 90 and the call is exercised, the customer would experience a:

A. $500 loss.
B. $1,000 profit.
C. $1,000 loss.
D. $500 profit.

A

D. $500 profit.

Credit: $10, $80
Debit: $85
$10 + $80 - $85 = $5

Premium is $1,000, paid to investor. Stock is purchased by investor for $8,500. Call exercises at 80, investor sells and receives $8,000. $1,000 received + $8,000 received = $9,000 received – $8,500 paid = $500 profit.

656
Q

An investor who writes a covered call option is subject to:

A. Unlimited profit and limited loss.
B. Limited profit and limited loss.
C. Limited profit and unlimited loss.
D. Unlimited profit and unlimited loss.

A

B. Limited profit and limited loss.

An investor who is long stock establishes a covered write by writing calls on a stock position. The calls are “covered” because the investor owns the underlying security. Writing calls provides income to the investor and creates a partial downside hedge, but limits the investor’s potential profit on the stock.

657
Q

You bought 100 shares of XYZ at 50 and, on the next day, bought an XYZ June 50 put for 1.50. You closed your position by letting the put expire and selling XYZ at 58. What is your gain or loss?

A. $650 loss
B. $950 loss
C. $650 gain
D. $800 gain

A

C. $650 gain

Premium Open - 1.50. Market: -50 = -51.50. Close: +58. Market: +6.50 X 100 = $650 gain

658
Q

Sell short 100 shares of XYZ at 46 in a margin account. Buy an XYZ July 45 call for 4. What is your maximum gain?

A. $400
B. $2,100
C. $2,300
D. $4,200

A

D. $4,200

The maximum gain is the short sale price of the stock less the premium paid for the call. 46 – 4 = 42 X 100 = $4,200.

659
Q

Sell one ABC May 45 call for 4.50. Sell one ABC May 45 put for 3. Assuming intrinsic value only, at what price is there a $500 profit?

A. 47 and 43
B. 46 and 44
C. 42.50 and 47.50
D. 43.50 and 46.50

A

C. 42.50 and 47.50

Credit: $4.50, $3
Debit:
$4.50 + $3 = $7.50 - X = $5
X = $2.50

The total premium is 7.50, so at 42.50 and 47.50, the profit would be $500.

660
Q

You sell short 100 shares of ABC at 25 and buy an ABC June 25 call for 4. You close your position with ABC at 20 and the call premium at $1. What is your gain or loss?

A. No gain/no loss
B. Gain of $200
C. Loss of $300
D. Loss of $100

A

B. Gain of $200

Credit: $25, $1
Debit: $4, $20
$25 + $1 - $4 - $20 = $2 x 100 = $200

Premium is -4 and market is +25 = +21. Call Premium is +1 and market is -20 = -19 +21 minus 19 = +2 X 100 shares = $200 gain

661
Q

A client has a discretionary account that is approved to trade all options. However, the client has said that she does not want to use any strategies or positions with an unlimited loss potential. Given that, what would be suitable for this client?

A. Long calls, long puts and naked call writing
B. Long and short straddles
C. Short spreads, short straddles, short calls and short puts
D. Credit and debit spreads, long straddles and covered call writing

A

D. Credit and debit spreads, long straddles and covered call writing

Long call and put positions always have a maximum loss that is limited to the premium paid. Long straddles - the simultaneous purchase of a call and put - always have a maximum loss that is limited to the two premiums paid. Whether they are debit or credit, put and call spreads always have a maximum loss that is limited to a portion of the differential between the two strike prices. Short puts always have a limited maximum loss because stock prices cannot fall infinitely; in other words, they can fall to zero, but no further. Covered call writing has a limited loss potential because the underlying stock is owned by the investor. However, naked call writing has an unlimited loss potential because stock prices can rise infinitely (at least in theory). The same holds true for short straddles, which involve the simultaneous sale of a call and put. Credit and debit spreads, long straddles and covered call writing are all limited-loss strategies.

662
Q

A customer sells 1 XYZ July 70 call @ 4 after having purchased 200 shares of XYZ @ $65 per share. If the customer is exercised, the tax consequences are I. Cost basis of $65 per share. II. Cost basis of $69 per share. III. Sale proceeds of $70 per share. IV. Sale proceeds of $74 per share.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and IV

Shares were purchased at 65, but sale proceeds include a premium of 4, plus a strike price of 70 or 74 total.

663
Q

Which of the following positions holds the most risk for an investor?

A. Buy 100 shares of ABC stock and sell 1 ABC call
B. Sell short 100 shares of ABC stock and buy 1 ABC call
C. Sell short 100 shares of ABC stock and sell 1 ABC put
D. Buy 100 shares of ABC stock and buy 1 ABC put

A

C. Sell short 100 shares of ABC stock and sell 1 ABC put

Long stock positions have a limited maximum loss because stock prices cannot fall infinitely; in other words, they can fall to zero, but no further. By contrast, short stock positions have unlimited risk potential because stock prices can rise to an infinite degree. Buying a call to hedge a short stock position holds the potential to completely offset the losses that would be incurred if the stock price rises. But selling a put to hedge a short stock position would only afford protection to the extent of the premium collected. So it is the riskier of the two types of short sale hedges and the riskiest of the four answers given.

664
Q

A client who believes the Canadian dollar will soon strengthen relative to the U.S. dollar might profit from which of the following strategies?

A. Sell calls on the Canadian dollar
B. Sell straddles on the U.S. dollar
C. Buy puts on the U.S. dollar
D. Buy calls on the Canadian dollar

A

A. Sell calls on the Canadian dollar

Options on the U.S. dollar are not available for trading on U.S. exchanges. Selling calls is a bearish strategy and would not make sense in this scenario. If the investor is right and the Canadian dollar does appreciate, buying calls on it could be profitable since this strategy is bullish.

ANSWER COMMENTS DO NOT MATCH ANSWER

665
Q

Your customer writes an OEX 250 put for 2.50 when the S & P 100 is at 252. What is the maximum loss?

A. $250
B. $24,750
C. $25,000
D. $25,200

A

B. $24,750

The maximum loss is the strike price of 250 minus 2.50 X 100 = 24,750.

666
Q

Your customer writes an S & P 100 (OEX) May 320 put for .50. With the OEX at 340, what is her maximum gain?

A. $34
B. $50
C. $510
D. $515

A

B. $50

When you write a put, your maximum gain is the premium you received - $50 or .50 point X 100.

667
Q

When a customer transfers their account from one broker/dealer to another broker/dealer (B/D), which of the following statements is correct?

A. Under FINRA rules, the carrying B/D has 1 day to validate and 3 days to complete the transfer.
B. Under MSRB rules, the carrying B/D has 4 days to validate and 3 days to transfer.
C. Under FINRA rules, the carrying B/D has 3 days to validate and 1 day to complete the transfer.
D. Under MSRB rules, the carrying B/D has 1 day to validate and 3 days to transfer.

A

A. Under FINRA rules, the carrying B/D has 1 day to validate and 3 days to complete the transfer.

However, if there are options in the account that are expiring within 7 days, these option contracts will not transfer.

MSRB rules the carrying B/D has 3 days to validate and 4 days to transfer.

668
Q

A registered representative was instructed by a client to purchase 100 shares of ABC stock at the market whenever the representative thinks the time is right. All of the following statements are correct EXCEPT:

A. The trade order should be marked “unsolicited.”
B. The registered representative, upon the customer’s request, may decide on the timing of the trade without written discretionary authority.
C. This is a discretionary trade and requires prior written authorization from the customer.
D. The client decided upon the amount, action, and asset.

A

C. This is a discretionary trade and requires prior written authorization from the customer.

This is not a discretionary trade because the registered representative did not choose the asset, the action, or the amount of the trade. Merely choosing the timing of a trade is not considered discretion.

669
Q

A client who has an individual account is leaving the country for an extended vacation for 3 months. He asked his registered representative to sell any of the securities that go down in value by 20% or more. The registered representative does not get a signed discretionary account agreement prior to the client leaving. Several securities in the client’s portfolio dropped in value by at least 20%. Which of the following can the registered representative do?

A. Sell any of the investments that dropped 20% or more based on verbal instructions that the registered representative received from the client.
B. Inform his supervisor of the situation.
C. Call the client’s home and see if his spouse can trade in the client’s account.
D. Call the client’s office and see if anyone there can authorize the sale of the securities.

A

B. Inform his supervisor of the situation.

Because the registered representative did not have written discretionary authority, the registered representative cannot do anything at this point except inform his supervisor.

670
Q

If you buy 1,000 shares of XYZ @ $5.00 a share, what is the minimum deposit required?

A. $1,000
B. $2,500
C. $2,000
D. $500

A

B. $2,500

Regulation Tis 50% of the purchase price.

671
Q

If you open a margin account to buy 100 shares of XYZ at $30, how much deposit is required?

A. $500
B. $1,500
C. $2,000
D. $3,000

A

C. $2,000

$2,000 is required since this is the minimum deposit, and not $1,500, which would be Reg T 50%.

672
Q

If you open a margin account to buy 100 shares of XYZ at $18, how much deposit is required?

A. $500
B. $900
C. $1,800
4. $2,000

A

C. $1,800

This is the fully paid price. This is an example of the exception when the deposit is less than the $2,000 minimum.

673
Q

If you sell short 10 shares of XYZ at $18, how much deposit is needed?

A. $500
B. $900
C. $1,800
D. $2,000

A

D. $2,000

This is due to the fact that the minimum deposit to open a short sale is $2,000.

674
Q

Which of the following decreases debit balances in margin accounts? I. Interest charged; II. Interest received; III. Withdrawal of securities; IV. Withdrawal of cash

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

Interest received reduces debit and increases equity. Withdrawal of securities means sale; half of the proceeds reduce debit.

675
Q

Market value is $12,000. Debit is $8,400. What’s the minimum equity?

A. $2,000
B. $2,800
C. $3,000
D. $4,000

A

C. $3,000

Minimum equity in a long account is 25% of the long market value (LMV).

676
Q

Cheryl has an individual retirement account as well as a joint account with her husband at her brokerage firm. What is her maximum coverage under SIPC?

A. $100,000
B. $500,000
C. $1,000,000
D. Unlimited

A

C. $1,000,000

SIPC provides $500,000 coverage for each “separate customer.” The individual account and joint account are two separate customers, providing her with a maximum of $1,000,000 coverage.

677
Q

All of the following are considered “separate customer accounts” for the purpose of SIPC coverage EXCEPT:

A. An individual account and a joint account with a spouse.
B. An individual’s cash and margin accounts.
C. An individual customer account and an individual IRA account
D. A parent who is listed as the custodian on two of his children’s accounts.

A

B. An individual’s cash and margin accounts.

An individual’s cash and margin account are combined for SIPC coverage. The SIPC coverage limit is $500,000 for each separate customer, the maximum of which $250,000 can be in cash.

678
Q

Compute combined equity in this account. Long market value is $80,000; Short market value is $6,000; Debit is $54,000; Credit is $10,000, and SMA is $10,000.

A. $30,000
B. $40,000
C. $50,000
D. $230,000

A

A. $30,000

LMV - DB - SMV + CB = $80 - $54 - $6 + $10 = $30 Equity

Long Market value of 80,000, minus short market value of 6,000 = 74,000, minus debit of 54,000 = 20,000, plus credit of 10,000 = 30,000 Ignore SMA.

679
Q

When the owner of a TOD account dies,

A. The deceased owner’s interest in the account passes to the estate.
B. Account ownership transfers directly to the designated beneficiary.
C. The account is frozen, pending instructions from the executor.
D. The entire account is inherited by the surviving owner.

A

B. Account ownership transfers directly to the designated beneficiary.

The account transfers directly to the beneficiary, bypassing probate. TOD (Transfer on Death) accounts are always individual accounts.

680
Q

Which of the following may result in the establishment of a short position? I. Purchasing a call; II. Arbitrage; III. Sale “against the box”; IV. Purchasing a put

A. I and II
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

A sale “against the box” is opening a short position against a corresponding long position to capture a gain but delay taxes. Arbitrage is simultaneously short and long, taking advantage of a market inefficiency.

681
Q

Maximum coverage for an investor under SIPC is:

A. $500,000 per separate customer and $100,000 in cash.
B. $500,000 per separate customer, with a limit of $250,000 of coverage for cash.
C. $100,000 per account.
D. $500,000 per account.

A

B. $500,000 per separate customer, with a limit of $250,000 of coverage for cash.

SIPC maximum coverage is $500,000 for each separate customer. A limit of $250,000 of that coverage may be in cash.

682
Q

Which of the following are needed for the opening of a corporate margin account? I. New account form; II. Corporate charter; III. Corporate resolution; IV. Power of attorney

A. I, II, and III only
B. I and IV only
C. II, III, and IV only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

A. I, II, and III only

I. New account form
II. Corporate charter
III. Corporate resolution;

All are needed to open a corporate margin account except power of attorney.

683
Q

Your client has not paid for a stock purchase in the allotted time period. According to Regulation T, this account will be frozen for:

A. A period of time necessary to receive payment for the transaction.
B. 7 days.
C. 30 days.
D. 90 days.

A

D. 90 days.

A violation of Regulation T for nonpayment of a transaction will cause the account to be frozen for a period of 90 days.

684
Q

Which of the following will affect SMA? I. Market decline; II. Money received; III. Interest charged; IV. Sale

A. I and II
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

C. II and IV

SMA: “You never lose it unless you use it.” Market declines (unless in a short account) and interest charges do not decrease SMA.

685
Q

Long 1,000 shares at 20, short 1,000 shares at 10. What is the minimum maintenance on these positions?

A. $8,000
B. $10,000
C. $12,500
D. $15,000

A

B. $10,000

25% x 1,000 x 20 = $5,000
30% x 1,000 x 10 OR $5/share x 1,000 shares = $3,000 OR $5,000 (whichever is greater)

Long 1,000 shares at 20 or 20,000 with maintenance at 25% or $5,000. For shares sold short, the minimum maintenance is the greater of 30% of the short market value or $5.00 per share. Because the short sale was at $10 per share, both the required deposit and the minimum maintenance are $5 per-share or $5,000. Therefore, the answer is $10,000 ($20,000 X .25 = $5,000; and 1,000 shares short at $5 = $5,000).

686
Q

A customer’s account would be frozen for 90 days if the customer:

A. Failed to deliver payment within 4 business days of purchase.
B. Bought and sold the same stock in the same account.
C. Bought and sold the same stock in different accounts.
D. Failed to deliver stock within 10 business days following sale.

A

A. Failed to deliver payment within 4 business days of purchase.

This is a Reg T violation. Not paying within 4 business days involves a 90-day account freeze. During this 90-day period, the customer must have cash in the account before making a purchase.

687
Q

Which of the following statements correctly describe when a registered representative uses discretion? I. Time of execution; II. Number of shares; III. Price; IV. The growth stock

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. I and III

A

C. II and IV

If the rep controls at least one of the “three As,” the rep is exercising discretion. The three As are asset (which security), activity (buy or sell), and amount (number of shares).

688
Q

A customer’s margin account has available SMA of $1,000. How much would the customer have to deposit to purchase listed options with premiums totaling $4,000?

A. $3,000
B. $4,000
C. $1,000
D. $2,000

A

A. $3,000

SMA of $1 can buy $2 of stock but only $1 of options premium (which have no loan value and must be fully paid). Therefore, $4,000 of option premium, less $1,000 of SMA equals $3,000 deposit.

689
Q

In a margin account, market value is $11,000 and debit is $5,000. What is the buying power in this account?

A. $500
B. $1,000
C. $1,500
D. $2,500

A

B. $1,000

SMA is $500 (equity is $6,000 exceeding 1/2 of $11,000 by $500). Buying power is $1,000, or twice the SMA amount.

690
Q

The partnership agreement is obtained when a broker/dealer opens an account for a partnership because:

A. It outlines the limited liability of the limited partners.
B. It names the individual authorized to trade for the partnership.
C. The agreement verifies state registration and tax status of the partnership.
D. It lists the ownership percentages for each partner.

A

B. It names the individual authorized to trade for the partnership.

The partnership agreement identifies the individual who trades on behalf of the partnership.

691
Q

With regard to a collect on delivery order, what is the proper procedure for the receiving firm should the funds not be available to pay for the securities at delivery?

A. The receiving firm has until T+4 to pay which includes the T+2 and 2-day extension, then it must return the securities if unable to pay for the order.
B. The receiving firm must pay for the securities within the T+2 settlement date.
C. The selling firm will never release the securities to the receiving firm without documentation of the funds being available; therefore, funds are simply placed back in the seller’s account.
D. The receiving firm must promptly return the securities to the selling firm.

A

D. The receiving firm must promptly return the securities to the selling firm.

FINRA Rule 11860 does not provide additional time to pay for the securities. The transaction, including price, is agreed upon in advance based on an understanding that the seller will be paid immediately once securities are delivered. Arrangements by the buyer and seller must be made along with the proper documentation before such a trade may occur. However, no additional terms are available, such as T+2 or an extension. Therefore, the receiving firm must promptly return the securities to the selling firm.

692
Q

When a broker/dealer receives an ACATS form, it must:

A. Freeze the account and await instructions from the transfer agent.
B. Verify positions within 3 business days.
C. Freeze the account after executing open orders.
D. Complete the transfer within 4 days.

A

D. Complete the transfer within 4 days.

Upon receipt of the ACATS, the broker/dealer must cancel open orders, freeze the account, verify positions within 1 day, and transfer positions within an additional 3 days.

693
Q

An investor can be granted an extension of time by:

A. The SEC.
B. His brokerage firm.
C. FINRA and the transacting exchange.
D. All of the above

A

C. FINRA and the transacting exchange.

Only the FINRA and the exchange where the stock was transacted may grant extensions to investors.

694
Q

After a customer’s brokerage account is closed, the account information must be maintained for how many years?

A. 2 years
B. 4 years.
C. 6 years.
D. Indefinitely

A

C. 6 years.

After a customer’s account is closed, the account information must be maintained for 6 years.

695
Q

The SIPC (Securities Investor Protection Corporation) insures a customer’s account for unreturned cash for up to:

A. $100,000.
B. $250,000.
C. $500,000.
D. $1,000,000.

A

B. $250,000.

SIPC insures unreturned cash up to $250,000.

696
Q

An investor requiring a fixed monthly income is best suited for an investment with:

A. Higher volatility for a potentially lower return.
B. An equity portfolio.
C. Higher volatility for a potentially greater return.
D. Lower volatility with a lower overall return.

A

D. Lower volatility with a lower overall return.

Investors with fixed income needs will accept less potential return for reduced volatility since the need for fixed income is the primary objective of the investment.

697
Q

If a customer purchasing securities on margin does not pay for the securities in the required time period, the account is frozen and no credit may be extended to them for:

A. 30 days.
B. 60 days.
C. 90 days.
D. 180 days.

A

C. 90 days.

Ninety days is the penalty for not paying for a margined security within the required 4 business day period for settlement of the purchase.

698
Q

A customer purchases 200 shares of XYZ at $50 in a margin account and meets the Reg T requirement. The stock rises to $55 on the first day, and then declines to $40 on the second day. What are the account equity and SMA balances?

A. $6,000 equity, SMA $0
B. $6,000 equity, SMA $1,000
C. $3,000 equity, SMA $500
D. $3,000 equity, SMA $1,000

A

C. $3,000 equity, SMA $500

SMA is created in the account when the market value of the stock increases to $55. When the stock declines to $40, equity drops to $3,000, but SMA is not affected. Remember: With SMA, you never lose it unless you use it.

$10,000 LMV - $5,000 DB = $5,000 E
$8,000 LMV - $5,000 LMV = $3,000 E

$55/share x 200 shares x 50% = $5,500
$5,500 - $5,000 = $500 SMA

699
Q

An investor initiated the following positions in her margin account: sold short 300 shares of ABC stock at $9 per share and sold short 500 shares of XYZ stock at $3 per share. What is the minimum required Reg T deposit?

A. $2,700
B. $2,850
C. $3,000
D. $4,200

A

C. $3,000

For stocks between $5 and $17.50 per share, the Rule is $5 per share; for stocks between $2.50 and $5 per share, the Rule is 100%. The deposit for short 300 shares of ABC @ $9 is 300 X $5 = $1,500 and the deposit for short 500 XYZ at $300 is 100% or $1,500, for a total of $3,000.

300 shares x $5/share (between $5 and $17.50 per share) = $1,500
500 shares x $3/share (between $2.50 and $5 per share = 100%) = $1,500
$1,500 + $1,500 = $3,000

700
Q

An initial sale of 100 shares of XYZ occurs at 30 in a new margin account. With XYZ at 25, what is the customer’s equity?

A. $1,500
B. $2,000
C. $2,500
D. $3,000

A

C. $2,500

An initial deposit of $2,000 is required since the initial sale is short. The resulting credit balance is $5,000 or short sale proceeds ($3,000) plus Reg T ($2,000). As the short market value share price declines to 25, equity increases to $2,500 or CB ($5,000) – SMV ($2,500) = E ($2,500).

701
Q

Under Regulation T, the 90-day restriction applies to a customer who purchases and subsequently sells:

A. Same stock in a cash account without having first fully paid for the purchase.
B. Different stocks in the same account.
C. Same stock in different accounts.
D. Same stock in a margin account without fully paying for the purchase.

A

A. Same stock in a cash account without having first fully paid for the purchase.

Cash account purchases must be fully paid by the fifth business day, or the account will be subject to day restriction and the position will be liquidated.

702
Q

Opening purchase in a margin account with no other positions is 2,000 shares at $2. With Reg T at 50%, what is the minimum deposit required?

A. $1,000
B. $1,250
C. $2,000
D. $5,000

A

D. $5,000

Minimum requirement for a stock valued at $2.50 per share or lower is $2.50 per share. 2,000 shares x $2.50= $5,000.

703
Q

A customer who purchases securities in a cash or margin account must pay for the securities in:

A. 1 business day.
B. 3 business days.
C. 4 business days.
D. 7 business days.

A

C. 4 business days.

A security purchased on margin must be settled in 4 business days, which is different than the 2 business settlement date for securities settling regular-way.

704
Q

An initial sale occurs of 100 shares of XYZ at 15 in a new margin account. Interest charges are based on:

A. $0
B. $1,500
C. $2,000
D. $3,500

A

A. $0

There are no interest charges on short sales. Money is not borrowed, only stock.

705
Q

A security is being offered on a When-Issued basis. However, before you place the trade, the When-Issue notice is suspended. How should you explain this to your client, who is interested in buying the stock?

A. The suspension terminates the When-Issued basis and now orders taken must be delivered on regular way settlement and delivery basis. The client can place the order at his convenience.
B. Orders are suspended; securities cannot be delivered.
C. When the suspension is lifted, we can place a buy order for the securities and then wait for delivery based on when the securities are made available.
D. You cannot buy this stock.

A

A. The suspension terminates the When-Issued basis and now orders taken must be delivered on regular way settlement and delivery basis. The client can place the order at his convenience.

At the point at which a When-Issued/When-Distributed Order has been suspended per NYSE Rule 63, the client can place an order whenever he wishes and the issuer is required to deliver securities based on regular way delivery and settlement.

706
Q

Which of the following is NOT true regarding a cash account?

A. The investor must sign a statement that he or she understands the risks.
B. The customer must pay for the purchase in accordance with Reg T within 4 business days.
C. The investor must pay in full for all purchases by the settlement date.
D. Brokers may require a large deposit before opening an account.

A

A. The investor must sign a statement that he or she understands the risks.

The broker usually will require the investor to sign a statement that he or she understands and acknowledges the risks associated with derivative instruments when trying to open an option account or with a penny stock account, not a cash account. All the other statements are true.

707
Q

What is the annual exclusion amount for money given as a gift?

A. $7,000
B. $10,000
C. $11,000
D. $15,000

A

D. $15,000

If you give someone money or property during your life, you may be subject to federal gift tax. Currently, the annual exclusion for gifts is $15,000 per gift recipient.

708
Q

Regulation T of the Federal Reserve Board involves all of the following security transactions EXCEPT:

A. Government debt.
B. ADRs (American Depositary Receipts).
C. Rights and warrants.
D. Corporate securities.

A

A. Government debt.

Government securities are exempt from Regulation T.

709
Q

When a registered representative retires and his accounts are re-assigned to a new representative, what must the new rep do?

A. The representative must update client suitability.
B. The representative must consult with his/her branch manager.
C. The representative must complete ACAT transfer forms immediately.
D. The representative must consult with the reassigned customer.

A

A. The representative must update client suitability.

The rep must complete client suitability forms and update them.

710
Q

A customer has a margin account. A broker/dealer is in receivership. The account has $90,000 securities and $50,000 debit. Which of the following would be true?

A. The client would be reimbursed $90,000.
B. The client would be reimbursed $50,000.
C. The client must deposit $50,000 in order to receive $90,000.
D. The client would be reimbursed $40,000.

A

D. The client would be reimbursed $40,000.

$90,000 securities minus $50,000 debit equals $40,000 equity, and only equity is reimbursed when the BD is in receivership.

A receivership is a court-appointed tool that can assist creditors to recover funds in default and can help troubled companies to avoid bankruptcy.

711
Q

If a customer purchases securities and does not settle the account in 4 business days, the brokerage firm’s first order of business is to:

A. Freeze the account for 90 days.
B. Cancel the trade and sell off the purchased securities.
C. Notify the SEC.
D. Notify the FINRA and the exchange.

A

B. Cancel the trade and sell off the purchased securities.

The firm is to immediately cancel the order and sell the securities. After the trade is completed, the customer account becomes frozen for 90 days in accordance with Regulation T.

712
Q

A customer deposits $100,000 face value of Treasury securities trading at par into his margin account. How much money could the customer withdraw?

A. $50,000
B. $85,000
C. $90,000
D. $95,000

A

D. $95,000

Treasuries have a maintenance requirement of only 5% of the face value. Therefore, $100,000 market value (and par value) minus 5% = $95,000 can be withdrawn as a loan.

713
Q

A customer has not paid for a stock transaction in 4 business days and has been refused an extension. The member firm:

A. May grant an extension if they desire.
B. Must close the account.
C. May sue the customer for the money.
D. Must cancel or liquidate the order by immediately selling the securities.

A

D. Must cancel or liquidate the order by immediately selling the securities.

The member firm must cancel or liquidate the transaction by promptly selling the securities because an extension has been refused.

714
Q

Which of the following facts concerning UGMA accounts is incorrect?

A. Gifts made to the minor are irrevocable.
B. Securities are registered in the name of the minor.
C. Only one custodian per minor is permitted.
D. Margin transactions are not allowed.

A

B. Securities are registered in the name of the minor.

In an Uniform Gifts to Minor Account (UGMA) account, securities are registered in the name of the custodian for the benefit of the minor. Only one custodian and one minor may be named per account. Gifts made to the minor are irrevocable. Margin accounts are not permissible for UGMA accounts.

715
Q

A customer margin account has market value of $10,000, debit balance of $8,000, and SMA of $1,000. The margin call can be met with:

A. $500 cash.
B. $500 SMA.
C. $1,000 cash.
D. $1,000 SMA.

A

A. $500 cash.

Equity is only $2,000 (MV $10,000 minus debit of $8,000). Maintenance is 25%, or $2,500. Therefore, a $500 cash deposit is required. SMA is pure leverage, not equity, and can never be used to meet maintenance. SMA is a credit extension, and maintenance call is a bankruptcy summons.

716
Q

A customer has a margin account with his broker/dealer with a $900,000 current market value and a $500,000 debit balance. The broker/dealer is declared bankrupt. Which of the following is true concerning the customer’s protection under SIPC?

A. The customer receives $500,000 in cash.
B. The customer receives $400,000 value in securities and cash.
C. The customer receives $900,000 in cash.
D. The customer must pay the debit balance prior to liquidation.

A

B. The customer receives $400,000 value in securities and cash.

SIPC covers only margin and cash account equity, and will reimburse each customer in cash for total account equity of $500,000 in cash and securities. In this case, it’s $400,000.

717
Q

An unmarried couple applies for a joint brokerage account and says they wish to open a JTWROS account together. What should the registered representative do before starting the application?

A. Open the account and file a SAR report following the application.
B. Begin the application immediately according to their wishes.
C. Explain the characteristics of that type of account.
D. Open a tenancy by the entirety account.

A

C. Explain the characteristics of that type of account.

The best answer is to explain the characteristics of this type of account, especially as it pertains to an unmarried couple. In a JTWROS account, 100% of the assets in the account pass to the surviving account owner should one die. A tenants in common account might be more suitable because in the event of the death of one of the owners, the deceased owner’s portion of the account will pass to their designated beneficiaries or to their estate. A tenancy by the entirety account is not correct because it is only available to married couples.

718
Q

A client’s margin account currently has $8,000 of equity and an SMA balance of $1,000. The customer wants to buy $4,000 of marginable stock. How much money must be deposited in the account in order to purchase the securities?

A. $500
B. $750
C. $1,000
D. $2,000

A

C. $1,000

A customer wanting to buy $4,000 of stock needs $2,000 of cash and/or SMA (cash and SMA have the same buying power). With $1,000 of SMA, the customer needs only $1,000 of cash.

719
Q

When a customer adds another owner to their account, the Customer Relationship Summary (Form CRS) must be updated within:

A. 15 days.
B. 30 days.
C. 45 days.
D. 6 months.

A

B. 30 days.

Form CRS (Customer Relationship Summary) must be updated within 30 days of any material changes in customer information. Changing the account registration is significant.

720
Q

In a custodial account, the responsibility for tax liabilities from dividends, interest income, and capital gains belongs to the:

A. Custodian.
B. Minor.
C. Minor’s parents or guardians.
D. All of the above.

A

B. Minor.

Tax liabilities belong to the minor in a custodian account.

721
Q

If a customer has a need for high liquidity and low principal risk, what type of security would be the best recommendation for their investment?

A. Municipal bonds
B. Corporate bonds
C. Treasury bills
D. Treasury bonds

A

C. Treasury bills

Based on the criteria mentioned, Treasury bills would be most suitable because of their high liquidity and low principal risk.

722
Q

Suitable investment recommendations should be based on which of the following?

A. Investments that have the potential to generate the highest return
B. The broker/dealer’s list of securities that are rated as a “strong buy”
C. The client’s investment objectives, financial situation and needs as well as their investment experience and risk tolerance
D. The broker/dealer’s historically top-performing securities

A

C. The client’s investment objectives, financial situation and needs as well as their investment experience and risk tolerance

Suitable recommendations should involve inquiring about a client’s investment objectives, financial situation and needs as well as their investment experience and risk tolerance.

723
Q

Which of the following joint accounts is designed specifically for married couples?

A. Tenancy by the Entirety
B. Transfer on Death
C. Tenants in common
D. Joint Tenants with Rights of Survivorship

A

A. Tenancy by the Entirety

Tenancy by the Entirety is a type of joint account specifically designed for legally married couples and contains the right of survivorship.

724
Q

The SIPC protection for cash claims is:

A. $100,000 for each separate account.
B. $250,000 for each separate customer.
C. $500,000 for each separate account.
D. $500,000 for each separate customer.

A

B. $250,000 for each separate customer.

SIPC coverage for cash claims is limited to $250,000 for each separate customer.

725
Q

Minimum margin on municipal bonds is determined by the:

A. Broker/dealer.
B. Federal Reserve Board.
C. MSRB.
D. FINRA.

A

D. FINRA.

The FINRA determines minimum margin, but the broker/dealer may require a higher margin. Municipals are exempt from SEC and Federal Reserve Board jurisdiction.

726
Q

In a new margin account, your customer purchases 500 shares of XYZ at $40 per share and meets the Reg T requirement. Three days after the position is opened, XYZ closes at $44 per share. The stock subsequently declines to 38. In response to your client’s inquiry, you would report that the current equity and SMA are:

A. $9,000 equity, 0 SMA.
B. $9,000 equity, 1,000 SMA.
C. $10,000 equity, 0 SMA.
D. $10,000 equity, 1,000 SMA.

A

B. $9,000 equity, 1,000 SMA.

500 x 40 = $20,000
$20,000 LMV - $10,000 DB = $10,000 E
$22,000 LMV x 50% = $11,000 - $10,000 = $1,000 SMA
$19,000 LMV - $10,000 DB = $9,000 E

Equity based on current market is 38 X $500 or $19,000. However, when the market rose to 44, equity was at $22,000 and $1,000 of SMA was created ($22,000 vs. $21,000 equals $1,000 SMA). SMA is never lost unless used, so the decline to $38,000 did not wipe out or affect SMA.

727
Q

Under Regulation T, if a customer’s account is frozen for 90 days, the customer:

A. May make sales but not purchases under any circumstances.
B. May not make a transaction of any kind.
C. May make purchases if the full purchase price is in the account before the order is transacted.
D. May make purchases but not sales under any circumstances.

A

C. May make purchases if the full purchase price is in the account before the order is transacted.

A customer with a frozen account may continue to make purchases, provided the full purchase price is in the account prior to the execution of the order.

728
Q

An account under the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act earned $8,500 in interest income from bonds. The minor is 13 years old. How is this interest income taxed?

A. A portion is taxed at the minor’s rate and a portion is taxed at the rate applied to trusts.
B. $8,500 taxed at the minor’s rate
C. $8,500 taxed at the custodian’s rate
D. $8,500 taxed at the parent’s rate

A

A. A portion is taxed at the minor’s rate and a portion is taxed at the rate applied to trusts.

Until the minor reaches 19 (or 24 if a full-time student), the portion of unearned income up to the IRS ceiling is taxed at the minor’s rate, and the remainder is taxed at the rate applied to trusts. Once the minor reaches the age threshold, the entire amount is taxed at the minor’s rate.

729
Q

The SIPC (Securities Investor Protection Corporation) insures a customer’s account for unreturned securities for up to:

A. $50,000.
B. $250,000.
C. $500,000.
D. $1,000,000.

A

C. $500,000.

SIPC insures unreturned securities up to $500,000.

730
Q

Your margin account has a short position. Your short credit balance is $20,000. How much is subject to interest charges?

A. $0
B. $10,000
C. $14,000
D. $18,000

A

A. $0

Interest is not charged on short positions. Stock, not money, is borrowed. This is like borrowing your neighbor’s tools. There is no interest, but watch out for the demand that they be returned.

731
Q

The customer has no cash available to trade in his cash account. On Monday, he purchases ABC stock for $5,000. He does not deposit cash in his account by Wednesday’s settlement date. On Thursday, he sells the ABC stock for $5,500 to cover the cost of his purchase. Which of the following statements is true?

A. This is an example of frequent trading.
B. This is not a violation.
C. This is a cash liquidation violation.
D. This is a freeriding violation.

A

D. This is a freeriding violation.

This is a freeriding violation because the customer did not pay for the security prior to selling it.

732
Q

A customer owns XYZ stock in her cash account, but has no funds available to trade. Nonetheless, she buys ABC stock on Monday. On Thursday, she sells XYZ stock to cover the purchase she made on Monday. This violation is called:

A. Liquidation resulting from unsettled trades.
B. Freeriding.
C. Cash liquidation.
D. Excessive trading.

A

C. Cash liquidation.

This is an example of a cash or trade liquidation, also called a late sale. It is considered a violation because the customer did not have sufficient cash to pay for the purchase. The ABC purchase on Monday settles on Wednesday. However, the sale of XYZ on Thursday will not settle until the following Monday.

733
Q

In order to open a new corporate margin account, all of the following are needed EXCEPT:

A. A corporate resolution.
B. An affidavit of domicile.
C. A new account form.
D. A copy of the corporate charter.

A

B. An affidavit of domicile.

The corporate charter identifies the state of account residence. The affidavit of domicile is used for state identification of a person who died with a joint account.

734
Q

A client wishes to open a portfolio margin account. What must be completed prior to opening the account?

A. The account must be approved by the CBOE or FINRA for Reg T exemption; and the customer must receive a copy of and sign the risk disclosure document, at the time of application or earlier
B. Be approved by a designated ROP for uncovered option writing; customer must receive a copy of and sign the risk disclosure document, at the time of application or earlier; and must be approved by CBOE or FINRA
C. Be approved by a designated ROP for uncovered option writing; and customer must receive a copy of and sign the risk disclosure document at the time of application or earlier
D. Be approved by a designated ROP for naked option writing; and the account must be approved by the CBOE or FINRA for Reg T exemption

A

C. Be approved by a designated ROP for uncovered option writing; and customer must receive a copy of and sign the risk disclosure document at the time of application or earlier

This type of account must pass the scrutiny of both the Branch Manager and a Registered Options Principal (ROP). The disclosure must be presented to the client and acknowledged by the client in writing. There is no approval required by the CBOE or FINRA. That is the responsibility of the ROP.

735
Q

Which of the following accounts is NOT insured by the SIPC?

A. Single owner account
B. Joint account
C. Commodities account
D. Custodian account

A

C. Commodities account

Commodities are not defined as securities and are exempt from SIPC coverage.

736
Q

In accordance with the Uniform Gifts to Minors Act, a donor may:

A. Include the value of collectibles in the account.
B. Only revoke gifts of cash.
C. Give cash gifts up to $15,000 annually.
D. Give an unlimited amount of cash.

A

D. Give an unlimited amount of cash.

There are no restrictions on the amount of cash that may be given to a minor under the Act; however, gift taxes may apply if the contribution exceeds a specified annual amount. All gifts are irrevocable.

737
Q

A customer opens an individual account and is approved for margin and option activity. The opening trade in the account is a long option position. Six days after the Reg T payment deadline, the customer’s husband contacts the broker/dealer to clarify information on the trade confirmation. Which of the following is true?

A. The broker/dealer is required to correct the trade error identified by the husband within 3 business days.
B. The husband may receive information about the confirm only and may not effect trades in the account.
C. Because it is after the Reg T deadline, the husband is told that the account is frozen.
D. No one at the broker/dealer may discuss the account with the husband.

A

D. No one at the broker/dealer may discuss the account with the husband.

This is an individual account. Without the account owner’s prior written permission, no one at the broker/dealer may discuss her account with another party, except for IRS and subpoena inquiries. This rule includes spouses.

738
Q

An investor has $10,000 in his margin account. He wants to sell short as many shares of XYZ stock as possible. XYZ is trading at $4 per share. With Reg T at 50%, what is the maximum number of shares he can sell short with $10,000?

A. 2,000
B. 2,500
C. 4,000
D. 5,000

A

B. 2,500

The required Reg T deposit for selling stock short between $2.50 and $5 per share is 100%; $10,000/$4 = 2,500 shares.

739
Q

Which of the following apply to progressive taxation? I. Low income earners are taxed at a higher rate than higher income earners. II. Higher income earners are taxed at a higher rate than low income earners. III. The federal marginal tax rate increases as income rises. IV. Progressive taxation includes marginal tax brackets.

A. I and II
B. I, II, and III
C. II and IV
D. II, III, and IV

A

D. II, III, and IV

Under progressive taxation, individuals and families with low incomes are taxed at a lower rate than those that earn higher income. The federal marginal tax rate increases in the United States as income rises.

740
Q

A customer who failed to complete payment in 4 business days applied for an extension but was denied. What action should be taken?

A. Following the 2nd business day, freeze the account for 90 days.
B. Give the customer an extra day to pay.
C. Close out the transaction.
D. Re-apply for another extension.

A

C. Close out the transaction.

Once the extension is denied, the transaction should be reversed, and the account should immediately be frozen for 90 days.

741
Q

A wealthy customer with a significant account balance repeatedly takes large positions in various mutual funds and attempts to time the market by trading his positions. This type of customer:

A. Creates a disruption and may have his account restricted.
B. Has no impact on the mutual funds.
C. Is a desirable customer.
D. May trade the mutual funds as frequently as he likes.

A

A. Creates a disruption and may have his account restricted.

A customer who buys and sells the same mutual fund on a frequent basis creates a difficult situation for the fund manager. The trading activity creates volatility in the fund’s cash position and the manager is not able to gauge the amount of cash available for new purchases. In addition, the fund manager may have to liquidate securities unexpectedly and in an ill-timed manner in order to meet the redemptions. Fund companies monitor this type of activity on the part of investors and may elect to close such an account.

742
Q

Regarding UGMA and UTMA, which of the following is FALSE?

A. The gift is irrevocable.
B. The donor can be the custodian.
C. The account can hold margined securities.
D. The donor must be an adult.

A

C. The account can hold margined securities.

The question asks which of the statements is false. Margin is not permitted in a custodial account. Neither Uniform Gift to Minors Act (UGMA) nor Uniform Transfer to Minor Act (UTMA) accounts can hold street-named securities, and margin account securities are in street name; all securities in a margin account must be registered.

743
Q

All of the following are required on a New Account Form EXCEPT:

A. A principal’s signature.
B. The customer’s business address.
C. The customer’s investment time horizon.
D. The customer’s Social Security number.

A

B. The customer’s business address.

A home address is required, not a business address.

744
Q

When an investor sells stock short that is also owned long, the transaction is defined as:

A. Short for a long exempt.
B. Shorting the stock.
C. Short against the box.
D. Short against long exempt.

A

C. Short against the box.

“Short against the box” is shorting a position which you currently own. This has no upside risk, since the long can be delivered against the short if the stock rises in value.

745
Q

Your client has a margin account. He bought 500 shares of ABC Corp @ 50 on margin and subsequently the market price dropped to 38. How should you explain the situation regarding equity in the account and his concern about a possible margin call?

A. The margin and maintenance call cannot be determined by the information provided.
B. The new equity, after the price declined, is $12,500 with plenty of equity still in the trade; however, a margin call would be required at $4,125.
C. The equity has dropped to $6,500 and the client needs to bring the equity up to $12,500 to avoid a margin call, which is 25% of the original trade.
D. The broker/dealer evaluates the equity in the account to determine if maintenance must be met. At $38, the client’s market value is $19,000. His original debt balance of $12,500 is subtracted to arrive at $6,500 in equity. The client need not be concerned about the margin call here. The $19,000 market value is then evaluated; Reg T is $9500 and maintenance is half that at $4,750. The client does not have excess equity, but he is $1,750 above the margin call level.

A

D. The broker/dealer evaluates the equity in the account to determine if maintenance must be met. At $38, the client’s market value is $19,000. His original debt balance of $12,500 is subtracted to arrive at $6,500 in equity. The client need not be concerned about the margin call here. The $19,000 market value is then evaluated; Reg T is $9500 and maintenance is half that at $4,750. The client does not have excess equity, but he is $1,750 above the margin call level.

500 x 50 = $25,000 LMV
$25,000 LMV - $12,500 DB = $12,500 E
$19,000 LMV - $12,500 DB = $6,500 E
25% x $19,000 LMV = $4,750 (min maintenance)

At the end of the day, the broker/dealer does a mark to the market to determine if there is a need for a margin call. This evaluation can be done anytime during the day if price volatility is significant. After the drop-in price, the new account value is $19,000. The debt is still $12,500, leaving $6,500 in equity, down from $12,500. To determine if there is a margin call, use Reg T (50%) on the new market value and half of that is the minimum maintenance or the margin call level. This makes Reg T $9,500 and the call level $4,750. No excess equity exists because the equity is below Reg T.

746
Q

Disadvantages of a short sale are I. Upside loss; II. Downside loss; III. Dividend responsibilities; IV. Interest responsibilities.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

Short sales have upside (unlimited) risk and dividend responsibilities on the borrowed stock. There are no margin interest charges, and profit is downside.

747
Q

Compute equity. Long market value: $48,000; Short market value: $18,000; Debit: $27,000; Credit: $15,000; SMA: $3,000

A. $15,000
B. $18,000
C. $21,000
D. $24,000

A

B. $18,000

$48,000 LMV - $27,000 DB + $15,000 - $18,000 = $18,000 E

Long MV ($48,000) minus Short MV ($18,000) equals $30,000 minus debit $27,000 equals $3,000 plus credit ($15,000) equals $18,000.

748
Q

You are performing a strategic asset allocation for a 62-year-old client. All of the following are correct EXCEPT:

A. A large percentage should be in cash if stocks have been weak the past 12 months.
B. General rule for allocation is to invest 100 – client’s age as a percentage of stocks within the portfolio. Therefore, 38% of the portfolio should be stocks.
C. Portfolio rebalancing should be on regular basis.
D. Client’s retirement plans should be considered.

A

A. A large percentage should be in cash if stocks have been weak the past 12 months.

Suitability issue here is an appropriate balance and not going in and out of the various markets to generate trades within a senior’s portfolio. Such activities are tactical and not appropriate. A high cash investment would leave the senior subject to inflation (purchasing power) risk.

749
Q

A customer opens a margin account with a $20,000 purchase. If Reg T = 50% and the customer pays in full for the purchase, what is the SMA in the account?

A. $0
B. $2,000
C. $10,000
D. $20,000

A

C. $10,000

With Reg T at 50%, the customer could have deposited only $10,000 to buy the $20,000 of stock. Because the full amount was deposited, SMA is credited $10,000.

750
Q

A customer purchases 100 shares of XYZ at 40 in a cash account. Four days later, he deposits $3,000 with a promise to deposit the remainder the next day. Three days later, no money has come in. What should the registered representative do?

A. Sell out enough to cover the remainder, and freeze the account for 90 days.
B. Because the client has a cash account, he violated Reg T by not paying in full.
C. Ask for an extension.
D. Nothing because the client has met Reg T.

A

A. Sell out enough to cover the remainder, and freeze the account for 90 days.

The firm should sell out enough to cover the remainder and freeze the account for 90 days.

751
Q

FINRA requires member firms to use reasonable diligence when opening and maintaining accounts. This rule is known as KYC. Which statement regarding KYC is true?

A. The information provided by the customer must be accurate, but not necessarily complete.
B. KYC means Knowledge of Character (Cash).
C. The prospective customer need only provide name and date of birth.
D. The member firm must be able to obtain required information and verify a prospective customer’s identity and creditworthiness.

A

D. The member firm must be able to obtain required information and verify a prospective customer’s identity and creditworthiness.

KYC is the acronym for FINRA’s Know Your Customer Rule, which requires member firms and associated persons to obtain and verify customer information. At a minimum, the customer’s name, date of birth, address and identification number (either social security number) are required. Information must current, accurate, true and complete.

752
Q

As an initial transaction in a margin account, you sell 100 shares of XYZ at 30. The market drops to 25. What is your equity?

A. $1,000
B. $1,500
C. $2,000
D. $2,500

A

D. $2,500

CB = 100 x $30 + $2,000 (min equity) = $5,000
SMV = 100 x $25 = $2,500
$5,000 CB - $2,500 SMV = $2,500

In shorting stock at 30, you must deposit $2,000 under the minimum equity rule. As the market value drops from $3,000 to $2,500, your equity rises from $2,000 (initial deposit) to $2,500.

753
Q

XYZ stock is trading at $1.25 per share. With Reg T at 50%, what is the required deposit to sell short 10,000 XYZ @ $1.25 per share?

A. $50,000
B. $6,250
C. $12,500
D. $25,000

A

D. $25,000

For stocks under $2.50 per share, the Rule is $2.50 per share. 10,000 x 2.50 = $25,000.

754
Q

All of the following will decrease the debit balance in a customer’s long margin account, EXCEPT:

A. Stock dividends.
B. Proceeds from the sale of securities.
C. Deposits of cash.
D. Cash dividends.

A

A. Stock dividends.

Stock dividends do not affect corporate capitalization, are not taxable, and do not affect debit balance in a margin account.

755
Q

All of the following statements are correct with regard to a Uniform Gifts to Minors Act (UGMA) account EXCEPT:

A. There can be only one custodian and one minor per account.
B. The custodian is not required to be a guardian or relative of the minor.
C. Purchases in the UGMA account are eligible for reduced sales charges from rights of accumulation.
D. The custodian may open a margin account for the minor.

A

D. The custodian may open a margin account for the minor.

UGMA accounts are permitted to have only one custodian and one minor per account. There are no requirements of relationship or guardianship between the minor and custodian. Purchases in an UGMA account may take advantage of reduced sales charges through rights of accumulation from other accounts held by the custodian and immediate family members. UGMA accounts cannot be margin accounts.

756
Q

Government securities regular settlement is:

A. Next day.
B. 7th business day.
C. 4 business days.
D. Same day.

A

A. Next day.

Government trades settle next day.

757
Q

Which of the following is the least likely recommendation an RR would make to a customer in a margin account?

A. Purchasing a municipal bond
B. Selling a NASDAQ security short
C. Selling a put against a short position
D. Establishing a credit call spread on an NYSE stock

A

A. Purchasing a municipal bond

Because margin interest on a municipal bond purchase is NOT deductible, the RR should not recommend purchasing a municipal bond on margin.

758
Q

Stanley is a retired engineer who wants a steady income stream that he can count on. He has a portfolio of investments that range from “investment grade” to “high-yield” from a quality perspective. How does the quality of the bond itself affect the yield that Stanley receives on his investments?

A. A higher yield bond has a higher quality and less volatility than a lower yield bond.
B. The investment grade bonds are a longer term investment
C. Higher yields generally carry a higher degree of risk and price volatility.
D. The lower the yield, the less the quality of the bond

A

C. Higher yields generally carry a higher degree of risk and price volatility.

Long term bonds and “high-yield” (low credit quality) bonds are inherently more volatile than “investment grade” (high credit quality) bonds and those with short-term maturities.

759
Q

A client is interested in investing in certain industries and also wishes to avoid others. In doing your research, you find four companies that meet the client’s criteria. Which suitability obligation have you addressed?

A. Quantitative suitability
B. Industry research analysis
C. Customer specific suitability
D. Reasonable basis suitability

A

C. Customer specific suitability

Customer specific suitability requires the broker to have a reasonable basis for believing that a recommendation is suitable for a particular customer based on the investment profile provided by the customer.

760
Q

Mr. Thompson has both a cash account and a margin account at a brokerage firm in his name. What is his maximum coverage under SIPC?

A. $100,000
B. $500,000
C. $1,000,000
D. Unlimited

A

B. $500,000

The maximum protection under SIPC is $500,000 for each separate customer. Because these accounts are both listed in his name only, they are treated as one customer, with a maximum total coverage of $500,000.

761
Q

A program established under the PATRIOT Act to prevent the funding of terrorism and money laundering is:

A. CIP.
B. IRS.
C. SAR.
D. KYC.

A

A. CIP.

CIP, or Customer Identification Program, is a provision of the USA PATRIOT Act, an anti-terrorism law enacted in 2001 in the aftermath of the 2001 terrorist attack on the World Trade Center. CIP requires financial institutions to verify the identity of individuals who want to conduct financial transactions with them, which assists in identifying attempts to fund terrorism and money laundering activities. KYC stands for Know Your Customer; IRS is the Internal Revenue Service; and SAR is a suspicious activity report.

762
Q

A Customer Relationship Summary (Form CRS) must be provided to customers when an associated person:

A. Compares the historic returns of different asset classes.
B. Provides general information about an employer-sponsored retirement plan.
C. Recommends that a customer open an IRA rollover account for assets currently held in a former employer’s retirement plan.
D. Discusses the impact of inflation on the stock market.

A

C. Recommends that a customer open an IRA rollover account for assets currently held in a former employer’s retirement plan.

Any recommendations related to rolling over assets from a retirement account into a new or existing account or investment require that a Customer Relationship Summary (Form CRS) be provided to the customer.

763
Q

A margin account has $11,000 market value and a $4,500 debit balance. How much excess equity is in the account?

A. $1,000
B. $1,500
C. $4,500
D. $6,500

A

A. $1,000

Market value of $11,000 minus Debit of $4,500 = $6,500 of equity. Current regulation T is $5,500 (50% of 11,000). Therefore, excess equity is $1,000.

764
Q

A client wants to open a UTMA account for her 12-year-old son. Whose tax ID is used?

A. Custodian
B. Father
C. Mother
D. Son

A

D. Son

A custodial account, such as a Uniform Transfers to Minors Act (UTMA) account, must be opened with the tax ID (Social Security number) of the minor. All securities are registered in the name of the custodian for the benefit of the minor.

765
Q

Which of the following signatures does FINRA require on a new account form?

A. A principal of the broker/dealer
B. The customer and the customer’s spouse
C. The customer’s
D. The registered representative’s

A

A. A principal of the broker/dealer

FINRA requires a principal to sign new account forms.

766
Q

What lowers debit balance? I. Stock dividend; II. Cash dividend; III. Cash from sale of securities; IV. Cash from the purchase of securities

A. I and II
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

Cash dividend and cash from the sale of securities lower the account’s debit balance.

767
Q

Which of the following statements are true regarding a prime brokerage account? I. It has a higher net equity requirement than standard margin accounts. II. It has a lower equity requirement than standard margin accounts. III. It can have trades executed by multiple broker/dealers. IV. It has trades executed by one broker/dealer, but safekeeping performed by another.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

One broker/dealer performs safekeeping, and record-keeping services. Trades may be executed by several additional broker/dealers, including the primary broker/dealer.

768
Q

A customer is long 100 shares of ABC at $60 and 100 shares of XYZ at $40 in a margin account. The debit balance in the account is $6,500. The customer sells 50 of the XYZ shares for $2,000. The credit to SMA is:

A. $0.
B. $500.
C. $1,000.
D. $2,000.

A

C. $1,000.

Because one-half of every sale can be withdrawn and was not, one-half of the sale amount is credited to SMA. This applies even if the account is restricted below Regulation T.

769
Q

The market value is $12,000. The debit balance is $5,500. What is your buying power?

A. $1,000
B. $1,500
C. $2,000
D. $500

A

A. $1,000

$12,000 LMV - $5,500 DB = $6,500 E
50% x $12,000 LMV = $6,000, $6,500 E - $6,500 = $500 SMA, $500 SMA x 2 = $1,000 Buying Power

Market Value: $12,000; Debt: $5,500; Equity: $6,500; SMA: $500 SMA is the amount by which equity exceeds the Reg T requirement ($6,000). SMA times 2 equals the buying power in the account.

770
Q

Which of the following documentation is required to open a corporate account?

A. Corporate charter and the corporate resolution
B. Corporate by-laws and the corporate resolution
C. Corporate by-laws and declaration from the Board of Directors specifying who has authority to trade in the account
D. Declaration from the Board of Directors designating who has authority to trade in the account and the corporate resolution

A

A. Corporate charter and the corporate resolution

The corporate resolution identifies the individual within the corporation who is authorized to trade on its behalf and the corporate charter states that the firm may engage in margin activity. Corporate by-laws are of no significance to the firm and FINRA and do not address the specific individuals and types of trading authorized.

771
Q

A customer’s margin account statement shows the following: LONG Market Value - $100,000; Debit Balance - $54,000; SHORT Market Value - $6,000; Credit Balance - $10,000; SMA: Available Balance - $10,000. What is the equity in the customer’s account?

A. $40,000
B. $50,000
C. $60,000
D. $70,000

A

B. $50,000

$100 (LMV) - $54 (DB) + $10 (CB) - $6 (SMV) = $2 E

Long market value ($100,000) minus short market value ($6,000) = $94,000 minus debit ($54,000) = $40,000 plus credit ($10,000) = $50,000. Ignore SMA.

772
Q

Regular way settlement in a DVP/RVP account is:

A. Always cash settlement.
B. Up to 35 calendar days.
C. Three business days after trade date.
D. One business day after trade date.

A

B. Up to 35 calendar days.

While settlement usually occurs quickly, the parties have up to 35 calendar days.

Delivery versus payment (DVP) is a settlement method that requires that securities are delivered to a particular recipient only after payment is made.

Receive versus payment (RVP) is a settlement method where the delivery of the securities and delivery of the payment must happen simultaneously.

773
Q

Which type of investor has increased buying power on margin that exceeds the Federal Reserve’s mandates?

A. CMO investors
B. Mutual fund class C investor
C. Pattern day trader
D. Retail investor utilizing a prime brokerage account at the broker/dealer

A

C. Pattern day trader

Since pattern day traders do not hold their positions overnight, the broker/dealer and the Federal Reserve permit significantly higher leverage in these accounts than those of typical retail margin clients.

774
Q

The disadvantages of a short sale are I. Downside risk. II. Upside risk. III. Dividend responsibilities. IV. Margin interest charges.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

Short sales have upside or technically unlimited risk. There are also dividend payment responsibilities to street-named stock owners, but there are no interest charges.

775
Q

Which is true regarding UGMA/UTMA accounts?

A. The donor can be the custodian.
B. All children can be in a single-family account.
C. A donor’s gifts can be revocable if not used for college education.
D. Both parents can be co-holders with the minor.

A

A. The donor can be the custodian.

UGMA/UTMA permits one donor, one custodian, and all gifts are irrevocable. The donor can be the custodian.

776
Q

What is the legal age for opening a brokerage account?

A. 17 years old
B. 18 years old and of full legal age in the state of residence
C. 21 years old
D. At least the age of majority in the state of residence

A

B. 18 years old and of full legal age in the state of residence

In order to open an account, a customer must be at least 18 years of age. In addition, the customer must be the full legal age in the state in which he or she lives. The full legal age, also known as the age of majority, is the age at which a person is considered an adult, with all of the attendant rights and responsibilities of adulthood.

777
Q

Wilma is a very nervous investor who wants to avoid as much risk as possible, and also wishes to be able to withdraw her money from the investment when she needs it. With respect to investment suitability, which of the following investments might work well for Wilma in this situation?

A. Retaining cash in her home
B. Her company’s stock
C. A growth mutual fund
D. A capital preservation fund

A

D. A capital preservation fund

Investors who expect to use their funds within the next 5 years or who simply have a very low tolerance for risk will typically sacrifice growth of principal for this level of liquidity. Capital preservation funds generally have low risk.

778
Q

A client places an order to sell stocks that are not in his account, stating he will deliver the securities. What must be discussed to meet the broker/dealer’s obligation in the trade?

A. Securities must be in good delivery status, including a signature on the back for transfer or stock power permitting the trade and have no physical damage to the certificates.
B. Securities must be in good delivery status including a signature on the back for ease of transfer of ownership, not be physically damaged, and meet the 100 share rule with the exact number of shares presented.
C. Client can deliver the securities anytime up to the close of business on the day of settlement and good delivery is not required since securities are registered.
D. Securities must be delivered by the end of the business day of trade to provide processing time for the broker/dealer before delivery.

A

B. Securities must be in good delivery status including a signature on the back for ease of transfer of ownership, not be physically damaged, and meet the 100 share rule with the exact number of shares presented.

Timely delivery, signatures with stock power, and the proper amount in 100 share divisible round lots are required since these shares are in the possession of the client and not street name. This status needs to be defined by the broker before placing the order; otherwise, the broker/dealer may be guilty of failure to deliver.

779
Q

All of the following investments may be suitable for a client in need of “current income” EXCEPT:

A. Zero-coupon bonds.
B. Government agency securities.
C. Utility stocks.
D. Preferred stocks.

A

A. Zero-coupon bonds.

Zero-coupon bonds do not generate current income; interest accumulates within the bond and is payable upon maturity.

780
Q

A firm has a joint account for a married couple. Any request for disbursement from the account, made by either spouse, would require that:

A. The check can be sent to either owner with power of attorney on file.
B. The instructions of either owner must be followed explicitly.
C. Any disbursement can be signed by either owner.
D. The check must be payable to both owners jointly.

A

D. The check must be payable to both owners jointly.

Any disbursement must be made out jointly, and the check must be sent in both names.

781
Q

All of the following agencies issue securities, EXCEPT:

A. Federal National Mortgage Association
B. Federal Reserve Board
C. Federal Home Loan Board
D. Tennessee Valley Authority (TVA)

A

B. Federal Reserve Board

The Federal Reserve Board (Fed or FRB) controls monetary policy (regulates the U.S. money supply). It presides over a 12-member system of regional Federal Reserve banks and uses various tools to tighten or ease the domestic money supply. The Fed does NOT issue securities. The TVA, Federal National Mortgage Association (Fanny Mae), and FHLB all issue securities.

782
Q

A registered representative with oral authority from the customer can decide which of the following?

A. Time and price
B. Quantity and time
C. Price and quantity
D. Security and price

A

A. Time and price

Time and price are nondiscretionary elements of an order. Quantity, security, and action (buy or sell) require special authority, power of attorney.

783
Q

The Federal Act that established procedures for the protection of customer funds and securities in the event that a broker/dealer becomes insolvent is called:

A. The Securities Act of 1933.
B. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
C. The Securities Advisers Act of 1940.
D. The Securities Investor Protection Act of 1970.

A

D. The Securities Investor Protection Act of 1970.

The Securities Investor Protection Act of 1970 (SIPA) established procedures for the protection of customer funds and securities in the event that a broker/dealer becomes insolvent. This act created the Securities Investor Protection Corporation (SIPC). The SIPC collects assessments from broker/dealers to protect customers from loss due to a failed broker/dealer.

784
Q

The market value of a securities account is $9,000. Debit is $5,000. What is SIPC coverage?

A. $4,000
B. $5,000
C. $9,000
D. $14,000

A

A. $4,000

SIPC only insures equity: MV minus debit balance = equity.

785
Q

A sale of securities in a long margin position affects which of the following? I. Equity; II. Market value; III. Debit; IV. SMA

A. I and III
B. II and III
C. II, III, and IV
D. III and IV

A

C. II, III, and IV

Equity is affected only by cash withdrawal or receipt (market value rise or fall). “Sale without cash” (50% could be withdrawn) means that market value and debit both fall equally, and SMA rises by half of the sale.

786
Q

Which of the following statements is TRUE regarding real estate investing?

A. The risks of investing in individual real estate properties are often higher than investing in a public REIT.
B. Real estate investing does not provide additional portfolio diversification.
C. All individual real estate investment properties must be sold, not rented.
D. Real estate investing is not a good alternative to investing in the stock market.

A

A. The risks of investing in individual real estate properties are often higher than investing in a public REIT.

Investing in a group of securities backed by real estate reduces the overall risk for an investor through diversification than investing in an individual property.

787
Q

A mutual fund that charges the maximum sales charge of 8½% allowable by the Investment Company Act of 1940 does NOT have to offer:

A. Breakpoints.
B. Rights of accumulation.
C. Exchange rights.
D. Dividend reinvestment at NAV.

A

C. Exchange rights.

Exchange rights are a convenience privilege and are not required by the Act. All of the other rights must be made available to investors in order to collect the maximum sales charges.

788
Q

The method by which a mutual fund offering price will be determined is:

A. Determined by market conditions.
B. Outlined in the prospectus.
C. Set by SEC rules.
D. The public offering price plus any sales costs.

A

B. Outlined in the prospectus.

The actual offering price is the net asset value (NAV), plus any sales charges, but the method used to determine the fund’s pricing can be found in the prospectus.

789
Q

A long-term investor who is comfortable with moderate risk believes that the best way to make money in the stock market is to buy low. The investor is skeptical of stocks that look overvalued and carry high P/E ratios. An appropriate mutual fund for this investor is:

A. Balanced fund.
B. Value fund.
C. Aggressive growth fund.
D. Asset allocation fund.

A

B. Value fund.

Value funds seek to buy undervalued stocks and make money when the stocks appreciate.

790
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of an Exchange Traded Fund (ETF)? I. ETFs aren’t sold directly to investors. II. ETFs provide intraday liquidity. III. ETFs are redeemable by the fund and the fund will pay the investor within seven days of redemption. IV. ETFs allow small dollar amounts of investment.

A. I and III
B. I, II and IV
C. III and IV
D. I and II

A

B. I, II and IV

Exchange Traded Funds (ETFs) allow intraday liquidity, and have a very low or no minimum investment requirement.

791
Q

Which of the following accurately describes an ETN?

A. ETNs are senior secured debt instruments.
B. ETNs have principal protection.
C. Interest payments fluctuate based on the underlying index.
D. Principal at maturity is based on an index.

A

D. Principal at maturity is based on an index.

Principal at maturity is based on the underlying index at that time, minus fees. ETNs are unsecured debt; they are backed by the credit of the issuing bank. ETNs have no principal protection. They do not pay periodic interest.

792
Q

Which of the following is a debt instrument?

A. REITs
B. ELKs
C. Inverse ETFs
D. HOLDRs

A

B. ELKs

ELKS are hybrid debt instruments linked to an equity or equity index.

793
Q

Which of the following is traded on the NYSE AMEX?

A. HOLDRs
B. ELKS
C. TANs
D. STRIPs

A

A. HOLDRs

HOLDRs trade on the NYSE AMEX and allow investors to trade one security representing a bucket of stocks in one sector.

794
Q

All of the following must be included in a prospectus EXCEPT:

A. The individual securities that make up the portfolio.
B. An expense table.
C. Per share income and capital changes.
D. Sales loads and fees.

A

A. The individual securities that make up the portfolio.

A prospectus must contain, among other requirements, the sales charges and fees, an expense table, and the per share income and capital changes. The fund’s portfolio holdings are not found in a prospectus.

795
Q

A redeemable security is:

A. A marketable security.
B. Traded on an exchange or OTC market.
C. A security with no secondary trading.
D. A negotiable security.

A

C. A security with no secondary trading.

A redeemable security is non-negotiable (i.e., nonmarketable) and must be redeemed by the issuer. Unit Investment Trusts (UITs), face amount certificates (FACs) and open-end mutual funds are all examples of redeemable securities.

796
Q

Which two of the following communications are NOT required to be filed with the FINRA Advertising Regulation Department? I. Institutional communications II. Retail communications regarding an investment analysis tool that have been pre-approved by a qualified registered principal III. Online investment analysis tools IV. Correspondence

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. I and IV
D. II and IV

A

C. I and IV

I. Institutional communications
IV. Correspondence

Neither correspondence nor institutional communications must be filed with FINRA. Investment analysis tools made available to retail investors and most retail communications must be filed, even if approved by a principal.

797
Q

A hybrid REIT invests in:

A. Collateral trust certificates.
B. Leveraged ETFs.
C. Mortgages.
D. ETNs.

A

C. Mortgages.

Hybrid REITS invest in both mortgages and real property.

798
Q

An investor wants to set up a fixed withdrawal plan for her mutual fund account. What is the most important consideration?

A. The fund family offers many investment choices.
B. The fund offers the exchange privilege.
C. The fund offers rights of accumulation.
D. All withdrawal plans involve uncertainty.

A

D. All withdrawal plans involve uncertainty.

Withdrawal plans offer no guarantees. All withdrawal plans involve uncertainty, and the investor might consume her balance faster than planned. The other options concern an investor who is purchasing; not redeeming.

799
Q

Which type of investment company issues debt instruments that offer the investor a predetermined rate of interest?

A. Open-end management companies
B. Closed-end management companies
C. Face amount certificate
D. Unit investment trust

A

C. Face amount certificate

Face amount certificate holders are entitled to redeem their certificates for a fixed amount on a specific date.

800
Q

Which of the following investments are based on or track a market index?

A. TRANs
B. RANs
C. ETNs
D. BANs

A

C. ETNs

Exchange-Traded Notes (ETNs) mirror market indexes. Bond Anticipation Notes (BANs), Tax and Revenue Anticipation Notes (TRANs) and Revenue Anticipation Notes (RANs) are short-term municipal notes.

801
Q

Face amount certificates issue debt certificates that offer predetermined interest rates. The certificates may be purchased by either periodic installments or with a lump-sum payment. These certificates have a maturity of at least:

A. 6 months.
B. 12 months.
C. 18 months.
D. 24 months.

A

D. 24 months.

Face amount certificates (FACs) have maturities of at least 24 months.

802
Q

A beginning investor has limited funds, but wants immediate exposure to a variety of investment styles. The investor should consider which of the following funds?

A. Fund of funds
B. Balanced fund
C. Growth and income fund
D. Asset allocation fund

A

A. Fund of funds

A fund of funds invests in other mutual funds. With a small investment, an investor gains exposure to several different mutual funds with different investment objectives. Alternately, the investor would need more money to invest the required minimum in several different funds to achieve the same exposure.

803
Q

Which of the following is FALSE regarding ETNs?

A. An ETN’s return is based on a market index.
B. The investor may hold until maturity or trade on an exchange.
C. Principal and interest are not guaranteed.
D. ETNs pay periodic interest.

A

D. ETNs pay periodic interest.

ETNs do not pay periodic interest. At maturity, the investor receives a principal amount based on an underlying market index.

804
Q

An investor seeks exposure to a broad range of small companies. His registered representative would most likely recommend:

A. Wilshire 5000 Index Fund
B. Russell 2000 Index Fund
C. Growth and Income Fund
D. S&P 500 Index Fund

A

B. Russell 2000 Index Fund

The Russell 2000 index is a broad index of 2000 small cap stocks. This provides this investor with the exposure he seeks. The S&P 500 index is an index of 500 large cap stocks. The Wilshire 5000 is a broad market-capitalization-weighted index of the market value of all stocks actively traded in the United States. While the growth stocks contained in a growth and income equity fund might be small cap, the income stocks are generally large cap.

805
Q

Which of the following are used as hedges? I. Reverse BANs; II. Inverse ETFs; III. Precious metals funds; IV. ETNs

A. I and II
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

Precious metals mutual funds are used as inflation protection. Inverse ETFs are structured to benefit from market declines.

806
Q

The investment company concept allows the individual investor to:

A. Defer taxes by reinvesting distributions in additional shares.
B. Achieve wide diversification with a relatively small investment.
C. Have a greater claim than other shareholders.
D. Realize a greater return on an investment.

A

B. Achieve wide diversification with a relatively small investment.

Use of an investment company does not assure greater returns. Taxes on distributions are not deferred unless the account is registered as a retirement account. Economies of scale allow the investor to achieve wide diversification and professional management at very low cost. No single shareholder has any right or claim that exceeds the rights or claims of other shareholders; they all have an undivided interest.

807
Q

Which type of investment companies do NOT charge a management fee?

A. Open-end investment companies
B. Closed-end investment companies
C. Face amount certificates
D. Unit Investment Trusts

A

D. Unit Investment Trusts

The portfolio of a Unit Investment Trust (UIT) is fixed and does not require an investment adviser. The portfolio is supervised, not managed.

808
Q

If you own securities that represent an undivided interest in a fixed portfolio, with which type of investment company are you invested?

A. Unit Investment Trust
B. Open-end management company
C. Closed-end management company
D. Face amount certificate

A

A. Unit Investment Trust

The Unit Investment Trust (UIT) portfolio remains fixed for the life of the trust.

809
Q

One of the significant advantages of investing in mutual funds is:

A. Reinvestment of dividends and capital gains with no tax liability.
B. Reinvestment of dividends at a reduced sales charge and no capital gains tax.
C. Automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at POP.
D. Automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at NAV.

A

D. Automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at NAV.

The automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains with no additional sales charge is a benefit to the mutual fund investor. However, the IRS does charge taxes on the distribution, whether the investor receives the money or reinvests it.

810
Q

Which of the following is not a characteristic of a hybrid REIT?

A. Less diversified
B. Invests in mortgages
C. Invests in real property
D. Provides potential appreciation

A

A. Less diversified

Because it invests in real property and mortgages, a hybrid REIT is more diversified. It provides both potential appreciation and income.

811
Q

Which of the following statements is NOT correct with respect to closed-end investment companies?

A. They continuously offer new shares.
B. They are listed and traded on exchanges.
C. There exists a fixed number of outstanding shares.
D. Investor demand determines share price in the secondary market.

A

A. They continuously offer new shares.

A closed-end investment company does not continuously issue new shares. A closed-end company issues a fixed number of shares in a public offering. The shares are then traded at a premium or discount on the secondary market.

812
Q

The average investor has limited assets, but by pooling funds with other investors in an investment company, the investor can receive the advantages of increased:

A. Professional management and diversification.
B. Liquidity and cost reduction.
C. Risk avoidance and dividends.
D. Market timing and risk reduction.

A

A. Professional management and diversification.

Although all answers have some merit, the major advantages of utilizing an investment company are diversification and professional management.

813
Q

An investor is interested in a REIT that will provide immediate income. The investor would best be served by:

A. A hybrid REIT.
B. An equity REIT invested in developing land.
C. Any type of REIT.
D. A mortgage REIT.

A

D. A mortgage REIT.

Rental properties such as shopping centers provide immediate income, as do mortgage REITS. Developing land provides long-term appreciation, not immediate income. A hybrid REIT sacrifices some income for appreciation, since it is invested for a combination of both.

814
Q

Which type of investment company issues certificates that can be redeemed for a fixed amount on a specified date?

A. Unit investment trust
B. Open-end management company
C. Closed-end management company
D. Face amount certificate

A

D. Face amount certificate

Face amount certificate holders own debt instruments that offer a predetermined rate of interest. They can be redeemed for a fixed amount on a specified date.

815
Q

Of the funds listed below, which would most likely have the highest portfolio turnover ratio?

A. Strategic income fund
B. Aggressive growth fund
C. Government bond fund
D. Corporate bond fund

A

B. Aggressive growth fund

Aggressive growth funds traditionally have the highest turnover ratios because the fund manager is constantly buying or selling issues to attempt to meet investor expectations.

816
Q

Which of the following is NOT true concerning a redemption fee?

A. It usually applies only for early redemptions, such as within 90 days or 1 year.
B. It is assessed as a percent of the NAV at the time of redemption.
C. It is a penalty intended to discourage short-term trading of fund shares.
D. It is a form of sales charge.

A

D. It is a form of sales charge.

Redemption fees discourage short term trading and offset costs associated with processing frequent trades in fund shares. Unlike CDSCs, the fee is based on the current NAV, rather than the lower of the NAV or cost basis.

817
Q

The bid and offer price of a mutual fund are $13.60 and $14.20 respectively. If Doug redeems 300 shares, he would receive:

A. $3,980.
B. $4,080.
C. $4,170.
D. $4,260.

A

B. $4,080.

Shares are redeemed at net asset value (bid price). 300 shares at $13.60 = $4,080.00.

818
Q

The following is a summary of an investor’s dollar cost averaging plan over the past 3 months: I. Amount invested = $1,000; Share price = $10; Shares purchased = 100; II. Amount invested = $1,000; Share price = $12.50; Shares purchased = 80; III. Amount invested = $1,000; Share price = $8; Shares purchased = 125. What is his cost basis per share?

A. $8.89
B. $9.84
C. $10.00
D. $10.17

A

B. $9.84

The investor owns 305 total shares with an investment of $3,000. $3,000 divided by 305 shares equals a per share cost basis of $9.84.

819
Q

Which of the following is subject to higher maintenance requirements when purchased on margin?

A. Floating CLANs
B. Leveraged ETFs
C. Inverse ETFs
D. Adjusting ARS

A

B. Leveraged ETFs

Leveraged ETFs are subject to higher margin requirements.

820
Q

An investor is interested in an income fund. The fund he selects is likely to have a portfolio that consists of:

A. High-yield corporate securities.
B. Growth company securities that consistently earn above-average income.
C. Growth.
D. A+ rated securities.

A

A. High-yield corporate securities.

Securities with high yields would most likely produce the best results for this investor. Companies that earn above average income do not necessarily distribute the earnings to shareholders.

821
Q

A mutual fund’s redemption fee is based on the:

A. Net asset value plus the sales charge.
B. Offering price less the sales charge.
C. Offering price.
D. Net asset value.

A

D. Net asset value.

Mutual funds redeem at net asset value (NAV). If there is a redemption fee, the funds would redeem at NAV minus the redemption fee.

822
Q

Which of the following disclosures must appear on investment analysis tools, reports generated by investment analysis tools, and retail communication related to investment analysis tools? I. A description of the criteria and methodology including its limitations and underlying assumptions; II. A statement that results can vary with each use and over time; III. A statement that FINRA has approved the investment analysis tool; IV. A statement that projections are hypothetical and do not reflect actual investment results.

A. I, II and IV
B. III and IV
C. I, II, III, and IV
D. I and II

A

A. I, II and IV

A statement that FINRA has approved the investment analysis tool is incorrect because it is improper to state or imply that FINRA has approved or endorsed the investment analysis tool.

823
Q

An equity REIT invests in:

A. Mortgages.
B. Real estate.
C. GNMAs.
D. Stocks.

A

B. Real estate.

An equity REIT invests in real estate for income or capital appreciation.

824
Q

What type of mutual fund will have a diversified portfolio of both stocks and bonds?

A. Growth fund
B. Income fund
C. Sector fund
D. Balanced fund

A

D. Balanced fund

A balanced fund will hold both stocks and bonds with the objective of risk stabilization through diversification.

825
Q

If a mutual fund publishes investment performance charts, the information presented must include:

A. Minimum sales charges.
B. Average sales charges.
C. Maximum sales charges.
D. All of the above.

A

C. Maximum sales charges.

Published performance charts reflect maximum sales charges.

826
Q

The type of mutual fund that invests in short-term debt instruments is a:

A. Money market fund.
B. Bond fund.
C. Growth fund.
D. Income fund.

A

A. Money market fund.

A money market fund invests in short-term, liquid, safe debt instruments, such as T-bills, negotiable CDs and commercial paper. Other bond (income) funds invest in various bonds which may be long term and/or higher risk. Growth funds invest in equities.

827
Q

Dollar cost averaging plans have which of the following features? I. They are voluntary plans. II. They generally have a minimum periodic investment. III. Investors are penalized for missing subsequent investment periods. IV. Over time, the investor’s person profit exceeds the average cost per share.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and II

Dollar cost averaging is a voluntary investment plan with systematic investments at fixed intervals, usually monthly or quarterly. There is a minimum investment required with each deposit. There is no penalty to the investor for failure to make additional investments. The investor’s person cost is lower than the average public price per share over time.

828
Q

UITs have fixed portfolios, which means that:

A. Because the UIT is established as a trust, a fixed return is guaranteed.
B. The portfolio is made up of fixed-return, high-quality debt securities.
C. Each share of the UIT represents an undivided interest in the portfolio.
D. The holdings in the portfolio are fixed for the life of the trust.

A

D. The holdings in the portfolio are fixed for the life of the trust.

The portfolio of a Unit Investment Trust (UIT) is usually fixed for the life of the trust. As such, it is referred to as a “supervised” (as opposed to an actively “managed”) portfolio.

829
Q

A mutual fund that invests primarily in securities issued by agencies such as Ginnie Mae or Freddie Mac, which provide regular income, is a(n):

A. Collateralized equity fund.
B. Municipal bond fund.
C. Index fund.
D. Mortgage-backed securities fund.

A

D. Mortgage-backed securities fund.

Mortgage-backed securities are issued by government agencies such as GNMA, FHLMC, and FNMA. Mortgage-backed securities provide monthly income. The income from a mortgage-backed securities fund is taxable.

830
Q

An investment adviser receives a fee for his services. This fee is classified as:

A. An operating expense of the fund.
B. A percentage of the sales charges paid by purchasers.
C. A portion of a fund’s CDSC.
D. A cost to the sponsor.

A

A. An operating expense of the fund.

The investment adviser fee is the largest single operating expense of a mutual fund.

831
Q

When a member offers an investment analysis tool to retail customers, it must make the investment analysis tool available to:

A. FINRA and the SEC concurrently, within 10 business days of its first use by the public.
B. FINRA and the SEC concurrently, 10 business days prior to its first use by the public.
C. FINRA 10 business days prior to its first use by the public.
D. FINRA within 10 business days of its first use by the public.

A

D. FINRA within 10 business days of its first use by the public.

The analysis tool must be made available to FINRA within 10 business days of its first use, as well as reports that the tool generates and any other retail communicates related to the investment tool.

832
Q

If you were purchasing a security on installments and the investment matured at a fixed dollar amount in the future, you would own a:

A. Closed-end management company.
B. Variable annuity contract.
C. Face amount certificate.
D. UIT.

A

C. Face amount certificate.

Face amount certificates (FACs) are purchased on installments and mature on a specified date at fixed dollar amounts.

833
Q

Which type of stock will generally pay little or no dividends?

A. Blue chip stock
B. Income stock
C. Cyclical stock
D. Growth stock

A

D. Growth stock

Growth companies generally retain all or most of their earnings for research and expansion and therefore pay little or no dividends to shareholders.

834
Q

All of the following are contained in a fund’s prospectus EXCEPT:

A. The fund’s policy concerning loans.
B. The fund’s current portfolio of securities.
C. Methods of redemption.
D. Method of calculating the fund’s net asset value.

A

B. The fund’s current portfolio of securities.

The current holdings in a portfolio are included in the fund’s semi-annual reports to shareholders, not in the prospectus. Funds must send annual and semi-annual reports to shareholders.

835
Q

REITs are traded:

A. At net asset value.
B. Both in the over-the-counter market and on exchanges.
C. In the over-the-counter market only.
D. On exchanges only.

A

B. Both in the over-the-counter market and on exchanges.

REITs are closed-end or publicly traded. Many are listed, and some are on NASDAQ. Some REITs are non-traded and are redeemable after a certain time or event.

836
Q

A broad market index ETN carries all of the following risks EXCEPT:

A. Loss of principal.
B. Business risk.
C. Market risk.
D. Credit risk.

A

B. Business risk.

A broad market index ETN carries all of the above risks except business risk, which refers to risks associated with a particular business rather than an index or other benchmark.

837
Q

A mutual fund family offers investors the privilege of:

A. Exchanging shares of one mutual fund for shares of another mutual fund without paying any taxes.
B. Buying mutual fund shares back after redeeming them from the same fund without paying an additional sales charge as long as the transaction is completed within 30 days.
C. Exchanging shares of mutual funds for shares of the company’s stock owned in the mutual fund portfolio.
D. Exchanging shares of one mutual fund for those of another mutual fund within the same family of funds with no additional sales charge.

A

D. Exchanging shares of one mutual fund for those of another mutual fund within the same family of funds with no additional sales charge.

Investors are allowed to exchange shares of one mutual fund for shares in another mutual fund in the same family of funds without paying any additional sales charge. However, the IRS does consider this transaction a sale and a purchase and any capital gain or loss rules would apply.

838
Q

All of the following are characteristics of Unit Investment Trusts EXCEPT:

A. Units are redeemable by the issuer.
B. A fixed portfolio.
C. No secondary market trading.
D. Actively managed portfolio.

A

D. Actively managed portfolio.

Unit Investment Trusts (UITs) are not actively managed. UITs consist of a fixed portfolio that, in most cases, remains unchanged for the life of the trust.

839
Q

Registered investment companies are required to have directors on their board that are independent of the management company. What is the required minimum percentage of unaffiliated directors?

A. 50%
B. 60%
C. 25%
D. 40%

A

D. 40%

On a registered investment company’s board, 40% of the directors are required to be unaffiliated with the company.

840
Q

Which of the following would not be in an equity REIT portfolio?

A. Vacant land
B. Shopping center
C. Office building
D. Mortgage

A

D. Mortgage

An equity REIT invests in real estate. Mortgage REITs invest in mortgages. Hybrid REITs invest in both.

841
Q

Which of the following is NOT true regarding DCA?

A. More shares are purchased when prices are lower.
B. A minimum investment is required with each deposit.
C. It results in a lower average cost per share.
D. It is not available to large investors.

A

D. It is not available to large investors.

Dollar cost averaging is available to both small and large investors.

842
Q

A closed-end management company has shares that:

A. Do not fluctuate with market demand.
B. Are redeemable.
C. Are not redeemable.
D. May be issued continually so new shares are available when new investors make a purchase.

A

C. Are not redeemable.

Shares from closed-end companies are not redeemable. The other characteristics listed represent shares of open-end investment companies.

843
Q

A mutual fund’s custodian:

A. Safeguards portfolio records.
B. Disburses dividends
C. Issues new shares and redeems old shares.
D. Safeguards fund cash and securities.

A

D. Safeguards fund cash and securities.

The custodian safeguards the mutual fund’s portfolio assets. The transfer agent processes shares and disburses dividends. The investment adviser maintains portfolio records.

844
Q

A young client with a low to moderate risk tolerance is seeking a long-term investment with some growth potential. Capital preservation is a concern; however, the client is willing to accept a moderate amount of volatility. An appropriate mutual fund for this investor is:

A. Balanced fund.
B. High-yield fixed income.
C. Government fixed-income fund.
D. Growth equity fund.

A

A. Balanced fund.

Balanced funds invest in both stocks and bonds and capital preservation is a priority. Because the fund holds stocks, there is potential for growth.

845
Q

All of the following are true concerning mutual fund shareholder rights EXCEPT they:

A. Must be advised of all proposals requiring shareholder approval.
B. Approve portfolio changes when recommended by the investment adviser.
C. May ratify selection of independent auditing firms.
D. Elect directors and approve investment advisory agreements.

A

B. Approve portfolio changes when recommended by the investment adviser.

Remember that this is an EXCEPT question. Portfolio changes are at the sole discretion of the investment adviser, consistent with established policy and objective. However, changes in investment objective or policy must be approved by shareholders.

846
Q

Which statement is most correct concerning money market funds?

A. They do not require a prospectus with the initial purchase.
B. The return is based on the prime rate less 1%.
C. There is a redemption fee when liquidating the fund.
D. Interest is based on rates of the short-term investments in the fund.

A

D. Interest is based on rates of the short-term investments in the fund.

A money market fund is a continuous primary offering and consequently a prospectus is required. The interest earned is based on the interest provided by the short-term investments held in the portfolio. Money market funds are no-load (purchased and redeemed at the NAV) and there are no redemption fees.

847
Q

An Emerging Market Currency ETN may be an appropriate investment for which of the following persons?

A. An experienced investor looking for a simple way to gain exposure to a portfolio of emerging market currencies
B. A sophisticated investor seeking to invest in a portfolio of emerging market equities
C. An experienced investor who is building a long-term portfolio of debt securities.
D. A sophisticated investor seeking current income

A

A. An experienced investor looking for a simple way to gain exposure to a portfolio of emerging market currencies

An Emerging Market Currency ETN may be a simple and cost-effective way for this investor to gain exposure to a basket of emerging market currencies.

848
Q

Your client is interested in knowing the expected distributions of dividends and capital gains from their mutual fund investments. Which one of the following statements is correct?

A. Capital gains can be declared and paid monthly, while dividends are paid monthly or annually.
B. Bond funds can pay capital gains monthly; however, stock funds must pay capital gains annually.
C. Capital gains can be distributed quarterly or annually at designated times set by the mutual fund.
D. Dividends are distributed quarterly, while capital gains are distributed once a year, usually at the end of the year.

A

D. Dividends are distributed quarterly, while capital gains are distributed once a year, usually at the end of the year.

Long-term capital gains must be paid no more frequently than on an annual basis. Dividends are distributed quarterly.

849
Q

An investor’s mutual fund account is currently worth $48,000. The sales charge was 8½%. If she withdraws 6% per year, her monthly payments will be:

A. $219.60.
B. $240.
C. Indeterminate; payment will fluctuate with market
D. None of the above; withdrawal penalties may apply

A

B. $240.

This is an example of fixed-percentage periodic payments, where an investor requests that a fixed percentage of shares be liquidated at fixed intervals. The 8½% sales charge has no effect on the amount the investor receives in monthly payment. $48,000 x 6%=$2,880 annual amount ($2,880/12=$240 monthly payment).

850
Q

Bill owns shares in a closed-end investment company. He can dispose of his shares by:

A. Redemption by the investment company at a discount.
B. Sale through the sponsor.
C. Sale in the open market.
D. Redemption by the investment company.

A

C. Sale in the open market.

Closed-end investment companies do not redeem their own shares. Once issued, shares are disposed of by sale in the open market at either a premium or discount, depending on market conditions. Shares of open-end investment companies are redeemed at NAV by the issuing fund company.

851
Q

When making mutual fund recommendations a registered representative should I. Concentrate on short-term trends to highlight investment opportunities. II. Compare standardized yields of similar funds. III. Explain the fund’s expense ratio. IV. Consider the total return of the fund after sales charges and expenses.

A. I and III only
B. II and IV only
C. II, III and IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

C. II, III and IV only

Mutual funds are appropriate for long-term investment objectives; therefore, it is not advisable to concentrate on the short-term trends of the fund.

852
Q

An investment company can perform certain activities only with the approval of a majority of the shareholders. Which of the following is the board of directors allowed to do without a shareholder vote?

A. Change the fees
B. Appoint officers of the investment company
C. Change the fund’s investment objectives
D. Approve investment advisory agreements

A

B. Appoint officers of the investment company

The board is elected by the shareholders, but the board has the authority to appoint officers to perform the company’s activities.

853
Q

An investor purchased 100 shares of an investment company and paid the market price plus a commission. What did the investor purchase?

A. Open-end investment company shares
B. Closed-end investment company shares
C. No-load funds
D. Any of the above is correct

A

B. Closed-end investment company shares

Closed-end shares are purchased at market price plus a sales commission, which differs from open-end shares, which are purchased at the NAV plus a sales charge.

854
Q

Which factors may an agent use with a client to compare different mutual funds? I. The fund’s beta; II. The fund’s Sharpe ratio; III. The fund’s risk coefficient; IV. The fund’s expense ratio

A. I and IV only
B. I, III and IV only
C. II, III and IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

All of these factors are useful during a comparison of mutual funds, and allowable for use with a client.

855
Q

Which of the following is an investment company with the objective of achieving the same return as a particular market index?

A. Industrial Revenue Bond
B. Exchange Traded Fund
C. Hedge Fund
D. Revenue Bond

A

B. Exchange Traded Fund

Exchange Traded Funds are investment companies whose objective is to achieve the same return as a particular market index and who primarily invest in the securities of companies included in a selected market index.

856
Q

Due to drought conditions, an experienced high net worth investor believes that the prices of a broad range of agricultural commodities will increase. Which of the following might be an appropriate investment for this investor?

A. Farm equipment limited partnership
B. Inverse agricultural sector total return ETN
C. Soybean futures
D. Agricultural sector total return ETN

A

D. Agricultural sector total return ETN

An agricultural sector total return ETN would provide exposure to price increases in a range of agricultural products.

857
Q

Publications reporting total return data for an investment should use the recommended reporting period of:

A. 5 years and 10 years.
B. 1 year, 5 years and the lesser of 10 years or life of the investment.
C. 1 year, 5 years and life of the investment.
D. 3 years and 5 years.

A

B. 1 year, 5 years and the lesser of 10 years or life of the investment.

FINRA guidelines recommend that total return illustrations be provided for a minimum of 10 years or the lifetime of the investment, but also include the 1- and 5-year intervals for the sake of full disclosure.

858
Q

How do asset allocation funds attempt to reduce risk?

A. Invest in tax-exempt investments
B. Utilize industry and asset class diversification
C. Only put assets in government bonds and notes
D. Specifically concentrate dedicated assets in one primary area of the market

A

B. Utilize industry and asset class diversification

Asset allocation funds reduce risk by investing in a wide array of industries and asset classes. A specialized or sector funds offers higher risk since it is vulnerable to that one market sector.

859
Q

An investor is 45 years old and is interested in obtaining the highest current income possible for his investment. He can tolerate principal fluctuations. Which of the following would best suit this individual’s investment objective?

A. Short-term U.S. government bond fund
B. Aggressive growth fund
C. High-yield bond fund
D. Balanced fund

A

C. High-yield bond fund

Bond funds are suitable for investors with income-oriented investment portfolio. High-yield fixed income funds could supplement a well-diversified portfolio, but are mostly suitable for aggressive long-term investors. These securities include above-average price fluctuation in return for the potentially higher yield. An aggressive growth fund is an equity fund used for long-term appreciation. A balanced fund generally offers a lower yield because it contains stocks in addition to bonds. A government bond fund offers a low yield in exchange for a low level of default risk.

860
Q

The responsibilities of the investment adviser include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Doing research on market and economic trends.
B. Making decisions on the diversification of the fund.
C. Timing investment decisions to take advantage of market swings.
D. Appointing the officers of the fund.

A

D. Appointing the officers of the fund.

Note that this is an EXCEPT question. The board of directors, not an investment adviser, appoints the officers of the fund.

861
Q

Why might the expense ratio of a no-load mutual fund be lower than that of a mutual fund with a load?

A. The cost of managing a mutual fund with a load is higher than that of a no-load fund.
B. No-load funds are not permitted to charge 12b-1 fees.
C. Sales charges of mutual funds with loads are included in their expense ratios.
D. No-load funds may not charge a 12b-1 fee that is greater than 25 basis points.

A

D. No-load funds may not charge a 12b-1 fee that is greater than 25 basis points.

Mutual funds with loads may charge a higher 12b-1 fee, whereas the 12b-1 fee for a no-load fund cannot be greater than 25 basis points. Otherwise, they lose their “no-load” status. Remember that a 12b-1 fee is a distribution fee that mutual funds charge to cover the cost of marketing and distributing fund shares. It is included in the expenses of the fund, thereby impacting the expense ratio. Do not be confused by the sales charges associated with load funds. They are not included in the expense ratio calculation but, rather, are added to the NAV to determine the sales price. Remember, NAV + SC = POP.

862
Q

The NAV will not change if:

A. The fund receives dividends.
B. The assets in the portfolio decrease.
C. The portfolio sells securities and retains the cash.
D. The fund pays dividends.

A

C. The portfolio sells securities and retains the cash.

When the portfolio sells securities, the value goes down. However, if the portfolio retains the cash, the value of the portfolio goes up by the same amount and the NAV does not change.

863
Q

Which type of mutual fund pays out a high rate of dividend income?

A. Sector fund
B. Income fund
C. Money market fund
D. Growth fund

A

B. Income fund

An income fund’s objective is to pay a high rate of dividend income to shareholders.

864
Q

What is the maximum front-end sales charge for a mutual fund?

A. 8½% of the net asset value
B. 9% of the public offering price
C. 9% of the net asset value
D. 8½% of the public offering price

A

D. 8½% of the public offering price

The maximum front-end sales charge for a mutual fund is 8½% of the public offering price.

865
Q

Which statement is true concerning dollar cost averaging (DCA)?

A. DCA protects the investor from a loss in a steadily declining market.
B. DCA is a way to reduce risk.
C. DCA allows the investor to buy the same number of shares per installment.
D. All of the above are true statements.

A

B. DCA is a way to reduce risk.

DCA is a method to reduce risk because more shares will be purchased in a down market, and fewer shares are purchased with the same amount of money in a rising market. This practice will level out the cost basis of the shares over time, which minimizes overall investor risk. DCA cannot protect the investor from a loss in a steadily declining market.

866
Q

An investor is skeptical that a portfolio manager can consistently outperform the market. In addition, the investor is concerned about costs. Which of the following funds best suits this investor?

A. Growth fund
B. Balanced fund
C. Index fund
D. ETF

A

C. Index fund

An index fund will always mirror the performance of the index it mirrors, so the investor has no worries of over- or underperforming the market. Index funds also have lower expenses, due to passive portfolio management. An ETF also has low expenses, but is actively managed and therefore does not address the investor’s performance concern.

867
Q

An investor seeks a fund that will provide regular income. His best choice is a:

A. Mortgage-backed security fund.
B. Government bond fund.
C. Money market fund.
D. Income fund.

A

A. Mortgage-backed security fund.

Because the mortgage-backed securities fund pays monthly principal and interest, it provides the best regular income.

868
Q

An example of a specialized mutual fund is I. A fund with below average growth with high dividends. II. A fund based on companies in a specific geographic region. III. A technology fund. IV. Safer than a nonspecialized fund.

A. II and III
B. III and IV
C. I and II
D. I and IV

A

A. II and III

Specialized or sector funds concentrate their investments in companies in certain geographic regions or specific industries. Below average growth with high dividends characterizes an income fund. Sector funds are riskier than nonspecialized funds because they are dependent on one industry or market sector.

869
Q

A mutual fund prospectus can no longer be used if financial information is older than:

A. 90 days.
B. 12 months.
C. 13 months.
D. 16 months.

A

D. 16 months.

A prospectus must contain current information about the investment company, and therefore, a prospectus that includes financial information more than 16 months old can no longer be sent out to prospective customers.

870
Q

A low-income 60-year-old retiree whose investment objective is current income until he can begin collecting Social Security is willing to accept volatility in principal in exchange for more income. Which of the following is the most suitable investment?

A. Zero coupon bonds
B. A fixed annuity
C. A high-yield bond fund
D. A balanced fund

A

C. A high-yield bond fund

A high-yield bond fund would most likely provide the highest current income although it may be volatile especially if interest rates go up. Fixed annuities normally provide smaller payments in return for the guaranteed payments. A balanced fund balances growth and income, and zero coupon bonds do not make interest payments.

871
Q

Jimmy had money invested in SkyHi Aggressive Growth Fund for the past calendar year and realized a substantial capital gain on the shares; however, Jimmy did not sell the shares during the year. Which of the following statements is TRUE?

A. The capital gain is reported to Jimmy on a 1099 form.
B. Jimmy is not required to pay taxes on realized capital gains.
C. Jimmy is not subject to taxes on the gains if they were reinvested.
D. This information is not subject to IRS reporting in the current year.

A

A. The capital gain is reported to Jimmy on a 1099 form.

When the fund realizes gains on investments in the portfolio, they are reported to shareholders on Form 1099.

872
Q

Which of the following mutual fund portfolios has market risk as its most prevalent risk factor?

A. Bond fund
B. Growth fund
C. Money market fund
D. Income fund

A

B. Growth fund

Growth funds include both blue chips and stock of less established companies and are most subject to overall market declines.

873
Q

With a systematic withdrawal plan, from what source are the first payments made?

A. Dividends
B. Original capital
C. Net invested capital
D. Capital gains

A

A. Dividends

Payments are first made from dividends, then capital gains. If there is not enough to make the payments from these sources, then payments from the principal will be made.

874
Q

Which of the following should NOT be used when comparing mutual funds?

A. Comparison of funds of a dissimilar objective
B. Quality of management
C. Risk factors
D. The fund’s investment policies

A

A. Comparison of funds of a dissimilar objective

When comparing mutual funds, it is important to restrict the comparison to funds of a similar nature.

875
Q

Dollar cost averaging I. Will allow an investor to purchase a fixed number of shares periodically. II. Is not as effective as market timing. III. Does not protect the investor against loss in steadily declining markets. IV. Does not guarantee a profit.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

D. III and IV

Dollar cost averaging utilizes fixed dollar amounts, not fixed share amounts and is more effective than market timing over the long term. Loss is always a possibility in a steadily declining market.

876
Q

With a systematic withdrawal plan, which type of plan is implemented when the investor wishes to receive the same amount of money with each payment?

A. Fixed percentage periodic payments
B. Fixed shares periodic payments
C. Fixed asset periodic payments
D. Fixed dollar periodic payments

A

D. Fixed dollar periodic payments

A fixed dollar payout option provides the investor with a specific dollar amount each payment.

877
Q

Which fund would be LEAST suitable for a retired investor?

A. Blue chip fund
B. Aggressive growth fund
C Money market fund
D. Income fund

A

B. Aggressive growth fund

The bond (income) fund is probably most appropriate for a retired investor who needs income. Retired investors generally keep a portion of their portfolios in equities to provide continuing appreciation through their retirement years, and the blue chip fund is a relatively conservative equity fund for this purpose. Retired investors generally maintain a portion of their portfolios in cash equivalents like money market funds. An aggressive growth fund has high volatility and risk, and is best for risk-tolerant investors.

878
Q

The statistic that measures fund performance and includes reinvested distributions and share appreciation, net of sales charges and expenses for the period is:

A. Investment objective.
B. Standardized yield.
C. Current distribution rate.
D. Total return.

A

D. Total return.

A fund’s total return is the statistical analysis that considers the fund’s net return after sales charges and expenses. It includes the effect of reinvested distributions and share price appreciation during the period in question.

879
Q

Which of the following is contracted by a mutual fund to issue new shares and cancel redeemed shares for the fund?

A. Board of directors
B. Transfer agent
C. Custodian
D. Investment adviser

A

B. Transfer agent

The transfer agent is in charge of issuing new shares, cancelling redeemed shares, as well as disbursing dividends and capital gains.

880
Q

James is looking to invest in a mutual fund that will provide some additional income, while still providing growth potential. The registered representative would most likely recommend which of the following?

A. Value fund
B. Money market fund
C. Government bond fund
D. Growth and income fund

A

D. Growth and income fund

James is looking for some potential income as well as growth. Based on the choices given the only one that will provide both growth and income would be the growth and income fund.

881
Q

Which of the following is the largest expense item of the fund?

A. Custodial
B. Management fee
C. Transfer agent
D. Board of directors

A

B. Management fee

The management fee is generally the largest expense item of the fund itself. Please note the sales charge goes to the underwriter and not the fund itself.

882
Q

What are the tax consequences of changing from one fund to another within a family of funds?

A. It is not a taxable event.
B. It may not be a taxable event if exchanged at the same NAV.
C. It is tax-deferred.
D. It is a taxable event because it is a purchase and sale.

A

D. It is a taxable event because it is a purchase and sale.

The exchange privilege of a family of mutual funds normally permits the sale of the shares of one fund and the purchase of the shares of another fund to occur at net asset value. The tax consequence results from the sale of fund shares compared with their original purchase price.

883
Q

Which of the following scenarios is NOT a breakpoint selling violation?

A. Dividing a customer’s purchase between several different mutual fund families to increase the sales charges, and the representative’s payout
B. Informing a customer that a larger amount invested in one fund would be less expensive than dividing the investment between two funds
C. Accepting an order from a customer to buy a fund below the breakpoint discount level without informing the customer of the breakpoint discount
D. Convincing a customer to buy two funds just below the breakpoint discount level, rather than pooling the money to invest in one fund that will meet the breakpoint discount

A

B. Informing a customer that a larger amount invested in one fund would be less expensive than dividing the investment between two funds

A registered representative is required to inform a customer that a larger investment in one fund above a breakpoint is more cost effective than smaller investments in two or more funds that fall below the breakpoint level. All of the other choices reflect breakpoint violations. Remember that whether the purchase order is solicited or unsolicited, the registered representative must inform the customer of the breakpoint sales discount.

884
Q

A signature guarantee is usually required for which of the following types of transactions? I. Wire transfers; II. Redemptions to addresses different than the address of record on the account; III. Redemptions on a two-party account; IV. For dollar amounts below certain limits

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

A signature guarantee is usually required for wire transfers, redemptions to addresses different than the address of record on the account, or for dollar amounts above certain limits.

885
Q

Money market fund returns will fluctuate in relation to the yields of:

A. Series EE savings bonds.
B. U.S. government bonds.
C. Passbook savings rates.
D. Treasury bills.

A

D. Treasury bills.

The returns on money markets will fluctuate in relation to the yields of the fund’s underlying securities. Money markets invest in short term maturity securities such as Treasury bills, commercial paper, bank certificates of deposit, and banker’s acceptances. They do NOT invest in longer term U.S. government bonds nor do they invest in non-negotiable Series EE savings bonds. Passbook savings rates offered by banks on savings account deposits are unrelated to money market investment portfolios.

886
Q

With regard to sales breakpoints, any schedule changes must be communicated to existing shareholders within what period of time?

A. Within 7 days
B. Within 30 days
C. Within 1 year
D. Immediately

A

C. Within 1 year

Investment companies have 1 year to advise existing shareholders of changes to breakpoint schedules.

887
Q

Which performance statistic is typically higher for newer funds with lower total assets?

A. Standardized yield of the fund
B. Current distribution rate of the fund
C. Expense ratio of the fund
D. Total return of the fund

A

C. Expense ratio of the fund

Newer funds with lower total assets under management will typically have higher expense ratios than similar funds with more assets and longer tenure.

888
Q

If a mutual fund with an offering price of $30 does not offer breakpoints, rights of accumulation, and dividend reinvestment at NAV to investors, what is its allowable maximum sales charge?

A. $1.50
B. $1.88
C. $1.95
D. $2.55

A

B. $1.88

If a mutual fund does not offer all of the following privileges – breakpoints, rights of accumulation, and dividend reinvestment at NAV – its maximum sales charge is 6.25%. ($30 x 6.25% = $1.88)

889
Q

The safekeeping of an investment company’s cash and securities is the responsibility of the fund’s:

A. Board of directors.
B. Investment adviser.
C. Custodian.
D. Transfer agent.

A

C. Custodian.

The custodian holds the assets of the company but does not perform any management or supervisory activities.

890
Q

An investor fears a coming inflation trend, and wants to protect his portfolio. He would probably choose a

A. Gold fund
B. Blue chip fund
C. Money market fund
D. High yield bond fund

A

A. Gold fund

Precious metals funds are used as protection against inflation. Bond funds suffer during inflationary periods because of rising interest rates.

891
Q

All the following are advantages of owning mutual fund shares EXCEPT:

A. Easily accessible information about the fund.
B. Tax-free capital gain distributions.
C. The reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at NAV.
D. Simplification of tax filing.

A

B. Tax-free capital gain distributions.

The investor may reinvest capital gains with no additional sales charge; however, the investor would still be required to pay taxes on the capital gain distribution whether they receive the money or reinvest it. All the other statements are benefits of mutual fund ownership.

892
Q

Regarding CDSCs, which of the following is NOT true?

A. They represent alternate methods of recovering fund marketing costs.
B. For a given holding period, costs associated with each class will differ.
C. The different share class options should always be pointed out by the rep.
D. They reduce the amount of the initial investment.

A

D. They reduce the amount of the initial investment.

Contingent deferred sales charges (CDSCs) are back-end loaded. They do not reduce the amount of the initial investment.

893
Q

A sales breakpoint for a mutual fund sale is available to:

A. Three friends who own a joint account.
B. Two sisters owning a joint account.
C. An investment club.
D. An individual account holder.

A

D. An individual account holder.

Sales breakpoints are available to individuals, custodian accounts for minor children, joint accounts with spouse and dependents, and trustees for corporate pension plans. Other joint accounts, investment clubs and partnerships are not eligible accounts for breakpoint sales.

894
Q

A client is planning on retiring in the next 2 years. His current investments consist of equity funds. For increased retirement income, he should begin to move his investments from equity funds to an:

A. Value fund.
B. Blend fund.
C. Income fund.
D. Money market fund.

A

C. Income fund.

The income fund will most likely provide the investor with the highest income of these choices. Income funds invest in blue chip and other dividend-paying stocks.

895
Q

A new investor recently opened a mutual fund account and is planning to make monthly investments with the goal of accumulating a sizeable retirement account in the next 20 years. What mutual fund feature best helps him in accomplishing this goal?

A. Automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at NAV
B. Rights of accumulation
C. The use of a systematic withdrawal plan
D. Letter of intent

A

A. Automatic reinvestment of dividends and capital gains at NAV

Mutual funds typically offer reinvestment of capital gains and dividends at net asset value (meaning without a sales charge). This feature makes a significant difference in portfolio accumulation value due to the compounding effect and will help him in achieving growth in his retirement account.

896
Q

Which of the following funds subjects the investor to added legislative risk?

A. International fund
B. Government bond fund
C. Balanced fund
D. Growth fund

A

A. International fund

International funds are subject to foreign as well as domestic legislative risk. In addition, they carry currency exchange risk.

897
Q

What types of securities would a mutual fund called Westgo Fixed Income Fund be likely to hold in its portfolio?

A. Debt securities only
B. Treasury bills and commercial paper only
C. An array of bonds and common stocks
D. Debt securities and preferred stocks

A

D. Debt securities and preferred stocks

Fixed income securities are those with a specific consistent yield such as debt securities and preferred stocks. They generally hold both short- and long-term fixed income securities, but no common stocks since common stocks pose the risk of a loss of principal. A money market fund would hold treasury bills and commercial paper.

898
Q

What type of mutual fund typically has a high degree of capital preservation but carries a risk of not producing high enough returns to keep up with inflation?

A. Income fund
B. Bond fund
C. Growth fund
D. Money market fund

A

D. Money market fund

These are typical characteristics of a money market fund. Other bond (income) funds offer higher yields. Growth funds are equity funds and have historically offered appreciation which exceeds inflation.

899
Q

An aggressive growth fund is a suitable investment for all of the following investors EXCEPT:

A. A young couple with a high tolerance for risk who are saving for a down payment to purchase a home in 2 years.
B. An experienced, risk tolerant investor seeking a long-term investment with capital appreciation.
C. A middle-aged investor seeking to boost returns in his otherwise conservative portfolio by allocating 5% of his assets into an aggressive growth investment with the potential for high returns.
D. A young aggressive investor seeking capital appreciation for a long-term IRA investment.

A

A. A young couple with a high tolerance for risk who are saving for a down payment to purchase a home in 2 years.

It is an incorrect statement because 2 years is not enough time to invest in an equity fund, especially a volatile one. The fact that the couple has a high tolerance for risk doesn’t change the reality that they need their money soon. They should invest in a fund where their principal will be secure and relatively stable.

900
Q

Which of the following investments is the LEAST appropriate for a portfolio with value as its management style?

A. An established computer hardware company with a low P/E ratio
B. A rapidly expanding restaurant chain with a high P/E ratio
C. A growing technology company whose stock dropped significantly in price due to one quarter of disappointing earnings
D. A relatively unknown but growing company with low P/E ratio and P/B ratios

A

B. A rapidly expanding restaurant chain with a high P/E ratio

Value managers typically favor stocks with low P/E ratio.

901
Q

Your client is a long-term investor who is willing to accept a moderate amount of volatility and wants to invest in a diversified portfolio of large cap U.S. companies across a broad spectrum of industries. The client thinks it is difficult to pick a fund manager that will consistently outperform the overall stock market. Which of the following is an appropriate investment for this investor?

A. S&P 500 Index Fund
B. Balanced Fund
C. Sector Fund
D. Russell 2000 Index Fund

A

A. S&P 500 Index Fund

This index fund will give the investor exposure to large cap U.S. stocks, and the investor will not have to guess which fund manager will keep up with or outperform the S&P 500.

902
Q

Which of the following functions would be performed by a mutual fund transfer agent?

A. Perform investment research and analysis
B. Receive common stock dividends payable to the fund
C. Deliver 20,000 shares of ABC stock sold from the fund’s portfolio
D. Cancel redeemed shares

A

D. Cancel redeemed shares

The transfer agent issues and redeems fund shares for individual investors.

Deliver 20,000 shares of ABC stock sold from the fund’s portfolio is incorrect because this is a function of the custodian. The custodian holds the stock on behalf of the fund’s shareholders and is responsible for delivering and receiving securities for the fund’s portfolio.

903
Q

Investment —- Sales Charge
$250K: No sales charge

Robert purchased $40,000 worth of ABC Growth Fund. At the same time his wife purchased $25,000 of ABC Growth Fund. Five years later, together their accounts are worth $99,000, and Robert purchases $2,000 worth of ABC Small Cap Fund for his son in a Coverdell Education Account. The ABC Fund has rights of accumulation and permits investors to combine investments from the entire family of funds for the purpose of reaching breakpoints. Which two of the following statements are correct?

I. Robert paid a 4% sales charge on his initial investment of $40,000.
II. Robert paid a 3% sales charge on his initial investment of $40,000.
III. The sales charge for the $2,000 purchase of ABC Small Cap fund for the Coverdell Education Account was 2%.
IV. The sales charge for the $2,000 purchase of ABC Small Cap fund for the Coverdell Education Account was 5%.

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. I and III
D. III and IV

A

B. II and III

II. Robert paid a 3% sales charge on his initial investment of $40,000.
III. The sales charge for the $2,000 purchase of ABC Small Cap fund for the Coverdell Education Account was 2%.

Robert paid 3% sales charge on his initial purchase because he could combine his purchase with his wife’s purchase for the purpose of reaching a breakpoint. Their total investment of $65,000 qualified them for the 3% breakpoint for investments of $50,000 - $100,000.

The purchase of $2,000 worth of ABC Small Cap Fund qualified for a 2% sales charge for investments of $100,000 -$250,000. This is because the current value of Robert’s and his wife’s account could be combined with the son’s purchase for the purpose of reaching a breakpoint. The current value of their combined accounts is $99,000 + $2,000purchase of ABC Small Cap Fund
= $101,000.

904
Q

Which of the following is (are) an approved methods of redeeming mutual fund shares? I. By check writing; II. By telephone; III. By written request; IV. Through a dealer

A. I and III only
B. II and III only
C. IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

Mutual fund shares may be redeemed by written request, via telephone (if appropriate documentation is on file to do so), and through check-writing privileges, if such privileges exist on the account.

905
Q

Which of the following is true of a geographic fund? I. It is most appropriate for a sophisticated investor who is already diversified. II. It is tax free to an investor who resides in the region. III. Because the fund is dependent on this one region, it carries more risk. IV. It is most appropriate for a beginning investor who resides in the region.

A. II and IV
B. I and III
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

B. I and III

A geographic fund allows a sophisticated, diversified investor to concentrate a portion of their portfolio in one region.

906
Q

Through whom may an investor redeem mutual fund shares? I. The dealer that sold the funds; II. The transfer agent; III. The SEC; IV. The custodian

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

The SEC is a governing body and does not handle customer transaction. A fund may be redeemed through the dealer or the transfer agent.

907
Q

Which of the following is LEAST likely to be found in the portfolio of an income fund?

A. Growth stock
B. Utility stock
C. Blue chip stock
D. Preferred stock

A

A. Growth stock

Growth companies typically reinvest their earnings instead of distributing these earnings as dividends. The other three are known for paying regular dividends.

908
Q

An investor is most interested in current yield from her investment. She should purchase a(n):

A. Sector fund.
B. No-load fund.
C. Growth fund.
D. Income fund.

A

D. Income fund.

An income fund’s primary investment objective is current yield.

909
Q

Which of the following is a suitability concern regarding a fund of funds?

A. Lack of diversification
B. Impaired liquidity
C. Specialized investment objective
D. High expense ratio

A

D. High expense ratio

Because a fund of funds invests in other mutual funds, it has a “double layer” of expenses, which typically means a higher expense ratio than other funds. By investing in a fund of funds, the investor gains exposure to several different investment objectives and a diverse range of securities. A fund of funds is a liquid as a conventional mutual fund.

910
Q

A mutual fund’s NAV is computed:

A. Twice a day.
B. Daily.
C. Weekly.
D. Monthly.

A

B. Daily.

A mutual fund’s net asset value (NAV) is computed once a day, usually at the close of the New York Stock Exchange.

911
Q

A mutual fund is listed in the paper at $18.50 - NL - +.02. How much is the sales charge on this fund?

A. $18.52
B. None; this is a no-load fund.
C. $.02 per share
D. $18.50

A

B. None; this is a no-load fund.

The “NL” designates this as a no-load fund. The $18.50 is the net asset value and public offering price of the fund.

912
Q

A mutual fund is listed as $20.25 - $21.41 - +.03. How much is the sales charge for this fund?

A. $20.25
B. $21.41
C. $.03
D. $1.16

A

D. $1.16

The sales charge is the difference of the public offering price ($21.41) from the net asset value (NAV) ($20.25) for a total of $1.16.

913
Q

Howard is a successful lawyer interested in the technology industry. He is saving for the down payment on a home that he plans to buy next year. Howard should invest in a:

A. Government bond fund.
B. Sector fund.
C. Money market fund.
D. Tax-free money market fund.

A

D. Tax-free money market fund.

Because Howard’s investment horizon is short, he needs the capital safety of a money market fund. As a “successful” lawyer, Howard is in a high tax bracket and is better served in a tax-free money market fund. Howard’s interest in tech stocks is irrelevant to the question because his short time horizon overrides all other factors.

914
Q

Which of the following is a risk associated with a mutual fund withdrawal plan?

A. Investors have no control over the liquidation process.
B. The investor may outlive his or her income.
C. The sales charge for the service is high.
D. There are no dividends or capital gains.

A

B. The investor may outlive his or her income.

Investors need to be aware that systematic withdrawal plans have potential to exhaust their principal. There is no guarantee on how long the plan will last.

915
Q

An investor opens a mutual fund account with $3,000. After 45 days, she signs a letter of intent for a $10,000 breakpoint. Nine months later, she deposits $12,000 into the fund. Which of the following statements is true?

A. She will not receive any reduced sales charges.
B. She will receive reduced sales charges on $15,000 worth of shares.
C. She will receive reduced sales charges on $12,000 worth of shares.
D. She will receive reduced sales charges on $10,000 worth of shares.

A

B. She will receive reduced sales charges on $15,000 worth of shares.

Letters of intent are valid for 13 months and can be backdated up to 90 days prior to their signing. She will receive the reduced sales charges on the entire $15,000 worth of shares.

916
Q

How often must performance statistics in a mutual fund prospectus be updated?

A. Every 90 days
B. Every 6 months
C. Every 12 months
D. Every 3 years

A

C. Every 12 months

A prospectus is required to be updated no less than every 12 months.

917
Q

A customer owns 100 shares XYZ Mutual Fund, an open-end investment company. When the customer sells the shares, he will receive:

A. Offering price from the previous day.
B. Offering price computed after the order is received.
C. NAV computed on the previous day’s closing value.
D. NAV computed after the order is received.

A

D. NAV computed after the order is received.

When a customer redeems or sells shares, the redemption value of an open-end investment company’s shares is based on the NAV computed after the order is received. The NAV is computed once a day at the close of the New York Stock Exchange. Buy and sell orders are based on the next price to be computed (forward pricing), so the customer selling shares will receive the NAV computed after the order is received at the close of the NYSE on that day.

918
Q

Which of the following statements is most correct concerning a mutual fund’s contingent deferred sales charges (CDSC)?

A. Funds with a CDSC will be offered at the net asset value plus the maximum allowable sales charge.
B. The longer the fund shares are held, the lower the sales charge percentage.
C. The sales charge will automatically be refunded upon sale of the fund shares.
D. The earlier the fund shares are sold, the lower the sales charge percentage.

A

B. The longer the fund shares are held, the lower the sales charge percentage.

919
Q

Which of the following statements is/are correct concerning the basis of a mutual fund’s redemption price? I. The price is based on the next calculated POP. II. The redemption price is the next computed NAV. III. If the fund charges a redemption fee, the fee will be based on a percentage of the NAV. IV. A shares are assessed a load upon redemption.

A. II and III
B. II and IV
C. I and II
D. I and IV

A

A. II and III

II. The redemption price is the next computed NAV.
III. If the fund charges a redemption fee, the fee will be based on a percentage of the NAV.

A fund’s redemption fee is based on the next calculated NAV after the end of the trading day. Redemption fees are based on a percentage of the NAV. A shares are assessed a load at time of purchase; B shares are assessed a load at time of redemption.

920
Q

Mutual fund investment income and capital gains distributions I. May be taken in cash. II. Can be reinvested into the fund at the POP. III. Are taxable whether taken in cash or reinvested. IV. May be tax deferred upon election.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

I. May be taken in cash.
III. Are taxable whether taken in cash or reinvested.

Mutual fund investors may choose to take distributions in cash or reinvest them at NAV. In either case, distributions are currently taxable. The only way to defer tax on distributions is to own fund shares in a tax-deferred account such as an IRA.

921
Q

An investor is participating in a dollar cost averaging plan with her mutual fund. She is investing $1,000 per month and has been in the plan for 4 months. The monthly share prices have been $5, $4, $2, and $8. How many shares does she own after the 4-month period?

A. 500
B. 875
C. 995
D. 1,075

A

D. 1,075

To find the answer, divide the share price each month into the invested amount to find how many shares were purchased each month, then add them together. She has purchased 200 shares ($1,000 / $5), 250 shares ($1,000 / $4), 500 shares ($1,000 / $2) and 125 shares ($1,000 / $8) for a total of 1,075 shares.

922
Q

A customer owns 500 shares of XYZ Mutual Fund A shares. She can redeem her shares at the:

A. NAV.
B. NAV less the CDSC.
C. POP less the CDSC.
D. POP.

A

A. NAV.

Class A shares are redeemed at the NAV.

923
Q

An investor wishes to invest $50,000 into a diversified portfolio of stocks, bonds, and money market securities. He wants to shift the percentages invested in each category as market conditions change but does not believe he has the time or resources to make the appropriate adjustments. Which of the following mutual funds would best suit his objectives?

A. Asset allocation fund
B. S&P 500 index fund
C. Target date fund
D. Strategic income fund

A

A. Asset allocation fund

Asset allocation funds hold a diversified portfolio of stocks, bonds and money market securities. The fund managers frequently use computer models to change the make-up of the portfolio in relation to current and projected market conditions.

924
Q

An investor who seeks growth would most likely choose a(n):

A. Fixed income fund.
B. Equity fund.
C. Bond fund.
D. Money market fund.

A

B. Equity fund.

A money market fund offers not growth but preservation of capital. A fixed income (bond) fund offers income; not growth.

925
Q

Mutual fund sales breakpoints are allowable only if:

A. Clients receive customized breakpoint schedules.
B. Information concerning scheduled breakpoints is given to shareholders and prospective investors.
C. All share classes assess a 12b-1 fee.
D. The fund’s NAV per share is at least $10.

A

B. Information concerning scheduled breakpoints is given to shareholders and prospective investors.

The fund’s NAV price is not a consideration for the sales charge reduction schedule. Breakpoints must apply uniformly to all offerees. 12b-1 fees are never required.

926
Q

Which type of mutual fund may be heavily invested in companies of cutting-edge industries or start-up companies with unproven earnings?

A. Growth and income fund
B. Income fund
C. Aggressive growth fund
D. Growth fund

A

C. Aggressive growth fund

This is the basic definition and objective of an aggressive growth fund.

927
Q

The total expenses divided by the average net assets is the formula used in determining the mutual fund’s:

A. Management fees.
B. Expense ratio.
C. Sales charges.
D. 12b-1 fees.

A

B. Expense ratio.

The fund’s expense ratio is important in evaluating the operating efficiency of the fund.

928
Q

Sales breakpoints are allowable if which of the following conditions are met?

A. Different investor classes qualify for different breakpoints.
B. Breakpoints uniformly apply to all offerees.
C. The prospectus remains the same if the breakpoint schedules change.
D. The investment company advises existing shareholders of any schedule changes within 2 years.

A

B. Breakpoints uniformly apply to all offerees.

The prospectus must be revised if the breakpoint schedules change.

929
Q

The Prime Care Fund is quoted at $25 - $26.70. The prospectus shows that the maximum sales charge for purchases of $25,000 to $49,999 is 4%. Approximately how many shares can a customer buy with $40,000?

A. 1,498
B. 1,536
C. 1,438
D. 1,600

A

B. 1,536

To find the answer, first calculate the sales charge. $40,000 at 4% means $1,600 will be used for sales charges, leaving $38,400 left to purchase shares. $38,400 divided by the net asset value (NAV) of $25 will purchase 1,536 shares.

930
Q

A mutual fund is quoted at $20. According to The Investment Company Act, what is the maximum sales charge allowed for this fund?

A. $1
B. $1.60
C. $1.70
D. $1.85

A

C. $1.70

The maximum sales charge allowed is 8.5% expressed as a percentage of the offering price. The correct answer would, therefore, be $1.70 (i.e. $20.00 X .085 = $1.70).

931
Q

Which of the following is least suitable for a retired couple looking for preservation of capital with a reasonable rate of return?

A. A specialized fund investing in emerging markets in South America
B. An U.S. government bond fund
C. Balanced fund where part of the money is invested in bonds and the other part in large cap companies
D. Asset allocation fund with 70% in AAA rate bond and 30% in large cap companies

A

A. A specialized fund investing in emerging markets in South America

A specialized fund in emerging markets is very high risk and not suitable for retired investors looking for capital preservation and income.

932
Q

A technology fund is an example of which type of mutual fund portfolio?

A. Specialized fund
B. Growth fund
C. Growth and income fund
D. Income fund

A

A. Specialized fund

Specialized or sector funds concentrate a major portion of their assets in specific industries, market sectors, or geographic regions.

933
Q

Which of the following are the most important points for an investor to understand regarding a geographic fund? I. The investor may switch to another fund within the same family at POP. II. A geographic fund is most appropriate for a sophisticated investor who is already diversified. III. The sales load is 5.5%. IV. Because the fund is dependent on one region, it carries more risk.

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. I and III

A

C. II and IV

A geographic fund carries more risk due to geographic concentration, and is most suitable to a sophisticated investor who wishes to concentrate a portion of their portfolio.

934
Q

Your client has just retired, and only has his pension plan to rely on for income, from which he needs a specific amount each month for living expenses. Which type of mutual fund portfolio would you recommend?

A. Blue chip growth funds
B. Specialized funds
C. International equities fund
D. Income and bond funds

A

D. Income and bond funds

Income and bond funds have an emphasis on current income with preservation of principal. These are the most important objectives for this situation.

935
Q

An individual wants a mutual fund that will give her exposure to both stocks and bonds. Which of the following funds should her registered representative recommend?

A. Income fund
B. Balanced fund
C. Blended fund
D. Asset allocation fund

A

B. Balanced fund

A balanced fund holds both stocks and bonds, and therefore, suits this investor’s interest. An asset allocation fund’s portfolio is allocated among all asset classes: stocks, bonds, and money market instruments. An income fund invests primarily in bonds (it may or may not contain preferred stocks). A blended fund contains a blend of growth stocks and value stocks.

936
Q

An investor has a very high annual income. One of her friends told her that she needs to find some investments that will help her earn a good return without having to pay so much in taxes to the federal and state governments. Which of the following would be a good choice for this investor?

A. Aggressive growth mutual funds
B. Bank deposit accounts
C. Municipal bond funds
D. CDs

A

C. Municipal bond funds

Municipal fixed income investments generate federally tax-exempt interest income and may be exempt from state tax if the holder is a resident of the issuing state.

937
Q

An investor likes the safety of a government bond fund, but will forfeit a portion of this safety for a slightly higher return. She would most likely choose which of the following?

A. Mortgage-backed security fund
B. High yield bond fund
C. Corporate bond fund
D. Growth and income fund

A

A. Mortgage-backed security fund

The MBS fund has less credit risk than a corporate bond fund because it generally invests in mortgage-backed securities, issued by a government agency. The other three funds have significantly more risk than the MBS fund.

938
Q

The payment to mutual fund investors who redeem their shares will be based on the:

A. Previous bid price as of the day the shares are received.
B. Next computed bid price as of the day the shares are received.
C. Next computed ask price as of the day the shares are received.
D. Current offering price.

A

B. Next computed bid price as of the day the shares are received.

The Forward Pricing Rule states that all purchases and liquidations will take place at the 4 p.m. EST Net Asset Value per share AFTER receipt of the order to purchase or sell. In this question, the liquidation sale of shares back to the fund takes place at the next computed bid (which means NAV).

939
Q

What type of mutual fund invests in companies that pay high dividends in relation to their market value?

A. Money market fund
B. Income fund
C. Bond fund
D. Growth fund

A

B. Income fund

The primary objective of an income fund is to generate current income. This is accomplished by investing in preferred stock and the common stock of companies with a history of paying high dividends in relation to their market value. Income funds will generally have public utilities in their portfolios for this reason.

940
Q

ABC Equity Fund charges a 12b-1 fee. The fund’s Board of Directors must be made up of at least:

A. 60% unaffiliated directors.
B. 40% employees and professional money managers.
C. 40% outside directors.
D. 51% unaffiliated directors.

A

D. 51% unaffiliated directors.

When a fund charges a 12b-1 fee, the majority of the board (51%) must be made up of unaffiliated or outside directors.

941
Q

Mutual funds are required to pay redemption proceeds within:

A. 5 business days.
B. 7 calendar days.
C. 10 calendar days.
D. 1 business day.

A

B. 7 calendar days.

The Investment Company Act of 1940 specifies that fund redemptions be paid within 7 calendar days.

942
Q

An investor wants more detailed information than what he can find in the prospectus with respect to the calculation of the net asset value. This information can be found in the:

A. Semi-annual report.
B. Statement of additional information.
C. Proxy statement.
D. Distribution plan.

A

B. Statement of additional information.

The detailed financial information can be found in the statement of additional information, which can be obtained by calling or writing the fund company.

943
Q

When calculating the net asset value of a mutual fund, you divide the:

A. Total net assets by the ask price for the fund shares.
B. Number of outstanding shares by the ask price for the fund shares.
C. Total net assets by the number of outstanding shares.
D. Number of outstanding shares by total net assets.

A

C. Total net assets by the number of outstanding shares.

Dividing the total net assets of a mutual fund by the number of outstanding shares will give you the fund’s net asset value (NAV).

944
Q

Which of the following is the main difference between two mutual funds: Domestic Blue Chip A and Domestic Blue Chip B?

A. Capitalization of the fund
B. Fund’s investment adviser or manager
C. The method of computing sales charges
D. The portfolio make-up of each fund

A

C. The method of computing sales charges

The “A” and “B” designate the class of shares used for calculating sales charges. Class A shares are offered at net asset value (NAV) plus an up-front load, while Class B shares are offered at NAV with a contingent deferred sales charge (CDSC). Class B shares will almost always have a higher 12b-1 fee. Customers have the choice of which type of fees will better suit their time horizons and objectives.

945
Q

A municipal securities money market fund is a suitable investment for a high-income investor seeking which of the following?

A. Tax-free income for the next 10 years
B. A safe investment vehicle to park the money while looking for a long-term investment
C. An investment that provides income and some growth potential
D. An IRA investment that has a stable principal

A

B. A safe investment vehicle to park the money while looking for a long-term investment

A municipal securities money market fund provides federal tax-free interest income and seeks to maintain a stable principal. It is a suitable short-term investment for a high-income investor. Tax-free securities should not be purchased for a retirement account.

946
Q

A mutual fund’s net asset value (NAV) is listed at $18.60. The sales charge is 5%. What is the offering price?

A. $18.60
B. $18.89
C. $19.53
D. $19.58

A

D. $19.58

To find the offering price, divide the NAV by the complement of the sales charge. Offer Price = NAV / (100%-Sales Charge %). In this case: Offer Price = $18.60 / (100% - 5%).

947
Q

Mutual fund shareholder rights include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Appointment of the investment adviser.
B. Voting by proxy.
C. Approving changes in investment objectives and policies.
D. Election of the directors.

A

A. Appointment of the investment adviser.

The investment adviser is chosen by the directors. Shareholders vote to approve the investment advisory agreement.

948
Q

A retired widow, age 71, is seeking a mutual fund to provide a moderate level of income to supplement her Social Security benefits. She is very conservative and wishes to preserve capital. Which of the following funds would be most suitable for this client?

A. Small-cap and medium-cap stock fund
B. Gold fund
C. Short-term U.S. government bond fund
D. Blue chip stock

A

C. Short-term U.S. government bond fund

Government fixed income funds, offer safety, generally less volatility, and preservation of capital. In return, they offer lower yields. A gold fund is used as an inflation hedge. Stock funds are used for appreciation rather than current income.

949
Q

All of the following apply to exchange privileges within a family of funds EXCEPT:

A. The shareholder will purchase shares in the target fund at NAV.
B. It is a taxable event.
C. Even though shares are redeemed, it is not a taxable event because the shareholder does not receive the proceeds.
D. There may be an exchange fee involved.

A

C. Even though shares are redeemed, it is not a taxable event because the shareholder does not receive the proceeds.

When shares are redeemed in the currently owned fund, a capital gain or loss is realized. Therefore, the IRS defines an exchange as a sale even though the proceeds are reinvested in another fund. Some funds charge a modest exchange fee.

950
Q

An experienced investor with a large portfolio of domestic stocks and mutual funds seeks to further diversify his investments by increasing his exposure to overseas companies. Which of the following mutual funds is an appropriate investment for this investor?

A. Fund of funds
B. Aggressive growth fund
C. International fund
D. Geographic fund

A

C. International fund

An international fund would provide diversification and exposure to overseas companies in a variety of countries. Geographic funds invest in one specific region.

951
Q

Those funds that concentrate a major portion of their assets on specific industry, markets, or geographic regions are called:

A. Speculative funds.
B. Bias funds.
C. Division funds.
D. Specialized funds.

A

D. Specialized funds.

Specialized funds concentrate a major portion of their assets on specific industries, market sectors, or geographic regions.

952
Q

An inexperienced conservative investor is selecting his first equity fund. He wants to limit his risk while acquiring equity exposure. Which fund is most suitable for this investor?

A. Allocation fund
B. Growth fund
C. Value fund
D. Balanced fund

A

C. Value fund

Value investing is a conservative long-term strategy of investing in undervalued equities. Growth investing is an aggressive strategy of choosing young, unproven companies. Asset allocation funds and balanced funds hold bonds along with stocks, and the investor has not expressed interest in bonds.

953
Q

Which of the following could be an open-end fund?

A. ABC Balanced with NAV of $11.00 and POP of $12.40
B. RTC Balanced with NAV of $12.50 and NAV of $12.50
C. CBC Growth with NAV of $9.50 and POP of 9.25
D. XYZ Growth with NAV of $12.00 and POP of 11.50

A

B. RTC Balanced with NAV of $12.50 and NAV of $12.50

The RTC Balanced can be an open-end fund or mutual fund. It is selling at the net asset value (NAV), so it is either a no-load mutual fund or a closed-end fund. XYZ and CBC are selling below the NAV of the fund, which means they cannot be open-end funds; however, they could be closed-end funds. ABC is selling with a difference between POP and NAV above 8.5%, which is a violation for an open-end fund. Therefore, ABC must be a closed-end fund.

954
Q

One particular mutual fund invests 96% of its assets in lumber companies. This is an example of a(n):

A. Diversified common stock fund.
B. Growth fund.
C. Specialized fund.
D. Income fund.

A

C. Specialized fund.

A specialized fund will invest a large percentage of its assets in a particular industry or geographic region.

955
Q

The purpose of breakpoints is to:

A. Give the investor a reduced POP.
B. Help the investor decide where to invest.
C. Give the investor an increased NAV.
D. Give the investor a reduced sales charge.

A

D. Give the investor a reduced sales charge.

Breakpoints give the investor a reduced sales charge for investments that exceed a predetermined level. This includes investments made after the initial purchase with a letter of intent.

956
Q

Which of the following statements regarding an LOI is false?

A. Maximum time limit of letter is 13 months.
B. The letter is not binding on the investor.
C. Redemptions are not allowed during the period.
D. Backdating of 90 days to include prior purchases is allowable.

A

C. Redemptions are not allowed during the period.

Redemptions are allowed during the period of the letter. If breakpoint levels are not met during the period, additional sales charges may be due from the investor.

957
Q

Alice wants a convenient way to choose an investment strategy that offers a mix of investments that is appropriate to her stage in life. Which fund should Alice choose?

A. Life index fund
B. Asset allocation fund
C. Balanced fund
D. Growth and income fund

A

B. Asset allocation fund

An asset allocation fund follows a specified allocation model. Alice can choose from various mutual funds following different investment allocation models and select a fund that is appropriate for her circumstances.

958
Q

Edgar wants to redeem 200 shares of his mutual fund. The bid price is $16.75 and the offer price is $18.10. How much will he receive?

A. $3,125
B. $3,350
C. $3,485
D. $3,620

A

B. $3,350

Redemption is done at net asset value (NAV), which is the bid price. 200 shares at $16.75 per share will redeem for $3,350.

959
Q

An investor purchasing a mutual fund will pay what price?

A. The public offering price quoted at previous day’s close
B. The next calculated net asset value after purchase
C. The next calculated public offering price after purchase
D. The net asset value quoted at previous day’s close

A

C. The next calculated public offering price after purchase

An investor will pay the next calculated public offering price, which is the net asset value plus any sales charges, after the time of purchase. Remember that mutual fund investors buy at the public offering price (POP) and redeem at net asset value (NAV) based on the next price to be computed at the close of the trading day. This is called forward pricing.

960
Q

Most fund companies will permit shareholders to request an actual certificate, similar to a stock certificate, which proves ownership of the shares; however, before those shares can be redeemed:

A. A signature guarantee of the buyer will be required.
B. They must be deposited into the account and re-evaluated by the fund company.
C. The seller generally must have an outside appraisal of the shares current value performed.
D. The shareholder must endorse the certificate in the presence of the buyer (company).

A

B. They must be deposited into the account and re-evaluated by the fund company.

Most fund companies will permit shareholders to actually request evidence of their ownership by an actual certificate, similar to a stock. Because of the increased sensitivity of this request, a signature guarantee of the owner is often required. It is important to note that before those shares can be redeemed, they must be deposited to the account and re-evaluated by the fund company.

961
Q

When discussing CDSCs with a client, it should be pointed out that:

A. Class A shares are actually cheaper.
B. Costs associated with each share class are fully disclosed in the prospectus.
C. It makes no difference which class one chooses.
D. Choosing B or C shares allow the investor to avoid sales charges.
A

B. Costs associated with each share class are fully disclosed in the prospectus.

Each share class has associated costs that vary with the holding period of the shares. These costs, including contingent deferred sales charges (CDSCs), are presented in tabular form in the prospectus so the investor can fully evaluate them.

962
Q

All of the following are duties of a transfer agent EXCEPT:

A. Holding customers’ securities for safekeeping.
B. Distributing capital gains to shareholders.
C. Issuing new shares physically or electronically.
D. Canceling redeemed shares.

A

A. Holding customers’ securities for safekeeping.

Transfer agents are contracted by the fund to perform basic clerical functions, including keeping track of the individuals and entities that own their stocks and bonds, issuing new shares, and canceling redeemed shares. Holding customers’ securities for safekeeping is a function of the custodian.

963
Q

In mutual fund investments, what fund type has a single industry focus?

A. Money market funds
B. Preferred bond funds
C. Industry common stock funds
D. Specialized funds

A

D. Specialized funds

Specialized funds concentrate a large percentage of their portfolio in a specific industry or market sector, such as energy, pharmaceuticals, or business machinery.

964
Q

Which of the following is false regarding an international fund?

A. They carry foreign legislative risk.
B. They help diversify a domestic portfolio.
C. They are good funds to start an investment portfolio.
D. International funds expose the investor to currency risk.

A

C. They are good funds to start an investment portfolio.

International funds are good for further diversifying an established domestic portfolio. An international fund is probably not the best choice for the first fund in a beginning portfolio.

965
Q

The LRH Growth Fund has a net asset value (NAV) of $16.84 and a maximum offering price listed at $18.11. The sales charge for this fund is:

A. 6 1/2%.
B. 7%.
C. 7 1/2%.
D. 8 1/2%.

A

B. 7%.

To find the percentage of the sales charge for a fund, divide the amount of the sales charge ($18.11 - $16.84 = $1.27) by the offering price ($18.11). $1.27 divided by $18.11 equals a charge of 7%.

966
Q

The NAV of a mutual fund is $15 per share and the sales charge is 8%. The POP is:

A. $13.80.
B. $15.80.
C. $16.30.
D. $17.00.

A

C. $16.30.

To calculate the POP, use this formula: NAV/(100% - sales charge); $15/(100%-8%); $15/.92 = $16.30.

967
Q

The Investment Company Act of 1940 states that a certain percentage of a mutual fund’s board of directors be unaffiliated with the fund. This minimum percentage of unaffiliated members must be at least:

A. 30%.
B. 40%.
C. 50%.
D. 60%.

A

B. 40%.

The board of directors is elected by fund shareholders and 40% of these board members must be unaffiliated with the fund. The remaining 60% may be employees, underwriters or advisers of the fund.

968
Q

A client with $1,000 to invest in a mutual fund for his IRA account is concerned about front-end loads reducing the size of the already small investment. The client plans on holding the investment until retirement (20 years or more). Class B shares may be more appropriate for this client than Class A shares for all of the following reasons EXCEPT:

A. After a specified holding period of time, Class B shares convert to Class A shares.
B. Class B shares have a lower expense ratio than Class A shares.
C. Class B shares’ CDSC declines over time.
D. Class B shares have no front-end load.

A

B. Class B shares have a lower expense ratio than Class A shares.

Class B shares have a higher expense ratio than Class A shares.

969
Q

Which legislative act requires that mutual funds pay redemption proceeds within 7 calendar days?

A. The Securities Act of 1933
B. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934
C. The Trust Indenture Act of 1939
D. The Investment Company Act of 1940

A

D. The Investment Company Act of 1940

Most of the legislation pertaining to mutual funds can be found in the Investment Company Act of 1940.

970
Q

An equity mutual fund is least likely to have an investment objective of:

A. Appreciation and income.
B. Preservation of capital.
C. Dividend income.
D. Long-term appreciation.

A

B. Preservation of capital.

Preservation of capital is pursued by investing in high quality, short-term debt, such as T-bills.

971
Q

Which investment would be most appropriate for an individual who is 40 years old and has a moderate risk tolerance level?

A. S&P index fund
B. U.S. Treasury notes
C. Short-term bond fund
D. High-yield municipal securities

A

A. S&P index fund

The S&P index fund offers a diversified portfolio with moderate risk and, at age 40, the investor has a relatively long time horizon and is in a better position to weather any volatility over the long term. While high-yield municipal securities also offer a moderate risk option, there is no mention of the individual being in a higher tax bracket which would have made this an appropriate choice. Both U.S. Treasury notes and short-term bond funds are conservative investments.

972
Q

Which of the following statements is FALSE with respect to value mutual funds?

A. They utilize a “buy and hold” strategy for the underlying securities.
B. They tend to under-perform during a general market advance.
C. They hold growth stocks and bonds that are deemed to be undervalued in price.
D. They tend to out-perform the overall market in a general market decline.

A

C. They hold growth stocks and bonds that are deemed to be undervalued in price.

Value funds primarily hold value stocks that are deemed to be undervalued in price for any number of reasons and thus have significant upside potential. However these funds do not hold bonds.

973
Q

An investor wants a fund that will reflect the performance of a broad sample of larger American companies. The investor is also concerned about fund expenses, so he would most likely select:

A. A blue chip stock fund.
B. An income fund.
C. A growth and income fund.
D. An S&P 500 Index fund.

A

D. An S&P 500 Index fund.

The best answer is the index fund. Its performance will mirror the S&P 500 Index, which is an index of large domestic corporations. Index funds have low expense ratios because they are passively managed. The other three funds are actively managed, which results in a higher expense ratio.

974
Q

The only activity that would cause the NAV per share of a mutual fund to change is if the fund:

A. Distributes capital gains.
B. Redeems shares.
C. Issues new shares.
D. Sells a security at a gain.

A

A. Distributes capital gains.

When a mutual fund distributes capital gains, the NAV per share decreases. None of the other activities would cause a change in the NAV per share.

975
Q

A very busy executive wants to diversify by investing in a variety of mutual funds, but doesn’t have time to research and choose the funds. Which of the following may be an appropriate investment for this investor?

A. An international fund
B. A large cap equity fund
C. An asset allocation fund
D. A fund of funds

A

D. A fund of funds

A fund of funds is a mutual fund that invests in several mutual funds giving the investor exposure to several investment styles and goals.

976
Q

A client makes an initial deposit of $10,000 into his mutual fund account and at the same time signs a letter of intent for $50,000. All of the following statements are correct concerning this situation EXCEPT:

A. If he fails to deposit the additional money, he will pay no additional charges.
B. He has 13 months to fulfill the deposit requirement of the letter of intent.
C. The fund will probably hold some of the initial shares in escrow.
D. If he fails to deposit the additional money, he will be required to send a check for the additional sales charges due.

A

A. If he fails to deposit the additional money, he will pay no additional charges.

A fund will normally hold enough shares from an initial deposit in escrow to cover additional sales charges due if the letter of intent is not fulfilled.

977
Q

Which of the following will cause the NAV per share of a mutual fund to increase?

A. Distribution of capital gains
B. Decrease in market value of securities
C. Distribution of dividends
D. Existing stock holding pays dividends

A

D. Existing stock holding pays dividends

A mutual fund’s NAV per share increases when an existing security holding pays dividends and interest. It will also increase when the market value of the securities in the fund rises. All of the other choices result in a decrease in NAV. Note that the actual distribution of dividends will cause NAV to decrease.

978
Q

Which of the following is false regarding a letter of intent?

A. A letter of intent can be backdated 6 months.
B. The investor can reach breakpoints in order to receive a reduced sales charge.
C. Re-invested capital gains and dividends are not calculated toward the letter of intent.
D. The letter of intent is good for 13 months.

A

A. A letter of intent can be backdated 6 months.

The letter of intent can only be backdated for 3 months to include previous investments and will allow another 10 months of investments.

979
Q

A couple is saving to purchase a home within the next 18 months. Their main investment goals are liquidity and safety of principal. Which of the following investments is the LEAST suitable for this couple?

A. Short-term bond fund
B. T-bonds
C. Money market fund
D. T-bills

A

B. T-bonds

All four choices are liquid investments; however, T-bonds are long-term bonds, and therefore, more subject to price volatility than the other 3 choices, making them the least suitable for an 18-month time horizon.

980
Q

Which of the following is NOT true concerning physical safety of mutual fund holdings?

A. Physical safety of fund’s assets is the responsibility of the custodian.
B. The shareholder needs to maintain share certificates since funds use “book entry” accounting.
C. Securities cannot exist as electronic records on computers.
D. If certificates are held, they must be surrendered in good order before shares can be redeemed.

A

C. Securities cannot exist as electronic records on computers.

Book entry (electronic records) is the conventional method of accounting for share ownership. In cases where certificates do exist, in order to redeem shares, they must be surrendered in good order.

981
Q

An investor buys a growth fund for:

A. Concentrated investment in industry.
B. Long-term appreciation.
C. Regular income.
D. Preservation of capital.

A

B. Long-term appreciation.

Growth funds offer long-term appreciation potential. They do not provide significant present income. They carry high market risk, not capital safety. They are not necessarily invested in one market sector.

982
Q

According to the Investment Company Act of 1940, the maximum sales charge is:

A. 8%.
B. 8½%.
C. 9½%.
D. 10%.

A

B. 8½%.

Sales charges must not be excessive and are limited to 8½%.

983
Q

After receiving a request for redemption, mutual fund companies must send the redemption payment within:

A. 5 days.
B. 7 days.
C. 10 days.
D. 30 days.

A

B. 7 days.

Mutual fund companies must send payments to the investor within 7 days.

984
Q

A letter of intent to allow an investor to qualify for sales discounts may be backdated how many days?

A. 30 days
B. 90 days
C. 180 days
D. Backdating is not allowed for sales discounts.

A

B. 90 days

Letters of intent may be backdated up to 90 days to qualify for sales discounts.

985
Q

The shareholders of a mutual fund have certain rights associated with the ownership interests they hold in the company. These rights include all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Election of board.
B. Approval authority for the company’s annual report.
C. Approval of investment advisory agreement.
D. Voting rights/proxy rights regarding company issues.

A

B. Approval authority for the company’s annual report.

This is an EXCEPT question. Mutual fund shareholders have the right to receive annual/semiannual reports; however, the company itself has approval authority for its publication. The shareholders approve the investment advisory agreement, have voting rights regarding company issues and elect board members. Additionally, they approve changes in investment objectives, policies, and fees, and ratify the selection of independent auditors.

986
Q

Mutual funds offer systematic withdrawal plans. Allowable types of withdrawal plan payouts include I. Fixed dollar periodic payments. II. Dollar cost averaging. III. Fixed shares periodic payments. IV. Life with period certain.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

Fixed dollar, fixed percentage, and fixed shares periodic payments are the withdrawal plan payout options. Dollar cost averaging is a plan of systematic investing into a fund. Life with period certain is a variable annuity payout option.

987
Q

An investor owns 100 shares of a mutual fund listed at 20.50 - 21.90. She has Class “B” shares that have a 3% CDSC. At what share price will her funds be redeemed if she sells them in the first year?

A. $19.89
B. $20.50
C. $21.23
D. $21.90

A

A. $19.89

Mutual funds redeem at net asset value (NAV) less any contingent deferred charges and/or redemption fees. Her funds will be redeemed at $20.50 minus the 3% CDSC for a share price of $19.89. CDSC is the abbreviation used for Contingent Deferred Sales Charges, which is a declining scale of back-end sales charges for class B shares.

988
Q

All of the following may be a suitable investment for an elderly investor whose primary investment objective is income EXCEPT:

A. A Ginnie Mae fund.
B. A value fund.
C. A bond fund.
D. An income fund.

A

B. A value fund.

A value fund is not an income investment. Value funds seek capital appreciation by purchasing undervalued securities and waiting for them to appreciate. Any of the other three may be suitable choices: a bond fund pays income from bond interest; an income fund pays income from stock dividends and bonds, and a Ginnie Mae fund pays income from interest and return of principal.

989
Q

Your client recently retired and received a lump-sum distribution from his employer. He is very risk averse and consults you about a safe vehicle in which to “park” the funds. Which of the following mutual funds would you recommend?

A. Government bond fund
B. Ginnie Mae fund
C. Value fund
D. Principal guaranteed fund

A

A. Government bond fund

The government bond fund is the most conservative choice, and is suitable for an investor whose primary objective is principal protection. A Ginnie Mae fund offers a slightly higher yield but with less safety. Value funds and principal-guaranteed funds hold stocks, which are riskier than bonds.

990
Q

For rights of accumulation, which of the following is NOT eligible for combining of accounts?

A. Spouses
B. Dependents other than immediate family members
C. Immediate family members
D. Charter members of an investment co-op

A

D. Charter members of an investment co-op

Investment co-ops and investment clubs are specifically excluded. If allowed in the fund’s prospectus, accounts may be combined with other bona fide dependents.

991
Q

What is the name of the fee charged by mutual funds to cover expenses related to the promotion and distribution of fund shares?

A. Sales charge
B. 12b-1 fee
C. Management fee
D. Operating expense

A

B. 12b-1 fee

Mutual funds may charge a 12b-1 fee to recover expenses associated with promoting and distributing the fund. This fee is in addition to the normal operating expenses of the fund and covers such items as printing prospectuses and sales materials.

992
Q

According to FINRA rules, which of the following is a retail communication?

A. A form letter sent exclusively to 100 insurance companies
B. A registered representative’s email correspondence with a customer regarding adding an additional beneficiary to her account
C. A communication sent to 25 investors within 30 calendar days that makes no investment recommendation or offer of services
D. An online investment analysis tool available to the public

A

D. An online investment analysis tool available to the public

Investment analysis tools are considered retail communications. A form letter sent to 100 insurance companies is an institutional communication. An email sent to one customer regarding adding a beneficiary and a communication sent to 25 or fewer investors within a 30-calendar-day period are correspondences if they don’t contain investment recommendations or offers of services.

993
Q

Which of the following group qualifies for rights of accumulations? I. Entities such as participants in a company retirement plan; II. A trust account; III. A company’s 401(k) plan; IV. An investment club

A. I and III only
B. II and IV only
C. I, II and III only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

C. I, II and III only

I. Entities such as participants in a company retirement plan
II. A trust account
III. A company’s 401(k) plan

Funds attract large investments by granting ROA to pension funds, 401(k)s and other formal entities. Informal groups such as investment clubs or co-ops do not qualify.

994
Q

Which of the following provides the investor with the most detailed information about the mutual fund?

A. Morningstar report
B. Red herring
C. The prospectus
D. The preliminary prospectus

A

C. The prospectus

The prospectus is the document that provides the most detailed information about the mutual fund. Although a preliminary prospectus is a disclosure document, it is not a complete disclosure. Red herring is another name for a preliminary prospectus. A Morningstar report is an independent source, but it does not provide the details that would be in the prospectus.

995
Q

A client owns a real estate partnership that generated a loss. The client may take a tax deduction for the loss again:

A. Wages earned as an employee.
B. Capital gains from selling stock.
C. Another limited partnership with passive income.
D. Income generated from a different real estate investment that was actively managed by the client.

A

C. Another limited partnership with passive income.

Passive activity losses may be deducted against passive income.

996
Q

What is the term describing the point at which your losses begin to exceed your benefits from a direct participation program?

A. Cost basis
B. Breakeven
C. Adjusted basis
D. Cross-over

A

D. Cross-over

Cross-over in DPPs (direct participation programs) is the point at which losses in taxable income exceed benefits.

997
Q

Which of the following is of least consequence in determining the tax benefits available in a farming syndication?

A. Outbuildings
B. Off-season use
C. Land
D. Farm residence

A

C. Land

Land cannot be depreciated. A farm residence cannot be depreciated, but operating costs can be deducted for conducting a business in a home, carefully. Out buildings can be depreciated, as can pasture land (off-season use).

998
Q

The syndicator of a limited partnership acts as:

A. The property manager.
B. The organizer of the partnership responsible for securities registration.
C. The managing underwriter of the offering of partnership units.
D. The general manager of partnership functions and works.

A

B. The organizer of the partnership responsible for securities registration.

The “syndicator” is the organizer who handles securities registration.

999
Q

A subscription for a limited partnership is deemed to be accepted when:

A. The general partner signs the subscription.
B. The certificate is filed with the state.
C. The limited partner signs the subscription.
D. The limited partner’s check clears.

A

A. The general partner signs the subscription.

The general partner must approve the limited partner as suitable for net worth and annual income standards.

1000
Q

Which of the following are considered risk factors in a direct participation program? I. Nonliquid aspects of the investment; II. Risk of audit; III. Loss of partnership status; IV. Conflicts of interest with the sponsor

A. I only
B. I, II, and III only
C. II and IV only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

D. I, II, III, and IV

I. Nonliquid aspects of the investment
II. Risk of audit
III. Loss of partnership status
IV. Conflicts of interest with the sponsor

DPPs are generally nonliquid. The IRS audits a very high percentage of them, and they occasionally fail to meet the technical IRS guidelines in order to avoid being taxed as an association (a corporation). If a DPP loses its categorization as a limited partnership, the advantages that pertain to being a limited partnership are also lost. Often the general partner is the sponsor of numerous programs at the same time, creating potential conflicts of interest.

1001
Q

A limited partnership has large depletion write offs. It is most likely a:

A. Developmental partnership.
B. Equipment leasing partnership.
C. Raw land partnership.
D. Construction partnership.

A

A. Developmental partnership.

Depletion is the cost recovery method for natural resources. It is most likely available in an oil and gas developmental partnership. Depletion is not used in real estate or equipment leasing partnerships.

1002
Q

In a limited partnership, a managing partner can do which of the following?

A. Borrow money from the partnership
B. Receive a 20% fee without conflict of interest
C. Sell but not purchase property
D. Buy and sell property

A

D. Buy and sell property

Receiving a fee and borrowing money are questionable selections at best and can be eliminated.

1003
Q

Which of the following trades freely on an exchange or OTC?

A. Master limited partnership
B. Unit investment trust
C. Real estate investment trust
D. Real estate limited partnership

A

A. Master limited partnership

UITs and REITs are only redeemable back to the trust. Limited partnerships are very illiquid. An MLP is a former limited partnership which has been restructured and now trades freely in the secondary market.

1004
Q

Which of the following tax aspects present in an oil and gas program would not be found in a real estate program?

A. Interest expense deductions
B. Conversion benefits
C. Depreciation
D. Depletion

A

D. Depletion

Depletion of a natural resource is not a factor in real estate, commercial or residential.

1005
Q

A tax shelter is created for $800,000 with one general partner and 10 limited partners. The proceeds are used to purchase a $2,000,000 office building, taking a non-recourse note for the $1,200,000 mortgage from a qualified lender. Economic conditions later cause the occupancy rate to fall to 10% and the program is dissolved. What may an individual limited partner write off?

A. Nothing
B. $80,000
C. $120,000
D. $200,000

A

D. $200,000

In a limited partnership, the limited partner may only deduct losses to the extent of the basis. Ten limited partners had invested $800,000 or $80,000 each, which was the initial basis per person. Later, when the partnership established a non-recourse loan of $1.2 million, each limited partner’s basis was increased by 10% of the $1.2 million, or $120,000. This raised each limited partner’s basis to $200,000, the maximum possible write-off amount.

1006
Q

A limited partnership has the following results: Income: $300,000; Operating costs: $200,000; Debt service: $95,000; Interest: $90,000; Depreciation: $60,000. What is the share of loss for a 10% limited partner?

A. $5,000 gain
B. $10,000 gain
C. $5,000 loss
D. $50,000 loss

A

C. $5,000 loss

$300,000 minus $200,000, minus $90,000, minus $60,000 equals $50,000 loss of which 10% is $5,000.

1007
Q

An investor in a Subchapter S corporation or a limited partnership is considered:

A. A participant.
B. A shareholder.
C. A limited partner.
D. An equity owner.

A

A. A participant.

In a corporation, an investor is a shareholder and a partner in a partnership, but in a direct participation program, an investor is a participant who directly shares in gains or losses if the program results in either loss or gain.

1008
Q

Advantages and risks of an equipment leasing program include I. High initial write-offs due to depreciation. II. Phantom income. III. Investment tax credit. IV. Dangers of equipment obsolescence.

A. I, II, and IV
B. I and III
C. II, III and IV
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

A. I, II, and IV

I. High initial write-offs due to depreciation.
II. Phantom income.
IV. Dangers of equipment obsolescence.

When equipment is depreciated, high write-offs result. As the equipment becomes fully depreciated, the write-offs shrink, while the revenues from leasing continue. The expenses no longer exceed the revenues, and there may be income which is taxable (the crossover point). However, to conserve cash, the program will distribute little if any of this income. This is phantom income because you are paying income tax on income that you don’t physically receive. Tax credits and appreciation apply to real estate programs, not equipment leasing programs. Obsolescence occurs when equipment is no longer used; it some cases, it is outdate.

1009
Q

Nonrecourse debt is not usually added to a limited partner’s cost basis, except in the case of:

A. Farming syndication.
B. Equipment leasing.
C. Public warehousing.
D. Real estate.

A

D. Real estate.

Real estate can use non-recourse (secured) loans in order to increase investor basis without the investor being legally at risk.

1010
Q

A general partner who puts together the administrative organization of the limited partnership and handles the registration of the securities with the states is known as the:

A. Underwriter.
B. Syndicator.
C. General manager.
D. Partnership manager.

A

B. Syndicator.

Syndicators handle state registration. Managers are appointed supervisors.

1011
Q

A limited partner invests $10,000 in a DPP program and signs a recourse loan for $40,000. What is the investor’s cost basis in the partnership?

A. $10,000
B. $40,000
C. $50,000
D. $60,000

A

C. $50,000

Cost basis includes at risk debt only for all programs except real estate (the only program permitted to use non-recourse loans from a qualified lender in order to increase cost basis).

1012
Q

Written verification of a customer’s financial condition is required when purchasing all of the following, EXCEPT:

A. A real estate syndication.
B. A real estate investment trust.
C. An oil and gas income program.
D. An equipment-leasing limited partnership.

A

B. A real estate investment trust.

The REIT is not a tax shelter or DPP requiring a signed subscription agreement.

1013
Q

Which of the following lower investor basis in a DPP? I. Depletion; II. Depreciation; III. Passive gain; IV. Passive loss

A. III only
B. I and II
C. I, II and IV
D. II and IV

A

C. I, II and IV

I. Depletion
II. Depreciation
IV. Passive loss

Passive gain raises basis. The other three lower basis.

1014
Q

A customer of yours owns a limited partnership interest in a real estate program. The partnership has incurred some nonrecourse debt and has paid a cash distribution to the partners. How is your customer’s partnership basis affected by the nonrecourse debt and the cash distribution?

A. Both are added to the basis.
B. Both reduce the basis.
C. Neither has an effect on the basis.
D. Each have an effect on basis but in opposite ways.

A

D. Each have an effect on basis but in opposite ways.

Non-recourse debt through a qualified lender increases investor basis (e.g. a bank mortgage) in a real estate program, while a cash distribution reduces basis.

1015
Q

If the IRS determines that a tax shelter was abusive, what consequences may follow? I. The deductions are disallowed. II. The taxpayer is charged interest on the back taxes, plus penalties. III. The taxpayer is charged with intent to defraud.

A. I only
B. I and III only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, and III

A

D. I, II, and III

Abusive tax shelters are like fraudulent sales, penalized, illegal, and painful if discovered.

1016
Q

Which of the following describe developmental oil and gas drilling programs? I. Drilling takes place only in proven areas. II. Return potential is not as great as it is in exploratory drilling. III. They are seldom used, due to the risk of dry holes. IV. Depletion allowance is no longer available for this type of drilling.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

A. I and II

I. Drilling takes place only in proven areas.
II. Return potential is not as great as it is in exploratory drilling.

“Developmental” means drilling in areas that have proven to have oil and gas reserves; therefore, the risk of a dry hole is much less than drilling in totally unproven areas (called exploratory or wildcat drilling). But, because the drilling is being done in an area with less risk, the return potential is less than exploratory drilling. Depletion is just as allowable here as in any oil/gas program.

1017
Q

XYZ Limited Partnership is seeking to roll up 50 individual limited partnerships into a Master Limited Partnership. The General Partner is charging limited partners a substantial fee for implementing the roll up as well as increasing its share of the total assets. Which TWO of following must occur in order for the roll up to go forward? I. Limited Partners must vote to approve the roll up. II. Limited Partners must be given 30 days to opt out of the roll up. III. The General Partner’s fees and increases share of assets are a conflict of interest and must be disclosed to the limited partners. IV. The General Partners must limit their fees to 1% of total assets.

A. I & III
B. I & IV
C. II & III
D. II & IV

A

A. I & III

Limited Partners must vote for the roll up and General Partners must disclose any conflicts of interest.

1018
Q

Limited partners have which two of the following rights in a DPP? I. Right to inspect partnership books; II. Right to sue the general partner for damages if the general partner wrongfully implements the proceeds of the project; III. Right to fix the compensation of the general partner; IV. Right to all of the tax benefits from the operations of the project

A. III and IV
B. I and II
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

B. I and II

Limited partners have only the right to inspect the books and to sue for breach of contract or fiduciary duty by the general partner. The GP establishes the GP’s compensation when structuring the limited partnership and this is disclosed in the offering memorandum or prospectus. LPs split the tax benefits with the GP, as outlined in the partnership agreement.

1019
Q

Which of the following is the order of the liquidating distribution when a direct participation program is dissolved? I. General creditor; II. Secured lender; III. General partner; IV. Limited partner

A. I, II, III, IV
B. I, II, IV, III
C. II, I, IV, III
D. II, I, III, IV

A

C. II, I, IV, III

Secured before general creditors, creditors before partners, limited before general partners.

1020
Q

IRS rules require that a limited partnership should be established with:

A. Economic substance and tax deductibility.
B. Profit motive and economic viability.
C. Continuity of life and tax deductibility.
D. Tax deductibility and profit motive.

A

B. Profit motive and economic viability.

IRS rules require that a limited partnership should be established with profit motive and economic substance as the major concerns. Continuity of life is usually avoided due to the restriction on corporate characteristics. Deductions and tax benefits may result in such investments but should not be the prime motives.

1021
Q

A client invested $200,000 in a real estate limited partnership and has no other income other than mutual fund dividends and salary. The client’s K-1 form shows the following: Gross revenue: $300,000; Operating expenses: $200,000; Interest on mortgage: $95,000; Depreciation: $55,000 If your client is in the 28% tax bracket and has no passive income, how much of a tax loss may be deducted?

A. $0
B. $14,000
C. $50,000
D. $55,000

A

A. $0

The K-1 (tax shelter version of a 1099) shows a $50,000 passive loss, calculated as follows: $300,000 minus the total of $200,000 plus $95,000 plus $55,000. A passive loss can be deducted only against passive income.

1022
Q

You have invested $200,000 in a direct participation program which has a $400,000 mortgage. Your K-1 shows the following: Revenue: $200,000; Operating costs: $90,000; Depreciation: $50,000; Interest: $40,000; Amortized principal: $10,000. What is taxable income?

A. $10,000
B. $20,000
C. $40,000
D. $50,000

A

B. $20,000

$200,000 less operating costs ($90,000) minus depreciation ($50,000) minus $40,000 mortgage of interest equals $180,000. $20,000 is taxable income. Amortized principal on the mortgage is not deductible.

1023
Q

What is the reason for purchasing undeveloped land?

A. Growth
B. Depreciation deductions
C. Safety
D. Tax credits

A

A. Growth

Growth. None of the others apply.

1024
Q

A DPP and a REIT have which of the following in common? I. Professional management; II. Pass through of loss; III. Pass through of gain; IV. Recourse debt

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

Both DPPs and REITs are professionally managed and have passthrough of gain. A DPP is structured as a tax shelter; a REIT is a Subchapter M Corp.

1025
Q

Revenues: $200,000; Operating Expenses: $50,000; Interest $10,000 and Loan Payments: $30,000; Management Expense: $6,000; Depreciation: $0. All of the following statements about this limited partnership are correct EXCEPT:

A. Cash flow is less than taxable income.
B. It has passed the crossover point.
C. Taxable income is $134,000.
D. Cash flow is greater than taxable income.

A

D. Cash flow is greater than taxable income.

Taxable Income: Revenue - Operating Expense - Interest - Management Expense = $134,000

Cash Flow: Revenue - Operating Expense - Interest - Loan Payment = $110,000

This limited partnership has taxable income of $134,000 ($200,000 minus $50,000 minus $10,000 minus $6,000 = $134,000), and cash flow of $110,000 ($200,000 minus $50,000 minus $10,000 minus $30,000 = $110,000). It has passed the crossover point - the point where the cash flow is equal to the taxable income.

1026
Q

A client invested $200,000 in a real estate limited partnership. The client’s K-1 form shows the following: Gross revenue: $300,000; Operating expenses: $200,000; Interest on mortgage: $95,000; Depreciation: $55,000 If your client is in the 28% tax bracket and has no passive income, how much of a tax loss may be declared?

A. $0
B. $14,000
C. $50,000
D. $55,000

A

A. $0

The K-1 (tax shelter version of a 1099) shows a $50,000 passive loss. $300,000 minus the total of $200,000(operating expenses) plus $95,000 plus $55,000. A passive loss can be deducted only against passive income.

1027
Q

An investor put $10,000 into a limited partnership and signed a recourse note for $40,000. If the partnership is dissolved, what are the consequences?

A. $50,000 tax liability
B. $10,000 loss
C. $40,000 tax liability
D. $50,000 loss

A

D. $50,000 loss

A $40,000 recourse note means that the limited partner is at full risk, in addition to the $10,000 investment. Thus, the loss is $50,000. Tax liability cannot be computed without more information.

1028
Q

Why is a REIT generally not used as a tax shelter?

A. Operating losses do not pass through.
B. Capital gains do not pass through.
C. Limited liability
D. Too many corporate aspects

A

A. Operating losses do not pass through.

A REIT is organized under subchapter M for tax purposes, as are investment companies. Subchapter M permits pass through of gains only to shareholders, but not pass through of operating losses.

1029
Q

In evaluating a limited partnership, which is the most important consideration?

A. Tax benefits
B. Liquidity
C. Economic viability
D. Avoidance of IRS audit

A

C. Economic viability

First, is the program any good? If so, what are its tax benefits?

1030
Q

Upon dissolution of a partnership, the total amount of money received by the limited partner is considered by the IRS to be:

A. Fully taxable as capital gain.
B. Taxable as ordinary income, only to the extent that it exceeds the basis.
C. Taxable as a capital gain, only to the extent that it exceeds the basis.
D. Fully taxable as ordinary income.

A

B. Taxable as ordinary income, only to the extent that it exceeds the basis.

Upon the dissolution of a limited partnership, the amount of money received by the limited partner is taxable as ordinary income, only to the extent that it exceeds the limited partner’s basis.

1031
Q

All of the following are benefits of raw land limited partnerships, EXCEPT:

A. Capital gain on sale.
B. Interest deductions.
C. Depreciation deductions.
D. Capital appreciation.

A

C. Depreciation deductions.

Land cannot be depreciated unless it is pasture land.

1032
Q

A limited partnership has the following results: Income: $300,000; Operating costs: $200,000; Debt service: $95,000 (including interest: $90,000 and principal: $5,000); Depreciation: $60,000. What would a 10% limited partner report for tax purposes?

A. $5,000 loss
B. $5,000 gain
C. $10,000 gain
D. $50,000 loss

A

A. $5,000 loss

$300,000 minus $200,000, minus $90,000, minus $60,000 equals $50,000 loss of which 10% is $5,000. The $5000 of principal repayment in the total $95,000 debt service is not a deduction.

1033
Q

Which of the following is/are true about recourse loans in a limited partnership program? I. The limited partner assumes responsibility for the loan’s repayment. II. The limited partner does not assume responsibility for the loan’s repayment. III. Any principal repayment lowers the limited partner’s basis. IV. Any principal repayment increases the limited partner’s basis.

A. I and III only
B. I and IV only
C. II and III only
D. II and IV only

A

A. I and III only

I. The limited partner assumes responsibility for the loan’s repayment.
III. Any principal repayment lowers the limited partner’s basis.

The limited partner is liable for the repayment of a recourse loan. Recourse debt increases a customer’s basis in any limited partnership. Any repayment of principal on the debt, therefore, decreases the limited partner’s basis.

1034
Q

Your cost basis is $20,000. Your limited partnership reports the following: Distributive loss of $3,500; Cash distribution of 12,000; Depletion of 4,000. What is your basis?

A. $500
B. $4,000; the $3,500 loss can no longer be used
C. $16,000 and $12,000 capital gain; loss cannot be used
D. $20,000; capital gain of $12,000; loss and depletion cannot be used

A

A. $500

Passive loss, cash, and depletion all reduce basis. $20,000 - 19,500 = $500.

1035
Q

Which of the following corporate characteristics is the most difficult to avoid when structuring a direct participation program?

A. Free transferability of ownership interest
B. Continuity of life
C. Centralized management
D. Limited liability

A

C. Centralized management

No business can operate without some type of centralized management. The general partner structures a limited partnership, and is the centralized management of the DPP.

1036
Q

DPPs are most appropriate for which of the following investors?

A. An individual seeking more reliable income within a retirement plan
B. A seniors investor seeking a steady income stream
C. A young investor who has a longer time horizon and can accept the volatility of the investment over time
D. A more sophisticated investor who seeks pass through income and potential tax benefits

A

D. A more sophisticated investor who seeks pass through income and potential tax benefits

DPPs are Direct Partnership Programs. They are passive investments that are concentrated in real estate and oil and gas development programs. These partnerships offer pass through investment income and depreciation or depletion right offs. While they have lost some of their attractiveness due to tax reform, they still offer opportunities, but to a more sophisticated investor who can accept losses.

1037
Q

What do a DPP and a REIT have in common?

A. Liquidity
B. Portion of recourse debt passed through to investors
C. Central records keeping
D. Pass through of loss

A

C. Central records keeping

Central records or professional management is common to both tax shelter and REIT programs. REITs do not have recourse debt or loss passthroughs. DPPs generally are not liquid.

1038
Q

An investor has an adjusted basis of $20,000 in a direct participation program. During the year $12,000 in cash distributions is received, and the investor’s share of depletion is $6,000. What is the adjusted basis at the end of the year?

A. $2,000
B. $8,000
C. $26,000
D. $38,000

A

A. $2,000

Both cash distributions and depletion lower basis. $20,000 minus $18,000 ($6,000 depletion plus $12,000 cash) = $2,000.

1039
Q

What is the major difference between an oil and gas limited partnership and a real estate limited partnership?

A. Tax credits
B. Depreciation
C. Depletion
D. IDCs

A

D. IDCs

IDCs, or intangible drilling costs, are the most beneficial deductions in oil and gas. Depletion, although also a difference, does not typically offer as much financial benefit.

1040
Q

An investor puts $10,000 into a real estate DPP. The program put $100,000 down for the purchase of an asset valued at $1 million, with recourse financing for the remainder of the purchase from a qualified lender. What is the investor’s basis?

A. $10,000
B. $90,000
C. $100,000
D. $110,000

A

C. $100,000

$10,000 is 10% of $100,000, so we assume the LP is a 10% owner. $90,000 is 10% of the $900,000 recourse debt. $10,000 +$90,000 = $100,000.

1041
Q

Which is the most accurate measure of return on an investor’s basis in a limited partnership?

A. Cash on cash
B. Internal rate of return
C. Current yield
D. Capitalization ratio

A

B. Internal rate of return

IRR (internal rate of return) accounts for present value, tax deductions, and cash flow.

1042
Q

All of the following are DPP programs, EXCEPT:

A. Equipment leasing.
B. Oil and gas.
C. Real estate.
D. Self-directed IRA.

A

D. Self-directed IRA.

An IRA is simply an account, not an investment.

1043
Q

Which limited partnerships are most likely to use depreciation?

A. Equipment leasing
B. Wildcatting
C. Raw land
D. Developmental

A

A. Equipment leasing

Land is not depreciated. Developmental and wildcatting energy partnerships use depletion, which applies to natural resources.

1044
Q

What is an underwriter’s maximum sales compensation, including wholesaling costs, in a DPP offering?

A. 8%
B. 8 1/2%
C. 10%
D. 12%

A

C. 10%

FINRA rules permit sales and underwriting compensation to a maximum of 10%. Any undefined fee and charge will be considered sales and underwriting.

1045
Q

You have invested $200,000 in a direct participation program which has a $400,000 mortgage. Your K-1 shows the following: Revenue: $200,000; Operating costs: $90,000; Depreciation: $50,000; Interest: $40,000; Amortized principal: $10,000. What is the cash flow?

A. $20,000
B. $40,000
C. $50,000
D. $60,000

A

D. $60,000

$200 - $90 - $40 - $10 = $60

The $200,000 of revenue is reduced by all payments made. $200,000 less operating costs ($90,000) minus interest ($40,000) minus amortized principal ($10,000) equals $60,000 cash flow. Depreciation reduces taxable income, not cash flow.

1046
Q

All of the following are oil and gas DPPs, EXCEPT:

A. Wildcatting.
B. Exploratory drilling.
C. Income.
D. Appreciation

A

D. Appreciation

Appreciation is not a form of oil and gas program; it is a type of real estate LP objective.

1047
Q

Which of the following best describes the cross-over point in limited partnership programs?

A. Cash flow and tax benefits have declined to equality with taxable income.
B. Profitability has declined to the level of equality which tax benefits.
C. The stage at which an exchange of assets is desirable
D. The point at which the program becomes profitable to the limited partners

A

A. Cash flow and tax benefits have declined to equality with taxable income.

After this crossover point, taxable income begins to exceed cash flow and tax benefits.

1048
Q

An investor in a limited partnership has established a basis for tax purposes of $20,000. During the year, the investor’s distributed share of the partnership losses was $18,000, and a cash distribution of $15,000 was received. How much of the loss can be used to offset other ordinary income?

A. $0
B. $2,000
C. $3,000
D. $5,000

A

A. $0

Passive loss from partnerships may not be offset against earned income or capital gain, only against passive income from other sources.

1049
Q

Which of the following does NOT provide limited liability for the owners?

A. REIT.
B. Real estate partnership
C. Limited partnership
D. Equipment leasing trust

A

B. Real estate partnership

Limited partnerships, equipment leasing trusts, and REITs are business forms in which the investors’ liability is limited to their investment in the enterprise. On the other hand, a “partnership” is assumed to be a general partnership unless specifically designated as a limited partnership. General partnerships expose the partners to unlimited liability.

1050
Q

When a general partner is organizing and establishing a limited partnership, the general partner is acting as a:

A. Partnership manager.
B. Underwriter.
C. Syndicator.
D. Property manager.

A

C. Syndicator.

When a general partner in a limited partnership is organizing and establishing a partnership itself, the term that applies is the “syndicator.” Later, if the general partner is selecting the property in which to be invested and managed, the general partner acts as the partnership manager. When performing the functions of the actual management of the property selected, the technical term is the “property manager.”

1051
Q

A limited partner exerts some control over partnership business activities. Which of the following are potential consequences?

A. Limited liability could be jeopardized.
B. There are no consequences.
C. Partnership liability will be increased.
D. Partnership liability will be reduced.

A

A. Limited liability could be jeopardized.

An LP acting in a management or decision-making capacity could become a GP for liability purposes.

1052
Q

A limited partnership has the following results: Income: $300,000; Operating costs: $200,000; Debt service: $95,000 (including interest: $90,000 and principal $5,000); Depreciation: $60,000. What would be the cash flow to a 10% limited partner?

A. $0
B. $500
C. $5,000
D. $10,000

A

B. $500

$300,000 minus $200,000, minus $95,000 equals $5,000 of which 10% is $500. Depreciation is a non-cash expense.

1053
Q

A partnership takes larger deductions against its computers in the first 2 years than in later years. The partnership is using:

A. Accelerated depreciation.
B. Accelerated amortization.
C. Straight line depreciation.
D. Accelerated depletion.

A

A. Accelerated depreciation.

Straight line depreciation deducts an equal amount each year. Depletion is used for natural resources and amortization is used for intangibles.

1054
Q

Revenues: $1,980,000; Operating expenses: $500,000; Interest expense: $300,000 Management fees: $100,000; Depreciation: $2,700,000 Taxable income or loss for the year from this limited partnership is:

A. $1,080,000 loss.
B. $1,080,000 income.
C. $1,620,000 loss.
D. $1,800,000 income.

A

C. $1,620,000 loss.

Total expenses = $3,600,000 ($2,700,000 plus $500,000, plus $300,000, plus $100,000). $3,600,000 minus $1,980,000 = $1,620,000 loss.

1055
Q

Which of the following is an exploratory well? I. Well in an unproven area; II. Well in a proven area; III. Well is a primary site; IV. Well is a secondary site

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

I. Well in an unproven area
III. Well is a primary site

Exploratory wells are in unproven areas and are primary sites. Developmental wells are in proven areas. Secondary sites use supplemental means of surfacing the oil, secondary drilling is water and steam, and tertiary is chemicals and gas.

1056
Q

What’s the difference between a REIT and a DPP?

A. A REIT has flow through of loss, a DPP of cash.
B. A DPP has flow through of gain and loss, a REIT only of loss.
C. A REIT has flow through of gain only, a DPP of loss and gain.
D. A REIT has flow through of gain, a DPP of loss.

A

C. A REIT has flow through of gain only, a DPP of loss and gain.

REITs, under subchapter M, pass through gain only, while DPPs, under subchapter K, pass through gain or loss.

1057
Q

In a limited partnership, what best describes the cross-over point?

A. Taxable income exceeds deductions.
B. Positive cash flow is generated and distributed.
C. Deductions exceed taxable income for the year and must be carried forward.
D. The issuer has sold enough units to make the shelter a viable investment.

A

A. Taxable income exceeds deductions.

If income exceeds deductions, tax liability occurs which may equal and then exceed all benefits from the program.

1058
Q

A limited partnership’s taxable income exceeds its cash flow. Which TWO of the following statements are correct? I. Limited partners will have “phantom income.” II. The limited partnership is experiencing the crossover point. III. Limited partners will pay income tax on their proportionate share of the cash flow. IV. The General Partner is required to distribute the entire cash flow to the limited partners.

A. I & II
B. I & III
C. II & III
D. III & IV

A

A. I & II

I. Limited partners will have “phantom income.”
II. The limited partnership is experiencing the crossover point.

The limited partners will have “phantom income.” Phantom income is reportable taxable income in excess of cash flow that limited partners do not receive but are taxed on. When a limited partnership’s taxable income exceeds cash flow, it has passed the crossover point.

1059
Q

A client of yours joins a limited partnership with an investment of $10,000 in cash, and also signs a recourse loan for $40,000. Which of the following are true concerning the client’s tax status? I. Cost basis is $10,000. II. Cost basis is $50,000. III. Tax deduction limit is $10,000. IV. Tax deduction limit is $50,000.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

D. II and IV

II. Cost basis is $50,000.
IV. Tax deduction limit is $50,000.

When the client invests $10,000 in the partnership, basis is $10,000. When the client later signs the recourse loan for $40,000, which adds $40,000 of liability if the partnership ever defaulted on the loan, the basis is adjusted to $50,000. According to the at risk limitation, the IRS stipulates that you may only deduct up to the amount of your basis, so the client’s tax deduction limit is $50,000.

1060
Q

When determining allowability of tax deductions in a limited partnership, the IRS mainly considers:

A. Past performance.
B. Management ability.
C. Intent to make money.
D. Tax accounting expertise.

A

C. Intent to make money.

This is just another version of the questions that are basically asking, “Do you know that the IRS wants to make sure that the DPP is established as a program to make a profit?” This program should seek profit, or economic viability, not just tax benefits.

1061
Q

All of the following properties can be depreciated, EXCEPT I. Vacant land. II. Non-commercial. III. Non-residential. IV. Tangible.

A. I only
B. I and II only
C. I and III only
D. II, III, and IV only

A

A. I only

I. Vacant land.

Only vacant land cannot be depreciated, but buildings can be depreciated. Straightline depreciation can be used for non-residential real estate, which is depreciated over 31.5 years, while non-commercial real estate can be depreciated on a straight line basis over 27.5 years. Tangible property uses ACRS.

1062
Q

A limited partnership reaches the crossover point, and the general partner refinances using a recourse mortgage. This results in a:

A. Increased cost basis.
B. Added tax liability.
C. Decreased cost basis.
D. Reduced tax liability.

A

A. Increased cost basis.

Recourse debt increases each LP’s cost basis.

1063
Q

Which of the following is not a true statement regarding “at risk” provisions?

A. Qualified non-recourse financing is excluded from tax basis, except in the case of real property.
B. Losses disallowed by “at risk” provisions in any one year are carried over to the next succeeding taxable year.
C. “At risk” provisions are not applicable to the exploration and exploitation of gas and oil.
D. Deductions of losses are limited to the investors’ invested capital plus the percentage of partnership liabilities for which the partner is personally liable.

A

C. “At risk” provisions are not applicable to the exploration and exploitation of gas and oil.

Most answers are extremely good definitions and statements from which you can learn about the “at risk” provisions of the Tax Reform Act of 1976. However, it is incorrect to say that “at risk” provisions are not applicable to the exploration and exploitation of gas and oil. Gas and oil are subject to these provisions.

1064
Q

Which of the following is a feature of oil and gas limited partnerships not found in real estate limited partnerships?

A. Depletion
B. Conversion of taxable income into capital gains
C. Depreciation
D. Flow-through of expenses

A

A. Depletion

Only mineral or resource programs have depletion.

1065
Q

All of the following are considered conflicts of interest for the general partner in a limited partnership, EXCEPT:

A. Selling a personally owned and existing office building to the limited partnership.
B. Acting as an agent for the partnership in managing partnership assets.
C. Accepting short-term loans from the partnership.
D. Accepting $20,000 for a covenant not to compete with the limited partnership.

A

D. Accepting $20,000 for a covenant not to compete with the limited partnership.

A conflict of interest is not involved when the GP is paid not to compete. All other choices are conflicts.

1066
Q

An investor purchases a 10% interest in a limited partnership with a $100,000 cash deposit. Her share of nonrecourse debt is $300,000. The limited partnership is forced to liquidate with the proceeds of the liquidation covering only $1,000,000 of the $3,000,000 debt. What is the customer’s maximum potential loss?

A. $10,000
B. $30,000
C. $100,000
D. $300,000

A

C. $100,000

Because the debt is non-recourse, the LP cannot lose more than the amount invested ($100,000).

1067
Q

An investor invests $20,000 in a limited partnership. The investor’s share of recourse debt is $80,000. What is true? I. The basis is $20,000. II. The basis is $100,000. III. The maximum risk is $20,000. IV. The maximum risk is $100,000.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

D. II and IV

II. The basis is $100,000.
IV. The maximum risk is $100,000.

Since the loan is recourse (at risk), basis and risk are the same: $100,000.

1068
Q

All of the following are advantages of an ACRS system EXCEPT:

A. Component depreciation.
B. 150% depreciation on used equipment.
C. Full depreciation of cost.
D. Failure to account for salvage value.

A

A. Component depreciation.

ACRS systems typically allow for the full cost of an asset to be depreciated. In other words, there is no salvage, or residual value. In fact, certain ACRS systems allow the owner to depreciate more than the cost of certain equipment. Component depreciation is a distractor and not an advantage of ACRS systems.

1069
Q

Mary Parker has a very large annual salary and is two years from retirement. She has an immediate need to shelter her income from taxes. Which of the following would best suit her objectives?

A. An oil and gas drilling program
B. Raw land
C. Real estate new construction program
D. An oil and gas income program

A

D. An oil and gas income program

Oil and gas income, although not the best tax shelter, is conservative for an investor 2 years from retirement.

1070
Q

Which of the following are considered a conflict of interest in a limited partnership?

A. The limited partners self-dealing to insure their profits without regard to other limited partners
B. The sponsor receiving a disproportionate share of program revenues.
C. The limited partners competing with the program by having interest in other similar partnerships
D. The general partner self-dealing to insure profits without regard to the limited partners

A

D. The general partner self-dealing to insure profits without regard to the limited partners

The general partner has a fiduciary responsibility for the limited partner and cannot act without considering the LP’s interests.

1071
Q

The maximum fee a broker/dealer can charge for a roll up is:

A. 2%.
B. 3%.
C. 5%.
D. 10%.

A

A. 2%.

When a broker/dealer is involved in a roll up of a limited partnership, the maximum fee the broker/dealer can charge is 2%.

1072
Q

Depreciation is a write-off available to investors in all of the following, EXCEPT:

A. Equipment leasing participations.
B. Oil and gas programs.
C. Real estate investment trusts.
D. Real estate limited partnerships.

A

C. Real estate investment trusts.

Depreciation and other deductions are available write-offs in most limited partnerships, whether real estate, equipment leasing, or oil and gas programs. REITs do not allow for the flow-through of the tax expenses; only the net income flows through on a REIT.

1073
Q

Revenues: $1,980,000; Operating expenses: $500,000 Interest expense: $300,000; Management fees: $100,000 Depreciation: $2,700,000 Cash flow from operation of this limited partnership program is:

A. Negative.
B. $1,080,000.
C. $1,380,000.
D. $2,700,000.

A

B. $1,080,000.

Depreciation is a non-cash expense. $1,980,000 minus $900,000 (operating expenses, interest expense and management fees) = $1,080,000 cash flow.

1074
Q

Which of the following is/are NOT possible benefits for an equipment leasing direct participation program? I. Steady income from rental payments; II. Investment tax credits; III. Cost recovery deductions; IV. Capital appreciation

A. II and IV
B. III and IV
C. I, II, and III
D. I only

A

A. II and IV

II. Investment tax credits
IV. Capital appreciation

Investment tax credits and capital appreciation are benefits/objectives of real estate programs, not equipment leasing programs.

1075
Q

A general partner is all of the following, EXCEPT:

A. One who has limited liability status.
B. A key executive.
C. One who buys and sells the program’s properties.
D. One who appoints the property manager.

A

A. One who has limited liability status.

General partners do not have limited liability, but as key executives, they buy and sell, appoint managers, and have general liability.

1076
Q

In a DPP a limited partner’s participation in the partnership does not take effect until:

A. The general partner signs the subscription agreement.
B. The limited partner signs the subscription agreement.
C. The general partner signs the partnership agreement.
D. The limited partner signs the partnership agreement.

A

A. The general partner signs the subscription agreement.

When the general partner signs the subscription agreement, the partnership is effective.

1077
Q

What oil and gas program has the least capital risk?

A. Income
B. Developmental
C. Exploratory
D. Drilling

A

A. Income

Income programs are based on producing wells.

1078
Q

Which of the following lowers investor basis in a limited partnership program? I. Depreciation; II. Depletion; III. Passive gain; IV. Passive loss

A. I, II and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. I, II and IV

A

D. I, II and IV

I. Depreciation
II. Depletion
IV. Passive loss

Depletion, depreciation and passive loss lower investor basis Passive gain raises investor basis.

1079
Q

Robert is a registered representative who sells both mutual funds and variable annuities. He makes a larger commission on variable annuities. One of Robert’s new customers is trying to decide between investing in a mutual fund or purchasing a variable annuity. Given FINRA communications rules regarding annuities, which of the following statements is Robert allowed to make?

A. “A variable annuity is like a mutual fund with tax-deferred growth.”
B. “A variable annuity can be surrendered for cash at any time without penalty.”
C. “A mutual fund is like a variable annuity with a lifetime income.”
D. “A variable annuity can be surrendered, but it may be subject to deferred sales loads, substantial surrender charges and tax penalties.”

A

D. “A variable annuity can be surrendered, but it may be subject to deferred sales loads, substantial surrender charges and tax penalties.”

This answer is correct because it does not imply that a variable annuity is a liquid short-term investment and it makes the investor aware of the pitfalls of early surrender.

1080
Q

The agent’s customers have several different types of investments within their portfolio. The investments include fixed annuities, variable annuities, Keogh plans, and IRAs. Within the list provided, which of the following would be considered securities?

A. Fixed annuities
B. Variable annuities
C. IRAs
D. Keogh plans

A

B. Variable annuities

Variable annuities are an insurance product with a separate account. The separate account is considered a security, and is registered under the Investment Company Act of1940 as either a unit investment trust or a managed investment company, such as a mutual fund.

1081
Q

All of the following statements regarding deferred and immediate annuities are correct EXCEPT:

A. Immediate annuities may only be funded with a single lump sum deposit.
B. Deferred annuities may be funded with periodic payments.
C. Immediate annuities may be funded with periodic payments.
D. Deferred annuities may be funded with a single lump sum deposit.

A

C. Immediate annuities may be funded with periodic payments.

This statement is incorrect because immediate annuities may ONLY be funded with a lump sum payment. Individuals cannot make payments into an annuity once the payout period begins.

1082
Q

Ralph receives a monthly check from a variable annuity contract. Ralph’s March check was smaller than his February check. The March check was smaller because:

A. The AIR in the separate account was reduced.
B. The separate account underperformed the AIR.
C. Fewer annuity units were liquidated to make the payment.
D. The separate account outperformed the AIR.

A

B. The separate account underperformed the AIR.

AIR is the interest rate the insurance company assigns to the separate account as a projection of future returns. If the separate account underperforms the AIR, the next monthly payment is reduced accordingly.

1083
Q

All of the following statements about bonus annuities are correct EXCEPT:

A. Bonus annuities typically have longer surrender periods than non-bonus annuities.
B. A bonus credit is a good reason to exchange an annuity.
C. Bonus credits are used to attract annuity sales.
D. Bonus annuities are not considered suitable investments for seniors.

A

B. A bonus credit is a good reason to exchange an annuity.

A bonus credit is a good reason to exchange an annuity. There are other important considerations, such as surrender charges, surrender period, or mortality expenses that can outweigh the benefits of bonus interest credits.

1084
Q

The maximum sales charge on a variable life contract under FINRA regulations is:

A. 9% over a period of up to 20 years.
B. 8.5% over the life of the policy.
C. 50% of the premium.
D. 15%.

A

A. 9% over a period of up to 20 years.

The maximum sales charge on a variable life insurance policy is 9% over the life of the policy. The life of the policy is considered the lesser of 20 years or the life expectancy of the insured.

1085
Q

A customer in a variable annuity assumes which of the following risks?

A. Investment
B. Expense
C. Contract performance
D. Mortality

A

A. Investment

Investment risk is the annuitant’s separate account performance risk. Contract performance is the risk that the insurance company will perform contractual obligations.

1086
Q

If an insured withdraws a portion of the face amount in the form of accelerated benefits because of a terminal illness, how will that affect the payable death benefit from the policy?

A. The death benefit will be forfeited.
B. The death benefit will be the same as the original face amount.
C. The death benefit will be larger.
D. The death benefit will be smaller.

A

D. The death benefit will be smaller.

If an insured withdraws a portion of the death benefit by the use of this rider, the benefit payable at death will be reduced by that amount, plus the amount of earnings lost by the insurance company in interest income.

1087
Q

A variable annuity may be an appropriate investment recommendation for which of the following clients?

A. A 30-year-old who is saving money to start a business
B. An 80-year-old retiree with adequate income who is seeking a conservative liquid investment
C. A 35-year-old who made the maximum contribution to her IRA and 401(k) plan and is saving for her child’s college education
D. A 55-year old-who has fully funded his IRA and 401(k) plan and has additional money available to save for retirement

A

D. A 55-year old-who has fully funded his IRA and 401(k) plan and has additional money available to save for retirement

A variable annuity may be an appropriate investment for retirement savings for a client who has fully funded their IRA and their employer’s retirement plans and has additional money available to invest for retirement. A variable annuity is usually not recommended for an 80-year-old because of potential surrender charges during the accumulation period. Both the 30- and 35-year-old need to access the funds before reaching age 59 ½ and may be subject to tax penalties.

1088
Q

Which types of variable annuities use accumulation units to track the owner’s interest in the separate account? I. Immediate annuity; II. Single premium deferred annuity; III. Periodic payment deferred annuity; IV. Amortization annuity

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

II. Single premium deferred annuity
III. Periodic payment deferred annuity

Immediate annuities do not have accumulation units, since payments begin immediately. There is no accumulation phase and therefore no accumulation units. Deferred annuities track accumulation units for the increase in value in the separate account from the realization of reinvested capital gains, interest, and dividends.

1089
Q

T invests into his variable annuity on a periodic payment plan. If T wishes to annuitize the contract and start receiving monthly payments now, which of the following is TRUE?

A. T is not allowed to annuitize a contract until the end of the specified time.
B. T must stop investing before he can annuitize the contract and start receiving monthly payments.
C. T may not start taking payments out of the contract until he reaches age 59 ½.
D. T may continue investing periodic payments, even though he is annuitizing and taking monthly payments from the annuity.

A

B. T must stop investing before he can annuitize the contract and start receiving monthly payments.

T would not be allowed to pay into a variable annuity and take out money, or annuitize the contract, at the same time.

1090
Q

Which type of policy allows the owner the greatest flexibility for premium payments?

A. Universal life insurance
B. Health insurance
C. Term life insurance
D. Variable life insurance

A

A. Universal life insurance

Universal life policies afford the owner flexibility in determining premium payment options.

1091
Q

What type of annuity contract could act as a hedge against either inflation or deflation?

A. Variable annuity
B. Combination annuity
C. Annuity with a period certain
D. Fixed annuity

A

B. Combination annuity

A combination annuity is a good hedge against inflation and deflation because a portion of the contract pays fixed interest, while the remaining portion could be placed in a variable annuity, which offers inflation protection.

1092
Q

“Separate account” is a term that applies to I. Whole life. II. Universal life. III. Variable life. IV. Variable annuities.

A. I and II
B. II and IV
C. III and IV
D. I, III and IV

A

C. III and IV

III. Variable life
IV. Variable annuities

The separate account only applies to the funds invested in a variable life or variable annuity contract.

1093
Q

The function of a prospectus in association with a variable contract is to:

A. Demonstrate superior performance potential when compared to whole life policies.
B. Provide the consumer with complete information in order to make an informed decision.
C. Relate how the separate account performance can affect the death benefit and cash accumulation.
D. Forecast future performance.

A

B. Provide the consumer with complete information in order to make an informed decision.

The main purpose of a prospectus with respect to a variable contract is to provide the consumer with complete and detailed information in an effort to assist them in making an informed decision.

1094
Q

A variable life insurance policyowner took a loan against his policy several years ago. Because of poor investment performance, his policy’s cash value has dropped to a negative value of $500. What are the policyowner’s options?

A. He can reduce his death benefit to make up for the short fall in his cash value.
B. Do nothing and hope the performance improves in the near future.
C. He has defaulted on his loan and must pay back the loan in full or surrender his policy immediately.
D. He has 31 days to pay back enough of the loan to bring the cash value positive.

A

D. He has 31 days to pay back enough of the loan to bring the cash value positive.

If poor performance causes the cash value to go negative, the policyowner has 31 days to pay back enough of the loan to bring the cash value positive again.

1095
Q

All of the following are correct regarding a variable annuity deferred sales charge EXCEPT it:

A. Declines over time.
B. Must be “fair and reasonable.”
C. Is assessed upon withdrawal.
D. Is deducted during the last 5 years of the accumulation period.

A

D. Is deducted during the last 5 years of the accumulation period.

A deferred sales charge is usually contingent on the length of time that the annuity is held and is assessed at withdrawal. It must be fair and reasonable.

1096
Q

All of the following are characteristics of fixed annuities EXCEPT:

A. Premiums are invested in the general account.
B. They are considered to be securities.
C. They guarantee a certain amount of income.
D. The insurance company assumes the risk.

A

B. They are considered to be securities.

Fixed annuities are not considered to be securities. The insurance company, rather than the owner, assumes all of the investment risk. The premiums or payments made by the owner are invested in the insurance company’s general account for all fixed insurance products. The annuitant is guaranteed a certain amount of income that is based on the purchase payments deposited.

1097
Q

In order to sell a variable annuity contract, which qualification must an individual obtain?

A. A securities registration but not an insurance license
B. An insurance license and a securities registration
C. A securities registration and a certificate of authority
D. An insurance license and a certificate of authority

A

B. An insurance license and a securities registration

To sell variable annuities, an individual needs both an insurance license and a securities registration because variable annuities are both insurance products and securities products.

1098
Q

All of the following are features and requirements of the Living Needs Rider EXCEPT:

A. Diagnosis must indicate that death is expected within 3 years.
B. It is usually available at no additional charge.
C. The remainder of the policy proceeds is payable to the beneficiary at the insured’s death.
D. It provides funds for medical and nursing home expenses to a terminally ill insured.

A

A. Diagnosis must indicate that death is expected within 3 years.

The Living Needs Rider provides for the payment of part of the policy death benefit if the insured is diagnosed with a terminal illness that will result in death within 2 years.

1099
Q

An investor that owns accumulation units has:

A. A single premium immediate annuity.
B. A single premium deferred annuity.
C. An immediate life annuity.
D. An immediate annuity with joint and last survivor.

A

B. A single premium deferred annuity.

Accumulation units are obtained in the premium paying period. Immediate annuities begin distribution to the investor upon purchase and pay out in annuity units.

1100
Q

With regard to variable life insurance policies, the largest expense for an insurance company associated with:

A. Administration.
B. Investment management.
C. Mortality.
D. Insurance.

A

B. Investment management.

The investment management fee is the largest cost incurred by an insurance company with regard to variable life insurance policies.

1101
Q

What is the purpose of annuity riders?

A. To increase the cost of an annuity
B. To provide more annuity products to consumers
C. To allow investors to obtain additional benefit
D. To allow an annuity to build cash value

A

C. To allow investors to obtain additional benefit

Annuity riders are features that allow annuity investors to obtain additional benefit not offered with the original annuity product.

1102
Q

The owner of a variable life insurance policy died. The policy had $110,000 in cash value and a $250,000 death benefit. Three years earlier the policyowner had taken out a policy loan for $30,000. How much in death benefit proceeds will the beneficiary receive?

A. $110,000
B. $220,000
C. $250,000
D. $330,000

A

B. $220,000

At the death of the owner of a variable contract, the beneficiary will receive the death benefit less any outstanding loans, which in this case would be $220,000 ($250,000 death benefit less the $30,000 loan).

1103
Q

Which statement is true regarding sales charges in a variable life insurance policy?

A. Up to 30% of the premium paid may be deducted for sales charges in the first policy year.
B. The maximum charge is 9% calculated over a 20-year period.
C. The maximum charge is 30% of the premium paid during the first policy year.
D. Sales charges over 10% of the premium paid must be refunded if the policy is surrendered within the first 2 years.

A

B. The maximum charge is 9% calculated over a 20-year period.

Maximum charges are: 9% calculated over 20 years, 50% of premium during first policy year. Charges in excess of 30% for first year and 10% second year must be refunded if policy is surrendered within first 24 months.

1104
Q

A provision in a life insurance policy that provides for the early payment of some portion of the policy face amount should the insured suffer from a terminal illness or injury is called:

A. Waiver of maturity provision.
B. Accelerated Benefit provision.
C. Viatical Settlement provision.
D. Automatic premium loan provision.

A

B. Accelerated Benefit provision.

The accelerated payment can be made in a lump sum or in monthly installments over a special period of time. This provision is given without an increase in premium. Some companies, however, deduct an interest charge from the proceeds paid out to make up for their loss earnings.

1105
Q

Which of the following best describes an annuity’s expense guarantee?

A. The annuity company is required to project the annuitant’s retirement expenses and guarantee a minimum coverage.
B. It is indexed to inflation.
C. The annuity company promises to pay a specified level of the annuitant’s expenses for life.
D. It establishes the maximum the annuity company may charge the contract.

A

D. It establishes the maximum the annuity company may charge the contract.

The expense guarantee establishes a maximum the insurance company may charge the annuitant for administrative expenses.

1106
Q

Which of the following is NOT a concern when executing a 1035 exchange?

A. New surrender period
B. Capital gains tax
C. Possible sales charges
D. Possible surrender charges

A

B. Capital gains tax

A 1035 exchange allows the policy holder to defer recognition and tax of any capital gain on the original product, so taxes are not a concern.

1107
Q

Which of the following is guaranteed in a variable life insurance policy?

A. Death benefit only
B. Surrender value
C. Cash value only
D. Cash value and death benefit

A

A. Death benefit only

Cash value can fluctuate depending on how the investment performs. However, even if the market tumbles and the cash value drops to zero, the policyowner of a variable life insurance policy is still entitled to the death benefit as long as the premium is paid. If the contract owner dies during the accumulation period, the beneficiary will receive the greater of the gross payments made into the contract or the accumulated value at the time of the owner’s death.

1108
Q

Regarding voting rights, contract owners of variable annuities:

A. Have voting rights similar to shareholders in mutual funds.
B. Have no voting rights because the insurance company assumes all investment risk.
C. May vote to ratify portfolio changes recommended by the investment manager.
D. Do not have voting rights because variable annuities are insurance products.

A

A. Have voting rights similar to shareholders in mutual funds.

Contract owners have voting rights proportional to the number of units they own, similar to the rights of mutual fund shareholders.

1109
Q

After the first annuity payment is calculated in a variable annuity, future payments are calculated:

A. By multiplying the total value of the account by the assumed interest rate.
B. By multiplying the number of annuity units by the current redemption value of a unit.
C. By multiplying the current value of an accumulation unit by the total number of units.
D. By liquidating a certain number of annuity units based on the performance of the separate account.

A

B. By multiplying the number of annuity units by the current redemption value of a unit.

The redemption value of an annuity unit changes with the performance of the separate account compared to the Assumed Interest Rate. For example, if the separate account outperforms in a given month, the resulting increase in redemption value will increase the amount of the next month’s payment.

1110
Q

What part of the Internal Revenue Code allows owners of a life insurance policy or annuity to exchange or replace their current contract with another contract without creating adverse tax consequences?

A. Section 457 Deferred Compensation Plan
B. Section 1035 Policy Exchange
C. Modified Endowment Exchange
D. 401(k) Plan

A

B. Section 1035 Policy Exchange

IRC Section 1035 allows for a tax-free exchange between certain insurance policies and/or annuities. The policy holder defers any gain on the exchange into the cost basis of the new product.

1111
Q

The best definition of an annuity unit is:

A. A unit of ownership in the separate account that, when multiplied by the value of a unit, describes the account holders value during the accumulation phase.
B. An assumption of a reasonable rate of return on the investments in the separate account.
C. A unit used to express the value of fixed annuities only.
D. An accounting measure that is created at the beginning of the annuity period and is used to determine the amount of future annuity payments.

A

D. An accounting measure that is created at the beginning of the annuity period and is used to determine the amount of future annuity payments.

During the annuity period, the current value of a fixed number of annuity units will determine the amount of each payment. The number of units is fixed at the time of annuitization.

1112
Q

Variable life policy provisions allow for:

A. Converting the policy to a term policy at certain intervals.
B. Changing among investment alternatives within the separate account subject to current capital gain/loss consequences.
C. Loans against a percentage of the policy’s cash value.
D. The payment of a death benefit in the event of suicide within the first year of the policy.

A

C. Loans against a percentage of the policy’s cash value.

The payment of a death benefit is not required if the insured commits suicide within the first 2 years of the policy. Variable policies may be converted to another type of permanent policy such as whole life or universal life, but not a term policy. Changes in investment alternatives within the separate account are not taxable events. Loans are permitted against a minimum of 75% of the cash value after the policy has been in place for 3 years.

1113
Q

Which of the following is NOT guaranteed?

A. Cash value on a variable life insurance policy
B. Interest on a fixed annuity contract
C. Interest and principal on direct U.S. government obligations
D. Death benefit on a whole life insurance policy

A

A. Cash value on a variable life insurance policy

The cash value in a variable life policy is contingent on the investment performance of the separate account.

1114
Q

If an insured commits suicide within the first 2 years of a variable life policy issue, the insurance company:

A. Pays nothing.
B. Returns the premiums paid into the policy.
C. Returns the sales charge plus the value of the separate account.
D. Must pay the death benefit.

A

B. Returns the premiums paid into the policy.

Suicide within 2 years of a policy issue date does not require the insurance company to pay the death benefit. The company will return the premiums paid to the beneficiary. This rule can be state-specific. Some states do not allow the company to contest suicide and are required to pay the death benefit.

1115
Q

All of the following are acceptable methods for purchasing an annuity EXCEPT:

A. Periodic premium immediate annuity.
B. Single premium deferred annuity.
C. Single premium immediate annuity.
D. Periodic premium deferred annuity.

A

A. Periodic premium immediate annuity.

An immediate annuity cannot have a periodic premium because immediate annuities begin paying out as soon as they are issued by the insurance company.

1116
Q

The cash value of a variable life policy:

A. Fluctuates based on the performance of the securities in the separate account.
B. Must be calculated at least quarterly.
C. Is guaranteed.
D. Decreases as premiums are paid.

A

A. Fluctuates based on the performance of the securities in the separate account.

Variable life policies have guaranteed minimum death benefits, but the cash values are not guaranteed. Cash values increase as premiums are paid and must be calculated at least monthly.

1117
Q

Which annuity provision guarantees payments as long as the annuitant lives?

A. Death benefit
B. Permanent period
C. Lifetime guarantee
D. Mortality guarantee

A

D. Mortality guarantee

The annuity company guarantees that it will make payments as long as the annuitant lives through a mortality guarantee.

1118
Q

A variable life policy’s nonforfeiture provision:

A. Entitles the policyowner to the cash value less any outstanding loan amount if the policy is terminated.
B. Means that any claim to the cash value is forfeited upon premature surrender of the policy.
C. Uses a cash value calculation as of the day the policy was signed.
D. Indemnifies the insurance company should a policyholder stop making premium payments.

A

A. Entitles the policyowner to the cash value less any outstanding loan amount if the policy is terminated.

Nonforfeiture provisions protect against the loss of any accumulated cash value should the policyholder surrender the policy. The policy holder would receive the surrender value which is equal to the cash value less outstanding loans and unpaid interest charges.

1119
Q

The owner of a variable annuity is guaranteed to receive payments for a minimum of 15 years. This annuity is a:

A. 15-year endowment annuity.
B. 15-year fixed payment annuity.
C. Life annuity with period certain.
D. Variable life annuity.

A

C. Life annuity with period certain.

An annuitant who is guaranteed to receive payments for a minimum of 15 years has a life annuity with period certain. Payments are guaranteed for the life of the annuitant or for 15 years, whichever is greater.

1120
Q

The separate account for a variable life policy had a 3% rate of return over the past year. The AIR for the policy is 6%. How will this affect the death benefit of the policy?

A. The rate of return for the separate account does not affect the death benefit, only the cash value.
B. The death benefit will decrease but not below the face amount of the policy.
C. The death benefit will decrease.
D. The death benefit will increase since the rate of return was positive.

A

B. The death benefit will decrease but not below the face amount of the policy.

The death benefit decreases if the rate of return falls below the AIR, but cannot fall below the minimum, which is the face amount of the policy.

1121
Q

The accelerated benefits provision will provide for an early payment of the death benefit when the insured:

A. Needs to borrow money.
B. Has earned enough credits.
C. Becomes disabled.
D. Becomes terminally ill.

A

D. Becomes terminally ill.

The accelerated benefits provisions allow the owner to be advanced a significant portion of the death benefit when the insured is terminally ill.

1122
Q

Actuarial science considers a person to be statistically dead at:

A. Age 76 for men and age 77 for women.
B. Age 100.
C. Age 76.
D. Age 77.

A

B. Age 100.

Mortality tables show that few people are alive at age 100, at which point they are considered to be statistically dead. Therefore, an insurance policy still in force for a person who reaches age 100 will pay the death benefit, even if the insured is still living.

1123
Q

A grandfather wants to select an annuity settlement option that will provide the best benefit to both his son and granddaughter. What annuity type would best suit his needs?

A. Joint annuity in the names of both his son and granddaughter
B. Joint and last survivor
C. Life income only
D. Life income period certain

A

B. Joint and last survivor

The joint and last survivor annuity would make payments to the son and then the granddaughter as long as one of them survives.

1124
Q

Variable annuities generally include an assumed interest rate. This is the:

A. Annual rate at which annuity payments will increase.
B. Annual rate of return assumed by the insurance company as a reference point to make annuity payments.
C. Rate used to illustrate the future growth prospects of the contract.
D. Annual dividend rate that will be paid to the contract holder.

A

B. Annual rate of return assumed by the insurance company as a reference point to make annuity payments.

The assumed interest rate (AIR) is the rate that the insurance company assumes the separate account will earn during the payout period. If the company is wrong, the monthly payments are adjusted accordingly. If the separate account actually earns more than the AIR, the monthly payment is increased. If the account earns less than the AIR, the monthly payment is reduced.

1125
Q

The cash value of the separate account of a variable life policy is $1,000. How many votes may the policyowner cast on matters requiring policy owner approval?

A. 1
B. 10
C. 100
D. 1,000

A

B. 10

Policyowners’ voting rights are in proportion to the cash value in the separate account. For every $100 of cash value, the policyowner has one vote.

1126
Q

An annuity owner chooses the straight life annuitization option because:

A. It provides payments to a beneficiary for a specified period.
B. It is the most conservative payout option available.
C. It provides equal monthly payments for the remainder of his lifetime.
D. It provides the maximum cash flow of all annuity options.

A

D. It provides the maximum cash flow of all annuity options.

The straight life payment option allows the greatest cash flow to the annuitant. The investor will receive payments for life, but at death, all payments stop. This option has the greatest risk to the investor.

1127
Q

What kind of annuity starts making payments to the annuitant one payment period after a lump sum deposit is made?

A. Temporary
B. Deferred
C. Lump sum
D. Immediate

A

D. Immediate

With an immediate annuity, payments to the annuitant begin one payment period after a lump sum deposit into the contract.

1128
Q

Owners of variable annuity contracts have which of the following rights? I. Right to vote on proposed changes in an investment policy; II. Right to reduced sales charges for large purchases; III. Right to vote for the portfolio manager; IV. Right to vote for the board of directors

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. III and IV
D. I and II

A

A. I and IV

I. Right to vote on proposed changes in an investment policy
IV. Right to vote for the board of directors

Variable annuity contract owners do not vote for the portfolio manager. Voting privileges are for election of members of the board, changes in investment policies of the separate account, and other issues as defined in the Investment Company Act of 1940.

1129
Q

The expense limitation clause of a life insurance policy:

A. Guarantees the mortality costs.
B. Requires the policyholder to pay all administrative expenses of the policy.
C. Requires the insurance company to pay administrative expenses above the maximum charges stated in the policy.
D. States the maximum allowable sales charge.

A

C. Requires the insurance company to pay administrative expenses above the maximum charges stated in the policy.

Any administrative expenses above the contractually stated maximum charges are the responsibility of the insurance company.

1130
Q

A variable life insurance policy states all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Current and maximum mortality costs.
B. Current and minimum guaranteed cash value.
C. Current and maximum investment management fee.
D. Current and maximum administrative expenses.

A

B. Current and minimum guaranteed cash value.

Variable life policies do not guarantee cash values. All the other choices are charges and expenses detailed in a variable life policy.

1131
Q

Concerning valuation of a variable annuity, which of the following are true? I. The value is expressed in units, similar to mutual fund shares. II. Units are revalued daily similar to mutual fund shares. III. The number of annuity units increases during the accumulation phase. IV. The value of a unit varies with the performance of the separate account.

A. I only
B. I, II and III
C. I, II and IV
D. II, III and IV

A

C. I, II and IV

I. The value is expressed in units, similar to mutual fund shares.
II. Units are revalued daily similar to mutual fund shares.
IV. The value of a unit varies with the performance of the separate account.

Units are valued daily similar to mutual funds and vary with the performance of the portfolio in the separate account. In the accumulation phase, units are referred to as accumulation units. A fixed number of annuity units are determined upon the annuitization of the contract.

1132
Q

With a variable annuity, which of the following factors are NOT involved in determining the amount of an annuitant’s first annuity payment?

A. The settlement option selected
B. The value of the annuitant’s interest in the separate account
C. An actuarial factor base on the annuitant’s life expectancy
D. The number of annuity units

A

D. The number of annuity units

After the amount of the first payment is calculated, the number of annuity units is determined by dividing the amount of the first payment by the current value of an annuity unit. This fixes the number of annuity units that will be used in calculating the amount of future payments.

1133
Q

During a period of a severe economic decline, the annuity payments received by the annuitant owning a fixed annuity will probably:

A. Remain the same.
B. Decrease.
C. Fluctuate with grate volatility.
D. Increase.

A

A. Remain the same.

Fixed annuity benefit payments have a minimum interest rate guaranteed.

1134
Q

The death benefit payable during the accumulation period of an annuity contract I. Is based on the greater of the gross payments to date or the value of the account at the time of death. II. Is not payable after annuity payments have started. III. Is the annuity feature that guarantees payments for the life of the annuitant. IV. Is available only with fixed annuity contracts.

A. III and IV
B. I and II
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

B. I and II

I. Is based on the greater of the gross payments to date or the value of the account at the time of death.
II. Is not payable after annuity payments have started.

The death benefit during the accumulation period protects the beneficiary in case the annuity owner dies before receiving annuity payments. After payments have begun, the annuity option chosen will determine what, if any, payments are made to the beneficiary upon the death of the annuitant.

1135
Q

Which of the following securities acts governs the variable annuity separate account?

A. Dodd Frank
B. The Investment Company Act of 1940
C. The Trust Indenture Act of 1939
D. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934

A

B. The Investment Company Act of 1940

The variable annuity separate account is considered an investment company under the Investment Company Act of 1940. The Trust Indenture Act of 1939 governs corporate bonds. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 governs the people involved in the broker/dealer registered routes as well as the exchanges and the secondary markets. Dodd Frank is a recent act dealing with financial reform and does not address the variable annuities separate account.

1136
Q

When an annuitant terminates an annuity during the accumulation phase, which of the following is true?

A. The annuitant will receive surrender value.
B. The annuitant will receive cost basis but forfeit growth.
C. The annuitant will be taxed at capital gains rates.
D. There is no termination; the annuity is a binding contract that may not be terminated.

A

A. The annuitant will receive surrender value.

The annuitant will receive current account value (cost basis plus growth) less any surrender charges, which equals surrender value.

1137
Q

P invested $10,000 into a nonqualified variable annuity 5 years ago. Today, P’s annuity is worth $16,000. She decides to withdrawal the full amount out of her annuity. On what portion will P have to pay taxes?

A. $6,000
B. $10,000
C. $16,000
D. P will have no tax liability

A

A. $6,000

P isn’t required to pay taxes on the original $10,000 she invested. The original $10,000 investment was paid with after-tax dollars; she would not be required to pay taxes on that portion again. P will, however, have to pay taxes on the gain of $6,000. With variable annuities, the money grows tax-deferred and is not taxed until the money is withdrawn from the annuity.

1138
Q

The cash value of a variable life insurance company must be calculated:

A. Daily.
B. Weekly.
C. Monthly.
D. Quarterly.

A

C. Monthly.

Although the cash value of a variable life insurance polity is usually calculated daily, it is required to be calculated at least monthly.

1139
Q

Mortality risk fees and operating expense risk fees are designed to:

A. Pay state taxes owed by the insurance company.
B. Protect the contract holder from rising premium costs.
C. Protect the insurance company by offsetting unexpected costs.
D. Protect the annuitant against losses in the separate account.

A

C. Protect the insurance company by offsetting unexpected costs.

These fees are deducted from the separate account to protect the insurance company against unexpected increases in operating costs and against annuitants who outlive their expected mortality.

1140
Q

What does a variable annuity guarantee to the annuitant at retirement?

A. Tax-free income
B. Total payments that equal at least the amount invested in the contract
C. Higher returns than can be obtained from a fixed annuity
D. None of the above

A

D. None of the above

None of these answers are true. If the performance in the separate account does well over time and the annuitant lives long enough, the owner may come out much better than from a fixed annuity, but there are no guarantees this will occur.

1141
Q

When a variable annuity is sold with a level load, the sales charge is deducted from:

A. The separate account on a quarterly basis.
B. The separate account on a monthly basis.
C. Each deposit made into the annuity contract.
D. The first deposit made into the annuity contract.

A

C. Each deposit made into the annuity contract.

Variable annuities can be sold on a level sales charge, or level load, basis. Level sales charges are deducted from each installment or deposit made into the contract.

1142
Q

John had been receiving monthly payments from his variable annuity for several years. Upon his death, his widowed wife received a lump-sum payment. This type of annuity was a:

A. Variable unit refund annuity.
B. Variable life annuity.
C. Variable joint and last survivor annuity.
D. Endowment annuity.

A

A. Variable unit refund annuity.

When a beneficiary receives a lump-sum payment, the annuity was a unit refund annuity. If the beneficiary had received the payment in installments, this would have been an installment refund annuity.

1143
Q

An annuity contract holder is considering a 1035 exchange from one annuity contract to another. Which of the following should she take into consideration prior to effecting a 1035 exchange?

A. The ability to annuitize the contract
B. Capital gains from the original annuity
C. The tax consequences of the exchange
D. Surrender charges

A

D. Surrender charges

1035 exchanges allow investors to exchange one annuity contract for another without a tax liability. However, the investor should look at all the different expenses or penalties prior to effecting the exchange. It may not be economically feasible based on the amount of the surrender charges from the existing contract or starting a new surrender charge period with a new contract.

1144
Q

The type of annuity that features tax-deferred growth is I. Tax-qualified annuity. II. Variable annuity. III. Deferred annuity. IV. Fixed annuity.

A. I only
B. III only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

All annuity products feature tax-deferred growth.

1145
Q

All of the following are true of the voting rights of variable life policyowners EXCEPT they:

A. Have one vote for every share.
B. Have one vote for every $100 of cash value.
C. Have the same rights as investment company shareholders.
D. Are entitled to vote on investment objectives of the separate account.

A

A. Have one vote for every share.

Voting is based on the cash value of the separate account, not shares. Policyowners have one vote per $100 of cash value. Owners are entitled to the same rights as investment company shareholders. Issues requiring policyholder approval include changes in investment objectives of the separate account.

1146
Q

Which of the following statements best describes the effect the Accelerated Benefit provision would have on the benefits paid to the beneficiary?

A. It will not affect the benefits paid to the beneficiary.
B. It will reduce the benefits by 70%.
C. It will increase the benefits paid to the beneficiary.
D. It will decrease the benefits paid to the beneficiary.

A

D. It will decrease the benefits paid to the beneficiary.

Accelerated Benefit provision allows the early payment of some portion of the death benefit if the insured becomes terminally ill or is confined to a long-term care facility. The face amount of insurance is therefore reduced, which will decrease the benefits paid to the beneficiary.

1147
Q

When is a policyholder allowed to surrender a variable annuity contract?

A. During either the accumulation or annuity period
B. During the grace period
C. During the annuity period
D. During the accumulation period

A

D. During the accumulation period

A variable annuity can only be redeemed (surrendered) during the accumulation period. Once a settlement option is selected and the contract is annuitized (the annuity period), the choice is irrevocable.

1148
Q

Sales charges for an annuity contract are limited to:

A. A fair and reasonable amount over the life of the contract.
B. 16% average over 4 years and 8.5% over the life of the contract.
C. A specific percentage of any single payment.
D. 9% average over the life of the contract.

A

A. A fair and reasonable amount over the life of the contract.

Variable annuity maximum sales charge must be fair and reasonable over the life of the contract.

1149
Q

Which of the following settlement options will give the annuitant the highest periodic payment?

A. Combined fixed and variable annuity payout
B. Unit refund life
C. Straight life
D. Fixed amount

A

C. Straight life

The straight-life annuity option gives the annuitant the highest periodic payment but carries the most risk. The annuitant receives payments as long as he or she lives. Upon the annuitant’s death, all payments end.

1150
Q

Under which of the following circumstances would an insurer pay accelerated benefits?

A. An insured is looking for a way to put her daughter through college.
B. A couple wants to build a house and would like to make a larger down payment.
C. An insured is diagnosed with cancer and needs help paying for her medical treatment.
D. A couple is nearing retirement and needs a steady stream of income.

A

C. An insured is diagnosed with cancer and needs help paying for her medical treatment.

Accelerated benefits are paid when insureds endure financial hardship due to severe illness. They may request immediate payment of some portion of the policy’s death benefit, usually 50-100%, depending on the insurer. Benefits are not taxable.

1151
Q

Which of the following is true regarding an insurance company’s general account?

A. Because it is conservatively invested, all investment risk is assumed by the investor.
B. Though it is invested primarily in equities, by law it may not deal in options or margin trading.
C. It is conservatively invested because it holds assets associated with guaranteed insurance products.
D. It holds assets invested in products that require insurance and securities licensing of representatives that sell them.

A

C. It is conservatively invested because it holds assets associated with guaranteed insurance products.

Because the general account holds assets invested in guaranteed products such as whole life policies and fixed annuities, it is typically invested conservatively in long-term debt. A securities license is not required to sell guaranteed products.

1152
Q

The owner of a variable life policy has the right to a refund of some of the sales charges if the policy is surrendered within

A. 1 year.
B. 18 months.
C. 2 years.
D. 60 days.

A

C. 2 years.

A policyholder may cancel a variable life contract within the first 2 years and must receive a partial refund of the sales charges.

1153
Q

Variable life policy premiums:

A. Are similar to whole life premiums for the same age and face amount.
B. Increase or decrease, depending on the performance of the separate account.
C. Are paid in fixed amounts at specified intervals.
D. Increase with the insured’s age.

A

C. Are paid in fixed amounts at specified intervals.

Premiums for variable and whole life policies are paid in fixed amounts at specified intervals. The amount of the premiums will differ between variable and whole life because of the distinct nature of each policy type.

1154
Q

What annuity provision guarantees a certain expense amount for an annuity contract?

A. Dollar limit
B. Amount guarantee
C. Mortality guarantee
D. Expense guarantee

A

D. Expense guarantee

Annuity companies are required to project their administrative expenses for annuity contracts. The expense guarantee establishes the maximum they can charge the contract. The annuity company is responsible for any increase in expenses beyond the amount guaranteed in the contract.

1155
Q

What is the greatest investment risk associated with a variable life insurance policy?

A. Credit risk
B. Currency risk
C. Market risk
D. Default risk

A

C. Market risk

Market risk is the greatest investment risk associated with a variable life insurance policy because the value of the separate account depends on the performance of the market.

1156
Q

Which of the following statements regarding the impact of market performance on a variable life insurance policy is TRUE?

A. The insurance company may increase the premiums due to poor market performance.
B. Expense charges may be increased by the insurance company against the separate account.
C. If performance in the separate account is negative, the policy may have no cash value.
D. The death benefit may decline to zero due to poor account performance.

A

C. If performance in the separate account is negative, the policy may have no cash value.

Poor performance could cause the cash value in a variable policy to be zero, but the death benefit may not fall below the face amount of the policy. Variable policy premiums are fixed, and contract expense clauses prevent the company from raising administrative fees.

1157
Q

Costs associated with variable annuities that are not included in the sales charge may include:

A. Investment management fees and administrative expenses.
B. Premium taxes.
C. Mortality risk fee and expense risk fee.
D. All of the above.

A

D. All of the above.

These charges are not included in the sales charge. Depending upon the contract, all are possible expenses or ongoing charges that are deducted from the separate account.

1158
Q

All of the following are differences between qualified and nonqualified retirement plans EXCEPT:

A. Taxation on accumulation.
B. Taxation of withdrawals.
C. Taxation of contributions.
D. IRS approval requirements.

A

A. Taxation on accumulation.

Taxation on accumulation is deferred in both types of plans. The rest of the characteristics differ.

1159
Q

Which of the following may establish a SEP?

A. Low-income individuals and families
B. Self-employed individuals
C. Military personnel
D. The elderly

A

B. Self-employed individuals

A Simplified Employee Pension is a type of qualified plan suited for the self-employed or small self-employed groups. A SEP is an arrangement whereby an employee establishes and maintains an individual retirement account to which the employer contributes. Employer contributions are not included in the employee’s gross income.

1160
Q

An employee contributed $3,000 to her employer’s qualified plan. What percentage of this contribution is she vested in?

A. 25%
B. 50%
C. 75%
D. 100%

A

D. 100%

Employees are always 100% vested in their own contributions.

1161
Q

Who can make a fully deductible contribution to an IRA?

A. Anybody; all IRA contributions are fully deductible regardless of income level
B. A highly paid individual covered by an employer-sponsored plan
C. A person whose contributions are funded by investment income
D. An individual not covered by an employer-sponsored plan

A

D. An individual not covered by an employer-sponsored plan

Any eligible person not participating in a qualified retirement plan can make a fully deductible contribution to an IRA. In addition, individuals who are not covered by an employer-sponsored plan may deduct the full amount of their IRA contributions regardless of their income level. Individuals who are covered by an employer-sponsored plan are subject to income limitations.

1162
Q

Which of the following is NOT a qualified exemption to the IRA early distribution rule and will incur a penalty?

A. For educational purposes
B. To pay for excessive medical bills
C. At age 60 for retirement purposes
D. To purchase an investment property

A

D. To purchase an investment property

Withdrawing funds for an investment property is not one of the conditions that will waive the 10% early withdrawal penalty.

1163
Q

Which one of the following statements regarding Coverdell Education Savings Accounts is correct?

A. Funds not used for education may be rolled over into an IRA for the beneficiary.
B. All distributions are taxable to the beneficiary.
C. Contributions are made with after-tax dollars and grow tax-deferred.
D. Contributions must cease when the beneficiary turns 30.

A

C. Contributions are made with after-tax dollars and grow tax-deferred.

Contributions to a Coverdell are made with after-tax dollars and grow tax-deferred. Withdrawals are tax-free when used for qualified education expenses. Contributions are not permitted once the beneficiary turns 18 and the money must be used by age 30 or rolled over to a Coverdell for another qualified family member. Unused funds cannot be rolled into an IRA.

1164
Q

Upon termination of employment, an employee’s funds from a 457(b) plan:

A. Can only be transferred to another 457(b) plan.
B. May be transferred into an IRA. Once transferred, the funds become subject to a 10% penalty for early withdrawal.
C. May be transferred to an IRA and still retain the exemption from the 10% penalty for early withdrawal.
D. Cannot be transferred to a qualified plan.

A

B. May be transferred into an IRA. Once transferred, the funds become subject to a 10% penalty for early withdrawal.

Funds from a 457(b) plan may be transferred to an IRA or other qualified plan; however once transferred the funds lose the exemption from the 10% penalty for early withdrawal.

1165
Q

Under a defined benefit retirement plan, who determines what benefits a retired employee will receive?

A. Federal government
B. Employer
C. Employee
D. Beneficiary

A

B. Employer

The employer defines the benefits by the use of a formula that applies to all employees.

1166
Q

A husband, age 45, earns $35,000 per year and wants to start an IRA for himself and his wife, age 43, who does not work. Which option legally gives them the largest deduction?

A. $6,000 each in two separate accounts
B. $12,000 in a single account
C. 100% of the husband’s annual salary
D. $3,000 total, split between two accounts with the spousal option

A

A. $6,000 each in two separate accounts

Currently, the spousal IRA allows for up to $6,000 for each in separate accounts, for a total deduction of $12,000. However, each account is limited to $6,000 per year.

1167
Q

Which of the following is NOT a characteristic of SIMPLE plans?

A. There are liberal loan provisions for hardships.
B. They are available to employers with 100 or fewer employees.
C. No other qualified plan can be in place.
D. There is a mandatory employer match up of up to 3% of an employee’s salary.

A

A. There are liberal loan provisions for hardships.

SIMPLE plans are available to employers with 100 or fewer employees. Loans are not permitted with SIMPLE plans.

1168
Q

How are funds contributed to a tax-sheltered annuity treated for taxation?

A. The contributions are taxed as income to the employee at the time the contribution is made, but distributions are tax free upon withdrawal.
B. The contributions are not included as income for the employee, but are taxable upon distribution.
C. The contributions are never taxed.
D. The contributions are taxed as income to the employee at the time they are contributed.

A

B. The contributions are not included as income for the employee, but are taxable upon distribution.

Funds contributed are excluded from the employee’s current taxable income, but are taxable at ordinary income tax rates upon withdrawal.

1169
Q

Which of the following is true about a defined benefit plan?

A. Low-salaried employees are excluded from the plan.
B. All participating employees are vested immediately following a contribution to the plan.
C. Contributions are made in regular fixed amounts.
D. High-salaried employees with only a few years until retirement receive the highest contribution.

A

D. High-salaried employees with only a few years until retirement receive the highest contribution.

Defined benefit plans favor owners and key employees nearing retirement. The contribution formula is weighted toward these employees.

1170
Q

Which of the following is NOT a feature of a Roth IRA?

A. Distributions may be deferred beyond the attainment of age 72.
B. Qualified distributions at the time of retirement are not taxed as income.
C. Contributions are tax deductible.
D. Contributions may continue, regardless of age, if there is earned income.

A

C. Contributions are tax deductible.

Roth IRA contributions are NOT tax-deductible. Because the contributions are made with after-tax dollars, qualified distributions are not income taxable. In order to contribute to an IRA, the individual must be working and must have earned income. Distributions (RMD) do not have to begin at age 72.

1171
Q

An Employee Stock Option Plan (ESOP):

A. Has no vesting schedule.
B. Allows an employee to purchase company stock in the future at a predetermined price.
C. Allows an employee to purchase company stock immediately.
D. May only be granted to employees.

A

B. Allows an employee to purchase company stock in the future at a predetermined price.

Employee Stock Option Plans allow an employee to purchase company stock at a future at a predetermined price. They are given to employees (usually executives and members of management) and nonemployees who are important to the company (e.g., suppliers and attorneys) as an incentive, making it possible for these individuals to share in the growth of the company.

1172
Q

Conventional and Roth IRAs are different in which of the following ways?

A. Minimum withdrawal age
B. Annual contribution limits
C. Catch-up provisions
D. Income eligibility limits

A

D. Income eligibility limits

Only the Roth has income eligibility limits. Anyone with earned income may contribute to a conventional IRA. However, the contribution may not be deductible, based on participation in an employer-sponsored retirement plan and the individual’s income level.

1173
Q

A 53-year-old individual who was laid off from his former company withdrew money from his traditional IRA despite immediately getting a new job with an increased salary. Which of the following is true?

A. The IRS will not tax him on the withdrawals because his employer terminated him from his job prior to age 59½.
B. The withdrawals will be taxed as ordinary income and subject to a 10% early withdrawal penalty.
C. All of the money he takes from his IRA will be tax-free because he was between jobs.
D. The withdrawals will be considered ordinary income and subject to a 15% penalty.

A

B. The withdrawals will be taxed as ordinary income and subject to a 10% early withdrawal penalty.

If withdrawals from an IRA are made prior to age 59½, the IRS will assess a 10% early withdrawal penalty, unless the withdrawals meet certain qualifications. The amount of the premature withdrawal from a traditional IRA is also taxed as ordinary income to the recipient when received.

1174
Q

Which of the following is true regarding a nonqualified deferred compensation plan?

A. Any funds are received tax-free by employees.
B. Employer may discriminate among employees.
C. Contributions are tax deductible.
D. It is a qualified plan and as such requires IRS approval.

A

B. Employer may discriminate among employees.

Deferred compensation plans are nonqualified (do not require IRS approval); contributions are not tax deductible; funds in the plan grow tax deferred, and any excess over the cost basis is taxed when received. Employers may discriminate among employees without regard to years of service, salary level, or any other criteria.

1175
Q

A couple established a Coverdell Education Savings Account for their son, who never attended college. The son will be turning 30 in a few months. What options do the parents have for the Coverdell they established for their son?

A. The parents can roll the money over to another qualified family member for his or her education without penalty.
B. The son can transfer the funds in the account to his children.
C. The parents will lose the money they invested for their son.
D. The parents must use the money in the account for their own educational interest.

A

A. The parents can roll the money over to another qualified family member for his or her education without penalty.

Coverdell Education Savings Accounts can be used for kindergarten through college. However, the money must be used before the individual turns 30. In this situation, the parents will need to transfer or roll over the Coverdell to another qualified family member (related by blood, marriage or adoption). There will be a 10% penalty if the parents withdraw the money and don’t use it for qualified education purposes.

1176
Q

Which of the following statements is NOT true concerning a nonqualified deferred compensation plan?

A. It does not require IRS approval.
B. It can be discretionary.
C. Any investments grow on a tax-free basis.
D. It is a contractual agreement in which an employee agrees to defer receipt of a portion of compensation until retirement.

A

C. Any investments grow on a tax-free basis.

Nonqualified deferred compensation plans may be discretionary and therefore do not require IRS approval. These plans are contractual agreements between employees and employers for the deferral of constructive receipt of a portion of their earnings.

1177
Q

When considering an investment for an ERISA account, the primary consideration is:

A. Inclusion on the state legal list.
B. Compatibility with the present portfolio.
C. Potential risk.
D. Production of income.

A

C. Potential risk.

ERISA regulations apply to retirement accounts, and conservation of principal is a primary account objective.

Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA)

1178
Q

Under SIMPLE plans, the employer must contribute matching contributions of up to:

A. 2% of employee annual salary.
B. 3% of employee annual salary.
C. 8% of employee annual salary.
D. 10% of employee annual salary.

A

B. 3% of employee annual salary.

Under SIMPLE plans, participating employees may defer up to a specified amount each year, and the employer must then contribute 3% of the annual compensation for those employees who participate. Alternately, the employer may contribute 2% for ALL employees regardless of their contribution. Contributions and earnings are both tax-deferred until funds are withdrawn.

1179
Q

A premature distribution from a Roth IRA made before the individual reaches age 59½ is subject to a 10% penalty tax unless the distribution was for:

A. Living expenses while the account holder is unemployed.
B. Legal fees arising from a divorce action.
C. A first-time home purchase.
D. Payments on an existing home to avoid a foreclosure action.

A

C. A first-time home purchase.

Premature distribution will result in penalties, unless made because of death or disability, purchase of a first home, or higher education for the individual, or the individual’s spouse, children, or grandchildren.

1180
Q

Which of the following statements is NOT correct concerning an IRA?

A. Married individuals can contribute into two separate accounts, up to a specified amount for each person.
B. Anyone with earned income can have an IRA.
C. An individual can contribute 100% of earned income up to a specified limit.
D. Married individuals must contribute into one account for both spouses, up to a specified amount for each person.

A

D. Married individuals must contribute into one account for both spouses, up to a specified amount for each person.

A married couple, under age 50, who file a joint tax return can contribute the maximum amount (currently $12,000) into two separate accounts, even if only one spouse had earned income. Each account contribution cannot exceed a specified amount for individuals (currently $6,000) in any 1 year.

1181
Q

An Internal Revenue Code provision that specifically provides for an individual retirement plan for public school teachers is a(n):

A. Keogh Plan.
B. IPG Plan.
C. 401(k) Plan.
D. 403(b) Plan (TSA).

A

D. 403(b) Plan (TSA).

Under a 403(b) Plan, tax-sheltered annuities (TSAs) are established for the employees of specified nonprofit charitable, educational, religious, and other 501(c)(3) organizations, including teachers in public school systems. Such plans generally are not available to other kinds of employees.

1182
Q

Which of the following annuity contract holders will incur a 10% penalty for an early lump-sum withdrawal from an IRA?

A. A contract holder who requires the funds for catastrophic medical expenses
B. A contract holder who is 55½ and has no hardship
C. A contract holder who is 45 years old and needs the money for a $5,000 down payment on a first home
D. A contract holder who is 50 years old and is totally disabled

A

B. A contract holder who is 55½ and has no hardship

Any nonqualified withdrawal made before the annuitant reaches age 59½ is termed a premature distribution and subject to a 10% penalty tax. The withdrawal amount is added to the individual’s ordinary income for that taxable year.

1183
Q

Which of the following is NOT true regarding a nonqualified retirement plan?

A. Excess over cost basis is taxed.
B. It can discriminate in offering its benefits and selecting participants.
C. Tax on accumulation is deferred.
D. It needs IRS approval.

A

D. It needs IRS approval.

Nonqualified retirement plans do not meet the IRS requirements for favorable tax treatment of deductions and contributions; therefore, they do not need IRS approval.

1184
Q

Which of the following is correct with regard to the withdrawal of funds from a tax-qualified retirement plan?

A. Funds may be withdrawn at retirement tax free.
B. All early withdrawals are subject to a penalty.
C. Contributions can be deducted from that year’s taxable income.
D. The employee will be taxed at the ordinary income rate on his cost basis.

A

C. Contributions can be deducted from that year’s taxable income.

Cost basis has already been taxed and will not be taxed again upon withdrawal. Premature withdrawals are taxed and penalized unless withdrawn for a qualified exemption. A traditional IRA is a top choice for immediate tax savings because contributions can be deducted from that year’s taxable income.

1185
Q

All of the following apply to defined benefit plans EXCEPT:

A. They are qualified plans and cannot discriminate.
B. Contributions are tied to the company profits.
C. Benefits are based on a specified formula that incorporates years of service, salary and age of retirement.
D. The employer is responsible for providing promised retirement benefits.

A

B. Contributions are tied to the company profits.

Defined benefit plans are not tied to the employing company’s profit; however, the employer is obligated to provide a certain, specified retirement benefit to an employee. The benefit is based upon a percent of salary multiplied by the number of years of service.

1186
Q

What is the primary purpose of a 401(k) plan?

A. To distribute life insurance benefits to beneficiaries
B. To accumulate retirement savings
C. To save money for college education
D. To assure that persons over age 72 are receiving sufficient minimum distributions from qualified plans

A

B. To accumulate retirement savings

A 401(k) is a qualified retirement plan that allows employees to take a reduction in their current salaries and earn tax-deferred growth on retirement savings.

1187
Q

An employer wants to begin a pension plan for its employees but does not want the obligation of annual contributions because of wide cash flow swings due to growth and plans for expansion. Which plan allows flexibility and still provides immediate vesting on contributions?

A. Defined contribution plan
B. Deferred compensation plan
C. Defined benefit plan
D. Simplified employee pension plan

A

D. Simplified employee pension plan

The simplified employee pension plan (SEP) allows flexibility of contributions and still provides immediate vesting.

1188
Q

Which statement best describes the typical candidate for a SIMPLE plan?

A. A small employer who wants the ability to offer an employee deferral plan without making employer contributions
B. The employer with fewer than 100 eligible employees who wishes to avoid employer participation yet allow individual employee deferrals with minimal administrative cost
C. The small employer who desires a flexible plan to reward key employees only
D. The employer with 100 or fewer eligible employees who desires an alternative to the 401(k) that includes employee deferrals, flexible employer matching features, and low administrative cost

A

D. The employer with 100 or fewer eligible employees who desires an alternative to the 401(k) that includes employee deferrals, flexible employer matching features, and low administrative cost

The SIMPLE is available to employers with 100 or fewer eligible employees and provides a low cost alternative to the 401(k) with some flexibility regarding the employer match. Since it is a qualified plan, discrimination is not permitted.

1189
Q

For an individual who is NOT covered by an employer-sponsored plan, IRA contributions are:

A. Partially tax-deductible depending on the income level.
B. Fully tax-deductible.
C. Deductible based on the income level.
D. Never tax-deductible.

A

B. Fully tax-deductible.

Individuals who are not covered by an employer-sponsored plan may deduct the full amount of their IRA contributions regardless of their income level.

1190
Q

Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) plans are available to which of the following types of individuals?

A. Self-employed individuals and their employees
B. Employees of a corporation, where a 401(k) is available
C. Employees covered by a union agreement
D. Employees of a nonprofit organization

A

A. Self-employed individuals and their employees

SEPs are IRA plans established for self-employed individuals. The employer must contribute the same percentages for each qualified employee under the SEP plan.

1191
Q

A man is 52 years old. He is terminating his employment at a state university. He is fully vested in a 457(b) plan. If he withdraws the money from his 457(b) plan,

A. He must pay capital gains tax and a 10% penalty.
B. He must pay income tax and a 10% penalty.
C. He must pay income tax.
D. He must roll it into another retirement plan.

A

C. He must pay income tax.

He must pay income tax. There is no 10% penalty on early withdrawal from a 457(b) plan.

1192
Q

IRA contributions:

A. Are restricted only to individuals not covered by a qualified employer plan.
B. Must be made in cash.
C. Can be made by any adult.
D. May be made with securities.

A

B. Must be made in cash.

IRA contributions are limited to cash. The cash can then be used to purchase securities in the account. Individuals covered by qualified employer plans may also make IRA contributions but may be limited to after-tax dollars. Only persons with earned income and nonworking spouses of persons with earned income may make IRA contributions.

1193
Q

When are “catch-up” contributions allowed in an IRA?

A. If the contributor does not participate in another qualified plan
B. When the contributor reaches the age of 50
C. When the contributor did not meet the minimum contribution limits the year before
D. Only with a joint IRA

A

B. When the contributor reaches the age of 50

Taxpayers who are age 50 or older are entitled to make additional “catch-up” contributions.

1194
Q

After what age could a Roth IRA distribution be classified as qualified?

A. 50
B. 59½
C. 70
D. 72

A

B. 59½

Roth IRA distributions made after the age of 59½ are considered qualified distributions. Other distributions can be labeled as qualified before the age of 59½ if they are made to the beneficiary at the owner’s death, if the owner is disabled, or if the distribution is for the first-time purchase of a home or for higher education. Qualified distributions are desirable because there is no 10% penalty imposed for early withdrawals.

1195
Q

An individual worked for his employer for 25 years before retiring. During his employment, all contributions to his qualified pension plan were made by the employer. Therefore, distributions from the plan to the employee will be regarded as

A. Ordinary income that will be taxed as ordinary income rates
B. Deferred compensation.
C. Capital gains subject to favorable taxation rates.
D. Part return of principal and part ordinary income.

A

A. Ordinary income that will be taxed as ordinary income rates

Since the employer made all contributions to the plan, the employee will report all payouts as ordinary income and will have no cost basis.

1196
Q

A SIMPLE (Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees) plan is available to small businesses that employ a maximum of how many employees?

A. 25
B. 50
C. 100
D. 500

A

C. 100

A SIMPLE (Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees) plan is available to small businesses that employ not more than 100 employees receiving a specified minimum in compensation from the employer during the previous year. In addition, to establish a SIMPLE plan, the employer must not have a qualified plan in place.

1197
Q

An employee quits her job where she has a balance of $10,000 in her employer-provided qualified plan. If she decides to move the balance to a traditional IRA through a direct transfer, how much will be transferred from one plan administrator to another, and what is the tax consequence?

A. $8,000, no tax consequence
B. $8,000, tax on growth only
C. $10,000, tax on growth only
D. $10,000, no tax consequence

A

D. $10,000, no tax consequence

During an IRA custodian-to-custodian transfer, the full amount is moved from one plan to the other, and there is no tax consequence.

1198
Q

A 403(b) plan is a qualified retirement plan available to:

A. Certain municipal government employees only.
B. Small corporations with 100 employees or less.
C. Employees of nonprofit, educational, and religious organizations.
D. Anyone with earned income.

A

C. Employees of nonprofit, educational, and religious organizations.

A 403(b) plan is a special tax-favored retirement plan available only to certain groups of employees (nonprofit charitable, educational, religious, and other 501(c)(3) organizations, including all employees in public education).

1199
Q

Which type of retirement account does not force distributions to start at age 72?

A. Standard IRA
B. Traditional IRA
C. Roth IRA
D. Flexible IRA

A

C. Roth IRA

A Roth IRA does not force distributions to start at age 72.

1200
Q

A Simplified Employee Pension Plan is:

A. A defined benefit plan for large businesses.
B. A defined contribution plan for a small business.
C. The same as a 401(k) plan.
D. The same as an IRA, with the same contribution limits.

A

B. A defined contribution plan for a small business.

A SEP is an employer-sponsored IRA with an expanded contribution rate up to 25% of compensation or a specified limit. SEPs are available to the self-employed and small employers.

1201
Q

If a plan participant takes a distribution from a qualified plan before 59½, the tax penalty is:

A. 6%.
B. 10%.
C. 15%.
D. 25%.

A

B. 10%.

The tax penalty for a premature distribution from a qualified plan is 10%, unless it falls into one of the categories for a penalty-free premature distribution. Income taxes on the distribution also apply.

1202
Q

Which of the following are characteristics of a SEP-IRA? I. A vesting schedule applies. II. A SEP-IRA is a qualified plan. III. Contributions are made by the employee. IV. The maximum allowable deductible contribution is greater than a personal IRA account.

A. II and III
B. II and IV
C. I and II
D. I and III

A

B. II and IV

II. A SEP-IRA is a qualified plan.
IV. The maximum allowable deductible contribution is greater than a personal IRA account.

A SEP-IRA is a Simplified Employee Plan for the self-employed and for small employers. A SEP-IRA is a qualified retirement plan in which all contributions are made by the employer and are tax deductible. The employee is immediately vested in the program. An additional benefit of a SEP-IRA is that the maximum allowable deductible contribution to the plan is greater than in a normal IRA.

1203
Q

A school teacher is retiring after 20 years of service. During the past 10 years, she invested $10,000 in a 403(b) through a payroll deduction offered by the school. Her account is now worth $16,000. What is her cost basis?

A. $0
B. $6,000
C. $10,000
D. $16,000

A

A. $0

The teacher has contributed to a qualified retirement plan; therefore, all the money she has invested is pre-tax. She has not paid taxes on any of the money yet, so her cost basis is $0, and she will be required to pay ordinary income taxes on the entire amount she withdraws.

1204
Q

John has been contributing to a retirement account on an after-tax basis. His registered representative told him that he does not have to pay taxes on the growth of his account. What type of retirement account does he have?

A. Simplified Employee Pension Plan
B. Traditional IRA
C. Roth IRA
D. 403(b) plan

A

C. Roth IRA

Roth IRAs have several distinguishing features. Unlike traditional IRAs, distributions do not have to begin at age 72. The contributions are not tax-deductible.

1205
Q

Which of the following best describes a transfer?

A. It is the movement of assets to an IRA without distribution to the account owner.
B. It is a movement of pension assets from the plan trustee to the employee.
C. It is a 401(k) distribution made payable to the plan participant.
D. It is a cash contribution to an IRA.

A

A. It is the movement of assets to an IRA without distribution to the account owner.

A transfer describes the movement of assets between IRA trustees or custodians without distribution to the account owner, resulting in no tax forms being generated by either trustee or custodian.

1206
Q

A 50-year-old individual needs $20,000 for his child’s education, and wishes to withdraw the necessary funds from his traditional IRA. Which of the following statements is true concerning taxation on the withdrawal?

A. The entire amount will be taxed as ordinary income.
B. The withdrawal will be subject to regular income tax and a 10% penalty tax.
C. Regular income tax on withdrawals in excess of his basis will apply, but no penalty tax.
D. A 10% penalty tax will be assessed for early distribution.

A

A. The entire amount will be taxed as ordinary income.

Withdrawals from a traditional IRA are subject to regular taxation. In addition, a 10% premature withdrawal penalty is assessed on anyone withdrawing the money under age 59½. However, the penalty will be waived if the distribution is due to the owner’s death or disability, for medical or education expenses and first-time home ownership. The withdrawal is still subject to taxes as ordinary income.

1207
Q

Which of the following CANNOT benefit from the catch-up contributions provision in IRAs?

A. An IRA owner age 50
B. A 401(k) participant who is 57 years old
C. A married person with a nonworking spouse who is 53 years of age
D. A 45-year-old man currently on disability

A

D. A 45-year-old man currently on disability

Taxpayers who are age 50 or older will be entitled to make additional “catch-up” contributions to their IRA or spousal IRA accounts. A 401(k) plan can also permit participants who are age 50 or older at the end of the calendar year to make catch-up contributions.

1208
Q

The 60-year-old owner of a traditional IRA passes away without ever having taken any distributions. The beneficiary is 40 years old. If the beneficiary cashes in the IRA, he is:

A. Required to roll over the proceeds to a qualified plan.
B. Subject to taxes and a 10% penalty.
C. Subject to taxes but not penalties.
D. Subject to penalties but not taxes.

A

C. Subject to taxes but not penalties.

At an IRA owner’s death, a beneficiary can choose to cash in the IRA. Taxes will be due, but the 10% penalty for early withdrawal will NOT apply.

1209
Q

A self-employed attorney has earned an income of $100,000 a year, and her husband earns $30,000 a year as her accountant. How much can she contribute to a spousal option IRA?

A. $3,000
B. $6,000
C. $12,000
D. $20,000

A

B. $6,000

If the couple is not covered by a pension plan, they can each contribute and deduct $6,000.

1210
Q

Which of the following is correct regarding a qualified profit-sharing plan?

A. The company is required to pay into the retirement plan regardless of their profit.
B. Employer contributions are required every year, but may vary in amount
C. The plan must be nondiscriminatory.
D. Benefits are not paid until the employee reaches age 67.

A

C. The plan must be nondiscriminatory.

In a profit-sharing plan, employers allow their employees to share in the profitability of the company. The company, however, does not need profits in order to make contributions to a profit-sharing plan. All qualified plans must be nondiscriminatory. Plan benefits are usually paid at age 65, or in some cases earlier, but not at age 67. The company is only required to contribute if the company made a profit that year.

1211
Q

Retirement account rollovers must be completed within:

A. 20 days.
B. 30 days.
C. 60 days.
D. 90 days.

A

C. 60 days.

Rollovers are subject to 20% withholding and must be completed within 60 days, or they are classified as permanent withdrawals, and income taxes apply. Only one rollover per year is permitted. There is no annual limit on custodian-to-custodian transfers.

1212
Q

A private corporation has been systematically laying off workers in an effort to reduce pension plan liabilities. The corporation is in violation of rules set by:

A. Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
B. Regulation T.
C. Prudent Man Rule.
D. ERISA.

A

D. ERISA.

ERISA sets the standards for private pension plans.

1213
Q

What is the consequence of contributing more than the specified maximum to a Roth IRA?

A. The investor will pay a tax penalty.
B. The contribution limit will be raised.
C. Distributions will be taxed as ordinary income rates.
D. The account growth will not be tax-deferred.

A

A. The investor will pay a tax penalty.

There is a specified maximum contribution that can be made to Roth IRAs, as with traditional IRAs. If a taxpayer contributes more than the maximum amount, a 6% tax penalty will be imposed.

1214
Q

Which of the following employees is eligible for a SEP? I. A 20-year-old employee; II. An employee with an annual salary above a specified limit; III. An employee who worked for the company for 3 of the last 5 years; IV. An employee who worked for the company last year.

A. III and IV
B. I and II
C. I and IV
D. II and III

A

D. II and III

II. An employee with an annual salary above a specified limit.
III. An employee who worked for the company for 3 of the last 5 years.

An employee is eligible for a SEP plan is he/she has reached age 21, has worked for the same employer in at least 3 of the last 5 years, and has received a specified minimum in compensation from the employer for the year.

1215
Q

An employee making $20,000 a year contributes to an IRA for 2 years. The employer then begins a qualified plan. With regard to IRA contributions, the employee:

A. Must withdraw IRA proceeds and pay a penalty.
B. Must transfer IRA proceeds to employer plan.
C. Must cease making deposits immediately. The proceeds can be left within the account and will accumulate tax-deferred.
D. May continue to make IRA contributions and deductions.

A

D. May continue to make IRA contributions and deductions.

The taxpayer can continue fully deductible IRA contributions while under a qualified plan as long as the payer’s income does not exceed certain thresholds.

1216
Q

In which qualified retirement plan may both the employer and employee contribute to an employee trust?

A. Profit-sharing
B. ESOP
C. 401(k)
D. Pension

A

C. 401(k)

In 401(k) plans, employee salary reduction contributions and employer matching contributions are contributed to the plan trust.

1217
Q

How are funds contributed to a 403(b) treated for taxation?

A. Taxed as current income to the employee, but distributions are tax free upon withdrawal
B. Not included as income for the employee, but are taxable as income upon distribution
C. Never taxed
D. Taxed as current income to the employee

A

B. Not included as income for the employee, but are taxable as income upon distribution

Funds contributed to tax-sheltered annuities are excluded from the employee’s current taxable income, but are taxable upon withdrawal.

1218
Q

A husband and wife want to make a contribution to their IRAs. The husband earns $35,000 a year. The wife is currently not working. What is the maximum they can currently contribute into their IRAs?

A. Up to $6,000 for the husband and $6,000 for the wife
B. $12,000, with any combination of contributions by the two of them
C. $6,000 only for Mr. Hardy
D. $11,000 into one account

A

A. Up to $6,000 for the husband and $6,000 for the wife

The maximum amount an individual can contribute annually to an IRA is up to 100% of earned income not to exceed $6,000. The same amount can be contributed for a nonworking spouse in a separate account, called a spousal IRA.

1219
Q

Required minimum distributions from a traditional IRA must begin at what age?

A. 55
B. 59½
C. 65
D. 72

A

D. 72

Upon reaching age 72, a traditional IRA owner must begin taking annual required minimum distributions (RMDs). They must be taken no later than April 1 of the year following the year in which the participant turns 72. Failure to take an RMD results in a 50% tax penalty levied on the amount of the required distribution that was not taken.

1220
Q

A 403(b) plan, commonly referred to as a TSA, is available to:

A. Postal employees.
B. Self-employed persons.
C. Teachers and employees of not-for-profit organizations.
D. Government workers.

A

C. Teachers and employees of not-for-profit organizations.

Tax-sheltered annuities, commonly referred to as 403(b) plans, are designed for teachers and employees of not-for-profit organizations, defined under code 501(c)(3).

1221
Q

Lump-sum distributions without penalty from qualified retirement plans may NOT be made to an individual for:

A. Person reaches age 59½.
B. Permanent retirement.
C. Permanent disability.
D. 30 years of service with the company.

A

D. 30 years of service with the company.

Lump-sum distributions cannot be made to a person for continuous service with a company, unless the person is also 59½ or older. Separation of service, death, retirement, disability, and attainment of age 59½ are the qualifying events eligible for lump sum distributions.

1222
Q

Which of them following employees must be included in his or her employer’s retirement plan under ERISA?

A. An employee who worked 400 hours last year and is on track to work at least that much this year.
B. A part-time employee who works 800 hours a year
C. A 19-year-old employee who has worked full-time for 1 year
D. An employee who is 21 years old and has worked for the company for the past 18 months

A

D. An employee who is 21 years old and has worked for the company for the past 18 months

Employees who are age 21 years or older and have worked at least 1 year and 1,000 hours must be included in the employer’s retirement plan according to ERISA

1223
Q

Distributions from traditional IRAs may begin at what age?

A. Any age if there are enough funds in the account
B. Age 59½
C. Age 60
D. Age 72

A

B. Age 59½

Normal distributions from a traditional IRA can occur at any point after the account holder reaches the age of 59½.

1224
Q

Under SIMPLE plans, employers must make a matching contribution of up to what percentage of the employee’s annual wages?

A. 3%
B. 5%
C. 7%
D. 10%

A

A. 3%

Under SIMPLE plans, participating employees may defer up to a specified amount each year, and the employer must then contribute up to 3% of the participating employees’ annual compensation as a matching contribution. Alternately, the employer may contribute 2% for ALL employees regardless of their participation. All contributions and earnings accumulate tax-deferred until funds are withdrawn.

1225
Q

Which of the following statements correctly summarizes that tax advantages of qualified retirement plans?

A. Employer contributions are tax deferred to the employee.
B. Employer contributions are taxed to the employee at the employee’s tax rate at time of withdrawal.
C. Employer contributions are tax deductible.
D. All of the above are correct.

A

D. All of the above are correct.

All of these statements correctly state tax advantages available through qualified retirement plans.

1226
Q

An employee quits her job where she has a balance of $10,000 in her employer-provided qualified plan. If she requests that the plan distribution is paid to her so that she can roll the proceeds into an IRA, how much will she receive from the plan administrator, and how long does she have to complete the tax-free rollover?

A. $8,000, 30 days
B. $8,000, 60 days
C. $10,000, 30 days
D. $10,000, 60 days

A

B. $8,000, 60 days

Because the employee has requested a distribution check, there will be a 20% withholding, and the participant has 60 days to reinvest it in an IRA to qualify as a tax-free rollover. The full amount of $10,000 must be reinvested, or the withheld amount of 20% will be considered a taxable distribution.

1227
Q

A public school teacher with a 403(b) plan resigned to take a new position in a different school district that also has a 403(b) plan. All of the following statements regarding her situation are correct EXCEPT:

A. 403(b) plans are portable and may be transferred into another employer’s 403(b) or another qualified plan upon termination.
B. Her 403(b) plan is not portable.
C. Her 403(b) plan may be transferred directly into her new employer’s 403(b) plan.
D. A direct transfer into her new employer’s plan is not taxable.

A

B. Her 403(b) plan is not portable.

403(b) plans are portable; they may be transferred to a new employer’s 403(b) plan or, upon termination of employment, into a qualified plan.

1228
Q

Which of the following statements is true about tax-qualified annuities?

A. They can discriminate.
B. Withdrawals are not taxed.
C. They must meet IRS requirements.
D. Employee contributions are not tax deductible.

A

C. They must meet IRS requirements.

In qualified annuities, IRS approval is required; contributions are tax deductible; accumulations are tax-deferred and withdrawals are taxed. Qualified annuities cannot discriminate among policyowners.

1229
Q

An investor established a Coverdell account in the name of the investor’s oldest child. Later, the child decides not to use the funds for education. What option is available to the investor?

A. Lose the funds invested into that account since the account falls under the “use or lose” provision of the IRS Code.
B. Cash in that child’s Coverdell account tax-free on the child’s 21st birthday.
C. Roll that child’s Coverdell account tax-free into an account for the investor’s next child for education purposes.
D. Rollover that child’s Coverdell account into a traditional IRA account for the child’s retirement.

A

C. Roll that child’s Coverdell account tax-free into an account for the investor’s next child for education purposes.

Generally, the responsible individual is permitted to change the beneficiary to another member of the family (related by blood, marriage or adoption) without triggering income tax and penalty provided the new beneficiary is under the age of 30. Once transferred, those funds must be used for qualified expenses for that person’s benefit.

1230
Q

A person transferring an IRA to another trustee via a trustee to trustee transfer:

A. Will not be subject to any penalties or taxation.
B. May only do so twice per year.
C. Will pay a penalty unless the person is at least 59½.
D. Will receive a check that must be rolled over to another qualified plan within 60 days to avoid taxation.

A

A. Will not be subject to any penalties or taxation.

There is no penalty or taxation for the transfer of an IRA from one trustee to another. Also, there is no limit on the number of trustee-to-trustee transfers that may be done in any time period. If the distribution was made payable to the IRA owner (a rollover), then 20% withholding and the 60-day reinvestment rule applies. Rollovers are limited to one time per year.

1231
Q

A 35-year-old employee and first-time home buyer wishes to withdraw $10,000 from her IRA account for the purchase. This provision is available in:

A. Roth IRAs only.
B. Traditional and Roth IRAs.
C. No IRA: buying a home is not a qualifying event.
D. Traditional IRAs only.

A

B. Traditional and Roth IRAs.

This hardship provision is available to owners of both traditional and Roth IRA accounts, without penalty.

1232
Q

ERISA qualified pension plan fund managers’ fiduciary responsibilities regarding plan investments are determined by:

A. SEC.
B. “Prudent Man” rules in the state where the fund operates.
C. The Investment Company Act of 1940.
D. FINRA.

A

B. “Prudent Man” rules in the state where the fund operates.

When investing pension fund money, pension fund managers must follow the Prudent Man rules in the state where they operate.

1233
Q

ERISA qualified pension plan administrators are required to do all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Allow plan participants to name beneficiaries.
B. File an annual report with the Department of Labor.
C. File quarterly reports with FINRA.
D. Communicate the plan’s financial information to plan participants.

A

C. File quarterly reports with FINRA.

ERISA requires qualified pension plan administrators to communicate plan financial information to plan participants, allow participants to name beneficiaries and file an annual report with the Department of Labor.

1234
Q

Which of the following is a primary difference between IRAs and SEPs?

A. More money can be contributed to a SEP.
B. Only $3,000 maximum per year can be contributed to a SEP.
C. The individual does not have an individual account in a SEP.
D. More money can be contributed to an IRA.

A

A. More money can be contributed to a SEP.

The primary difference between a SEP (Simplified Employee Pension) plan and an IRA is the much larger amount that can be contributed each year to a SEP plan (25% of the employee’s compensation up to a specified limit). Additionally, in a SEP, the contributions are made by the employer on behalf of the employee.

1235
Q

After the beneficiary of a Coverdell reaches 30 years of age, within how many days must the funds be withdrawn?

A. Immediately
B. 10 days
C. 20 days
D. 30 days

A

D. 30 days

The funds must be withdrawn from a Coverdell account within 30 days after the beneficiary attains the age of 30. Alternatively, the account could be transferred to another qualified family member. If the funds are not withdrawn, the capital gains on the account become taxable and subject to a 10% penalty.

1236
Q

The capital asset pricing model is used to determine:

A. Total capital asset value based on alpha, beta, and an appropriate internal rate of return.
B. The value of fixed assets using ACRS methods.
C. A security’s value, considering its beta and a risk-free rate of return.
D. A security’s value, using LIFO, FIFO, weighted average or specific identification.

A

C. A security’s value, considering its beta and a risk-free rate of return.

The CAPM considers the security’s beta, the time value of money, and a theoretical risk-free rate of return.

1237
Q

Jennifer is selling securities at a loss. She will NOT be allowed to claim the loss if she:

A. Repurchases the same securities within 30 days.
B. Bought an option contract to sell the securities within 30 days before the sale.
C. Bought an option contract to sell the securities within 30 days after the sale.
D. All of the above would disallow claiming of the loss.

A

A. Repurchases the same securities within 30 days.

Wash sale rules apply for replacing the sold security within 30 days of the sale. This would include substantially similar investments such as call options for the same security.

1238
Q

An indication of investor sentiment is found in which of the following?

A. Increase in stock prices
B. Increase in trading volume
C. Decrease in short interest
D. Increase in interest rates

A

A. Increase in stock prices

Investor sentiment can be bullish or bearish. An increase in stock prices is bullish. An increase in interest rates and a decrease in short interest (investors will not be buying to cover short positions) are bearish. An increase in trading volume is neutral without more information.

1239
Q

A technical analyst interprets a reverse head and shoulders formation to be:

A. Reduction in investor interest
B. Increase in investor interest.
C. Reversal of a downward trend.
D. Reversal of an upward trend.

A

C. Reversal of a downward trend.

A reverse head and shoulders formation is believed to be the reversal of a downward trend.

1240
Q

Mrs. Johnson bought 200 shares of Intec at 18 in March. When she passed away in June, the market price of Intec was 21. What is the taxation to her daughter, who inherited the shares?

A. Her cost basis is 21 and the holding period is short-term.
B. Her cost basis is 18 and the holding period is long-term.
C. Her cost basis is 18 and the holding period is short-term.
D. Her cost basis is 21 and the holding period is long-term.

A

D. Her cost basis is 21 and the holding period is long-term.

The cost basis on inherited securities is the market value at the time of death and the holding period is always long-term, no matter how long the securities were actually owned.

1241
Q

All of the following would be included in the 12 leading indicators published by the Commerce Department EXCEPT:

A. Consumer Price Index.
B. New machine tool orders.
C. Building permits.
D. Housing starts.

A

A. Consumer Price Index.

The Consumer Price Index is a monthly coincident indicator of inflation, not a leading indicator.

1242
Q

The capital asset pricing model considers all of the following factors EXCEPT:

A. Consumer Price Index.
B. Beta.
C. Risk-free rate of return.
D. Time value of money.

A

A. Consumer Price Index.

The CAPM considers the security’s beta, the time value of money, and the risk-free rate of return on a theoretical investment.

1243
Q

An investor bought 100 shares of XYZ stock at $55 in January of 20XX. Today, with the stock trading at $75, the investor donated it to a charitable institution. What are the tax consequences of this gift?

A. A $5,500 deduction is allowed.
B. A $7,500 deduction is allowed.
C. The investor must pay a gift tax.
D. No deduction is allowed.

A

B. A $7,500 deduction is allowed.

The value of a charitable gift that is deductible by the donor is the appreciated value of the securities.

1244
Q

What economic theory advocates stimulating economic growth through government intervention?

A. Supply side
B. Fiscal policy
C. Foreign exchange policy
D. Keynesian Theory

A

D. Keynesian Theory

Keynesian Theory is the economic theory that advocates stimulating economic growth through government intervention.

1245
Q

A technical analyst states that the market is “consolidating.” This means that the market trend line is moving:

A. Downward, with sporadic upswings.
B. Upward.
C. Downward.
D. Sideways.

A

D. Sideways.

Consolidating markets move sideways, with many trades all in a narrow price range, not up (bullish) or down (bearish).

1246
Q

Which of the following is NOT true of Section 1035 Policy Exchanges?

A. It is typically used when exchanging or replacing a less competitive life policy with a more competitive life policy.
B. Any exchange made under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code must be completed within 30 days.
C. It requires an absolute assignment of the existing policy to the replacing company who surrenders the contract and issues a replacement policy.
D. It is an IRS Code that permits like kind exchanges of property.

A

B. Any exchange made under Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code must be completed within 30 days.

Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code does not give a specific time limit to complete such an exchange.

1247
Q

Which of the following is a coincident indicator?

A. Industrial production
B. Machine tool orders
C. Business inventories
D. Orders for durable goods

A

A. Industrial production

GDP (industrial production) is a coincident indicator. Inventories are a lagging indicator, while orders for durable goods and machines are leading indicators.

1248
Q

A customer has purchased $15,000 worth of XYZ Corporation over a period of time. Which of the following is true about his subsequent sale of $5,000 of XYZ stock?

A. The investor is allowed to specify which shares are being sold to minimize his capital gain.
B. His capital gain is $5,000.
C. The IRS requires that LIFO be used to identify the shares sold in order to maximize the customer’s tax liability.
D. The IRS requires that FIFO be used to identify the shares sold in order to maximize the customer’s tax liability.

A

A. The investor is allowed to specify which shares are being sold to minimize his capital gain.

The investor can specify the security identification method of particular shares sold, or, in the absence of choice, the IRS will use FIFO. Therefore, security the identification method is most common.

1249
Q

Which of the following are considered to be technical indicators? I. 200-day moving average; II. Put/call ratio III; Short interest; IV. Confidence index

A. I and II
B. I, II, and III
C. III and IV
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

B. I, II, and III

I. 200-day moving average
II. Put/call ratio
III. Short interest

All are technical indicators, EXCEPT the confidence index.

1250
Q

If an investor cannot specifically identify redeemed shares, IRS assumes that reporting will be on the basis of:

A. Last-In, First-Out.
B. First-In, First-Out.
C. Determined on a case by case basis.
D. Average cost.

A

B. First-In, First-Out.

IRS assumes the First-In, First-Out accounting method when shares cannot be specifically identified.

1251
Q

A technical analyst believes that a head and shoulders formation indicates:

A. Reversal of an upward trend.
B. Continuation of an upward trend.
C. An opportune time to buy calls.
D. A maximum P/E value.

A

A. Reversal of an upward trend.

A technician is a “tic hopper” or “trend grabber”, and neither bull nor bear. “Head and shoulders” means that every upward move is meeting greater resistance, not downside pressure. A good technician would sell calls, not buy puts.

1252
Q

XYZ Corporation’s income statement renders the following information: Income from operations: $2,000,000 Preferred Dividends from other corporations: 100,000 XYZ Corporation has taxable income of:

A. $2,000,000
B. $2,050,000
C. $2,070,000
D. $2,100,000

A

B. $2,050,000

Remember the 50% dividend exclusion that a corporation has on dividends received from stock that it owns in other corporations. Therefore, 50% of the $100,000 preferred dividend is excluded from income. The firm will only pay tax on the remaining $50,000 (in addition to their operating income of $2,000,000, of course).

1253
Q

Under the “wash sale” rule, a loss on the sale of a security is deferred if, within a period beginning 30 days before the sale and ending 30 days after the sale, a customer effects which of the following transactions which remain unexercised involving that security?

A. Buys a put
B. Sells a put
C. Buys a call
D. Sells a call

A

B. Sells a put

Sell a put, and if unexercised, collect premium for a gain while attempting to deduct a capital loss.

1254
Q

If the Federal Reserve Board increases the discount rate, all of the following will increase, EXCEPT:

A. The call loan rate.
B. The federal funds rate.
C. The amount of loans made available by banks.
D. The discount rate on Treasury bills.

A

C. The amount of loans made available by banks.

If rates increase, banks tighten credit, and the amount of loans decreases.

1255
Q

All of the following are leading indicators EXCEPT:

A. Unemployment claims.
B. Index of industrial production.
C. Machine tool orders
D. Housing starts.

A

B. Index of industrial production.

The index of industrial production is coincident. Leading indicators include housing starts, as measured by building permits and new private housing units, average weekly initial claims for unemployment insurance, and machine tool orders as measured by manufacturers’ new orders.

1256
Q

Disintermediation is:

A. Large scale movement from the short to the long end of the yield curve.
B. Large scale investor movement from debt to equities
C. An investor purchasing a primary offering directly from the issuer rather than the syndicate.
D. Terminating an investment advisory contract between the issuer and the underwriter during the offering period.

A

A. Large scale movement from the short to the long end of the yield curve.

Disintermediation occurs when investors leave the uncertainty of short term rates and lock in long term rates when the yield curve is inverted.

1257
Q

Beta of 1 indicates coincidence with:

A. Market risk.
B. Market index volatility.
C. Systematic risk.
D. Unsystematic risk.

A

B. Market index volatility.

Beta of “1” indicates coincidence with the volatility of a particular index.

1258
Q

George sold 100 shares of Karkraft for $20, which was a $5 per share loss. Fifteen days later, he purchased 100 shares of Karkraft at $22. What is his cost basis per share for the new purchase?

A. $17
B. $20
C. $22
D. $27

A

D. $27

Since George did not wait at least 31 days to repurchase the same shares that he sold, wash sale rules apply and the loss is not recognized. He must add the loss into the new shares, making his cost basis $27. If he would have waited 31 days before purchasing the new shares, he could have recognized the loss and the new cost basis would have been $22.

1259
Q

Which of the following is considered a coincident economic indicator?

A. Index of industrial production
B. Housing starts
C. The yield curve
D. Capital goods expenditures

A

A. Index of industrial production

The Index of Industrial Production (GDP) is a coincident indicator. The rest are leading indicators.

1260
Q

Which of the following industries is LEAST defensive?

A. Utilities
B. Clothing
C. Automobile repair
D. Automobile production

A

D. Automobile production

Auto production is a big-ticket consumer item, and is cyclical, not defensive. In other words, it follows the economic cycle.

1261
Q

When interest rates are fluctuating,

A. Long- and short-term rates move in concert.
B. There is no relationship between the movement of long- and short-term rates.
C. Long-term rates move more sharply.
D. Short-term rates move more sharply.

A

D. Short-term rates move more sharply.

Short-term interest rates are more volatile; they move more sharply (quickly). However, long-term bond prices change more.

1262
Q

A technical analyst comparing the number of advances and declines in the market is concerned with which aspect of technical market theory?

A. Breadth of the market
B. Leadership
C. Confidence
D. Volume of the market

A

A. Breadth of the market

The advance/decline ratio is used to determine the overall movement of the market. For example, although the Dow Jones Industrial Average may go up by 50 points today, if we found that advancing issues were outnumbered by declining issues by a 2-to-1 ratio, that tells us that the market is overall not bullish. In fact, in this example, the market would be considered to be bearish.

1263
Q

A customer purchased 200 shares of XYZ 2 years ago at $40. The current market price is $50. If the customer gifts these shares to his daughter today, which statements describe the tax consequences?

A. The daughter will not have a tax liability if she sells the shares at the current market price.
B. The customer will not have a tax liability if she sells the shares instead of gifting them.
C. The cost basis to the daughter is $50 a share.
D. The daughter will have a tax liability if she sells the shares at the current market price.

A

D. The daughter will have a tax liability if she sells the shares at the current market price.

The recipient (daughter) has the tax liability if she sells any shares following the gift, and the basis is the donor’s original cost basis or $40 a share, unless the current market price of the shares at the time of the gift are less than the donor’s original cost basis.

1264
Q

Which of the following are true of the interbank market? I. Major users are banks and large multi-national corporations. II. The foreign currencies are usually traded in blocks of $1,000,000 to $5,000,000. III. Systematic reporting of last sale information is available. IV. Spot transactions are for longer time periods than forward transactions.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

I. Major users are banks and large multi-national corporations.
II. The foreign currencies are usually traded in blocks of $1,000,000 to $5,000,000.

The major participants in the interbank market are central banks and large multi-national corporations. Although they are negotiable, foreign currencies are usually traded in blocks of $1-$5 million. There is no systematic reporting system for last sale information. Spot transactions are 1 or 2 days; forward transactions are for a time period longer than 2 days, generally, 1, 2, 6, 9, 12, or 18 months.

1265
Q

How much of a $10,000 loss in securities can be written off against non-passive income?

A. $0
B. $2,500
C. $3,000
D. $7,500

A

C. $3,000

Securities losses are normally capital and can be deducted up to $3,000.

1266
Q

Aglet International has a pre-tax income of $2,000,000. In addition, it received dividends of $100,000 from its stock portfolio. If the corporation’s tax rate is 34%, what is its total tax liability?

A. $680,000
B. $697,000
C. $707,200
D. $714,000

A

B. $697,000

The corporate dividend exclusion is 50%. Therefore, $50,000 of the $100,000 dividends can be excluded from reported income. Such a dividend exclusion applies to common and preferred dividends received by one U.S. corporation from another. For tax purposes, pre-tax income of $2,000,000 plus the $50,000 taxable dividend total $2,050,000 multiplied by the tax bracket 34% ($2,050,000 x 34% = $697,000).

1267
Q

Which of the following is the narrowest measure of the market?

A. Value Line Index
B. Dow Jones Industrial Average
C. Standard and Poor’s 100 Index
D. NYSE Composite Index

A

B. Dow Jones Industrial Average

The Dow Jones Industrial Average consists of only 30 equities. Value-line has about 1,650 and the NYSE about 2,500.

1268
Q

$140,000 capital gain; $150,000 capital loss. What can be deducted from normal income?

A. $2,000
B. $3,000
C. $5,000
D. $10,000

A

B. $3,000

The rule is that no more than $3,000 net capital loss can be deducted in any 1 year by a taxpayer.

1269
Q

A rising put/call ratio:

A. Indicates greater option activity.
B. Indicates more derivative creation.
C. Is bullish.
D. Is bearish.

A

D. Is bearish.

A growing number of puts compared to calls indicates bearish investor sentiment.

1270
Q

In order to avoid the wash sale rule, the investor when selling a security should not:

A. Purchase a put option on the security within 30 days prior to and after the sale.
B. Purchase a call option on the security within 30 days prior to and after the sale.
C. Purchase a put option on the security within 30 days of the sale.
D. Sell a call option on the security within 30 days of the sale.

A

B. Purchase a call option on the security within 30 days prior to and after the sale.

Purchasing a call represents the purchase of a substantially identical security, especially when exercised. (Long calls when exercised are long the stock.)

1271
Q

Which of the following industries is most cyclical?

A. Home appliances
B. Retail
C. Tobacco
D. Natural gas

A

A. Home appliances

Home appliances are big-ticket consumer items, and their purchases and sales rise and fall with the economic cycle.

1272
Q

Yield curve analysis is useful to an investor purchasing debt securities for which of the following reasons? I. Allows the comparison of rates of return as maturities are extended; II. Allows the yield on a particular debt security to be compared to the yield of similar securities on either a current or historical basis; III. Is useful in determining the market expectations for interest rates; IV. Predicts future of long-term interest rates

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

I. Allows the comparison of rates of return as maturities are extended
III. Is useful in determining the market expectations for interest rates

Yield curves are used to compare yields at different maturities and to examine market rate expectations (normal - stable to low rates; inverted - high or rising rates). They are not used to compare, judge market demand, or predict interest rates.

1273
Q

An investor experiences a $1,000 loss in the sale of a stock but repurchases the position within 30 days, although in a different tax year. Which of the following is true?

A. The loss deduction is allowable in full.
B. No loss deduction is permitted.
C. 33% of the loss deduction is allowable each year (to be taken over 3 years).
D. The loss deduction is allowable, but only to the extent of offsetting capital gains.

A

B. No loss deduction is permitted.

No loss deduction is permitted under these circumstances.

1274
Q

Technical analysis is used for which of the following for an investor?

A. Timing
B. Earnings per share
C. Stock selection
D. Price-earnings ratio

A

A. Timing

Price and time are technically determined. Security, ratios, and EPS are fundamental.

1275
Q

Another term for “market risk” is:

A. Systematic risk.
B. Purchasing power risk.
C. Credit risk.
D. Interest rate risk.

A

A. Systematic risk.

Market risk is systematic, not company-specific, inflation (purchasing power), default (credit), or rate risk.

1276
Q

All of the following statements regard 1035 exchange rules are true EXCEPT:

A. A life insurance policy can be exchanged for an annuity.
B. A whole life insurance policy can be exchanged for a term insurance policy.
C. A whole life insurance policy can be exchanged for a Universal life insurance policy.
D. On a trustee-to-trustee exchange where the policyowner exchanges a life insurance policy for another life insurance policy on the same life, there will be no income tax on the transaction.

A

B. A whole life insurance policy can be exchanged for a term insurance policy.

Only cash value life to cash value life policy, endowment contract or annuity, endowment to endowment or annuity, or annuity to annuity are allowed. Using life insurance or annuity surrender values to purchase term insurance does not qualify under Section 1035 as a nontaxable event.

1277
Q

An investor wishes to sell stock for a loss and repurchase the same security within 30 days of the sale. Which of the following is true regarding this transaction?

A. The loss would be allowed for all purposes.
B. Under no circumstances can it be done.
C. The loss would not be allowed, unless the stock was held long term on the date of sale.
D. The IRS will disallow the loss for tax purposes.

A

D. The IRS will disallow the loss for tax purposes.

The sale for a loss, with a repurchase within 30 days of a substantially identical security, is a wash sale, and no deduction of loss is allowed.

1278
Q

An announcement in the newspaper states that the MI money supply has declined. This means that:

A. Demand deposits, NOW accounts, and money in circulation have decreased.
B. Money has been moving from savings accounts into checking accounts.
C. The U. S. Treasury has been removing damaged currency from circulation at a faster rate than it is replaced.
D. Both demand deposits and time deposits have been decreasing.

A

A. Demand deposits, NOW accounts, and money in circulation have decreased.

Demand deposits, NOW accounts and money in circulation are the definition of M1.

1279
Q

A customer bought 100 shares of XYZ at 48. Within 31 days she sold her shares at 41. She then, within 30 days, wrote an XYZ May 40 put. How can she avoid deferral of her tax loss?

A. Exercise the put.
B. Allow the put to expire.
C. Repurchase the put.
D. Nothing. The loss will be deferred.

A

D. Nothing. The loss will be deferred.

By writing a put within 30 days of a sale for a loss, she committed a wash violation, since writing a put with its duty to buy is repurchase of the substantially identical security.

1280
Q

Which of the following is a wash sale?

A. Selling a put or buying a call within 30 days of sale of stock
B. Buying a put within 30 days of sale of stock
C. Selling a call within 30 days of sale of stock
D. Buying a put or a call within 30 days of sale of stock

A

A. Selling a put or buying a call within 30 days of sale of stock

A wash sale involving a sale for a capital loss ends a capital loss deduction if the customer buys a call or sells a put on the same stock, because both are substantially identical long market positions.

1281
Q

The federal funds rate has been increasing consistently over the last several months. This would indicate which of the following?

A. The prime rate will decrease.
B. The Federal Reserve Board will increase reserve requirements.
C. Banks are having trouble meeting reserve requirements.
D. Money market interest rates will decrease.

A

C. Banks are having trouble meeting reserve requirements.

Federal Reserve member banks charge each other the Fed funds rate for overnight loans to meet their reserve requirement. If this rate is rising, it indicates greater loan demand among Fed member banks to satisfy the reserve requirement.

1282
Q

A customer has the objective of maximizing current income. Under which conditions would you recommend that the customer sell long-term debt positions and buy short-term obligations?

A. The yield curve is positive.
B. The yield curve is normal.
C. The yield curve is inverted.
D. The yield curve is bell-shaped.

A

C. The yield curve is inverted.

An inverted yield curve means that short-term rates are high and long-term rates are lower. So to maximize current income, the investor will buy short-term debt and sell long-term bonds.

1283
Q

The difference between a stock’s actual return and its beta is:

A. Beta.
B. Theta.
C. Alpha.
D. Mean deviation.

A

C. Alpha.

Alpha is the difference between a stock’s beta and its actual return.

1284
Q

All of the following are components of the leading economic indicators as published by the Department of Commerce EXCEPT:

A. Claims for unemployment.
B. Index of industrial production.
C. S&P 500.
D. New equipment orders.

A

B. Index of industrial production.

Coincident indicators are current indices (that show the current phase of the cycle), and the more current the index, the more coincident. The Index of Industrial Production is a coincident indicator, not leading.

1285
Q

Which of the following is a lagging indicator?

A. The S&P 500 index
B. Industrial production
C. Average prime rate
D. Housing starts

A

C. Average prime rate

Lagging indicators include average duration of unemployment, labor costs, commercial and industrial loans, and average prime rate. Industrial production is a coincident indicator, and housing starts and S&P 500 are leading indicators.

1286
Q

An investor wants to give her daughter all of the shares in her growth mutual fund. Since the initial purchase, the value of the shares has increased steadily over the life of the investment. When the shares are gifted, the cost basis of the daughter’s shares will be:

A. The difference between the initial purchase price for the shares and the current NAV of the shares.
B. The initial NAV price the investor paid for the shares originally.
C. The NAV of the shares on the day they are “gifted” to her.
D. The same cost basis that the investor had for the shares.

A

D. The same cost basis that the investor had for the shares.

When a security is received as a gift, the cost basis depends on the relationship of the market value of the securities to the donor’s cost basis. If the market value is higher than the donor’s basis, the recipient’s cost basis is equal to the donor’s. If the market value is lower than the donor’s cost basis, the recipient’s basis is equal to the market value of the securities at the time of the gift.

1287
Q

What part of the Internal Revenue Code allows an owner of a life insurance policy or annuity to exchange or replace their current contract with another contract without creating adverse tax consequences?

A. 401(k) Plan
B. Section 457 Deferred Compensation Plan
C. Section 1035 Policy Exchange
D. Modified Endowment Exchange

A

C. Section 1035 Policy Exchange

IRC Section 1035 allows for a tax-free exchange between certain insurance policies and/or annuities.

1288
Q

An investor purchases a stock for $38 a share, sells it for $35 a share, then re-acquires the same stock two weeks later at $44 a share. What is the basis?

A. $42
B. $38
C. $44
D. $47

A

D. $47

This is a question regarding the Wash Sale Rule. Since the investor sold the stock at a $3 a share loss but then re-acquired the same stock two weeks later, the loss is not usable on the customer’s tax return. However, the $3 loss is reflected on the basis of the new stock by adding the $3 a share loss to the price of $44 a share; the basis is $47 a share. If the stock were sold later at, say, $52 a share, the investor would show a $5 a share capital gain.

1289
Q

The dollar is strengthening against the pound sterling. Which are the probable causes?

A. Increasing imports/decreasing exports
B. Lowering interest rates/rising prices
C. Rising interest rates/lowering prices
D. Increasing exports/decreasing imports

A

C. Rising interest rates/lowering prices

Rising interest rates support the dollar and cause the prices of bonds and stocks to decline. Import/export levels are a consequence of the relative strength of the two currencies.

1290
Q

A customer purchased 100 shares of a listed stock for $10 a share on August 4, 2016. On April 22, 2017, he sold the stock for $25 a share. If the customer is in the 33% income-tax bracket, what is the amount of tax liability on this transaction?

A. $168
B. $240
C. $420
D. $495

A

D. $495

$2,500 proceeds - $1,000 cost = $1,500 short-term gain. This is a short-term gain since the long-term holding period is more than 12 months for securities purchased after 12/31/87. 33% x $1,500 = $495 tax.

1291
Q

Which of the following is/are characteristics of the interbank system? I. Centralized II. Not regulated III. Responds to national economic policies

A. I only
B. II only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, and III

A

B. II only

II. Not regulated

The interbank market is not regulated; therefore, it is not centralized. However, the Federal Reserve Board does act as a central bank.

1292
Q

An investor learns that he inherited a mutual fund that had a NAV of $50 per share on the date of the owner’s death. Thirty days after the death of the owner, the NAV is $55. It is now 2 months since the owner died and the NAV is $60. The owner’s cost basis was $20. What is the cost basis for the beneficiary?

A. $20
B. $50
C. $55
D. $60

A

B. $50

When a security is inherited, the beneficiary’s cost basis is the fair market value (in this case, the NAV) of the security on the day of the deceased’s death. This is called a “stepped up” basis.

1293
Q

All of the following are considered lagging indicators EXCEPT:

A. Employment.
B. Housing permits.
C. Automobile sales.
D. Appliance sales.

A

B. Housing permits.

Housing permits are leading indicators because they are the first in a series of events. After housing permits are issued, materials are purchased, construction begins, etc. When houses are sold, the buyers typically purchase durable goods such as major appliances. Appliance, employment, and automobile sales are lagging because they measure past activity.

1294
Q

If the Federal Reserve Board through the FOMC (Federal Open Market Committee) lowers the discount rate, which of the following will decline? I. T-Bill discount rate; II. Federal Funds rate; III. Prime rate; IV. Lending levels at banks

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and II

The T-Bill and the Fed Funds rates will decline. The prime rate may not, and lending levels increase when rates are lower.

1295
Q

The broker call rate is based on:

A. Rate governing bond call provisions.
B. Broker/dealer investment in Treasury Securities.
C. Rate banks charge broker/dealers for loans secured by securities.
D. Debit balances in customer margin accounts.

A

C. Rate banks charge broker/dealers for loans secured by securities.

The broker call rate is based on the rate banks charge broker/dealers for customer debit balance funding. The rate broker/dealers charge customers is the purpose loan rate.

1296
Q

Estate tax applies to:

A. Assets in excess of a specified amount at the time of the owner’s death.
B. Assets that are transferred before the owner dies.
C. Assets that a person owns and uses during their lifetime.
D. All assets at the time of death of the owner.

A

A. Assets in excess of a specified amount at the time of the owner’s death.

Estate tax is based on the amount of assets that a person owns at the time of their death. Assets in excess of a specified amount set by the IRS and subject to change are taxed.

1297
Q

Which of the following is considered to be a lagging indicator of economic trends?

A. Consumer expectations for economic conditions
B. Personal income
C. New housing permits
D. Unemployment

A

D. Unemployment

Lagging indicators include average duration of unemployment, labor costs, commercial and industrial loans, and average prime rate. Housing starts (new housing permits) and consumer expectations for business and economic conditions are leading indicators. Personal income is a coincident indicator.

1298
Q

All the following are leading indicators EXCEPT:

A. Machine tool orders.
B. Housing starts.
C. The S&P 500 stock prices.
D. Personal income.

A

D. Personal income.

Leading indicators predict future economic activity in a business cycle. Coincident indicators show the current phase of the cycle. Personal income is considered a coincident indicator.

1299
Q

Which best describes the Federal Funds Rate?

A. Daily average of largest central banks
B. Daily average of reserve member banks
C. Weekly average of reserve banks
D. Weekly average of yield auctions of member banks

A

B. Daily average of reserve member banks

The Federal Funds Rate is overnight (daily) borrowings by Fed reserve member banks.

1300
Q

Your client has the following results for the current year: Capital gains: $20,000; Capital losses: $30,000 What is the tax status for the client?

A. $3,000 capital loss for the current year and then $3,000 can be claimed as capital loss for the next tax year.
B. $10,000 loss is applied against the income of the client on 1040 form.
C. $3,000 capital loss for current year and the remaining $7,000 capital loss is claimed the following year.
D. $5,000 capital loss reported for the current year and $5,000 capital losses for the following year can be reported.

A

A. $3,000 capital loss for the current year and then $3,000 can be claimed as capital loss for the next tax year.

Capital losses can be netted against capital gains to reduce taxes on capital gains. Excess capital losses can be deducted in any given tax year up to a maximum of $3,000 per year. However, if total losses exceed gains by more than $3,000, the remaining losses can be deducted in future years.

1301
Q

A policyowner cancels his life policy but instructs the insurance company to transfer the cash value of his policy to an annuity. This nontaxable transaction is called:

A. Qualified distribution.
B. Premature distribution.
C. Rollover.
D. 1035 exchange.

A

D. 1035 exchange.

In accordance with Section 1035 of the Internal Revenue Code, certain exchanges of life insurance policies and annuities may occur as nontaxable exchanges.

1302
Q

A market volatility indicator that measures the price volatility of a fund in relation to the overall market is called:

A. The Beta.
B. The Alpha.
C. The Sharpe ratio.
D. The standard deviation.

A

A. The Beta.

The Beta measures the reaction of a particular fund in relation to the movements of the market. The higher the beta on a fund, the more there is potential for volatility. A Beta of 2 means twice the volatility in comparison to a Beta of 1.

1303
Q

To calculate taxes due on mutual fund shares being sold using the average cost basis for the shares, what must the investor account for?

A. The taxes paid on dividend and capital gain reinvestments made for additional shares.
B. Any cash dividends paid out to the investor during the holding period.
C. All dividend and capital gains paid out to the investor in cash after the shares were purchased.
D. Only the capital gains received in cash during the holding period.

A

A. The taxes paid on dividend and capital gain reinvestments made for additional shares.

To be calculated correctly, investors must also take into account all taxes previously paid on shares that have been purchased through dividend or capital gains reinvestment programs.

1304
Q

David sold 100 shares of Office Max at a loss. Twenty days later, he reinvested the proceeds from the sale into shares of Office Depot. The wash sale rules:

A. Apply only if he received more from the sale of Office Max than he reinvested into Office Depot.
B. Do not apply at all.
C. Apply to these transactions.
D. Apply only if he paid more to purchase Office Depot than he received from Office Max.

A

B. Do not apply at all.

The wash sale rules do not apply because the investor did not purchase substantially the same property. These are different companies even though they are in the same industry.

1305
Q

Your client owns a utility income fund and reinvests the monthly dividend and income distributions back into the fund. If he redeems some of the shares at a loss, which statement is CORRECT?

A. Contingent deferred sales charges are waived when shares are redeemed at a loss.
B. He cannot redeem shares while participating in dividend reinvestment.
C. The redemption will fall under IRS wash sale rules.
D. He must renew the dividend reinvestment program after redeeming the shares.

A

C. The redemption will fall under IRS wash sale rules.

If an investor buys substantially identical shares within 30 days after selling them at a loss, IRS wash sales rules will apply and the loss will disallowed on the amount of shares repurchased.

1306
Q

Nathan realized a $4,500 long-term capital loss on his investment. What is the maximum deduction he can take against his ordinary income?

A. $1,500
B. $3,000
C. $4,500
D. Unlimited

A

B. $3,000

The maximum annual capital loss deduction is $3,000. The remainder may be carried over to the next year.

1307
Q

An analyst noticing that the market in general has been declining in ever-increasing volume would call this a:

A. Sell off.
B. Climax.
C. Support level.
D. Breakout.

A

A. Sell off.

By definition, the “support level” is the established historical price level, below which a particular stock is considered to be undervalued; therefore, buying pressure could be expected. The “resistance level” is the price level at which a stock is considered to be overvalued and selling pressure would be expected. A “breakout” occurs when a stock moves beyond either the support or resistance levels. A climax is when a peak occurs in the market or a security. Large and increasing volumes of sales create a sell off.

1308
Q

Stimulating the economy through spending policies is known as:

A. Monetarism.
B. Keynesianism.
C. Supply side.
D. Open market.

A

B. Keynesianism.

Both taxes and spending are Keynesianism, embracing the idea that the government should actively intervene in the economy to produce desired outcomes.

1309
Q

A stock’s trading range is 86-92. Which of the following statements are correct if the stock has been declining below 90? I. Breakout at 93; II. Breakout at 85; III. Support is 86; IV. Resistance is 91.

A. I, II, III, and IV
B. I, II, and III
C. I and III only
D. II and III only

A

B. I, II, and III

I. Breakout at 93
II. Breakout at 85
III. Support is 86

Support is at 86, the low end of the trading range, breakout is at 85 given decline below the support level of 86, and breakout is also at 93 given increase above the resistance level of 92.

1310
Q

Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is:

A. The broadest measure of all products manufactured in the U.S., computed in actual dollars.
B. A representative sample of selected goods and services produced in the U.S., computed in real dollars.
C. The sum of all goods and services produced in the U.S., computed in real dollars.
D. The value of all net exports from the U.S., computed in real dollars.

A

C. The sum of all goods and services produced in the U.S., computed in real dollars.

GDP is the sum of all goods and services of the U.S. in real dollars.

1311
Q

On Nov 10, there was an opening sale of 100 shares of XYZ at 25. On Dec 9 the shares were purchased at 30. On Jan 3, the shares were sold again for 30. What is the result?

A. $500 loss is deferred
B. Taxable gain of $500
C. Taxable loss of $500
D. $500 gain is deferred short against the box

A

A. $500 loss is deferred

This is a short wash sale, an opening short, purchase for a loss, and another short sale. Therefore, the loss cannot be deducted.

1312
Q

If the Federal Reserve Board switched from a tight money policy to an easy money policy, which of the following bonds would increase the most in price?

A. Short-term bonds
B. Intermediate term bonds
C. Long-term bonds
D. None of these. Easy money would cause the price to decline.

A

C. Long-term bonds

Switching to easy money means that money supply increases, pushing interest rates down and bond prices up. The rule of thumb here is that the bonds with the longest term to maturity (in this case, the long-term bonds) will change the most in price as measured in dollars.

1313
Q

Which of the following would increase U. S. exports? I. Strengthening dollar; II. Weakening dollar; III. Balance of payment deficits; IV. Balance of payment credits

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

II. Weakening dollar
III. Balance of payment deficits

If the dollar is weak (lower-priced than the foreign currency) and the balance of payments are in deficit, then exports should suffer less restraint.

1314
Q

A couple wants to gift the maximum possible to their two children this year without incurring gift tax. What is the total amount they may gift in 1 year?

A. $15,000
B. $30,000
C. $45,000
D. $60,000

A

D. $60,000

The husband and wife can each gift $15,000 per recipient. As a couple, they can gift: $30,000 x 2 children = $60,000.

1315
Q

The yield curves for high-grade and low grade bonds are both positive and are moving further apart. An investment in which of the following would be most consistent with the economic expectations reflected in this relationship?

A. Government bonds
B. Premium bonds
C. Discount bonds
D. Corporate bonds

A

A. Government bonds

Rates are rising, a recession is threatening, and an investor flight to quality is happening.

1316
Q

The theory that reducing taxes and limiting government involvement in business activities stimulates economic growth is called:

A. Monetarism.
B. Supply side.
C. Cost-pull, demand-push.
D. Keynesianism.

A

B. Supply side.

“Supply side” economics is defined by this question. It is considered the opposite of the Keynesian theory.

1317
Q

The Federal Reserve Board is purchasing securities through open market operations. What are the likely effects of these transactions?

A. Bond prices and yields remaining stable
B. Bond prices increasing, yields decreasing
C. Bond prices decreasing, yields increasing
D. Bond prices increasing, yields increasing

A

B. Bond prices increasing, yields decreasing

When the Fed purchases securities, it injects money into the money supply, which expands it. This loosens credit, lowers interest rates and yields, and raises prices.

1318
Q

Open market operations of the Federal Reserve Board cause direct changes in:

A. Interest rates.
B. Velocity of money.
C. Dollar exchange rates.
D. M1.

A

D. M1.

M1 is part of the money supply that the Fed regulates through buying or selling governments and government agencies.

1319
Q

All of the following are examples of defensive industries EXCEPT:

A. Tobacco.
B. Clothing.
C. Building materials.
D. Food retail.

A

C. Building materials.

Building materials are “big ticket” items related to construction and housing, which are very cyclical. Defensive industries include consumable goods, such as food, alcohol, tobacco, drugs, cosmetics, and clothing.

1320
Q

A customer purchased 100 shares of XYZ stock at $30 per share. Two years later, the customer donated the shares to charity. At the time of the donation, XYZ had a market value of $50 per share. What are the tax consequences for the customer?

A. The donor will have a $5,000 income tax deduction.
B. The recipient’s cost basis is $3,000.
C. The donor must pay capital gains tax on the appreciation.
D. The donor will have a $3,000 income tax deduction.

A

A. The donor will have a $5,000 income tax deduction.

Subject to certain restrictions, charitable donations of stock are tax deductible at their market value at the time of the donation, in this case, $5,000. The donor is not subject to capital gains tax on the appreciation. The recipient’s cost basis is $5,000.

1321
Q

In June, a beneficiary inherited stock from his grandmother. She paid $35 per share in April; fair market value at the time her death was $38 per share. The beneficiary has:

A. A short-term gain of $3.
B. A long-term gain of $35.
C. A cost basis of $35.
D. A cost basis of $38.

A

D. A cost basis of $38.

The heir received the shares at a stepped-up cost basis of fair market value at the time of the grandmother’s death. Inherited shares are always long-term, regardless of the deceased’s holding period.

1322
Q

A technician or chartist would regard which of the following as the basis for a market trend?

A. Advance/decline line
B. Federal trade deficit report
C. DJIA
D. Earnings per share

A

A. Advance/decline line

The advance/decline line is the best of these measures. The Dow Jones Industrial Average is too narrow.

1323
Q

If interest rates are falling, which statement is TRUE?

A. Both bonds will appreciate equally.
B. There is no relationship exists between appreciation rates of discount and premium bonds.
C. Discount bonds will appreciate faster than premium bonds.
D. Premium bonds will appreciate faster than discount bonds.

A

D. Premium bonds will appreciate faster than discount bonds.

Premium bonds appreciate faster if rates are falling. High coupon bonds appreciate the most as new rates and existing yields fall. Low coupons depreciate the most if new rates and existing yields rise.

1324
Q

Which of the following best describes a flat yield curve?

A. Short and long maturities show approximately the same yield.
B. Yields tend to increase as the quality of securities increase.
C. Short maturities show a lower yield than long maturities.
D. Short maturities show a higher yield than long maturities.

A

A. Short and long maturities show approximately the same yield.

An inverted yield curve indicates short-term rates above long-term rates. A normal curve shows short-term below long-term rates. A flat curve indicates that long and short-term yields are equal.

1325
Q

If a foreign country’s currency is weakening against the U. S. dollar, what would the foreign country do to support its currency? I. Buy U.S. dollars; II. Buy the foreign currency; III. Sell the foreign currency; IV. Sell U.S. dollars

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

C. II and IV

II. Buy the foreign currency
IV. Sell U.S. dollars

To support the foreign currency, the strategy would be to buy the foreign currency and sell U. S. dollars.

1326
Q

Which of the following would qualify as a Section 1035 exchange?

A. Fixed Annuity to a Cash Value Life Insurance Policy
B. Variable Annuity to a Cash Value Life Insurance Policy
C. Fixed Annuity to a Term Life Insurance Policy.
D. Cash Value Life Insurance Policy to a Cash Value Life Insurance Policy

A

D. Cash Value Life Insurance Policy to a Cash Value Life Insurance Policy

Section 1035 allows for the following exchanges: Life to Life, Life to Annuity, Annuity to Annuity, NOT Annuity to Life or a Cash Value Life Insurance Policy to a Term Life Insurance Policy.

1327
Q

Which index is the broadest measure of the market?

A. NYSE Composite
B. Standard and Poor’s 500
C. Wilshire
D. Value Line

A

C. Wilshire

Wilshire has 7,000 stocks, Value-line has 1,700, and the NYSE composite has approximately 3,000.

1328
Q

If the yield curve is inverted, I. Short-term yields are less than long-term yields. II. Short-term yields are higher than long-term yields. III. Investors are lengthening maturities in their portfolios. IV. Investors are shortening maturities in their portfolios.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

In an inverted curve, short-term rates are temporarily higher than long-term rates. Because of the inverted curve’s uncertainty, investors move from short-term to long-term yields.

?????

1329
Q

What method of calculating the cost basis of mutual fund shares sold requires accurately recording each share transaction and accounting for individual shares sold?

A. Share Identification method
B. Average Share Cost Basis method
C. Individual Share Cost Basis method
D. First-In, First-Out (FIFO) method

A

A. Share Identification method

Under this method, the investor keeps track of the cost of each share purchased and identifies the specific shares to be liquidated (i.e., the shares purchased on a given date at a given cost).

1330
Q

Shares of a growth fund are exchanged for shares of a value fund with the same principal underwriter. The exchange is performed within 24 months of the original purchase, resulting in a gain. Which is true? I. Long-term; II. Short-term; III. Capital gain; IV. No gain, no loss.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

B. I and III

I. Long-term
III. Capital gain

One year and one day (or longer) is long term. Gain on the sale is taxed.

1331
Q

How much of a security-related loss can be deducted against non-passive income in an instance in which the investor had a $5,000 loss?

A. $0
B. $2,500
C. $3,000
D. $5,000

A

C. $3,000

A capital loss (securities-related) can mean as much as $3,000 deducted against non-passive income.

1332
Q

The excess return of an investment relative to its benchmark is called:

A. The Alpha.
B. The Beta.
C. The Sharpe ratio.
D. The standard deviation.

A

A. The Alpha.

Alpha is the difference between the beta and the actual return obtained from an investment. The point of reference for the alpha is the beta; therefore, a negative alpha indicates underperformance while a positive one represents a better than expected return.

1333
Q

All of the following statements about FINRA’s continuing education requirement are correct EXCEPT:

A. Registered persons have 120 days from the second anniversary of their initial registration to complete the Regulatory Element.
B. Member firms administer the Regulatory Element.
C. Member firms administer the Firm Element.
D. The Firm Element should be based on a written training plan.

A

B. Member firms administer the Regulatory Element.

The Regulatory Element is administered by FINRA, not the member.

If the registered person fails to complete the Regulatory Element in the 120 days, the registered person will have their registration deemed inactive until the requirement has been met. After the second anniversary and the completion of the Regulatory Element, the clock is set to within 120 days of their anniversary date every 3 years.

The Firm Element requires that members develop a formal written training plan on at least an annual basis.

1334
Q

A registered representative located in a branch of a commercial bank is opening an account for a new customer. All of the following are required disclosures EXCEPT:

A. The securities are not FDIC insured.
B. The securities are covered under SIPC.
C. The securities are not an obligation of the bank.
D. The securities have investment risk.

A

B. The securities are covered under SIPC.

Although B is a true statement, “securities are covered under SIPC,” it is not a required disclosure for a registered representative located in a bank.

“The securities are not FDIC insured”
is a correct disclosure that is required because FDIC covers bank assets, not investments made under the broker/dealer.

“The securities are not an obligation of the bank” is also a correct statement and a required disclosure. It is important not to confuse a customer of the bank who is also a customer of the broker/dealer. Customers may assume that they are making the same type of investment, but they are not. The securities of the broker/dealer have investment risks, while deposits at a commercial bank do not.

1335
Q

An investment banking representative is out for dinner with a potential client. The research analyst shows up at the restaurant. Are they allowed to join the investment banking rep and the potential client for dinner?

A. Yes, as long as no business is being discussed.
B. No, because they were not invited.
C. Yes, because it is only a potential investment banking client.
D. No, any communications between the investment banking rep and the analyst must be in the presence of legal and/or compliance.

A

D. No, any communications between the investment banking rep and the analyst must be in the presence of legal and/or compliance.

The analyst may talk to the client to provide information and/or answer questions as long as the investment banking representative is not present.

1336
Q

According to FINRA rules, which of the following falls under the definition of an independently prepared reprint?

A. An excerpt from a monthly market letter prepared by the broker/dealer and previously approved by FINRA
B. A copy of a newspaper display ad listing the broker/dealer’s services
C. A copy of an investment company ranking prepared by the research department of the broker/dealer
D. A copy of a magazine article on retirement planning issued by a publisher that is not affiliated with the member

A

D. A copy of a magazine article on retirement planning issued by a publisher that is not affiliated with the member

Independently prepared reprint means any reprint of an article or its excerpt issued by a publisher not affiliated with the member using the reprint.

1337
Q

Customer dispute: A broker/dealer pays a customer $20,000 for a representative’s mistake. What would happen if the representative is fined $20,000?

A. At minimum, the SRO would open an investigation on the $20,000 error.
B. The representative would be suspended for 90 days.
C. Nothing. The customer did not call for arbitration.
D. Nothing. The customer was satisfied before anything happened.

A

A. At minimum, the SRO would open an investigation on the $20,000 error.

The broker/dealer would report the settlement of the $20,000 dispute, and the appropriate SRO would investigate.

1338
Q

The Federal Act that established to regulate investment advisory activities and define requirements for registration is called:

A. The Investment Advisers Act of 1940.
B. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
C. The Investor Protection Act of 1970.
D. The Securities Act of 1933.

A

A. The Investment Advisers Act of 1940.

The Investment Advisers Act of 1940 was established to regulate investment advisory activities and define requirements for registration of such individuals.

1339
Q

What is the timeframe for filing relevant Suspicious Activity Reports?

A. Within 90 days of the suspicious transaction
B. Within 30 days of initial discovery
C. Within 30 days of the suspicious transaction
D. Within 90 days of initial discovery

A

B. Within 30 days of initial discovery

Relevant SAR reports must be filed with FinCEN within 30 days of initial discovery of a suspicious transaction.

1340
Q

When a municipal securities broker/dealer disciplines an associated person, this incident must be reported to the appropriate SRO:

A. If the fine exceeds $2,500.
B. If the associated person is terminated.
C. Only upon SRO spot check request.
D. Always.

A

A. If the fine exceeds $2,500.

MSRB rules require that all disciplinary events resulting in a fine exceeding $2,500 be reported to the SRO, which will initiate an investigation.

1341
Q

The Department of Enforcement or the National Adjudicatory Council has the authority to impose which penalties on a FINRA member? I. Censure; II. Fine; III. Suspension of FINRA registration; IV. Revocation of FINRA registration.

A. III and IV only
B. I, II, III, and IV
C. I and II only
D. I, II, and III only

A

B. I, II, III, and IV

I. Censure
II. Fine
III. Suspension of FINRA registration
IV. Revocation of FINRA registration

Both the Department of Enforcement and the National Adjudicatory Council have the authorization to impose any and all of these penalties upon a FINRA member.

1342
Q

If the SEC orders a person’s registration suspension or revocation, that person I. May only remain associated with the member in a clerical or administrative capacity. II. May not receive any salary, credits or commissions that might accrue during a suspension period. III. May not remain associated with the member in any capacity. IV. May be paid monies that were earned prior to the disciplinary action.

A. III only
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II, III and IV

A

D. II, III and IV

II. May not receive any salary, credits or commissions that might accrue during a suspension period.
III. May not remain associated with the member in any capacity.
IV. May be paid monies that were earned prior to the disciplinary action.

The person may not be associated with the member in any capacity and may not be paid any earnings that might accrue after the disassociation. However, monies earned prior to the disciplinary event may be paid.

1343
Q

When a registered representative fails to fulfill his responsibilities under an arbitration agreement, the FINRA’s arbitration committee can:

A. Refer to the Department of Enforcement.
B. Fine.
C. Suspend.
D. Imprison.

A

A. Refer to the Department of Enforcement.

Arbitration is only for civil actions. The Department of Enforcement handles punishment and disciplinary actions.

1344
Q

The following statements are true of Anti-Money Laundering Compliance Programs EXCEPT:

A. Anti-money laundering programs are designed to monitor the member’s compliance with the requirement of the Regulation S-P: Privacy of Consumer Financial Information.
B. Broker/dealers are required to file Suspicious Activity Reports that identify and describe suspicious transactions.
C. Member organization’s anti-money laundering programs must be approved in writing by a member of senior management.
D. Financial entities are required to consult government-provided lists of known/suspected terrorists as part of account opening process.

A

A. Anti-money laundering programs are designed to monitor the member’s compliance with the requirement of the Regulation S-P: Privacy of Consumer Financial Information.

Anti-money laundering programs are designed to achieve and monitor the member’s compliance with the requirements of the Bank Secrecy Act.

1345
Q

According to SRO rules, a registered representative can do all the following EXCEPT I. Guarantee against market loss. II. Share in profit and losses with a customer. III. Issue a put. IV. Guarantee repurchase of a bond.

A. I and II
B. I, II, and IV
C. II and IV
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

B. I, II, and IV

A registered representative can sell (issue) a put. The rest are not allowed.

1346
Q

Which needs the approval of a supervisory analyst?

A. Sales literature
B. Seminar
C. Market letter
D. Research report

A

D. Research report

Only the research report by NYSE rules requires a supervisory analyst’s review. The rest do not involve analysis skills; they require presentation efforts.

1347
Q

According to MSRB rules, which of the following is used to determine investor suitability? I. Investment objectives; II. Age of customer; III. Address; IV. Tax status

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

B. I and IV

I. Investment objectives
IV. Tax status

Address is not needed for suitability. Age is needed only to ensure that the customer is not a minor or too old for 30-year bonds.

1348
Q

Which of the following violates the MSRB’s gift and gratuities rule? I. Consuming a $125 bottle of wine with the employee of another broker/dealer. II. Giving a $125 bottle of wine to the employee of another broker/dealer. III. Inviting the employee of another broker/dealer to share a $5000 skybox at a football game. IV. Giving the employee of another broker/dealer season tickets to the opera.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

C. II and IV

II. Giving a $125 bottle of wine to the employee of another broker/dealer.
IV. Giving the employee of another broker/dealer season tickets to the opera.

The $100 limit applies to gifts and gratuities only. Mutual consumption is not subject to a dollar limit.

1349
Q

A registered representative and his brokerage firm are having a dispute they cannot settle. The dispute must be settled by:

A. Arbitration.
B. The SEC.
C. FINRA.
D. The Board of Governors.

A

A. Arbitration.

The parties must settle the dispute through arbitration.

1350
Q

Which of the following describes the practice of front-running?

A. Purchasing securities after receiving nonpublic material information
B. Borrowing securities from clients
C. Copying the trades of clients in a personal account
D. A securities professional executing a trade in his own account prior to the client’s to achieve a more profitable trade

A

D. A securities professional executing a trade in his own account prior to the client’s to achieve a more profitable trade

Front-running clients’ account is a practice where a securities professional executes personal trades prior to the client’s trade to achieve a more profitable trade for a personal account.

1351
Q

A client has discussed his interest in XYX Corporation common stock with his registered representative. The registered representative has a completed discretionary trade document on file for the client’s account. The registered representative overhears a colleague speaking with a client who is interested in buying a large block of XYZ stock. The registered representative immediately places an order for the stock before the colleague places his order. Are there consequences to the trade?

A. Yes; the registered representative is guilty of front running and unethical behavior and will be subject to disciplinary action by FINRA.
B. No; the registered representative was given discretionary authority in the account and does not need approval from the client to proceed with the trade.
C. No; the registered representative has discretionary authority and until settlement to notify the client.
D. Yes, the registered representative violated the discretionary authority by not informing the client of the intention to place an order and it is considered a Minor Rule Violation.

A

A. Yes; the registered representative is guilty of front running and unethical behavior and will be subject to disciplinary action by FINRA.

While the registered representative’s intentions were in the interest of the client, the registered representative ran a trade in front of a large block of stock that the registered representative knew would push the price of the stock higher. This is referred to as front running, a clear ethics violation. The fact that the registered representative had discretionary authority in the account has no bearing on the situation. If the trade had been done without knowledge of the soon-to-be posted large block order, then the RR would be compliant and the trade could go through.

1352
Q

Which of the following statements is INCORRECT in regard to brokers and dealers?

A. A dealer makes a profit by charging a commission on the security transaction.
B. An agent is a broker and sells securities for a customer.
C. Securities firms may act in the capacity of both a principal and an agent and are referred to as broker/dealers.
D. A principal is a dealer and sells securities from its own inventory.

A

A. A dealer makes a profit by charging a commission on the security transaction.

Dealers do not profit by charging a commission; they make their profit by marking up the security over the market price.

1353
Q

Which of the following sanctions may be imposed upon a representative under the Code of Procedure?

A. Censure and fine only
B. Censure, fine, expel, suspend or bar only
C. Censure, fine, expel, suspend, bar and arrest
D. Censure, fine and expel only

A

B. Censure, fine, expel, suspend or bar only

FINRA can impose all of these sanctions; however, it does not have arrest authority. Matters reaching a criminal level are referred to the SEC, who does have arrest authority.

1354
Q

All the following are appropriate options that a broker/dealer can offer customers to allow them to opt out of Reg S-P Privacy Rules easily EXCEPT:

A. A written letter.
B. A toll-free phone number.
C. A prepaid postcard addressed to the broker/dealer.
D. A link in e-mail.

A

A. A written letter.

It is too cumbersome to ask a customer to write a letter requesting to opt out of allowing the broker/dealer to send their personal nonpublic information to nonaffiliated third parties. The other choices are appropriate.

1355
Q

Participation in seminars, radio or television interviews would be best described as:

A. Public appearances.
B. Sales presentation.
C. Correspondence.
D. Institutional communications.

A

A. Public appearances.

Public appearances refer to participation in seminars, radio or television interviews, or other public speaking activities and are included in the definition of retail communications.

1356
Q

The FINRA statute of limitations for arbitration claims is:

A. 7 years.
B. 1 year.
C. 3 years.
D. 6 years.

A

D. 6 years.

The statute of limitations is six years from the date of occurrence.

1357
Q

Who obtains the CUSIP for a municipal bond issue?

A. The transfer agent
B. The purchasing customer
C. The issuer
D. The underwriter

A

D. The underwriter

Obtaining the CUSIP is the responsibility of the underwriter.

The CUSIP number is a unique identification number assigned to all stocks and registered bonds in the United States and Canada, and it is used to create a concrete distinction between securities that are traded on public markets.

1358
Q

FINRA may impose which of the following sanctions on a member or an associated person for a violation of securities laws and regulations: I. Fine, censure, suspension of membership or barring from association with a member firm; II. Up to 10 years in prison; III. Expulsion from membership or revocation of registration; IV. Up to 3 years in prison and/or fine of up to $10,000.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and III

I. Fine, censure, suspension of membership or barring from association with a member firm.
III. Expulsion from membership or revocation of registration.

In addition to fines, censure, membership suspension or revocation, FINRA may impose any other sanction “deemed appropriate.”

1359
Q

All of the following require employer permission to open an account at a NYSE member firm, EXCEPT I. A cash account by the clerical employee of another member. II. A margin account by a trader whose spouse works for the member. III. A margin account by an officer of a bank. IV. A cash account by an officer of a bank.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

D. III and IV

Neither the cash nor the margin accounts of a bank officer require permission.

1360
Q

All retail communications containing a mutual fund ranking must disclose all of the following EXCEPT:

A. The number of funds in the investment category.
B. The 10 largest investment holdings in the fund.
C. The length of the ranking period.
D. The ranking criteria.

A

B. The 10 largest investment holdings in the fund.

FINRA does not require retail communications containing a mutual fund ranking to disclose the fund’s 10 largest holdings.

1361
Q

If an individual is found in violation of SEC rules for bribing a foreign official, The Act of 1934 specifies a maximum penalty of:

A. $100,000, imprisonment for 5 years, or both.
B. $500,000.
C. $1,000,000, imprisonment for 10 years, or both.
D. $2,000,000.

A

A. $100,000, imprisonment for 5 years, or both.

The maximum penalty for bribing a foreign official is a $100,000 fine, imprisonment for 5 years, or both.

1362
Q

Regarding penny stocks, which of these is true about the suitability statement? I. It must be furnished to the customer before any transactions are done in the account. II. The customer must fully complete the form with all financial information and then return it to the broker/dealer. III. The broker/dealer must indicate why the customer is suitable to buy “designated securities.”

A. I only
B. I and II only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, and III

A

D. I, II, and III

I. It must be furnished to the customer before any transactions are done in the account.
II. The customer must fully complete the form with all financial information and then return it to the broker/dealer.
III. The broker/dealer must indicate why the customer is suitable to buy “designated securities.”

Regarding penny stocks and their suitability requirements, a formal Suitability Statement must be furnished to the customer before any transactions are made. The customer must then complete the form and mail it back to the firm, and the broker/dealer must indicate why it concluded that the customer is suitable to buy these securities.

1363
Q

Of the following examples, which would be EXEMPT from liability under insider trading laws?

A. Printers of financial periodicals
B. Clerical employees of corporations
C. There are no exceptions.
D. Accountants for publicly traded companies

A

C. There are no exceptions.

There are no exemptions under the insider trading laws for the misuse of nonpublic information.

1364
Q

The MSRB’s anti-money laundering rules require that a municipal broker/dealer’s procedures contain I. An employee training program. II. A designated independent party to test the procedures. III. Perpetrator forfeiture rules. IV. SRO reporting procedures.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

In addition, the procedures must contain features to detect suspicious activity and money laundering activity as well as customer identification procedures.

1365
Q

Which of the following is an acceptable gift for a member of another firm according to FINRA Rules?

A. All of the above are acceptable
B. Super Bowl tickets worth $450
C. A cash gift of $100
D. A gold pen set valued at $150

A

C. A cash gift of $100

Only gifts valued at $100 or less are acceptable. The $100 in cash is the only allowable gift according to FINRA Rules.

1366
Q

A registered representative of a NYSE firm has written a research report and wishes to mail it to a customer. The rep can:

A. Do so if the report agrees with the firm’s current recommendations.
B. Not do so without the approval of a firm officer.
C. Not do so without the approval of a supervisory analyst.
D. Not do so.

A

C. Not do so without the approval of a supervisory analyst.

The supervisory analyst is the principal responsible for all of the firm’s research reports, and approval before made available to the public. R/R is a common reference to Registered Representative or Agent.

1367
Q

A municipal securities dealer buys $500,000 of 6% revenue bonds at par. The dealer immediately re-offers the bonds. Under MSRB rules, which two of the following would be considered bona fide quotes under the circumstances described? I. 4.10 net; II. 5.8, less 1/2; III. 101; IV. 108

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

II. 5.8, less 1/2
III. 101

If the dealer bought 6% bonds at par, he would re-offer at a slight premium. 5.80 basis is only 20 basis points premium (20 basis points below 6%), and the price would be 101, the smallest premium price.

1368
Q

The Investment Company Act of 1940 requires that most investment companies register with:

A. NASD.
B. The NYSE.
C. The SEC.
D. FINRA.

A

C. The SEC.

The Act requires investment companies, unless exempt, to register with the SEC.

1369
Q

According to the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, a trust indenture is required:

A. On government bonds.
B. On municipal bonds.
C. On municipal and corporate bonds.
D. On corporate bonds.

A

D. On corporate bonds.

The Trust Indenture Act of 1939 requires a trust indenture on corporate bonds over $5 million. This is commonly used but not required on municipal revenue bonds.

1370
Q

Which of the following would meet the MSRB’s definition of a customer? I. A bank trust officer purchasing for a trust account; II. A bank dealing in municipal bonds; III. An investment adviser handling accounts for his clients; IV. An issuer buying a security in the secondary market

A. I, II, III and IV
B. I and II only
C. I, III and IV only
D. III and IV only

A

C. I, III and IV only

I. A bank trust officer purchasing for a trust account
III. An investment adviser handling accounts for his clients
IV. An issuer buying a security in the secondary market

A customer is any entity not engaged in the sale of securities in a professional capacity. Answer choice II is a municipal securities dealer; therefore, it is a sales professional.

1371
Q

Arbitration proceedings against a registered representative can be initiated by:

A. A customer.
B. An employer.
C. A FINRA member.
D. All of the above.

A

D. All of the above.

The FINRA Code of Arbitration states that any of the mentioned entities may initiate arbitration against a registered representative.

1372
Q

When a registered representative decides to place a mutual fund advertisement, which of the following is a requirement?

A. It requires SEC approval in writing.
B. Written approval from a registered principal of the firm.
C. The advertisement must be kept on file for 1 year.
D. The initial advertisement must be filed with FINRA 1 month prior to use.

A

B. Written approval from a registered principal of the firm.

When a registered representative decides to place a mutual fund advertisement, he must first get written approval from a registered principal of his firm. If the member firm has not previously filed the retail communication, it must file the initial one with FINRA at least 10 business days prior to use. These materials must be kept on file for 3 years.

1373
Q

If a CPA also provides investment advice to his clients for a fee, the CPA is considered a/an:

A. Broker.
B. Custodian.
C. Investment adviser.
D. Fiduciary.

A

C. Investment adviser.

A person who receives compensation for investment advice is classified as an investment adviser. However, if providing advice is incidental to an accountant’s business and he does not charge a fee for the advice, the accountant would not be required to register as an investment advisor.

1374
Q

Under NYSE rules, the final approval to open a new account is given by the:

A. Financial principal.
B. Account executive.
C. Operations manager.
D. Partner or principal.

A

D. Partner or principal.

NYSE rules ascribe account approval to the partner and principal. FINRA rules ascribe account approval to the Branch Manager and order ticket approval to the principal.

1375
Q

A registered representative qualified to sell only municipal securities may solicit orders for which of the following? I. Sewer and water revenue bonds; II. General obligation bonds; III. Municipal unit investment trusts; IV. Open end municipal bond funds

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

A limited representative for municipal bonds is not authorized to sell investment companies without a Series 6 or 7 registration.

1376
Q

A registered representative would be required to notify a FINRA member firm for engaging in all of the following activities EXCEPT:

A. Starting a consulting practice.
B. Entering triathlons.
C. Umpiring little league baseball games.
D. Selling real estate.

A

B. Entering triathlons.

FINRA member firms are to be notified of any outside business activities. Triathlons are done as hobbies and not for monetary gain and therefore are exempt from notification requirements.

1377
Q

In order to comply with FinCEN’s anti-money laundering initiative, broker/dealers are required to:

A. Designate an AML compliance officer.
B. Test the program internally with in-house staff.
C. Have each employee fingerprinted.
D. Have the AML program approved by FINRA.

A

A. Designate an AML compliance officer.

As part of a broker/dealer’s responsibility to comply with AML initiatives, it is required to appoint a qualified AML compliance officer who must administer the AML program and ensure that all employees are aware of their duties. In addition, the broker/dealer must establish policies, procedures and internal controls based on an in-house risk assessment, provide ongoing training for employees, and have the program independently tested on a regular basis.

1378
Q

Prior to completing a trade, a broker/dealer must have which of the following, according to MSRB rules? I. Customer signature; II. Registered representative signature; III. Principal signature; IV. Customer financial status.

A. I and III only
B. I and IV only
C. II, III and IV only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

C. II, III and IV only

Financial status establishes suitability, whereas registered representative and principal signatures are required for any trade, whether cash or margin account. A customer signature is only required for a margin account.

1379
Q

For violations of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 with respect to bribing a foreign official, which of the following are true? I. An individual can be subject to a $100,000 fine, imprisonment for 5 years, or both; II. A business entity can be subject to a $2,000,000 fine; III. The company can pay a fine imposed on a person if the person was acting for the company; IV. A violator can be imprisoned even if he was unaware of the regulation.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

I. An individual can be subject to a $100,000 fine, imprisonment for 5 years, or both.
II. A business entity can be subject to a $2,000,000 fine.

Any fine or penalty imposed on a person cannot be paid by the company. An individual who was unaware of the regulation can be fined but not imprisoned.

1380
Q

Which of the following are required by the MSRB on each trade confirmation I. Principal or agent capacity; II. Yield to partial call; III. Broker/dealer’s phone number; IV. Current yield

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

The MSRB’s confirm disclosure requirements are the same as FINRA’s but also include the broker/dealer’s phone number. Current yield and yield to partial call are never disclosed on the confirmation.

1381
Q

A broker/dealer would need to file a Currency Transaction Report for which of the following transactions?

A. Single transaction involving $11,000 of currency
B. Multiple transactions on the same business day by the same customer: one of $3,000 and the other of $5,000
C. Multiple transactions by the same customer: one of $5,000 on one business day, and the other of $5,000 two days later
D. Single transaction involving $3,000 of currency

A

A. Single transaction involving $11,000 of currency

Broker/dealers are required to file the Currency Transaction Report (CTR) for single transactions involving currency that exceed $10,000, or multiple transactions during any one business day that total more than $10,000.

1382
Q

A decision that comes from the FINRA Board of Arbitration is:

A. Not binding if either party disputes the decision.
B. Not binding if both parties mutually dispute the decision.
C. Able to be appealed.
D. Binding on all parties involved.

A

D. Binding on all parties involved.

Parties to arbitration must agree to accept the board’s decisions prior to the arbitration, and decisions are binding on all involved.

1383
Q

Simplified arbitration procedures are available for disputes that do not exceed:

A. $5,000.
B. $10,000.
C. $25,000.
D. $50,000.

A

D. $50,000.

Simplified arbitration is available for disputes not in excess of $50,000. Otherwise, a full panel of arbitrators will hear the case.

1384
Q

Retail communications must be approved prior to use with the general public and must be kept on file for a period of:

A. 5 years.
B. 3 years.
C. 1 year.
D. 6 months.

A

B. 3 years.

Approved retail communication must be kept on file for 3 years.

1385
Q

Which of the following are powers of the SEC? I. Fine; II. Imprison; III. Write laws; IV. Revoke registrations

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and IV
D. III and IV

A

D. III and IV

The SEC writes the laws that govern the financial markets. The Commission can revoke the registration of a broker/dealer, but it has few punitive powers. It cannot fine or imprison; it refers criminal cases to the judicial system.

1386
Q

Under which of the following circumstances is a broker/dealer allowed to share nonpublic information of consumers with nonaffiliated third parties?

A. Broker/dealer did not disclose the information-sharing agreement with nonaffiliated parties to the consumer.
B. Broker/dealer did not establish safeguards to protect the consumer records.
C. The customer has not elected to opt out of the disclosure.
D. The consumer did not receive the initial privacy notice.

A

C. The customer has not elected to opt out of the disclosure.

A broker/dealer may not share nonpublic personal information of consumers with nonaffiliated third parties, except when a joint marketer or service provider delivers certain information to the consumer, and if the consumer has not elected to opt out of the disclosure.

1387
Q

15c2-6 involves the sale of low priced non-listed equities. According to 15c2-6 which of the following is an experienced customer? I. A customer with an account opened and funded more than a year within the prior year; II. A customer who has done a trade within the prior year; III. A customer who has done 3 penny stock trades with the same firm; IV. A customer who has done 3 penny stock trades with three different firms.

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. I and III

A

D. I and III

I. A customer with an account opened and funded more than a year within the prior year.
III. A customer who has done 3 penny stock trades with the same firm.

15c2-6 defines an “experienced customer” as one who has opened and funded an account more than one year, or has done three penny stock trades with the same firm within the past year.

1388
Q

According to MSRB rules, a salesman registered as a “municipal securities registered representative” (Series 52) by the MSRB may NOT sell which of the following?

A. Tax-free unit investment trusts
B. Government bonds
C. General obligation bonds
D. Industrial revenue bonds

A

A. Tax-free unit investment trusts

Of all the answers, only “tax-free unit investment trusts” represents a product other than municipal or government bonds. Trust units are NOT municipal bonds. They are broker/dealer-created investment companies. A municipal securities license does not allow a registered representative to sell shares or units of any investment company, including municipal bond mutual funds or UITs.

1389
Q

If a municipal financial professional (MFP) gives $300 to the campaign of the mayor in the city where the MFP lives, for what period of time is the MFP’s employing municipal firm prohibited from doing a negotiated underwriting?

A. 18 months
B. 1 year
C. 6 months
D. 2 years

A

D. 2 years

Any MFP who violates the contribution rules would trigger a two-year prohibit for the firm in which the firm would not be able to be involved with a negotiated underwriting.

1390
Q

If a municipal firm makes a contribution to the county assessor in the community where their office was located, which of the following occurs?

A. The firm would be unable to enter into a negotiated underwriting with that municipality for two years
B. Depending on the amount of money that was contributed, the firm may or may not be able to engage an investment banking business.
C. The municipal broker/dealer would be terminated and no longer be able to conduct municipal activities
D. The firm would be unable to enter into a competitive bid with that municipality for two years

A

A. The firm would be unable to enter into a negotiated underwriting with that municipality for two years

The municipal firm is not allowed to contribute money to any candidate who would have influence over the municipality, regardless if located in their district or not. One way to remember this is you, the MSP, who is an individual, can only give money to a candidate they can vote for. Since the firm itself has no ability to vote for a candidate, it is prohibited from giving any money.

1391
Q

Filing false, inaccurate or misleading information on a Form U4 is a violation that may result in:

A. An official complaint on record in the CRD against both the member and the associated person.
B. Statutory disqualification.
C. A 30-day suspension.
D. A fine imposed by the SEC.

A

B. Statutory disqualification.

Filing false, inaccurate and/or misleading information may result in statutory disqualification. Statutory disqualification can prevent a person or firm from becoming registered, or can result in a revocation of registered status.

1392
Q

If a member firm suspects that a senior customer (age 65 or older) is being financially exploited, it may:

A. Place a temporary hold on disbursements from the customer’s account.
B. Liquidate the person’s account and hold the proceeds in trust.
C. Contact a caretaker or relative.
D. Contact FINRA and report the suspected abuse.

A

A. Place a temporary hold on disbursements from the customer’s account.

A member firm that suspects that a senior customer is being financially exploited may place a temporary hold on the disbursement of funds or securities from the customer’s account.

1393
Q

All of the following are true statements regarding a full arbitration hearings EXCEPT:

A. A customer is allowed to request that the panel consist of at least two members of the securities industry.
B. The maximum award is $50,000.
C. Customers must agree in writing to the use of arbitration procedures.
D. Any awards must be in writing and delivered to the claimants within 30 business days.

A

B. The maximum award is $50,000.

$50,000 is the maximum award under simple arbitration, but there are no limitations to the awards available from a full arbitration hearing.

1394
Q

In the sale of a new issue of municipal securities, MSRB disclosure requirements specify that a customer must be provided with a copy of the:

A. Feasibility study.
B. Official notice of sale.
C. Legal opinion.
D. Preliminary official statement.

A

D. Preliminary official statement.

Preliminary official statements are as good as final official statements and constitute prospectus-like risk disclosure.

1395
Q

In which two of the following capacities can a broker/dealer act? I. In an agency capacity buying or selling out of its own inventory; II. In a principal capacity buying or selling out of its own inventory; III. In an agency capacity buying or selling on behalf of others; IV. In a principal capacity buying or selling on behalf of others

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

II. In a principal capacity buying or selling out of its own inventory.
III. In an agency capacity buying or selling on behalf of others.

A firm can act as a broker or a dealer in a transaction. As a broker, the firm acts in an agent capacity and charges a commission. As a dealer the firm buys or sells out of inventory and acts in a principal capacity for profit.

1396
Q

Insider trading laws set guidelines for imposing penalties including civil actions in a federal court. The maximum penalty a court can impose for insider trading violations is:

A. $500,000.
B. $100,000 fine, 5 years imprisonment, or both
C. The amount of profit gained or loss avoided.
D. An amount up to 3 times the profit gained or loss avoided.

A

D. An amount up to 3 times the profit gained or loss avoided.

When the insider trading violations are subject to civil but not criminal penalties, the maximum fine cannot exceed three times the profit gained or loss avoided.

1397
Q

Violations of SEC rules or the Act of 1934 are subject to criminal penalties, which include misleading or false statements on any report or application. The maximum penalty for an individual is:

A. $100,000 fine, imprisonment for 5 years, or both.
B. $500,000 fine.
C. $100,000 fine.
D. $1,000,000 fine, imprisonment for 10 years, or both.

A

D. $1,000,000 fine, imprisonment for 10 years, or both.

The penalties are severe for SEC violations, with the maximum penalty for an individual being $1,000,000 fine, imprisonment for 10 years, or both.

1398
Q

The first level of appeal by a respondent to a decision by the Department of Enforcement would be to the:

A. National Adjudicatory Council.
B. Federal Courts.
C. Securities and Exchange Commission.
D. District Business Conduct Committee.

A

A. National Adjudicatory Council.

If a respondent appeals the decision by the Department of Enforcement, his first level of appeal will be heard by National Adjudicatory Council.

1399
Q

A registered representative associate with a municipal broker/dealer firm has received a written customer complaint. Which two of the following are required by the broker/dealer and the associated person? I. The firm would be required to send an investor brochure to the customer. II. The firm must immediately notify the MSRB and await instructions. III. The registered representatives handle the complaint on their own. IV. The registered representatives immediately tell their supervising principal.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

B. I and IV

I. The firm would be required to send an investor brochure to the customer.
IV. The registered representatives immediately tell their supervising principal.

The broker/dealer would be required to send the customer out an investor brochure to inform the customer of what actions they can take against the firm or the register rep. Once they receive a written customer complaint, the registered rep must immediately forward the complaint to their supervising principal. There is no need to inform the MSRB and await instructions because the MSRB does not enforce their own regulations.

1400
Q

At which point does a registered representative come under the NYSE constitution and rules?

A. When the application has been completed
B. When employed by the firm
C. 90 days after beginning work
D. 180 days after passing the test

A

B. When employed by the firm

Only employment places a representative under the NYSE rules, not passing the test. A NYSE apprenticeship lasts 120 days.

1401
Q

A conflict between B/Ds is settled by:

A. Arbitration.
B. Negotiation.
C. The DBCC.
D. Mediation.

A

A. Arbitration.

Arbitration is automatic between B/Ds.

1402
Q

Failure to promptly pay a fine or other monetary sanction imposed as a result of proceedings under the Code of Procedure may result in:

A. Summary suspension or expulsion of a member notice in writing.
B. Summary suspension or expulsion of a member or associated person after 30 days’ notice in writing.
C. Summary revocation of the registration of a member firm after 30 days’ notice.
D. None of the above.

A

A. Summary suspension or expulsion of a member notice in writing.

After written notice, failure to pay a monetary sanction that has become due and payable will result in summary suspension or expulsion of a member firm.

1403
Q

FINRA bylaws which relate to a member firm’s dealings with the public are provided for in the:

A. Conduct Rules.
B. Code of Procedure.
C. Code of Arbitration.
D. Uniform Practice Code.

A

A. Conduct Rules.

Equitable principals of trade and business between member firms and the public are provided for in the Conduct Rules.

1404
Q

Which of the following is true of customer complaints received by an NYSE member? I. They must be maintained in a central file in the office where received. II. They must be maintained in a central file in the home office. III. Both written and oral complaints must be maintained. IV. Only written complaints must be maintained.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

C. II and III

II. They must be maintained in a central file in the home office.
III. Both written and oral complaints must be maintained.

Both oral and written customer complaints must be maintained in a central file at the home office. Resolution must be monitored by a Series 14-qualified principal.

1405
Q

According to MSRB rules, under which of the following conditions may a municipal dealer share in the losses of a customer’s account?

A. If the dealer effected the transaction for the customer
B. If the dealer receives compensation on an offsetting transaction
C. If pursuant to a written guarantee made to the customer
D. Under no circumstances

A

D. Under no circumstances

Dealers may not share in profits or losses of customer accounts.

1406
Q

The SEC regulation that requires firms to send privacy and opt-out notices to customers detailing the policies it has in place to protect the security of consumer nonpublic information is called:

A. Regulation T.
B. Regulation A+.
C. Regulation D.
D. Regulation S-P.

A

D. Regulation S-P.

SEC Regulation S-P addresses consumer privacy and requires firms to send privacy and opt-out notices to customers annually. These notices must detail the firm’s policies to protect consumer nonpublic information and allow customers to opt out of sharing with nonaffiliated third parties.

1407
Q

If a member and a non-member of the FINRA have a dispute, it can go to arbitration at the insistence of:

A. The member.
B. The non-member.
C. Any member firm of the FINRA.
D. Any of the above

A

B. The non-member.

Whereas member firms must submit disputes among themselves to FINRA arbitration, a non-member cannot be forced to do so. If the non-member wishes arbitration, however, an FINRA member cannot refuse to arbitrate.

1408
Q

According to MSRB rules, all of the following should be obtained from a customer, EXCEPT:

A. Tax status.
B. Age or approximate age.
C. Financial status.
D. Marital status.

A

D. Marital status.

Age, financial status, and tax status must always be obtained.

1409
Q

The maximum gift that broker/dealers can give their employees per year is:

A. $100.
B. $250.
C. $500.
D. $1,000.

A

A. $100.

The maximum employee gift by a broker/dealer is $100 per year.

1410
Q

Within how many calendar days must messages be sent to existing customers to be considered correspondence?

A. 15 days
B. 30 days
C. 45 days
D. 60 days

A

B. 30 days

“Correspondence” refers to any written or electronic mail messages distributed to either existing customers or to 25 or fewer prospective customers within any 30 calendar-day period.

1411
Q

Under the Code of Procedure, violations by an associated person are punishable by which of the following sanctions?

A. Censure, suspension or revocation of registration, expulsion, fine, barring, and any other fitting sanction.
B. Expulsion and imprisonment.
C. Maximum fine of $1 million, imprisonment for 10 years, or both.
D. Censure, suspension, expulsion, fine, imprisonment up to 3 years.

A

A. Censure, suspension or revocation of registration, expulsion, fine, barring, and any other fitting sanction.

Only civil penalties are imposed under the Code. Violators are subject to imprisonment only in criminal proceedings.

1412
Q

The Trust Indenture Act of 1939 establishes that:

A. Legal trust must be created for municipal bond sales underwriting.
B. Corporate bonds have attached a trust indenture indicating security for the bond.
C. Legal opinion must be attached to all municipal bonds.
D. Official statements must be prepared for all municipal bonds.

A

B. Corporate bonds have attached a trust indenture indicating security for the bond.

Trust indentures indicate whether a bond is secured (debenture/subordinate debenture) and, if secured, whether it is an open end indenture (Every issue has parity claim, subject to additional bonds test limitation on the number of issues) or closed end indenture (priority of claim). The trust indenture applies only to corporate bonds, since legal opinion is only on municipal bonds.

1413
Q

Under MSRB rules, a broker/dealer’s municipal activity must be supervised by:

A. A financial and operations principal
B. An officer of the broker/dealer
C. A designee of the board of directors
D. A municipal securities principal

A

D. A municipal securities principal

A Series 53-licensed municipal principal supervises municipal activity at a broker/dealer. Municipal fund securities must be supervised by a Series 51-licensed principal.

1414
Q

It is illegal for a registered representative to do which of the following?

A. Use excessive trading on a client’s account to generate commissions.
B. Borrow from or loan to a client any form of security.
C. Use inside information to trade a client’s account.
D. All of the above

A

D. All of the above

All are prohibited activities.

1415
Q

According to MSRB rules, a broker/dealer must disclose all of the following to a customer EXCEPT:

A. Net worth.
B. Telephone number.
C. Capacity.
D. Inventory position.

A

A. Net worth.

The broker/dealer needs customer net worth but does not need to disclose his own.

1416
Q

Which of the following is not a prohibited practice?

A. Pegging
B. Repeating unsubstantiated information
C. Interpositioning with a broker’s broker
D. Paying a market maker to traffic in a security.

A

C. Interpositioning with a broker’s broker

Interpositioning is permissible only when using a broker’s broker. Pegging, spreading rumors, and paying market makers to make markets in specific stocks are always prohibited practices.

Interpositioning refers to the illegal practice of using an unneeded third party, usually another broker-dealer, between the customer and the best available market price, with the sole purpose being to generate extra commissions.

Pegging is controlling a country’s currency rate by tying it to another country’s currency or steering an asset’s price prior to option expiration.

1417
Q

The term “person associated with an investment advisor” means any of the following persons EXCEPT:

A. Any partner, officer, or director of an investment advisor (or any person performing similar functions)
B. Any person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by an investment advisor, including any employee of an investment advisor
C. Persons associated with an investment advisor whose functions are clerical or ministerial in nature
D. All of the above are considered “persons associated with an investment advisor”

A

C. Persons associated with an investment advisor whose functions are clerical or ministerial in nature

The term “person associated with an investment advisor” means any partner, officer, or director of an investment advisor (or any person performing similar functions), or any person directly or indirectly controlling or controlled by an investment advisor, including any employee of an investment advisor, except for persons associated with an investment advisor whose functions are clerical or ministerial in nature.

1418
Q

An investor owned stock in the corporation where he was an officer. Two days before it was made public that the company would file for a financial restructure, he sold his stock for $50,000. After the news became public, the stock would have been worth $10,000. What is the maximum civil penalty that can be imposed on this investor?

A. $10,000
B. $30,000
C. $50,000
D. $120,000

A

D. $120,000

Insider trading laws allow a maximum penalty of 3 times the profit gained (or loss avoided).

1419
Q

Under MSRB rules, which of the following is NOT considered advertising?

A. Customer complaints.
B. Records of transactions between dealers.
C. Official statements
D. Offering circulars.

A

C. Official statements

According to MSRB rules, any written communication is considered advertising except the official statement. An “official statement” is the offering document and technically comes from the issuer as a prospectus-like statement.

1420
Q

Which of the following is NOT true concerning the Central Registration Depository?

A. Information is available on currently registered persons as well as those who were associated with a member within the preceding 2 years.
B. The public may access information regarding registered persons, including employment history, current registrations and disciplinary proceedings.
C. Member firms may access information regarding registered persons, including employment history, current registrations and disciplinary proceedings.
D. Information is available only via written inquiry.

A

D. Information is available only via written inquiry.

The Public Disclosure Program permits release of information contained in the Central Registration Depository via written, electronic and telephone inquiry. The free service that provides this information is called BrokerCheck.

1421
Q

MSRB rules require a registered representative to obtain all of the following information regarding a new client, EXCEPT:

A. Investment experience.
B. Date of birth.
C. Financial condition.
D. Investment objective.

A

A. Investment experience.

MSRB rules require a registered representative to obtain information regarding the investor’s tax status, investment objectives, and financial background. Rules also require the registered representative to determine if the investor is of legal age. There is no specific requirement to obtain information concerning the client’s investment experience.

1422
Q

According to MSRB rules, all of the following would be an advertisement, EXCEPT I. Listings of offerings. II. Market letters. III. Reprints of form letters. IV. Preliminary official statements. V. Abstract official statements. VI. Final official statements.

A. I and III only
B. I, IV, and VI only
C. II, III, and VI only
D. IV, V, and VI only

A

B. I, IV, and VI only

I. Listings of offerings.
IV. Preliminary official statements.
VI. Final official statements.

According to MSRB rules, an advertisement would include any published material or any promotional literature which is made available to the public. However, official statements (preliminary and final) and listings of offerings would not be included within the scope of an advertisement. Examples of an advertisement, as cited by the MSRB, are notices, circulars, reports, market letters, form letters, and abstracts or summaries of official statements.

1423
Q

Broker/dealers (B/Ds) are held to higher disclosure standards with regard to penny stocks. What information must be disclosed to penny stock clients?

A. Number of shares the quote is good for, and average trading volume of the penny stock, dealer bid/offer if no inside bid/offer is available
B. Number of shares the quote is good for, average trading volume of the penny stock, and the broker’s experience in trading penny stocks
C. Inside bid and offer quotation, number of shares the quote is good for, and average trading volume of the penny stock
D. Inside bid and offer quotation, number of shares the quote is good for, and the dealer’s bid/offer if no inside bid/offer quotation is available

A

D. Inside bid and offer quotation, number of shares the quote is good for, and the dealer’s bid/offer if no inside bid/offer quotation is available

SEC Rule 15g-3 applies and requires the inside quotations and a B/D’s quotes if the inside quotation is not available. It also requires the parties to disclose the number of shares that can be bought or sold with the quote. There is no disclosure requirement for the volume being traded in a penny stock.

1424
Q

When a firm effects trades for its own account, it is acting in a principal capacity and is considered a(n):

A. Broker.
B. Dealer.
C. Agency.
D. Financial institution.

A

B. Dealer.

A firm transacting trades for its own account is acting in the capacity of a dealer.

1425
Q

Which of the following would NOT have to register as an investment adviser?

A. An economics professor who occasionally advises other faculty members on their portfolios as a favor.
B. An accountant who charges a client for constructing a financial portfolio.
C. A lawyer whose investment advice is central to their practice.
D. A publisher of a newsletter providing specific investment advice for particular clients.

A

A. An economics professor who occasionally advises other faculty members on their portfolios as a favor.

The key word here is “occasional.” An economics professor who provides occasional investment advice to colleagues is not an investment adviser. The professor is also providing investment advice as a favor, which implies that there is no compensation involved, further confirming that this is not a business. Professionals, such as lawyers, accountants, teachers, and engineers, whose investment advice is an incidental portion of their business practice, are excluded from the definition of an investment adviser. In addition, a publisher is not exempt from registration if the investment advice is tailored to specific clients or if promoting particular securities.

1426
Q

For the purposes of Regulation S-P, the definition of a consumer may include all of the following statements EXCEPT:

A. An individual who uses financial products for personal or family purposes.
B. An individual who normally has a one-time contact with a financial institution.
C. An individual who has a continuing relationship with a financial institution.
D. An individual who obtains financial services from a financial institution.

A

C. An individual who has a continuing relationship with a financial institution.

Consumer normally has no further contact with that institution other than the one-time delivery of products or services to be used for personal or family purposes. Customer is an individual or entity with which a financial institution expects to have a continuing relationship.

1427
Q

According to MSRB rules, if a control relationship exists between an issuer and a municipal securities dealer, the nature of that relationship must be disclosed under which of the following circumstances? I. When the transaction involves the sale of a new issue; II. When the transaction occurs in the secondary market; III. When the broker/dealer is acting as agent; IV. When the broker/dealer is acting as principal

A. I and III only
B. I and IV only
C. IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

I. When the transaction involves the sale of a new issue.
II. When the transaction occurs in the secondary market.
III. When the broker/dealer is acting as agent
IV. When the broker/dealer is acting as principal

Control relationships must be disclosed in the official statement and on the confirm.

1428
Q

Which of the following would be included in the definition of an investment adviser?

A. A broker/dealer who charges a fee for analyzing client portfolios
B. An individual who publishes a quarterly newsletter with a model portfolio that includes buy/sell recommendations
C. An attorney who works with his client on a Chapter 11 re-organization
D. A business professor who teaches a class in portfolio management
A

A. A broker/dealer who charges a fee for analyzing client portfolios

Investment advisers are paid for providing customer-specific investment advice. This does not include professionals, such as lawyers or accountants, whose advice is incidental to their primary profession and who are not paid specifically for such advice. Attorneys may work with their clients on Chapter 11 reorganization and are not considered investment advisers in this capacity. Publishers are not considered investment advisers if they do not provide investment advice specific to the needs of a particular client.

1429
Q

According to MSRB rules, which of the following is used to determine customer suitability? I. Investment experience; II. Tax status; III. Investment objective; IV. Financial capacity

A. I and II only
B. I and III only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

D. I, II, III, and IV

I. Investment experience
II. Tax status
III. Investment objective
IV. Financial capacity

All are necessary.

1430
Q

Persons who are found guilty of insider trading violations are subject to all of the following penalties EXCEPT:

A. FINRA fines.
B. Civil lawsuits.
C. Treble charges.
D. Imprisonment.

A

A. FINRA fines.

FINRA fines can only be assessed against FINRA members and their associates. All other violators may be subjected to any of the other penalties listed.

1431
Q

The Act that requires financial institutions to develop, implement and monitor procedures that prevent its registered representatives and associated persons from misusing nonpublic information is the:

A. Securities Act of 1933.
B. Securities and Exchange Act of 1934.
C. Investment Company Act of 1940.
D. Investor Fraud Act of 1970.

A

B. Securities and Exchange Act of 1934.

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 requires that broker/dealers establish, maintain, and enforce procedures to prevent the misuse of nonpublic information by any person associated with the firm.

1432
Q

Which of the following is excluded from the FINRA approval rule?

A. Performance reports
B. Circulars
C. Sales literature
D. Tombstone ads

A

D. Tombstone ads

Specific communications with individuals, internal memorandums, tombstone ads, routine announcements discussing member firm personnel changes and prospectuses are excluded from the scope of FINRA approval rule.

1433
Q

Internal procedures which limit and control the passing of sensitive, potentially nonpublic information between the departments of a corporation or firm to aid in protecting investors against violations of insider trading laws are known as:

A. Information barriers.
B. Internal command and control procedures.
C Chinese walls.
D. Gatekeeper rules.

A

C Chinese walls.

“Chinese walls” are internal procedures which limit and control the passing of sensitive, potentially nonpublic information between the departments of a firm.

1434
Q

Under MSRB rules, all of these would be reasons for a customer to refuse to accept delivery of a municipal bond EXCEPT:

A. No signature on a registered bond.
B. A drastic fluctuation downward in the market price since the purchase of the bond.
C. Mutilated coupons.
D. Missing legal opinion.

A

B. A drastic fluctuation downward in the market price since the purchase of the bond.

A customer can refuse to accept a bad delivery of bonds, which is what is described by the mutilated coupons, missing legal opinion and lack of signature answers. A drastic downward fluctuation is not a reason to refuse the bonds. Remember that the terms of the trade, including price, are set on trade date and are legally binding from that date forward.

1435
Q

A registered representative of a member firm has a dispute with his employer regarding one of the critical terms of employment: commissions. The appropriate SRO procedure for handling this is:

A. Negotiation.
B. Litigation.
C. Arbitration.
D. Mediation.

A

C. Arbitration.

The key is the word “dispute.” In the securities industry, disputes are always settled through arbitration. In order for the registered representative to litigate (go to court), the rep would have to terminate FINRA registration and then sue in civil court.

1436
Q

The electronic system for reporting municipal bond trades in the OTC secondary market is:

A. Pink sheets.
B. SHORT.
C. Munifacts.
D. NASDAQ.

A

B. SHORT.

The Short-term Obligation Rate Transparency System reports muni trades in the secondary market.

1437
Q

Which of the following would be considered short swing profits by the IRS?

A. A company insider profits on a stock trade after holding the stock for a 5-month period
B. Investor repurchasing the same security within 30 days
C. Short sale of a nonowned security
D. Purchase and sale of the same security within 1 day

A

A. A company insider profits on a stock trade after holding the stock for a 5-month period

Short-swing profits result from trades or sales of securities held by the insider for less than 6 months. These profits must be paid back to the corporation.

1438
Q

FINRA bylaws which relate to a member firm’s dealings with the public are contained in the:

A. Code of Arbitration.
B. Uniform Practice Code.
C. Code of Conduct.
D. Code of Procedure.

A

C. Code of Conduct.

Equitable principals of trade and business between member firms and the public are provided for in the Code of Conduct.

1439
Q

A prospective customer tells the registered rep to add her name to the broker/dealer’s do-not-call list. Which of the following is true?

A. The rep’s supervising principal may call to verify account information.
B. No one from the broker/dealer may call the individual again.
C. The broker/dealer may continue to send faxes to the number.
D. The compliance officer may call the individual to verify her request.

A

B. No one from the broker/dealer may call the individual again.

If the individual is an established customer, the rep may call the individual to verify account information. Otherwise, no one from the broker/dealer may call the prospective customer under the Do Not Call or Telemarketing Rules.

1440
Q

Under MSRB rules, all of the following are considered advertisements, EXCEPT:

A. Market letters.
B. Official statements.
C. Summary of an official statement.
D. Offering circulars.

A

B. Official statements.

An “official statement” is the offering document and technically comes from the issuer as a prospectus-like statement.

1441
Q

Which of the following is NOT subject to the short-swing profit rule?

A. An investor with a net worth in excess of $5,000,000 (exclusive of primary residence)
B. The CEO of a publicly traded corporation
C. An owner of 15% of the outstanding shares
D. A director serving on the board of a public com

A

A. An investor with a net worth in excess of $5,000,000 (exclusive of primary residence)

The short swing profit rule applies to insiders (officers and directors) and owners of 10% or more of the outstanding shares; net worth is not a consideration.

1442
Q

Under MSRB uniform practice rules, regular way settlement on municipal bonds is:

A. One business day following trade date.
B. Not regulated, since municipals are exempt securities.
C. Same day, or cash settlement.
D. Three business days following trade date.

A

D. Three business days following trade date.

MSRB uniform practice rules regulate its member firms, not the securities themselves. Regular way settlement on municipal bonds and corporate bonds is T +3. Regular way settlement on treasury bonds is T + 1.

1443
Q

After receiving an initial privacy notice, subsequent privacy notices should be provided to customers:

A. Quarterly.
B. Semiannually.
C. Annually.
D. Every 3 years.

A

C. Annually.

Consumers must be provided with an initial privacy notice at account opening; those who become customers should receive annual privacy notices.

1444
Q

What is the timeframe for reporting to FINRA when a member or associated person is the subject of a customer complaint involving theft, misappropriation of funds or securities, or forgery?

A. 10 days
B. 15 days
C. 20 days
D. 30 days

A

D. 30 days

FINRA requires member firms to notify them within 30 days if a complaint is filed against a member or associate for theft or misappropriation of funds or securities, or forgery.

1445
Q

Under the Code of Procedure, what is the penalty imposed by FINRA and the Department of Enforcement if a person is found guilty of FINRA rule violations? I. Fines; II. Suspension; III. Censure; IV. Expulsion

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II, III and IV
D. I, II, III and IV

A

D. I, II, III and IV

I. Fines
II. Suspension
III. Censure
IV. Expulsion

All of the above could be penalties for violation of the Codes of Procedure.

1446
Q

According to FINRA Rules on Private Securities Transactions, an associated person entering into a series of private transactions without compensation must provide to the member firm all of the following EXCEPT:

A. A statement of possible compensation.
B. A description of each proposed transaction.
C. The person’s proposed role in the transactions.
D. A written notice on each transaction.

A

D. A written notice on each transaction.

In the case where a series of related transactions without compensation are involved, an associated person needs to provide only a single written notice.

1447
Q

Which of the following is true regarding private securities transactions for compensation? I. They must be approved by a person’s member firm. II. They must be recorded on the member firm’s books. III. The member firm must supervise the person’s participation. IV. Member firm does not have the authority to disapprove transactions.

A. I and II only
B. I, II and III only
C. II and III only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

B. I, II and III only

I. They must be approved by a person’s member firm.
II. They must be recorded on the member firm’s books.
III. The member firm must supervise the person’s participation.

The member firm must approve the transaction, record it on their books, and supervise the person’s participation in the transaction as if it is executed on behalf of the member. If the member disapproves a person’s participation in a private transaction, the person may not participate in the transaction in any manner, directly or indirectly.

1448
Q

Special procedures must be followed by a municipal bond dealer when opening an account for which of the following?

A. Niece of an NYSE trader
B. Spouse of a municipal employee
C. Bank teller
D. Principal of another firm

A

D. Principal of another firm

An employee of another MSRB dealer firm opening an account requires prior notice and duplicate confirmations to the employer dealer.

1449
Q

According to FINRA Rules, the definition of correspondence is messages that are distributed to how many prospective customers within a 30-calendar-day period?

A. No more than 25
B. At least 25
C. More than 50
D. Fewer than 100

A

A. No more than 25

“Correspondence” refers to any written or electronic mail messages distributed to either existing customers or to 25 or fewer prospective customers within any 30-calendar-day period.

1450
Q

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 deals with all of the following issues EXCEPT:

A. The regulation of broker/dealers.
B. The sale of new issues.
C. The trading of securities after they have been issued.
D. The regulation of exchanges.

A

B. The sale of new issues.

The sale of new issues of securities is covered by the Securities Act of 1933.

1451
Q

Which of the following statements is NOT true concerning simplified arbitration?

A. This procedure is available for disputes involving amounts of $50,000 or less.
B. The arbitrator’s decision is binding on both parties.
C. Arbitrator reviews written submissions from both parties.
D. A single arbitrator conducts a hearing and renders a decision.

A

D. A single arbitrator conducts a hearing and renders a decision.

There is no hearing under simplified arbitration, only written submissions from both parties which are reviewed by the single arbitrator.

1452
Q

The maximum penalty which can be imposed on a business entity for false or misleading information on any SEC report or application is:

A. $100,000.
B. $1,000,000.
C. $2,000,000.
D. $2,500,000.

A

D. $2,500,000.

The maximum fine for a business entity that is found guilty of violations of The Act of 1934 or SEC rules is $2,500,000. One million is the maximum fine for any person for the same activity. For a bribe, a person will be fined $100,000, and a business entity - $2 million.

1453
Q

Any retail communication relating to investment companies must be filed with FINRA within how many days after initial use?

A. 3 days
B. 5 days
C. 7 days
D. 10 days

A

D. 10 days

Retail communication relating to investment companies must be filed with FINRA within 10 days after initial use.

1454
Q

Which of the following best fits the definition of an investment adviser?

A. Lawyer
B. Publisher of reports used to promote particular securities
C. Bank
D. Broker/dealer whose advice is incidental to their business

A

B. Publisher of reports used to promote particular securities

In this case, a publisher would fall under the definition of an investment adviser because it is promoting specific securities. Lawyers and broker/dealers whose advice is incidental to their business, and do not receive fees solely for the advice given, are not considered investment advisers.

1455
Q

Maximum civil and criminal penalties for an individual for insider trading violations are:

A. $10,000 and/or 5 years imprisonment.
B. $200,000 and/or 30 years imprisonment.
C. $1,000,000 and or/15 years imprisonment.
D. $5,000,000 and/or 20 years imprisonment.

A

D. $5,000,000 and/or 20 years imprisonment.

Maximum civil penalties are limited to three times the amount of the gain or loss avoided. Maximum criminal penalties are limited to $5,000,000 and/or 20 years imprisonment.

1456
Q

MSRB rules do not permit I. Bona fide quotes distributed as offers. II. Nominal quotes distributed as bids. III. Nominal quotes distributed as offers. IV. Nominal quotes distributed as workouts

A. I and IV
B. II and III
C. II and IV
D. I and II

A

B. II and III

II. Nominal quotes distributed as bids.
III. Nominal quotes distributed as offers.

Bona fide quotes are equivalent to firm (binding) quotes and are allowed as bids or offers. Nominal quotes are subject to confirmation, or nonbinding. They are given as “workouts” between traders, or are information-only and are not allowed as either binding bids or offers.

1457
Q

Correspondence refers to any written communications distributed to 25 or fewer retail investors within what period of time?

A. 10 days
B. 15 days
C. 20 days
D. 30 days

A

D. 30 days

Correspondence refers to any written or e-mail messages distributed to either existing customers or to 25 or fewer prospective customers within any 30 calendar day period.

1458
Q

Which of the following is considered a self-regulating organization for the regulation of securities offerings and trading? I. MSRB, DC; II. FINRA III. CBOE; IV. SEC

A. I and II only
B. I, II and III
C. II only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

B. I, II and III

I. MSRB, DC
II. FINRA
III. CBOE

FINRA, the MSRB, and CBOE are all self-regulatory organizations for securities offering and trading. The SEC is not an SRO.

1459
Q

The main function(s) of FINRA include I. Self-regulation for the over-the-counter market; II. Self-regulation for national exchanges; III. Monitor compliance with rules of ethical practice; IV. Approve and monitor SEC rules and regulations.

A. I only
B. I, II and III only
C. II and IV only
D. I, II, III and IV

A

B. I, II and III only

I. Self-regulation for the over-the-counter market
II. Self-regulation for national exchanges
III. Monitor compliance with rules of ethical practice

FINRA regulates only the over-the-counter and national exchanges; additionally, market and monitors compliance with ethical practices. The SEC monitors FINRA, not the other way around.

1460
Q

Under the Uniform Securities Act, the definition of an investment adviser includes:

A. A trust company.
B. A lawyer advising clients on pension plan investments without accepting a fee.
C. The publisher of an investment newsletter that promotes specific investments for a fee.
D. A general circulation newspaper that has an investment column.

A

C. The publisher of an investment newsletter that promotes specific investments for a fee.

An investment adviser advises clients on investment selections for compensation. The lawyer’s advice and the general circulation newspaper column are examples of incidental business practices; they are not compensated for the advice and therefore do not fall under the Act’s definition of investment advisers. Trust companies are also excluded from the definition of an investment adviser.

1461
Q

Member firms must notify FINRA of any disciplinary action taken against a representative of the firm. Which of the following would require reporting to the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority?

A. A letter of warning
B. A suspension
C. $1,500 fine
D. None of the above

A

B. A suspension

Any suspension, termination, withholding of commissions, or fines in excess of $2,500 would be required to be reported to FINRA.

1462
Q

Under MSRB rules, which of the following call provisions could affect the yield required to be shown on a customer’s municipal bond confirmation?

A. Extraordinary
B. Sinking fund
C. Catastrophe
D. In-whole

A

D. In-whole

Only in-whole or refunding provisions must be cited as lowest yields on premium bond confirms.

1463
Q

Any person for whom the member carries an account, or who has an account with any registered investment company for which the member serves as principal underwriter, and who is not an institutional investor is a(n):

A. Associated investor.
B. Adjunct investor.
C. Existing retail customer.
D. Prospective retail customer.

A

C. Existing retail customer.

An “existing retail customer” is any person for whom the member carries an account, or who has an account with any registered investment company for which the member serves as principal underwriter, and who is not an institutional investor. A “prospective retail customer” is any person who has not opened such an account and is not an institutional investor.

1464
Q

The FINRA bylaw category which defines the proper methods for handling securities violations and complaints is the:

A. Code of Arbitration.
B. Uniform Practice Code.
C. Conduct Rules.
D. Code of Procedure.

A

D. Code of Procedure.

The Code of Procedure is concerned with methods of handling disciplinary procedures against member firms and registered personnel. Remember: COPs handle complaints!

1465
Q

The MSRB was created by:

A. The Securities Exchange Act of 1934.
B. The Securities Amendment Act of 1975.
C. The Securities Investor Protection Amendment Act of 1988.
D. The Investment Advisors Act of 1940.

A

B. The Securities Amendment Act of 1975.

The Securities Investors Amendment Act of 1975 created the MSRB.

1466
Q

The MSRB rule dealing with quotations relating to municipal securities covers I. Distribution of bids. II. Distribution of offers. III. Requests for bids. IV. Requests for offers.

A. I and II only
B. I and III only
C. III and IV only
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

D. I, II, III, and IV

I. Distribution of bids.
II. Distribution of offers.
III. Requests for bids.
IV. Requests for offers.

Quotations, whether bids or offers, requests or distributions, must be fair, reasonable, and not misleading.

1467
Q

Who enforces MSRB rules on NYSE member firms?

A. MSRB
B. SIPC
C. NYSE
D. FINRA

A

D. FINRA

FINRA is the SRO which enforces MSRB rules. The MSRB does not enforce its rules, and municipals are not exchange-traded.

1468
Q

Regarding the distribution of new issue municipal bonds, the MSRB rules prohibit:

A. Providing to the customer a summary of the Official Statement.
B. A dealer disclosing to a customer, upon request, the syndicate order priority.
C. The dealer selling the bonds to the customer with an oral guarantee to buy the bonds back at any time with no loss to the customer.
D. Selling bonds with a letter of credit backed by the dealer bank.

A

C. The dealer selling the bonds to the customer with an oral guarantee to buy the bonds back at any time with no loss to the customer.

Repurchase agreements are legal only if written and at a price; otherwise, the bonds are not genuinely offered for sale.

1469
Q

When are broker/dealers required to file a Currency Transaction Report?

A. Any transmittal of currency outside the U.S.
B. Multiple transmittals of currency by one customer
C. Any transmittal of funds of at least $2,000
D. A single currency transaction in excess of $10,000

A

D. A single currency transaction in excess of $10,000

Broker/dealers are required to file Currency Transaction Report (CTR) for single transactions involving currency that exceed $10,000, or multiple transactions during any single business day that total more than $10,000.

1470
Q

Financial Trust Inc. is issuing a closed-end bond for $15 M with a 10-year maturity. Under the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, which of the following would be true? I. The issue must have a trust document stating whether the bond is secured or unsecured. II. The bond is secured and the collateral cannot be used against another form of security. III. The bond will have priority over all other ownership claims if the company is liquidated. IV. This bond will not be a secured issue since it is a closed-ended investment.

A. I and II
B. I, II and III
C. II and III
D. I, II, III and IV

A

B. I, II and III

I. The issue must have a trust document stating whether the bond is secured or unsecured.
II. The bond is secured and the collateral cannot be used against another form of security.
III. The bond will have priority over all other ownership claims if the company is liquidated.

The Trust Indenture Act provides, as amended, that every corporate bond of more than $5 M and 5 years maturity or longer must have a trust document stating whether the bond is secured or unsecured. If the bond is secured, the trust indenture must specify the kind of property and if the indenture is open-end or closed-end. Closed-end means that the bond is secured and that the collateral cannot be used against another form of security. The bond is senior to all other debts based on a secured collateral.

1471
Q

FINRA Code of Procedure states that the first level of jurisdiction for a complaint against a member firm or one of its personnel is:

A. Department of Enforcement.
B. Board of Governors.
C. Federal Courts.
D. Securities and Exchange Commission.

A

A. Department of Enforcement.

A complaint will first be filed with the Department of Enforcement. The Board of Governors may also file a complaint with the Committee.

1472
Q

A municipal broker/dealer enters a bid wanted. This is a:

A. Nominal estimate used to mark-to-market.
B. Binding offer to sell.
C. Binding offer to buy.
D. Nonbinding request for a likely bid.

A

D. Nonbinding request for a likely bid.

A bid wanted is entered to get information on the bond; a likely bid. It is nonbinding.

1473
Q

Your client is 78 years old and has recently shown signs of memory lapses when he meets with you. It has been about 3 months since you have spoken with this client when you notice a significant amount of activity in the account, including the sale of securities and requests for funds to be removed. You are concerned about fraud in the account. What action can you take to address your concerns?

A. While you cannot transact without the proper trading authority, you have an obligation to contact the client. Whether successful or not, you can place a hold on trading and funds transfers.
B. You are a registered representative and can have your company simply back out of the trades.
C. Nothing, without a power of attorney you cannot reverse trade requests or money transfers out.
D. You can alert your principal officer and inform the principal you wish to be supervised while making transactions in the account.

A

A. While you cannot transact without the proper trading authority, you have an obligation to contact the client. Whether successful or not, you can place a hold on trading and funds transfers.

For seniors age 65 or older who have physical or mental disabilities, FINRA permits the registered representative to place a temporary hold on the disbursement of funds or securities from the customer’s account. In addition, with written authorization from the client, the registered representative may contact a previously designated trusted contact person to discuss the account.

1474
Q

According to MSRB rules, in order for a municipal bond dealer to effect transactions on a client’s behalf, the dealer must:

A. Get quotes from three municipal dealers who regularly quote the bonds in which the customer wishes to buy.
B. Contact enough dealers to obtain a price that is fair, reasonable, and non-discriminatory.
C. Try to get the best price.
D. Get quotes from the three largest dealers in the same geographic area.

A

B. Contact enough dealers to obtain a price that is fair, reasonable, and non-discriminatory.

According to MSRB rules, in affecting transactions on a client’s behalf, a registered representative should execute a trade at a price that is fair and reasonable. There is no requirement for the registered representative to obtain the very best price in the market for the customer or to contract a specific number of dealers.

1475
Q

The FINRA bylaw that is concerned with the settlement of disputes is called the:

A. Uniform Practice Code.
B. Code of Arbitration.
C. Conduct Rules.
D. Code of Procedure.

A

B. Code of Arbitration.

FINRA requires that disputes be submitted to arbitration.

1476
Q

After the last issue date, how long must institutional communications be kept on file for inspection?

A. 3 years
B. 5 years
C. 8 years
D. 10 years

A

A. 3 years

The following documentation must be maintained on file for 3 years: all correspondence, retail and institutional communication, information about the sources of any statistical tables, charts, graphs or illustrations used in retail communications, as well as evidence of a principal’s approval of these materials.

1477
Q

A broker/dealer’s business continuity plan must include I. Information backup and storage plans. II. Contact information for at least two principals available on a website. III. Voting procedures for replacing missing personnel. IV. An online directory for all firm personnel.

A. I and II
B. I and III
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

I. Information backup and storage plans.
II. Contact information for at least two principals available on a website.

In addition, this plan must be updated annually and approved by senior management.

1478
Q

Communication with the institutional investors of a government entity is called:

A. Institutional sales material.
B. Government telemarketing.
C. Government sales correspondence.
D. Focused direct marketing.

A

A. Institutional sales material.

“Institutional sales material” is any communication with the following institutional investors: government entity or subdivision, employee benefit plan with at least 100 participants, qualified plan with at least 100 participants, FINRA member, or registered associated person or person acting solely on behalf of any such institutional investor.

1479
Q

Which of the following is/are true regarding a private securities transaction? I. It is also known as “selling away.” II. It is a violation of FINRA’s Conduct Rules. III. Associated persons are allowed to participate in private securities transactions at any time. IV. It is a transaction within the normal business of the member firm.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. III and IV

A

A. I and II

I. It is also known as “selling away.”
II. It is a violation of FINRA’s Conduct Rules.

Private securities transactions are defined as transactions effected outside the normal business of the member firm and are not recorded on the firm’s books and records. This is known as “Selling Away,” and is a violation of FINRA Conduct Rules. No person associated with a member shall participate in any manner in a private securities transaction unless specific requirements of Rule 3040 are met.

1480
Q

Under FINRA rules, which of the following would be considered a Ranking Entity for the purpose of using investment company performance information in retail communications?

A. A mutual fund research company that provides general information to the public that is paid for by subscribers
B. The research department of a member firm that has selling agreements with investment companies
C. The research department of an investment company
D. A mutual fund research website that accepts paid advertising from investment companies

A

A. A mutual fund research company that provides general information to the public that is paid for by subscribers

Ranking entities must be in the business of providing general information about investment companies to the public, be independent from the investment company and its affiliates, and cannot accept payment from investment company or its affiliates for a ranking.

1481
Q

When a municipal securities broker/dealer receives an ACATS from another dealer, it has I. Three days to verify account positions II. One day to verify account positions III. Four days to complete transfer of account positions IV. Three days to complete transfer of account positions.

A. I and III
B. I and IV
C. II and III
D. II and IV

A

A. I and III

I. Three days to verify account positions.
III. Four days to complete transfer of account positions.

MSRB time requirements for verifying and transferring positions are more generous than FINRA time requirements. Remember that municipal bonds are more unique and thinly traded than equities, and often more time is necessary to price or locate municipal bonds.

1482
Q

Which of the following is TRUE regarding the review or approval of institutional communications?

A. Institutional communications must be reviewed or approved by the financial regulatory branch of each state government prior to use.
B. Institutional communications do not need to be reviewed or approved.
C. Institutional communications must be reviewed or approved by a registered principal.
D. Institutional communications must be reviewed or approved by FINRA prior to use.

A

C. Institutional communications must be reviewed or approved by a registered principal.

Institutional communications must be reviewed or approved by a registered principal. This review or approval may be executed after the first use of the material as long as the firm has training in place for their associated persons.

1483
Q

If a registered rep fails to pay a monetary sanction under the Code of Procedure, I. The employing firm may be summarily suspended or expelled for failure to immediately terminate the rep. II. The representative’s registration may be summarily revoked. III. An injunction may be placed against the representative. IV. The representative may be imprisoned.

A. I and II
B. I and IV
C. II, III, and IV
D. I, II, III, and IV

A

A. I and II

I. The employing firm may be summarily suspended or expelled for failure to immediately terminate the rep.
II. The representative’s registration may be summarily revoked.

In such a circumstance, the association may suspend or expel the member for failure to terminate the rep and/or may revoke the rep’s registration.

Injunction: an authoritative warning or order.

1484
Q

The Bank Secrecy Act was designed to do all of the following EXCEPT:

A. Protect the privacy of consumers.
B. Identify the source of currency transported into or out of the U.S.
C. Identify the source and volume of currency deposited in financial institutions.
D. Authorize the maintenance of records of financial transactions.

A

A. Protect the privacy of consumers.

The Bank Secrecy Act was designed to help identify the source, volume, and movement of currency transported into or out of the United States, or deposited in financial institutions, and to maintain records of financial transactions and to report any suspicious transactions.

1485
Q

The maximum value of a gift allowed by FINRA Rules is:

A. $25 per gift.
B. $50 per person per year.
C. $100 per gift.
D. $100 per person per year.

A

D. $100 per person per year.

A gift may not exceed $100 per person per year.

1486
Q

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 defines an insider as I. Director or officer of a corporation; II. Owner of 5% or more of a corporation stock; III. Clerical personnel; IV. Outside attorneys and auditors.

A. II and III
B. I, III, and IV
C. II, III, and IV
D. I and II

A

B. I, III, and IV

I. Director or officer of a corporation.
III. Clerical personnel.
IV. Outside attorneys and auditors.

Owners of 10% or more of a corporation stock are insiders. All other persons listed are defined as insiders due to their access to company information.

1487
Q

Under MSRB rules, which of the following are grounds for statutory disqualification? I. Lying on the U4. II. Any felony in the last 10 years. III. Being barred by another SRO. IV. Any misdemeanor in the last 10 years.

A. I and II only
B. I, II and III only
C. I, II and IV only
D. II and III only

A

B. I, II and III only

I. Lying on the U4.
II. Any felony in the last 10 years.
III. Being barred by another SRO.

Only securities-related or theft-related misdemeanors are grounds for statutory disqualification.

1488
Q

A dispute has developed between a broker at XYZ Brokerage and a client. The amount involved in the dispute is $21,500. What recourse is available to the client and what is the process?

A. Simplified arbitration is available and one arbitrator is appointed, hears the case from both parties, and renders a decision, which is final.
B. Mediation is available and one mediator will render a decision and provide it to the hearing officer after hearing both sides of the story. From there, they can decide to accept the decision or go to court.
C. Mediation is available and both parties must agree to accept the decision of one mediator who reviews each case and renders a decision.
D. Mediation is available and one mediator assists the two parties in coming to an agreement among themselves. If no decision can be reached, the mediator will decide.

A

A. Simplified arbitration is available and one arbitrator is appointed, hears the case from both parties, and renders a decision, which is final.

Simplified arbitration is available for disputes involving amounts of $50,000 or less. One arbitrator renders a decision on the case based on a review of written submissions by both parties. There is no opportunity for a hearing; decisions are final.

1489
Q

According to MSRB rules, a certificate would be considered mutilated and not in good delivery form if any of the following is not ascertainable EXCEPT:

A. The CUSIP number.
B. Signature on registered bond.
C. The coupon rate.
D. The maturity date.

A

A. The CUSIP number.

The CUSIP number is the least-significant of these answers in terms of good delivery. CUSIP is basically an issuer identification number. The other answers represent information that is vital for a purchaser to know in order to ascertain that the correct bonds have been delivered.

1490
Q

Which of the following will be a violation of the Private Transactions Conduct Rule 3040?

A. An associated person entering a transaction with an immediate family member not for compensation.
B. An associated person offering securities that are not registered with the Commission.
C. An associated person entering into a series of private transactions
D. An associated person being involved in a private transaction for compensation on behalf of a member firm.

A

B. An associated person offering securities that are not registered with the Commission.

Private securities transactions are defined as transactions effected outside the normal business of an associated person’s employment with a member firm and that are not recorded on the firm’s books and records. This is known as “Selling Away,” and is a violation of FINRA Conduct Rules. Private securities transactions may include (but are not limited to) new offerings of securities which are not registered with the Commission.

1491
Q

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934:

A. States the requirement to be registered with the SEC for people advising others with securities.
B. Regulates exchanges and over-the-counter markets.
C. Stipulates the requirement of registration of public holding companies.
D. States there should be full and fair disclosure of information in a prospectus.

A

B. Regulates exchanges and over-the-counter markets.

The Securities Exchange Act of 1934 regulates exchanges and over-the-counter markets.

1492
Q

A private securities transactions exists when a representative:

A. Has a joint account with a family member.
B. Is selling away.
C. Makes a trade for his personal account.
D. Is engaged in an outside business activity.

A

B. Is selling away.

A private securities transaction, or selling away, exists when a representative is involved in the sale of securities that are not sponsored by the firm.

1493
Q

If a client is leaving the United States for an extended period of time, confirmations may be held by the broker:

A. Only upon the client’s written request.
B. Under no circumstances.
C. If he or she gives prior verbal consent.
D. Only for transactions exceeding 500 shares or $10,000.

A

A. Only upon the client’s written request.

Only upon written request can a broker/dealer hold mail, confirmations, etc., for a client who leaves the country.